Docstoc

WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY - PDF

Document Sample
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY - PDF Powered By Docstoc
					WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                              WSU Project No. 089-169976




                              Division of Finance and Facilities Management




                                    WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY

                  Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178


                                   WSU PROJECT NUMBER 089-169976




     FOR:                                              Owner's Representative:
     Board of Governors                                Clement R. Prabakaran, Project Manager
     Wayne State University                            Facilities Planning & Management
     Detroit, Michigan                                 Design & Construction Services
                                                       5454 Cass
                                                       Wayne State University
                                                       Detroit, Michigan 48202

     Owner's Agent:                                    Consultant:
     Paula Reyes, Purchasing Manager                   Smith Group Inc
     WSU – Purchasing Department                       500 Griswold Street, Suite 1700
     5700 Cass, Suite 4200                             Detroit, MI 48226
     Detroit, Michigan 48202
     313-577-3649 / 313-577-3747 fax
     bb2709@wayne.edu and copy
     ac0578@wayne.edu
                                                                                 12-17-2009
   WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY           Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                        WSU Project No. 089-169976


                                          TABLE OF CONTENTS

          Title Page                                                    00001-1

          Table of Contents                                             00002-1

   Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract

          00005 Information for Bidders                                 00005-1

          00100 Instructions to Bidders                                 00100-1 thru 00100-5

          00250 Notice of Pre-Bid Conference                            00250-1

          00300 Form of Proposal                                        00300-1 thru 00300-5

          00400 Contractor's Qualification Statement                    00400-1 thru 00400-2

          00410 Prevailing Wage Rate Schedule                           00410-1

          00420 Project Labor Agreements                                00420-1

          00500 Agreement Between Contractor and Owner
                for Construction                                        00500-1 thru 00500-8

          00510 Form of Guarantee                                       00510-1

          00700 General Conditions (A.I.A. A-201)             00700-1

          00800 WSU Supplementary General Conditions
                of the Contract for Construction                        00800-1 thru 00800-12

          00850 Drawings                                                00850-1


Division 1 - General Requirements

          01000 General Requirements                                    01000-1 thru 01000-9

          01010 Summary of Work (Includes Scope of Work)                01010-1 thru 01000-1




   TABLE OF CONTENTS                                                                            00002-1
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY               Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                         WSU Project No. 089-169976


                                      INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS

OWNER:                                                  Board of Governors
                                                        Wayne State University

PROJECT:                                                Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire
                                                        Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                        Project No. 089-169976
LOCATION:
                                                        Wayne State University
                                                        5047 Gullen Mall
                                                        Detroit, Michigan 48202
OWNER’S AGENT:
                                                        Paula Reyes, Purchasing Manager
                                                        WSU – Purchasing Department
                                                        5700 Cass, Suite 4200
                                                        Detroit, Michigan 48202
                                                        313-577-3649 / 313-577-3747 fax
                                                        bb2709@wayne.edu & copy ac0578@wayne.edu


                                                        Clement R. Prabakaran, Project Manager
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE:                                 Facilities Planning & Management
                                                        Design & Construction Services
                                                        Wayne State University
                                                        5454 Cass Avenue
                                                        Detroit, Michigan 48202

                                                        Smith Group Inc
Architect:                                              500 Griswold Street, Suite 1700
                                                        Detroit, MI 48226

SPECIAL NOTE:               Right to reject any and all proposals, either in whole or in part, and to waive any
irregularities therein is reserved by the Owner.

BIDS ADVERTISED: 12-17-2009

BIDDING: Bidding documents may be obtained by pre-qualified vendors from the University Purchasing
Web Site at http://www.forms.purchasing.wayne.edu/Adv_bid/Adv_bid.html beginning 12-17-2009.
When visiting the Web Site, click on the "Construction" link in green. Copies of the RFP will not be
available at the pre-proposal meeting.

MANDATORY Pre-Bid Conference: 10:00 a.m., local time, 12-23-2009 to be held at Wayne State
University – 5047 Gullen Mall, Fifth Floor Conference room, Detroit, MI, 48202. Late Arrivals may not
be permitted to submit bids.

OPTIONAL Second Walk Through: TBD (if needed) to be held at Wayne State University – Location
and time to be announced at the Mandatory Pre-bid Meeting.

DUE DATE FOR QUESTIONS: Due Date for questions shall be 1-6-10 at 12:00 Noon. All questions
must be reduced to writing and emailed to the attention of Paula Reyes, Purchasing Manager at
bb2709@wayne.edu, copy Ken Doherty, Associate Director at: ac0578@wayne.edu.

Bids Due:     Sealed proposals for lump-sum General Contract will be received at the office of the


INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS                                                                             00005 - 1
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY               Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                         WSU Project No. 089-169976


Purchasing Department located at 5700 Cass Avenue, Suite 4200, Detroit, MI 48202 on 1-14-10, until
2:00 p.m. (local time). Bid Opening will immediately follow in the Purchasing Conference Room 4400.

Bid Qualification Meeting: The lowest bidder is to be available for bid prequalification meeting the day
following the bid opening, at Facilities Planning & Management office located at 5454 Cass Avenue,
Detroit, MI 48202.

All available information pertaining to this project will be posted to the Purchasing web site at
http://www.forms.purchasing.wayne.edu/Adv_bid/Adv_bid.html.
Information that is not posted to the website is not available/not known




INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS                                                                             00005 - 2
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY         Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                   WSU Project No. 089-169976


                                 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

OWNER:                                            Board of Governors
                                                  Wayne State University

PROJECT:                                          Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire
                                                  Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                  Project No. 089-169976

LOCATION:                                         Wayne State University
                                                  5047 Gullen Mall,
                                                  Detroit, Michigan 48202

OWNER’S AGENT:                                    Paula Reyes, Purchasing Manager
                                                  WSU – Purchasing Department
                                                  5700 Cass, Suite 4200
                                                  Detroit, Michigan 48202
                                                  313-577-3649 / 313-577-3747 fax
                                                  bb2709@wayne.edu & copy ac0578@wayne.edu

1.   PROPOSALS

     A.     The Purchasing Agent will receive sealed Proposals for the work as herein set forth at
            the place and until the time as stated in the "Information for Bidders", a copy of which is
            bound herewith in theses specifications, at which time and place all proposals will be
            publicly opened and read aloud.

     B.     Proposals shall be for a lump-sum General Contract for the entire work of the
            Project as provided in the Form of Proposal.

     C.     Proposals shall be submitted in duplicate on forms furnished with the Bidding documents.
            The forms must be fully filled out in ink or typewritten with the signature in longhand, and
            the completed forms shall be without alterations, interlineations, or erasures. Forms shall
            contain no recapitulations of the work to be done. Each proposal shall be delivered in an
            opaque sealed envelope, marked "PROPOSAL" AND SHALL BEAR THE NAME OF
            THE PROJECT AND THE NAME OF THE BIDDER. Proposals submitted by telephone
            or telegraph will not be accepted. Modifications by telephone or telegraph to previously
            submitted proposals will not be accepted.

     D.     (revised 5-29-2009) All base bids must be conforming to the detailed specifications and
            drawings provided by the University, including any Addenda or Clarifications issued.
            Voluntary Alternates will only be considered if the Contractor has also submitted a
            conforming base bid. Any stipulation of voluntary alternates or qualifications contrary to
            the Contract requirements made by the Bidder in or accompanying his proposal as a
            condition for the acceptance of the Contract will not be considered in the award of the
            Contract and will cause the rejection of the entire Proposal.

     E.     The competency and responsibility of Bidders will be considered in making the award.
            The Owner does not obligate himself to accept the lowest or any other bids. The Owner
            reserves the right to reject any and all bids and to waive any informalities in the
            Proposals.

2.   PROPOSAL GUARANTEE




INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS                                                                       00100 - 1
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY            Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                      WSU Project No. 089-169976


     A.     A certified check or bank draft payable to the Owner, or satisfactory Bid Bond executed
            by the Bidder and Surety Company, in an amount equal to not less than five percent (5%)
            of the maximum proposal amount shall be submitted with each Proposal, which amount
            may be forfeited to the Board of Governors, Wayne State University, if the successful
            Bidder refuses to enter into a Contract within sixty (60) days from receipt of Proposals.

     B.     The bid deposit of all bidders except the lowest three will be returned within three (3)
            days after the bids are opened. After the formal Contract and bonds are approved, the
            bid deposit will be returned to the lowest three bidders, except when forfeited.

     C.     Bid bonds shall be accompanied by a Power of Attorney authorizing the signer of
                   the bond to do so on behalf of the Surety Company.

     D.     Withdrawal of Proposals is prohibited for a period of sixty (60) days after the actual date
            of opening thereof.

3.   CONTRACT SECURITY (revised 4-2007)

     A.     The successful Bidder will be required to furnish a Performance Bond and Labor and
            Material Payment bond in an amount equal to 100% of the contract award amount, and
            include such cost in the Proposal, complying with the laws of the State of Michigan. The
            graduated formula no longer applies.

     B.     Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond shall be from a surety
            company acceptable to the Owner and made payable as follows:

            (1)     A bond for 100% of the contract award amount to the Board of Governors of
                    Wayne State University, and guaranteeing the payment of all subcontractors and
                    all indebtedness incurred for labor, materials, or any cause whatsoever on
                    account of the Contractor in accordance with the laws of the State of Michigan
                    relating to such bonds.

            (2)     A bond for 100% of the contract award amount to the Board of Governors of
                    Wayne State University to guarantee and insure the completion of work
                    according to the Contract.

4.   BOND CLARIFICATION

     For bids below $50,000.00,

     A.     Bid bond will not be required.
     B.     Performance Bond will not be required.

5.   INSPECTION

     A.     Before submitting his Proposal, each Bidder shall be held to have visited the site of the
            proposed work and to have familiarized himself as to all existing conditions affecting the
            execution of the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. No allowance or
            extra consideration on behalf of the Contractor will subsequently be made by reason of
            his failure to observe the Conditions or on behalf of any subcontractor for the same
            reason.

6.   EXPLANATION TO BIDDERS AND ADDENDA

     A.     Neither the Owner nor Representative nor Purchasing Agent will give verbal answers to

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS                                                                      00100 - 2
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY            Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                      WSU Project No. 089-169976


              any inquiries regarding the meaning of drawings and specifications, and any verbal
              statement regarding same by any person, previous to the award, shall be unauthoritative.

      B.      Any explanation desired by Bidders must be requested of the Purchasing Agent in
              writing, and if explanation is necessary, a reply will be made in the form of an Addendum,
              a copy of which will be forwarded to each Bidder registered on the Bidders' List
              maintained by the Purchasing Department.

      C.      All addenda issued to Bidders prior to date of receipt of Proposals shall become a part of
              these Specifications, and all proposals are to include the work therein described.

7.    INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

      A.      If any person contemplating submitting a bid for the proposed Contract is in doubt as to
              the true meaning of any part of the drawings, specifications, or other Contract
              Documents, he may submit to the Purchasing Agent, a written request for an
              interpretation thereof. The person submitting the request will be responsible for its
              prompt delivery. Any interpretation of the Contract Documents will be made by an
              addendum duly issued. A copy of such addendum will be mailed and delivered to each
              registered Bidder. Each proposal submitted shall list all addenda, by numbers, which
              have been received prior to the time scheduled for receipt of proposal.

8.    SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT*

      A.      Whenever a material, article or piece of equipment is identified on the Drawings or in the
              Specifications by reference to manufacturers' or vendors' names, trade names, catalog
              numbers, or the like, it is so identified for the purpose of establishing a standard, and any
              material, article, or piece of equipment of other manufacturers or vendors which will
              perform adequately the duties imposed by the general design will be considered equally
              acceptable provided that the material, article, or piece of equipment so proposed is, in
              the opinion of the Architect, of equal substance, appearance and function. It shall not be
              purchased or installed by the Contractor without the Architect's written approval.

9.    TAXES

      A.      The Bidder shall include in his lump sum proposal and make payment of all Federal,
              State, County and Municipal taxes, including Michigan State Sales and Use Taxes, now
              in force or which may be enacted during the progress and completion of the work
              covered.

10.   REQUIREMENTS FOR SIGNING PROPOSALS AND CONTRACTS

      A.      The following requirements must be observed in the signing of proposals that are
              submitted:

              (1)     Proposals that are not signed by individuals making them shall have attached
                      thereto a Power of Attorney, evidencing the authority to sign the Proposal in the
                      name of the person for whom it is signed.

              (2)     Proposals that are signed for partnership shall be signed by all of the partners or
                      by an Attorney-in-Fact. If signed by an Attorney-in-Fact, there must be attached
                      to the Proposal a Power of Attorney evidencing authority to sign the Proposal,
                      executed by the partners.

              (3)     Proposals that are signed for a corporation shall have the correct corporate

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS                                                                          00100 - 3
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY         Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                   WSU Project No. 089-169976


                    name thereof and the signature of the President or other authorized officer of the
                    corporation, manually written in the line of the Form of Proposal following the
                    words "signed by". If such a proposal is signed by an official other than the
                    President of the Corporation, a certified copy of resolution of the Board of
                    Directors, evidencing the authority of such official to sign the bid, shall be
                    attached to it. Such proposal shall also bear the attesting signature of the
                    Secretary of the Corporation and the impression of the corporate seal.

11.   QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS

      A.    The Owner may request each of the three (3) low bidders to submit information
            necessary to satisfy the Owner that the Bidder is adequately prepared to fulfill the
            Contract. Such information may include past performance records, list of available
            personnel, plant and equipment, description of work that will be done simultaneously with
            the Owner's Project, financial statement, or any other pertinent information. This
            information and such other information as may be requested will be used in determining
            whether a Bidder is qualified to perform the work required and is responsible and reliable.

12.   SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

      A.    The attention of all Bidders is called to the General Conditions, Supplementary General
            Conditions, and Special Conditions, all of which are a part of the Specifications covering
            all work, including Subcontracts, materials, etc. Special attention is called to those
            portions dealing with Labor Standards, including wages, fringe benefits, Equal
            Employment Opportunities, and Liquidated Damages.

      B.    Prior to award of the project, the apparent low bidder will be required to produce a
            schedule of values which will include the proposed subcontractors for each division of
            work and whether the subcontractor is signatory or non-signatory. A contract will not be
            issued to the apparent low bidder until this document is provided. A contractor will have
            one week to produce this document. If the required document is not received within this
            time, the bidder will be disqualified.

13.   NOTICE OF AWARD/ACCEPTANCE OF BID PROPOSAL (revised 12-15-2009)

      A.    The Proposal shall be deemed as having been accepted when a copy of the Contract
            (fully executed by both the vendor and the appropriate signatory authority for the
            University), with any/all Alternates, Addenda, and Pre-Contract Bulletins, as issued by
            the office or agent of the Owner has been duly received by the Contractor. After signing
            the Contracts, the Contractor shall then return all copies, plus any required bonds and
            certificates of insurance, to the office of the Owner's Representative, at 5454 Cass,
            Wayne State University, Detroit, MI 48202. Construction will begin when the fully-
            executed contract has been returned to the Contractor.

14.   TIME OF STARTING AND COMPLETION

      A.    It is understood that the work is to be carried through to substantial completion with the
            utmost speed consistent with good workmanship and to meet the established start and
            completion dates.

      B.    The Contractor shall begin work under the Contract without delay, upon receipt of a fully-
            executed contract from the Owner, and shall substantially complete the project ready for
            unobstructed occupancy and use of the Owner for the purposes intended within the
            completion time stated in the Contract.



INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS                                                                      00100 - 4
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY          Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                    WSU Project No. 089-169976


      C.     The Contractor shall, immediately upon receipt of fully-executed contract, schedule his
             work and expedite deliveries of materials and performance of the subcontractors to
             maintain the necessary pace for start and completion on the aforementioned dates.

15.   BIDDING DOCUMENTS

      A.     Bid specifications are not available at the University, but are available beginning 12-17-
             2009 through Wayne State University Purchasing Department’s Website for Advertised
             Bids: http://www.forms.purchasing.wayne.edu/Adv_bid/Adv_bid.html. The plans for
             this project can be viewed in advance and/or printed from the above website. Copies of
             the RFP will not be available at the pre-proposal meeting.
      .

      B.   DOCUMENTS ON FILE (revised 12-2007)

             (1)     Wayne State University Purchasing Department’s Website.
                     All available information pertaining to this project will be posted to the Purchasing
                     web site at http://www.forms.purchasing.wayne.edu/Adv_bid/Adv_bid.html.
                     Information that is not posted to the website is not available/not known.

             (2)     Notification of this Bid Opportunity has been sent to DUNN BLUE (for purchase
                     of Bid Documents only), DODGE REPORTS, REED CONSTRUCTION,
                     CONSTRUCTION NEWS and the CONSTRUCTION ASSOCIATION OF
                     MICHIGAN (CAM).

             (3)     Please note: Effective December 1, 2007, bid notices will be sent only to those
                     Vendors registered to receive them via our Bid Opportunities list serve. To
                     register, to http://www.forms.purchasing.wayne.edu/Adv_bid/Adv_bid.html,
                     and click on the “Join our Listserve” link at the top of the page.




INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS                                                                         00100 - 5
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY               Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                         WSU Project No. 089-169976



                                NOTICE OF MANDATORY PRE-BID CONFERENCE


PROJECT:           Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178,



PROJECT NOS.: WSU PROJECT NO. 089-169976

It is MANDATORY that each Contractor proposing to bid on this work attends the pre-bid conference at the following
location:

Wayne State University
5047 Gullen Mall, Fifth Floor Conference room
Detroit MI 48202

10:00 a.m., local time, 12-23-2009

The purpose of this conference is to clarify the procedures, scope of work, and to identify any omissions and/or
inconsistencies that may impede preparation and submission of representative competitive bids.

An attendance list shall be prepared and minutes of the conference shall be furnished to all those attending.

Any clarifications or corrections that cannot be made at the conference will be by Addendum.


All available information pertaining to this project will be posted to the Purchasing web site at
http://www.forms.purchasing.wayne.edu/Adv_bid/Adv_bid.html.
Information that is not posted to the website is not available/not known.




NOTICE OF MANDATORY PRE-BID CONFERENCE                                                              00250 - 1
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY         Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                   WSU Project No. 089-169976


                                            AGENDA
     I.     Welcome and Introductions
            A. Wayne State University Representatives
            B. Vendor Representatives
            C. Sign in Sheet- be sure to include your fax number and email address (LEGIBLY) on the sign in
               sheet.
            D. Pass your business cards to: Paula Reyes, Purchasing Manager

     II.    Brief Overview of Wayne State University
            A. Purpose and Intent of RFP.
            B. Detailed review of the RFP and the requirements for a qualified response.
            C. Review of all pertinent dates and forms that are REQUIRED for a qualified response.

     III.   Vendor Questions/Concerns/Issues
            A. Questions that can be answered directly by the appropriate person in this meeting will be
               answered and both question and answer will be recorded in the minutes of the meeting.
            B.   Questions that need to be researched will be answered and a nature of clarification will be
                 faxed to each vendor present.
            C.   Minutes will be emailed to all participants of the meeting within a reasonable amount of time.
                 (be sure to include your email address/addresses on the sign in sheet)
            D.   Questions and concerns that come up after this meeting are to be addressed to Paula Reyes,
                 Purchasing Department. Discussion with other University members is seriously discouraged
                 and could lead to disqualification from further consideration. All questions and answers will be
                 recorded and emailed to all participants of the RFP.
            E.   Due date for questions is 1-6-10, 12:00 noon.

     IV.    Proposal Due Date- 1-14-10, 2:00 p.m.

     V.     Final Comments

     VI.    Adjourn




NOTICE OF MANDATORY PRE-BID CONFERENCE                                                       00250 - 2
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY         Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                   WSU Project No. 089-169976



VENDOR NAME


                    GENERAL CONTRACT - PROPOSAL FORM (revised 10 - 2009)

Please Note – Vendors must Prequalify themselves when responding to this bid opportunity. Our
Prequalification questions can be found on page 4 of this section.

OWNER:                                          Board of Governors
                                                Wayne State University

PROJECT:                                        Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire
                                                Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
PROJECT NO.:
                                                WSU PROJECT NO. 089-169976

PROJECT TYPE (Check One):
                                                      Mechanical Work
                                                      Electrical Work
                                                      General
                                                      Construction, Office,
                                                      classroom
                                                      General
                                                      Construction,
                                                 X    specialized, research
                                                      space
                                                      Hazardous Material
                                                      Cement
                                                      Roofing
PURCHASING AGENT:
                                                Paula Reyes, Purchasing Manager
                                                WSU – Purchasing Department
                                                5700 Cass, Suite 4200
                                                Detroit, Michigan 48202
                                                313-577-3649/ 313-577-3747 fax
                                                bb2709@wayne.edu & copy ac0578@wayne.edu
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE:
                                                Clement R. Prabakaran, Project Manager
                                                Design & Construction Services
                                                Facilities Planning & Management
                                                Wayne State University
                                                5454 Cass Avenue
                                                Detroit, Michigan 48202
TO:
                                                Board of Governors
                                                Wayne State University
                                                Detroit, Michigan
BASE PROPOSAL:
                                    The undersigned agrees to enter into an Agreement to complete the
                                    entire work of the Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage -
                                    Labs 5168 & 5178 project (WSU Project No. 089-169976) in accordance
                                    with the Bidding Documents for the following amounts:




FORM OF PROPOSAL FOR THE GENERAL CONTRACT                                               00300 - 1
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY        Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                  WSU Project No. 089-169976


                                                                  Dollars ($                      )

ALTERNATE NO. 1:
                                  The undersigned agrees to enter into an agreement to complete the
                                  Alternate # 1 work of the Construction of Office and Microscopy Room as
                                  shown in the floor plan project and to provide all labor and material
                                  associated with the work in accordance with the Bidding Documents for
                                  the following amounts:


                                                                  Dollars ($                      )

LAWN REPLACEMENT:        The undersigned agrees that, in the event of existing lawn or landscaping
                         damage, due to the Contractor's work, that has not been properly addressed and
                         repaired to the satisfaction of the University, the University may repair/replace
                         the lawn and/or landscaping, and that the expense will be at a unit cost of
                         $10.00 per square yard for lawn, and landscaping at a rate of 1.5 times the
                         cost of said repairs, the full cost of which shall be reimbursed by the contractor.

CONTRACT CHANGE          The undersigned agrees to the following pricing formula and rates ORDERS:
                         for changes in the contract work:

                         1.       For subcontract work, Contractor's markup for handling, overhead, profit
                                  and bonding on subcontractor's sell price, shall not exceed 5%.

                         2.       For work by his own organization, Contractor's markup for job* and
                                  general overhead, profit and bonding shall not exceed 5% of the net
                                  labor** and material costs.

                         * Job overhead includes supervision and executive expenses; use charges on
                         small tools, scaffolding, blocking, shores, appliances, etc., and other
                         miscellaneous job expenses.

                         ** Net labor cost is the sum of the base wages, fringe benefits established by
                         governing trade organizations, applicable payroll taxes, and increased expense
                         for contractor's liability insurance (Workman's Compensation, P.L. and P.D.).

TIME OF COMPLETION:      (revised 10-15-2009)
                         The Contract is expected to be fully executed on or about 25 calendar days after
                         successful bidder qualification and recommendation of award. The undersigned
                         agrees to start construction immediately after receipt of a fully executed
                         contract and Purchase Order, and to complete the work as follows:

                         Substantial Completion no later than 05-14-10.

LIQUIDATED DAMAGES:      It is understood and agreed that, if project is not completed within the time
                         specified in the contract plus any extension of time allowed pursuant thereto, the
                         actual damages sustained by the Owner because of any such delay, will be
                         uncertain and difficult to ascertain, and it is agreed that the reasonable
                         foreseeable value of the use of said project by Owner would be the sum of
                         $500.00, Five Hundred Dollars per day, and therefore the contractor shall pay
                         as liquidated damages to the Owner the sum of $500.00, Five Hundred Dollars
                         per day for each day's delay in substantially completing said project beyond the
                         time specified in the Contract and any extensions of time allowed thereunder.




FORM OF PROPOSAL FOR THE GENERAL CONTRACT                                                00300 - 2
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY               Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                         WSU Project No. 089-169976


TAXES:                           The undersigned acknowledges that prices stated above include all applicable
                                 taxes of whatever character or description. Michigan State Sales Tax is
                                 applicable to the work. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to
                                 reject any or all bids and to waive informalities or irregularities therein.

ADDENDA:                         The undersigned affirms that the cost of all work covered by the following
                                 Addenda are included in the lump sum price of this proposal.

                                         Addendum No.           Date

                                         Addendum No.           Date

                                         Addendum No.           Date


CONTRACTOR'S PREQUALIFICATION STATEMENT & QUESTIONNAIRE:

                           Our Minimum Requirements for Construction Bids are:

WSU considers this project: General Construction, specialized, research space.

Criteria               Small Project          Medium Project         Large Project         Very Large Project
                       bid less than          bid between            bid between           bid greater than $2
                       $50,000                $50,001 and            $250,001 and $2       million
                                              $250,000               million
EMR Rating             1.0 or Less            1.0 or Less            1.0 or Less           1.0 or Less
(Experience
Modification Rating)
Bondable Vendor        N.A.                   Required               Required              Required
Length of Time in      2 Years                3 Years                5 Years               5 Years
Construction
Business
Demonstrated           1 or more              1 or more              2 or more             3 or more
Experience in
Projects Similar in
Scope and Price in
the last 3 years
Unsuccessful           None Allowed           None Allowed           None Allowed          None Allowed
Projects on Campus
in last 3 years
Failure to comply      None Allowed           None Allowed           None Allowed          None Allowed
with Prevailing
Wage and/or Project
Labor requirements
Company currently      1 Year                 2 Years                3 Years               3 Years
not in Chapter 11 of
the US Bankruptcy
Code

Contractors must complete the following information to determine their eligibility to participate in this
bid. This information is required with your Bid to the University

Failure to complete this form in its entirety will result in your bid being disqualified.
Check one of the following on the makeup of your company:


FORM OF PROPOSAL FOR THE GENERAL CONTRACT                                                     00300 - 3
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY              Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                        WSU Project No. 089-169976



         Corporation                                                 Individual

         Partnership                                                 Joint Venture

         Other (Explain)




1. How many years has your organization been in business as a contractor?

2. How many years has your organization been in business under its present business name?

3. List states in which your organization is legally qualified to do business.



4. Provide the Name and Address of your Liability Insurance Carrier.



5. What is your current EMR Rating?
   The minimum requirement is an EMR Rating of 1.0 or less for all projects. Bidders with a rating higher than
   1.0 understand that their bid may be disqualified, at the sole discretion of the University.

6. What percentage of the work do you normally perform with your own work force/employees?


7. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? If so, attach a separate sheet of explanation.
   Include the name of the Project, the customer, the dates of the work, and the amount of the contract


8. Has any officer or partner of your organization ever been an officer or partner of another organization
   that failed to complete a construction contract? If so, attach a separate sheet of explanation.



9. List the construction experience of the principals and superintendents of your company.

    Name: __________________________________ Title: _____________________________________

    _________________________________________________________________________________



    Name: __________________________________ Title: _____________________________________

    _________________________________________________________________________________



    Name: __________________________________ Title: _____________________________________


FORM OF PROPOSAL FOR THE GENERAL CONTRACT                                                        00300 - 4
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY             Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                       WSU Project No. 089-169976



    _________________________________________________________________________________




10. List the construction Projects, and approximate dates, when you performed work similar in Scope to this
    project.


    Project: ___________________________________ Owner:__________________________________

    Contract Amount: ___________________________ Date Completed: _________________________

    Project: ___________________________________ Owner: __________________________________

    Contract Amount: ___________________________          Date Completed: _________________________

    Project: ___________________________________          Owner: __________________________________

    Contract Amount:___________________________          Date Completed: _________________________


11. List the construction Projects, and approximate dates, when you performed work similar in Dollar Amount to
    this project.

    Project:___________________________________ Owner:__________________________________

    Contract Amount: __________________________ Date Completed: _________________________

    Project: __________________________________ Owner: __________________________________

    Contract Amount: __________________________ Date Completed: _________________________

    Project: ___________________________________ Owner: __________________________________

    Contract Amount: ___________________________ Date Completed: _________________________

12. Is your Company “bondable”?     Yes                 No

13. What is your present bonding capacity? $

14. Who is your bonding agent?

    NAME:

    ADDRESS:

    PHONE:              (               )

    CONTACT:

15. Does your company agree to provide financial reports to the University upon request? Failure to agree may
    result in disqualification of your bid. Yes        No




FORM OF PROPOSAL FOR THE GENERAL CONTRACT                                                      00300 - 5
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY              Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                        WSU Project No. 089-169976


16. Does your company agree that all of the Terms and Conditions of this RFP and Vendor’s Response Proposal
    become part of any ensuing agreement? Yes                 No

17. Does your company agree to execute a contract containing the clauses shown in Section 00500 “Agreement
    Between Contractor and Owner for Construction”? Yes               No

    If “No”, clearly note any exceptions to any information contained in the contract documents and include with
    your proposal.

18. Note: Contractors submitting proposals for this project may, at the discretion of the University, be required to
    submit references including contact information to be used to assist in the post bid evaluation process for the
    subject project

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF                       The undersigned has read and understands the minimum qualifications
MINIMUM QUALIFICATIONS:                  for University construction projects, and has completed the
                                         Prequalification section completely and accurately. The undersigned
                                         understands that a contractor, who fails to meet the minimum
                                         qualifications in the category identified for this project, will be
                                         disqualified from consideration for the project.


ACCEPTANCE OF PROPOSAL:                  The undersigned agrees to execute a Contract, being the Wayne State
                                         University standard form titled "Agreement Between Contractor and
                                         Owner for Construction", provided that we are notified of the acceptance
                                         of our Proposal within sixty (60) days of the date set for the opening
                                         thereof.

The undersigned below understands that the bid will be disqualified if the
Prequalification information above is not completed in its entirety.
NAME OF COMPANY:

OFFICE ADDRESS:

PHONE NUMBER:                                                              DATE

FAX NUMBER:

SIGNED BY:
                                                                  Signature


                                                       (Please print or type name here)

TITLE




FORM OF PROPOSAL FOR THE GENERAL CONTRACT                                                         00300 - 6
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY             Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                       WSU Project No. 089-169976


                          PREVAILING WAGE RATE SCHEDULE (revised 11-2009)

A.   See also Page 00100-4 Section 12.B

B.   Wayne State University requires all project contractors, including subcontractors, who provide labor on
     University projects to compensate at a rate no less than prevailing wage rates.


C.   Contracts requiring prior approval of the Board of Governors between the University and a construction
     manager, design builder, or general contractor will include a requirement that the construction manager,
     design builder, or general contractor, with its contractors and subcontractors on that project, enter into a
     Project Labor Agreement in connection with that project, and may specify one or more of the items that the
     PLA must contain. See Section 00100 for additional information.

D.   The rates of wages and fringe benefits to be paid to each class of laborers and mechanics by each
     VENDOR and subcontractor(s) (if any), including individually contracted labor commonly referred to as
     “1099 Employees” shall be not less than the wage and fringe benefit rates prevailing in Wayne County,
     Michigan, as determined by the United States Secretary of Labor.


E.   To maintain compliance with State of Michigan Ordinances, Certified Payroll must be provided for each of
     the contractor’s or subcontractor’s payroll periods for work performed on this project. Certified Payroll
     should accompany all Pay Applications. Failure to provide certified payroll will constitute breach of
     contract.

     A Prevailing Wage Rate Schedule has been issued from the State of Michigan that is enclosed in this
     section

     Additional information can be found on the University Purchasing Department’s web site at the following
     URL address:



                    http://purchasing.wayne.edu/vendors/wage-rates.php

     If you have any questions, or require rates for additional classifications, please contact:

                    Michigan Department of Consumer & Industry Services,
                    Bureau of Safety and Regulation, Wage and Hour Division,
                    7150 Harris Drive,
                    P.O. Box 30476,
                    Lansing, Michigan 48909-7976

                    http://www.michigan.gov/dleg/0,1607,7-154-27673_27706---,00.html

F.   Wayne State University's Prevailing Wage Requirements:

     When compensation will be paid under prevailing wage requirements, the University shall require the
     following:

           A. The contractor shall obtain and keep posted on the work site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of
              all current prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates.




PREVAILING WAGE RATE SCHEDULE                                                                      00410 - 1
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY              Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                        WSU Project No. 089-169976


           B. The contractor shall obtain and keep an accurate record showing the name and occupation of
              and the actual wages and benefits paid to each laborer and mechanic employed in connection
              with this contract.

           C. The contractor shall submit a completed certified payroll document [U.S. Department of Labor
              Form WH 347] verifying and confirming the prevailing wage and benefits rates for all employees
              and subcontractors for each payroll period for work performed on this project. The contractor
              shall include copies of pay stubs for all employee or contract labor payments related to Wayne
              State University work. The form can be downloaded from the Department of Labor website at
              http://www.dol.gov/whd/forms/wh347.pdf.


                  Note: Contractor invoices WILL NOT be processed until certified payroll documents are
                  received.

G.   If the VENDOR or subcontractor fails to pay the prevailing rates of wages and fringe benefits and does not
     cure such failure within 10 days after notice to do so by the UNIVERSITY, the UNIVERSITY shall have the
     right, at its option, to do any or all of the following:

             1.      Withhold all or any portion of payments due the VENDOR as may be considered necessary
                     by the UNIVERSITY to pay laborers and mechanics the difference between the rates of
                     wages and fringe benefits required by this contract and the actual wages and fringe benefits
                     paid;

             2.      Terminate this contract and proceed to complete the contract by separate agreement with
                     another vendor or otherwise, in which case the VENDOR and its sureties shall be liable to
                     the UNIVERSITY for any excess costs incurred by the UNIVERSITY.

                     Terms identical or substantially similar to this section of this RFP shall be included in any
                     contract or subcontract pertaining to this project.

H.   The current applicable prevailing wage rates as identified by the State of Michigan Department of
     Consumer & Industry Services, Bureau of Safety and Regulation, Wage and Hour Division are attached.
     Refer to item C above if additional information is required.

I.   Prior to award of the project, the apparent low bidder will be required to produce a schedule of values which
     will include the proposed subcontractors for each division of work and whether the subcontractor is
     signatory or non-signatory. A letter of intent or contract will not be issued to the apparent low bidder until
     this document is provided. The apparent low bidder will have one week to produce this document. If the
     required document is not received within this time, the bidder will be disqualified, and the next low bidder
     will be required to provide this schedule of values.




           SEE ATTACHED STATE PREVAILING WAGE INFORMATION




PREVAILING WAGE RATE SCHEDULE                                                                   00410 - 2
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY    Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                              WSU Project No. 089-169976


                                                                                            PO Box 30476
                                                   Department of Energy, Labor and Economic Growth         6546
Mercantile Way, Suite 5




PREVAILING WAGE RATE SCHEDULE                                                   00410 - 1
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY        Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                  WSU Project No. 089-169976




     AA.    PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENTS (revised 11-2009)

     (Deleted)

            A.   Contracts requiring prior approval of the Board of Governors between the University and a
                 construction manager, design builder, or general contractor will include a requirement that
                 the construction manager, design builder, or general contractor, with its contractors and
                 subcontractors on that project, enter into a Project Labor Agreement (PLA) in connection
                 with that project, and may specify one or more of the items that the PLA must contain.

            B.   Prior approval of the Board of Governors is required for the designing and implementation
                 of construction or renovation of a building or other real property improvement or
                 maintenance project if:

                 (1)   the project’s estimated cost would exceed $250,000.

                 (2)   the project would change the height or footprint of an existing Building other than a
                       temporary building ; or

                 (3)   the project would make a material long-term change to the landscape.

            C.   A project labor agreement (PLA) is an agreement between a construction manager, design
                 builder, or general contractor engaged on a University construction project and the union(s)
                 representing workers on that project, covering the terms and conditions of employment on
                 that project.

            D.   This policy recognizes that numerous contractors have established relationships with
                 unions independent of their relationship with Wayne State University. Nothing in this policy
                 shall be deemed to require that a contractor execute a PLA when doing so would conflict
                 with such a relationship.

            E.   Will this Project require the Contractor to complete a Project Labor Agreement:

                    Yes Yes, PLA is Required.                   No, PLA is not required
                  (To be completed by the Purchasing Agent)

            F.   To maintain compliance with State of Michigan Ordinances, the contractor shall submit a
                 completed certified payroll document [U.S. Department of Labor Form WH347] verifying
                 and confirming the prevailing wage and benefits rates for all employees and subcontractors
                 for each payroll period for work performed on this project. The contractor shall include
                 copies of pay stubs for all employee or contract labor payments related to Wayne State
                 University work. The form can be downloaded from the Department of Labor website at
                 http://www.dol.gov/whd/forms/wh347.pdf.

                 Note: Contractor invoices WILL NOT be processed until certified payroll documents
                 are received.


            G.   A complete copy of the Board Policy can be downloaded at:
                 http://www.purchasing.wayne.edu/Project_Labor_Agreements.html




PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENTS                                                                   00420 - 1
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY       Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                 WSU Project No. 089-169976




             AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE UNIVERSITY AND CONTRACTOR
                        FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES




             Executed as of the ______ day of _________, 2009 by and between:

                      The Board of Governors, Wayne State University
                                 Detroit, Michigan 48202
                                     (The University)


                                           and


                                        Contractor
                                          address
                                       city/state/zip


                                        regarding




           Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178




                              WSU Project No. 089-169976




AGREEMENT BETWEEN CONTRACTOR AND OWNER                                             00500 - 1
FOR CONSTRUCTION
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY             Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                       WSU Project No. 089-169976


In consideration of the mutual covenants and conditions contained herein, the Parties agree as follows:

                                      Article 1 - Scope of Work

1.1     This Agreement provides for Project includes Restore and renovate fire damaged interior of
        Labs 5168 and 5178 in the Bio-Science Building including finishes, equipment, electrical,
        mechanical and plumbing work., located at 5047 Gullen Mall. All work is performed on Wayne
        State’s main campus in Detroit Michigan. The documents listed in Article 4 fully define the scope
        of work.

1.2     The Contractor shall furnish all the labor, materials, equipment, services, and supervision to
        perform all the work shown on the drawings and specifications listed in Article 17, including any
        addenda issued during the bid phase, and approved change orders issued during the
        construction phase.

1.3     The Contractor shall notify the University in writing within five (5) calendar days when the
        Contractor discovers any condition that will affect the contract amount or the completion date.

                         Article 2 - Time of Completion (revised 10-15-2009)

2.1     The work to be performed under this Agreement shall commence upon the Contractor’s receipt of
        a fully-executed Agreement. The Contract is expected to be fully executed on or about 25
        calendar days after successful bidder qualification and recommendation of award. The
        undersigned agrees to start construction immediately after receipt of a fully executed contract
        and Purchase Order, and to complete the work as follows:

        Substantial Completion no later than 05-14-10.


                                     Article 3 - The Contract Sum

3.1     The University shall pay the Contractor a lump sum amount of $ indicate amt. in no. (indicate
        amt. in words and xx/100 Dollars) for the performance of all work associated with the Contractor’s
        Base Bid.

3.2     The University may, at its sole discretion, during the life of the contract, award the following
        alternates, at the amounts indicated (If section 3.2 is not used, delete all text and enter
        "Deleted").

                                  Description                                       Amount
         Alternate #1
         Alternate #2
         Alternate #3


3.3     In the event additional work becomes necessary, the following unit prices will apply (If section
        3.3 is not used, delete all text and enter "Deleted"):

         Work Item                                                                  Unit Price
         1.
         2.
         3.


AGREEMENT BETWEEN CONTRACTOR AND OWNER                                                           00500 - 2
FOR CONSTRUCTION
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY             Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                       WSU Project No. 089-169976


                                 Article 4 - The Contract Documents

4.1   The Contract Documents shall consist of this Agreement, the drawings and specifications as
      listed in Article 17, the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction as defined by AIA
      Document A201 1970 Edition, except as otherwise provided herein, and Wayne State
      University’s Supplementary General Conditions 1997 Edition.

4.2   For any inconsistencies found among or between these Contract Documents, the language
      contained in this Agreement shall prevail over all other documents and the Supplementary
      General Conditions shall prevail over the General Conditions. In the event of a conflict between
      the Drawings and Specifications, the requirement for the higher quantity and/or higher quality
      shall prevail.
                               Article 5 – Examination of Premises

5.1   The Contractor acknowledges that the University provided the opportunity for a thorough
      examination of the project site and its surroundings and that the Contractor knows of no
      conditions preventing accomplishment of the full scope of work within the time and for the amount
      specified in this Agreement.

5.2   The University will deny all claims for additional time and/or cost for conditions that could have
      been reasonably discovered during such an examination.

                                  Article 6 - The Architect/Engineer

6.1   The Architect/Engineer for this project is:

                                     Smith Group Inc
                                     500 Griswold Street, Suite 1700
                                     Detroit, MI 48226

6.2   The University will appoint a Project Manager who will be the University’s point of contact for all
      matters of contract administration including, but not limited to, interpretation of documents,
      defining the scope of work, approving work schedules, and approving contract payments.

                                      Article 7 - Additional Work

7.1   The University reserves the right to let other Agreements in connection with this work. The
      Contractor will afford other Contractors or the University’s own workforce reasonable opportunity
      for the delivery and storage of their material and for the performance of their work and shall
      properly connect and coordinate its work with theirs.


7.2   If any part of the Contractor’s work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of
      another Contractor or the University’s own workforce, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly
      report to the University’s Project Manager any defects in such work that render it unsuitable for
      such proper execution and results. The Contractor’s failure to so inspect and report shall
      constitute an acceptance of the work of others as fit and proper for reception of the Contractor’s
      work and as a waiver of any claim or defense against the University or other contractor which
      relies in whole or in part upon the contention that such work was unsuitable for proper execution
      and resolution.
                                    Article 8 – Dispute Resolution

8.1   Jurisdiction over all claims, disputes, and other matters in question arising out of or relating to this
      contract or the breach thereof, shall rest in the Court of Claims of the State of Michigan. No

AGREEMENT BETWEEN CONTRACTOR AND OWNER                                                             00500 - 3
FOR CONSTRUCTION
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY            Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                      WSU Project No. 089-169976


      provision of this agreement may be construed as Wayne State University’s consent to submit any
      claim, dispute or other matter in question for dispute resolution pursuant to any arbitration or
      mediation process, whether or not provisions for dispute resolution are included in a document
      which has been incorporated by reference into this agreement. Specifically, all references to
      Arbitration contained in the General Conditions are superceded by this Article.

8.1   In any claim or dispute by the Contractor against the University, which cannot be resolved by
      negotiation, the Contractor shall submit the dispute in writing for an administrative decision by the
      University’s Vice President for Finance and Administration, within 30 days of the end of
      negotiations. Any decision of the Vice President shall be made within 45 days of receipt from the
      Contractor and is final unless it is challenged by the Contractor by filing a lawsuit in the Court of
      Claims of the State of Michigan within one year of the issuance of the decision. The Contractor
      agrees that appeal to the Vice President is a condition precedent to filing suit in the Michigan
      Court of Claims.

8.2   For purposes of this section, the “end of negotiations” shall be deemed to have occurred when:

      8.2.1 Either party informs the other that pursuant to this section, negotiations are at an impasse;
      or

      8.3.2 The Contractor submits the dispute in writing to the Vice President.



8.4   Unless otherwise agreed by the University in writing, and notwithstanding any other rights or
      obligations of either of the parties under any Contract Documents or Agreement, the Contractor
      shall continue with the performance of its services and duties during the pendency of any
      negotiations or proceedings to resolve any claim or dispute, and the University shall continue to
      make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents; however, the University shall not be
      required or obligated to make payments on or against any such claims or disputes during the
      pendency of any proceeding to resolve such claims or disputes.

                              Article 9 - Termination for Convenience

9.1   Upon thirty days written notice to the Contractor, the University may, without cause and without
      prejudice to any other right or remedy of the University, elect to terminate the contract. In such
      case, the Contractor shall only be paid (without duplication of any items), using a Close Out
      Change Order, for the following:

      9.1.1   For completed and acceptable work executed in accordance with the Contract
              Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums
              for overhead and profit on such Work;


      9.1.2   For expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services
              and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in
              connection with uncompleted work, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and
              profit on such expenses.

9.2   The Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue, delay or
      disruption, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. For purposes
      of this section, “fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit” shall be determined by
      reference to Michigan law, without reference to principles used for such determinations in


AGREEMENT BETWEEN CONTRACTOR AND OWNER                                                           00500 - 4
FOR CONSTRUCTION
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY             Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                       WSU Project No. 089-169976


       arbitration.

                                   Article 10 - Progress Payments

10.1   On or before the 20th day of each month, the Contractor shall submit a written application for
       payment, using form AIA G702, to the Architect/Engineer and the University’s Project Manager
       for review. The Architect/Engineer shall have ten (10) calendar days to accept or reject the
       Contractor’s application for payment. Acceptable applications for payment shall then be
       submitted to the University for payment of authorized amount(s) within thirty (30) calendar days of
       receipt by the University’s Project Manager.

10.2   The application for payment shall contain a full schedule of values organized and sorted by
       subcontractor, by Construction Specifications Institute standard work categories, or in another
       format acceptable to the University.

10.3   Monthly progress payments shall show the percentage of work installed as of the date of the
       application, less amount previously installed and the amount due for the application period. The
       Contractor shall deduct a 10% retainage from the balance due for each progress payment and
       indicate the net amount due on each application.

10.4   When 50% of the work associated with this Agreement is installed, the Contractor shall not
       deduct additional retainage from the balance due from the University. When substantial
       completion is achieved and acknowledged by the Architect/Engineer, the Contractor and the
       University in writing, the University shall remit to the Contractor all but 2% of the retainage. The
       remaining 2% shall be retained by the University until the final payment is authorized and
       remitted to the Contractor.

                            Article 11 - Acceptance and Final Payments

11.1   Final payment shall be due thirty (30) days after the completion of the work, including all punch
       list items, provided the work is fully completed and the Agreement fully performed.

11.2   Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, the
       Architect/Engineer shall promptly inspect the work. When the Architect/Engineer concludes that
       the work is acceptable and the Agreement to be fully performed, the Architect/Engineer shall
       promptly issue a final certificate with an original signature, stating that the work provided is
       complete and acceptable and that the entire remaining balance found to be due the Contractor
       shall be remitted by the University once the final application for payment is received.

11.3   If, after the work has been substantially completed, full completion thereof is materially delayed
       through no fault of the Contractor, and the Architect/Engineer so certifies, the University shall,
       upon certificate of the Architect/Engineer, and without terminating the Contract, make payments
       of the balance due for that portion of the work fully completed and accepted. Such payments
       shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not
       constitute a waiver of claims.


                                   Article 12 - Non-Discrimination

12.1   The Contractor agrees that it will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for
       employment, to be employed in the performance of this Agreement, with respect to hire, tenure,
       terms, conditions or privileges of employment or any matter directly or indirectly related to
       employment, because of race, color, religion, sex, age, national origin, or ancestry. Breach of
       this covenant may be regarded as material breach of this Agreement.

AGREEMENT BETWEEN CONTRACTOR AND OWNER                                                           00500 - 5
FOR CONSTRUCTION
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY             Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                       WSU Project No. 089-169976



12.2   The Contractor further agrees that it will, in all subcontracts relating to the performance of the
       work under this Agreement, provide in its subcontracts that the subcontractor will not discriminate
       against any employee or applicant for employment, to be employed in the performance of such
       contract, with respect to hire, tenure, terms, conditions or privileges of employment, or any matter
       directly or indirectly related to employment because of race, sex, age, color, religion, national
       origin or ancestry. Breach of this covenant may also be regarded as a material breach of this
       Agreement.

                                    Article 13 - Prevailing Wages

13.1   The Contractor and each subcontractor shall pay to each class of mechanics and laborers not
       less than the wage and fringe benefit rates prevailing in the Detroit Metropolitan Area, as
       determined by the United States Department of Labor. The Contractor shall post on site, in a
       conspicuous place, a copy of all applicable wage and benefit rates, and shall provide the
       University with a copy of the applicable wage and benefit rates.

13.2   The Contractor and each subcontractor shall keep an accurate record showing the name and
       occupation of and the actual benefits and wages paid to each laborer and mechanic employed in
       connection with this contract. The Contractor and each subcontractor shall make certified payroll
       records available to the University’s representatives upon request.

13.3   If a Contractor or subcontractor fails to pay the prevailing rates of wages and fringe benefits and
       does not cure such failure within ten (10) days after notice to do so by the University, the
       University shall have the right, at its option, to do any or all of the following:

       13.3.1   Withhold all or any portion of payments due the Contractor as may be considered
                necessary by the University to pay laborers and mechanics the difference between the
                rates of wages and fringe benefits required by this Agreement and the actual wage and
                fringe benefits paid.

       13.3.2   Terminate part or all of this Agreement or any subagreement and proceed to complete
                the Agreement or subagreement by separate agreement with another Contractor or
                otherwise, in which case the Contractor and its sureties shall be liable to the University
                for any excess costs incurred by the University.

13.4   The Contractor shall include terms identical or substantially similar to this section in any
       Agreement or subagreement pertaining to the project.

                                      Article 14 - Save Harmless

14.1   The Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the University, its agents and
       employees from any and all loss, damage, claims, and causes of action whatsoever, including all
       costs, expenses and attorneys’ fees arising out of Contractor’s performance of obligations under
       the terms and conditions of this agreement. Such responsibility shall not be construed as liability
       for damage caused by or resulting from the negligence of the University, its agents other than the
       Contractor, or its employees.

                                   Article 15 - Liquidated Damages

15.1   It is understood and agreed that, if the project is not completed within the time specified in the
       Agreement plus any extension of time allowed pursuant thereto, the actual damages sustained
       by the University because of any such delay will be uncertain and difficult to ascertain, and it is
       agreed that the reasonable foreseeable value of the use of said project by the University would

AGREEMENT BETWEEN CONTRACTOR AND OWNER                                                           00500 - 6
FOR CONSTRUCTION
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY             Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                       WSU Project No. 089-169976


       be the sum of $$500.00, Five Hundred Dollars Dollars per day. Therefore, the Contractor
       shall pay as liquidated damages to the University the sum of $$500.00, Five Hundred Dollars
       Dollars per day for each day’s delay in substantially completing said project beyond the time
       specified in this Agreement and any extensions of time allowed there under.

                                        Article 16- Interpretation

16.1   This Agreement shall be interpreted and construed according to the laws of the State of
       Michigan.

16.2   If one part of this Agreement is found to be void by legal or legislative action, the remainder of the
       contract remains in full effect.




AGREEMENT BETWEEN CONTRACTOR AND OWNER                                                            00500 - 7
FOR CONSTRUCTION
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY           Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                     WSU Project No. 089-169976




                             Article 17 - Drawings and Specifications

17.1   The Technical Specifications dated 12-17-2009, and the following List of Drawings represent the
       scope of work as defined in the Contract Documents from Article 4.

DRAWINGS

Drawing No.           Description




AGREEMENT BETWEEN CONTRACTOR AND OWNER                                                      00500 - 8
FOR CONSTRUCTION
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY           Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                     WSU Project No. 089-169976



IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties to these presents have hereunto set their hands as of the day and
year first written above.

Signed, sealed and delivered
in the presence of:                          CONTRACTOR’S NAME GOES HERE

                                             By__________________________________
                                               signature

                                             ____________________________________
                                             Please print name here

                                             ____________________________________
                                             Date signed

                                             ____________________________________
                                             Title

_____________________________
Witness                              THE BOARD OF GOVERNORS of
                                           WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY

                                             By_______________________________
                                               John L. Davis, Vice President for
                                               Finance and Facilities

                                             __________________________
                                             Date signed

Form Contract Approved by OGC 5/98




AGREEMENT BETWEEN CONTRACTOR AND OWNER                                                   00500 - 9
FOR CONSTRUCTION
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                          WSU Project No. 089-169976


                                            FORM OF GUARANTEE


PROJECT: Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178

OWNER: BOARD OF GOVERNORS, WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY

CONTRACTOR:

DATE:

Know all men by these presents that, in consideration of my (our) having been awarded the Contract or
Subcontract for complete furnishing and installation of:

Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178 (089-169976)


For: Board of Governors, Wayne State University

In conformity with drawings and specifications prepared by Architect or Engineer, Smith Group Inc, and
known as the buildings indicated above, I (we) do hereby agree that, should I (we) be notified that the said
work has proved faulty, etc., that I (we) will return to the buildings within three (3) working days of the receipt
of such notice, and will furnish the necessary labor and material to repair such work to the satisfaction of the
Owner and without cost to the Owner.

The Agreement shall remain in full force and effect FOR A ONE YEAR PERIOD (DATE TBD)

WITNESS:                                             signed:
                                                               Subcontractor

                                                     by:

                                                     address:

                                                     city/state/zip:

                                                     signed:
                                                               General Contractor
                                                     by:

(THIS FORM TO BE FILED IN DUPLICATE.)




FORM OF GUARANTEE                                                                                       00510 - 1
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY          Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                    WSU Project No. 089-169976




                           GENERAL CONDITIONS (Revised 10-2009)


A.   Although AIA Document A201 - Twelfth Edition (April 1970) - "General Conditions of the Contract for
     Construction" is not bound herein, it forms a part of these construction documents.

B.   A reference copy of AIA Document A201 - Twelfth Edition (April 1970) - "General Conditions of the
     Contract for Construction" is on file at the following location:


                             Wayne State University
                             Finance & Facilities Management
                             Purchasing Department
                             Academic / Administrative Services Building
                             5700 Cass Avenue
                             Detroit Michigan 48202




GENERAL CONDITIONS                                                                            00700 - 1
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY       Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                 WSU Project No. 089-169976




                       SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS

                                            OF

                         THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION




             Facilities Planning & Management - Design & Construction Services

                                  Wayne State University




SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS                                                   00800 - 1
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY          Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                    WSU Project No. 089-169976


                      WSU SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
                                     OF THE
                           CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION

NOTE:       The following items related to A.I.A. General Conditions, A.I.A. Document A-201 - Twelfth
            Edition (April 1970), by specific number being amended to.             These items, as
            amendments, shall have precedence over the article being amended.

ARTICLE 1 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

1.1         DEFINITIONS

1.1.5       The Agreement

            The Agreement executed by the Contractor and the Owner.

1.2         EXECUTION, CORRELATION, INTENT, AND INTERPRETATIONS

1.2.6       "General Conditions and "Supplementary General Conditions" apply with
            equal force to all Contractors, Subcontractors work, and extra work required under this
            Contract.

1.2.7       Precedence of Drawings and Specifications.
            The Agreement has precedence over WSU Supplementary General Conditions.

            WSU Supplementary General Conditions have precedence over A.I.A. A-201 General
            Conditions of the Contract.

            Specifications have precedence over drawings. Full-size drawings have precedence
            over scale drawings. Large-scale plans and details have precedence over small-scale
            plans and details. Figured dimensions have precedence over plans and elevations.

ARTICLE 2 - ARCHITECT

2.1         DEFINITION

2.1.1.1     The term Architect or Architect/Engineer as used in these specifications refers to
            Facilities Planning and Management - Design Services, and/or Consulting
            Architect/Engineer.

2.2         ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT

2.2.16      The Architect will assign Field Representatives to make periodic visits to the project for
            the purpose of assisting the Architect in carrying out his field responsibilities at the site.
            The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of any such Field Representative
            shall be as follows:

            a.      Explain Contract Documents:       Assist the Contractor via the Contractor's
                    Superintendent to understand the intent of the Contract Documents.

            b.      Observations: Conduct on-site observations and spot checks of the work in
                    progress as a basis for determining conformance of the work, material, and
                    equipment with the Contract Documents.




SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS                                                               00800 - 2
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY      Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                WSU Project No. 089-169976


           c.    Additional Information:     Obtain from the Architect, additional details or
                 information, if and when required, at the job site for proper execution of the work.

           d.    Modifications: Consider and evaluate suggestions or modifications that may be
                 submitted by the Contractor and report them with recommendations to the
                 Architect for final decision.

           e.    Construction Schedule and Completion: Be alert to the completion, and report
                 same to the Architect. When the construction work has been completed in
                 accordance with the Contract Documents, advise the Architect that the work is
                 ready for general inspection and acceptance.

           f.    Job Conferences: Attend and report to the Architect on all required conferences
                 held at the job site.

           g.    Observe Tests: See that tests which are required by the Contract Documents
                 are actually conducted; observe, record and report to the Architect all details
                 relative to the test procedures; and advise the architect's office in advance of the
                 schedules of tests.

           h.    Inspection by Others: If inspectors, representing local, state or federal agencies
                 having jurisdiction over the project, visit the job site, accompany such inspectors
                 during their trips through the project, record the outcome of these inspections,
                 and report same to the Architect's office.

           i.    Shop Drawings: Do not permit the installation of any materials and equipment
                 for which shop drawings are required unless such drawings have been duly
                 approved and issued by the Architect.

           j.    Contractor's Requisitions for Payment: Review and make recommendations to
                 the Architect for disposition.

           k.    List of Items for Correction: After substantial completion, make a list of items for
                 correction before final inspection and check each item as it is corrected.

           l.    Owner's Occupancy of the Building: If the Owner occupies (to any degree) the
                 building prior to actual completion of the work by the Contractor, be especially
                 alert to possibilities of claims for damage to completed work prior to the
                 acceptance of the building.

           m.    Owner Existing Operation: In the case of additions to or Demolitions of an
                 existing facility, which must be maintained as an operational unit, be alert to
                 conditions on the job site which may have an effect on the Owner's existing
                 operation.

           n.    Limitations of Authority: Do not become involved in any of the following areas of
                 responsibility unless specific exceptions are established by written instructions
                 issued by the Architect.

                 aa.     Do not authorize deviations from the Contract Documents.

                 bb.     Avoid conducting any test personally.

                 cc.     Do not enter into the area of responsibility of the Contractor's field
                         superintendent.


SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS                                                           00800 - 3
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY         Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                   WSU Project No. 089-169976


                    dd.     Do not expedite job for Contractor unless so instructed by the Architect.

                    ee.     Do not advise on or issue directions relative to any aspect of the building
                            technique or sequence unless a specific technique or sequence is called
                            for in the Specifications or by written instructions from the Architect.

                    ff.     Do not approve shop drawings or samples.

                    gg.     Do not authorize or advise the Owner to occupy the Project, in whole or
                            in part, prior to the final acceptance of the building.

                    hh.     Do not issue a Certificate for Payment.

ARTICLE 3 - OWNER

3.5         OWNER'S RIGHT TO DO WORK

3.5.1       The Owner may exercise his right, which is hereby acknowledged by the Contractor, to
            let independent of the Contract for the work herein specified, any other work on the
            premises even if of like character and trades, and the Owner shall not be liable for any
            damage, loss or expense incurred by the Contractor through the fault of any other
            Contractor so employed by the Owner. The Contractor acknowledges the necessity of
            work by others, to be performed at approximately the same time as the work hereunder,
            and agrees to perform his work in full cooperation with the work of such other trades
            and/or Contractors, partially or entirely completed, by such other trades and/or
            Contractors, or by the Owner, when, in the opinion of the Architect, such access or use is
            necessary for the performance and completion of any portion or all of the work of others
            or of any work on the site.

3.6         OWNER'S ACCESS AND PARTIAL OCCUPANCY

3.6.1       The Owner shall have access to the work at all times, and at his election, may from time
            to time (prior to the stipulated contract completion date) occupy any of the units or parts
            of the project as the work in connection therewith is complete to such a degree as will, in
            the opinion of the Owner, permit their temporary or permanent use. The Owner will, prior
            to any such partial occupancy, give notice to the Contractor thereof and such occupancy
            shall be upon the following terms:

            a.      Such occupancy shall not constitute an acceptance of work not performed in
                    accordance with the Contract nor shall such occupancy relieve the Contractor of
                    liability to perform any work by the Contract by not complete at the time of
                    occupancy.

            b.      Except as otherwise provided by an agreement at the time of such partial
                    occupancy, the Contractor shall be relieved of all maintenance costs on units or
                    parts so occupied.

            c.      The Contractor shall not be responsible for wear and tear or damage resulting
                    from partial occupancy.

            d.      The Owner shall assume risk of loss with respect to any unit or part so occupied.

            e.      The Contractor shall, if required by the Owner, furnish heat, light, water, or other
                    such services to the units or parts occupied and the Owner shall make proper
                    remuneration therefore to the Contractor.


SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS                                                              00800 - 4
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY        Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                  WSU Project No. 089-169976


3.6.2      The Contractor agrees that the Owner shall have the right, after seven (7) days' written
           notice to the Contractor, to place and install as much equipment and machinery during
           the progress of the work as is possible before the completion of the various parts of the
           work; and further agrees that such placing and installation of equipment shall not in any
           way evidence the completion of the work or any portion thereof, nor signify the Owner's
           acceptance of the work or any portion thereof. Should the Owner place or install such
           equipment and machinery with his own forces he shall be responsible for any damage to
           work of the Contractor caused by the Owner's work or workmen. Should the Owner have
           such placement or installation performed by another Contractor, then the Owner shall
           require said Contractor to be responsible for all such damage caused by his work, his
           workers, or his subcontractors.

ARTICLE 4 - CONTRACTOR

4.4        LABOR AND MATERIALS

4.4.3      All materials shall be so delivered, stored and handled to prevent the inclusion of foreign
           materials and the damage of materials by water or breakage. Packaged materials shall
           be delivered and stored in original packages until ready for use. Packages or materials
           showing evidence of water or other damage shall be rejected. All materials shall be of
           the respective qualities specified herein.

4.4.4      The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper care and protection of all his materials,
           equipment, etc., delivered at the site. Building materials, equipment, etc., may be stored
           on the premises subject to the approval of the Architect.

4.4.5      To insure timely availability of critical materials in case of national emergency, the
           Contractor may order his subcontractors to proceed with fabriciation of the same earlier
           than required by normal sequence of construction. In the event storage facilities are not
           available on the site or at the source of fabrication, the Owner will endeavor to provide
           such storage space as may be available to care for same. Where this is necessary, the
           Contractor shall be paid for all stored material on the Owner's property or on the
           properties approved by the Owner upon approval of certified invoices. It shall be the
           Contractor's obligation to pay for all handling costs and damage to this material. The
           Contractor shall protect this property against damage.

4.6        TAXES

4.6.1      The Bidder shall include in his proposal and make payment of all Federal, State, County
           and Municipal taxes including Michigan State Sales and Use Taxes, now in force or
           which may be enacted during the progress and completion of the work covered.

4.7        PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES

4.7.3      The Contractor shall pay highway or DPW fees for damages to sidewalks, streets, or
           other public property or to any public utilities.

4.7.4      Permits and licenses of a temporary nature necessary for the execution of the work shall
           be secured and paid for by the Contractor.




SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS                                                             00800 - 5
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY         Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                   WSU Project No. 089-169976


4.7.5      Except for the General Building Permit (which is not required), the Contractor shall
           secure and pay for all other required permits, including the following:

                   Electrical       -        State of Michigan
                   Plumbing         -        State of Michigan
                   Mechanical       -        State of Michigan
                   Elevator         -        City of Detroit

4.7.6      The Contractor shall secure certificates of inspection and of occupancy that may be
           required by authorities having jurisdiction over the work. These certificates shall be
           delivered to the Architect upon completion of the work.

4.9        SUPERINTENDENT

4.9.2      The Contractor shall give sufficient supervision to the work, using his best skill and
           attention. He shall carefully study and compare all drawings, specifications, and other
           instructions, and shall at once report to the Architect any error, inconsistency, or
           omission which he may discover, but he shall not be held responsible for their existence
           or discovery.

4.9.3      The Contractor's superintendent shall periodically inspect the entire project to make
           certain that all of the stipulations of all of the articles of the General Conditions are being
           observed.

4.12       DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS AT THE SITE

4.12.1.1   Refer to Paragraph 4.12.1, of A.I.A. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.
           Modify the last sentence of this paragraph to read:

                   "The Drawings, marked to record all changes made
                   during construction, shall be incorporated in the
                   Contractor's 'Informational Package'."

4.12.2     As a basic and interim step for the fulfillment of the "Informational Package", accurate
           records of all non-structural underground and concealed work shall be kept, including,
           but not limited to, all piping, conduit, equipment, and drainage and tunnel work. In
           addition, such records shall be available for review during various steps of the project.

4.13       SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES

4.13.9     Immediately before and as a condition of substantial completion, the Contractor shall
           provide the Owner an "Informational Package" and instructional sessions on the
           operation, maintenance, and service of the facility. The "Informational Package" shall
           include:

           1.      One (1) set of transparency (sepia) of the approved shop drawings and
                   descriptive material submitted during construction. Any shop documents
                   unobtainable in sepia shall be supplied in three (3) sets.

           2.      One (1) set of transparency (sepia) of constructional shop drawings with
                   all installation revisions incorporated to reflect the as-built condition.
                   Examples of constructional shop drawings are dimensioned conduit,
                   piping and ductwork layout drawings.




SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS                                                               00800 - 6
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY            Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                      WSU Project No. 089-169976


            3.       Three (3) sets of instructional manuals on the installation, operation,
                     maintenance and service of equipment and systems, including parts
                     lists.

            Examples of Specific Information Required:

            1.       Electrical

                     a.       Conduit layout of light, power, and special systems, indicating
                              dimensionally the locations and size of runs; circuit grouping and
                              conductor size and number in conduit runs.
                     b.       System description and elementary diagrams, connection and
                              interconnection diagrams, and device internal diagrams.

            2.       Mechanical

                     a.       Piping and ductwork layout indicating dimensionally the location and size
                              of the runs.

                     b.       Description and diagrams of control systems.

            Following the submittal of the "Informational Package", the Contractor shall schedule and
            provide, at the Owner's convenience, instructional sessions for Owner's personnel to
            acquaint them with the operation, maintenance, and service of the system.

            3.       Elevators

                     a.       Elementary diagrams and description of sequence of operation of the
                              system control components, connection and interconnection diagrams,
                              and device internal diagrams.

ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS

5.2         AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE
            WORK

5.2.3       Delete Article 5.2.3 in its entirety.

5.2.4       Delete Article 5.2.4 in its entirety.

ARTICLE 7 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS (Revised 4-2007)

7.5         PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND

7.5.1       The Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment bond
            in an amount equal to 100% of the contract award amount, and include such cost in the
            Proposal, complying with the laws of the State of Michigan

            Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond shall be from a surety
            company acceptable to the Owner and made out as follows:

            A.       A bond for 100% of the contract award amount to the Board of Governors of
                     Wayne State University, and guaranteeing the payment of all subcontractors and
                     all indebtedness incurred for labor, materials, or any cause whatsoever on
                     account of the Contractor in accordance with the laws of the State of Michigan


SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS                                                             00800 - 7
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY            Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                      WSU Project No. 089-169976


                      relating to such bonds.

             B.       A bond for 100% of the contract award amount to the Board of Governors of
                      Wayne State University to guarantee and insure the completion of work
                      according to the Contract.

7.7          ROYALTIES AND PATENTS

7.7.1        The Contractor hereby agrees to indemnify, protect and save harmless the Architect and
             the Owner from and against any and all liability, loss or damage, and to reimburse the
             Owner and the Architect for any expenses, including legal fees and disbursements to
             which the Owner or the Architect may be put because of claims of litigation on account of
             infringement or alleged infringement of any letters patent or patent rights by reason of the
             work or materials, equipment, or other items used by the Contractor in its performance.

7.9          INTEREST

7.9.1        Delete Article 7.9 in its entirety.

ARTICLE 8 - TIME

8.1          DEFINITIONS

8.1.3        The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work is the Date certified by the Architect
             when construction of the entire work is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the
             Contract Documents, so the Owner may occupy the Work for the use for which it is
             intended. It is the beginning date for the guarantees on all the Project Work.

8.3.5        LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

             It is understood that if said Contract is not completed within the time specified in the
             Contract plus any extension of time thereto, the Contractor shall pay Liquidated
             Damages to the Owner as set forth in Article 11 of the Agreement between Contractor
             and Owner for Construction.

ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENT AND COMPLETION

9.3          PROGRESS PAYMENTS

9.3.1        On or before the 20th day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect on
             the Owner's Standard Form, a written application for payment showing the proportionate
             value of the work installed to date from which shall be deducted, a reserve of 10% and all
             previous payments, and the balance of the amount as approved by the Architect shall be
             due and payable to the Contractor on or about the 15th day of the succeeding month.

9.3.2.2      No payments will be made because of materials or equipment stored off the site, except
             as provided for in Subparagraph 4.4.5 of the Supplementary General Conditions or other
             special cases the Owner may approve.
9.6          FAILURE OF PAYMENT

9.6.1        Delete Article 9.6 in its entirety.

ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE

11.1         CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS                                                               00800 - 8
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                    Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                              WSU Project No. 089-169976



11.1.2             The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than any
                   limits of liability specified herein, or required by law, whichever is greater, and shall
                   include contractual liability insurance as applicable to the Contractor's obligations under
                   Paragraph 4.18.

                   During the life of the Contract, the Contractor shall maintain the following types of
                   insurance:

         A.        General Requirements
         Type of Insurance                     Minimum Requirement

         1.Comprehensive General               Bodily Injury                 $ 500,000 each person
                 Liability                                                   $1,000,000 aggregate

                                               Property Damage               $ 500,000 each occurrence
                                                                             $1,000,000 aggregate
                                                                                      or
                                                                             $2,000,000 combined single limit (CSL)

         2.Fire Legal Liability                                              $ 100,000

         3.Comprehensive Automobile            Bodily Injury                 $ 500,000 each person
                 Liability (including                                        $1,000,000 each accident
                 Hired and non-owned           Property Damage               $ 500,000 each accident
                 vehicles)
                                                                                      or
                                                                             $2,000,000 combined single limit (CSL)
         4.Workers'Compensation                Statutory - Michigan
                 (Employer's Liability)        $100,000

         5.Property - All Risk                 In an amount sufficient to cover the total value of the contractor's
                                               property in the care, custody or control of WSU.



         B.        Maximum Acceptable Deductibles

           Type of Insurance                                       Maximum Deductible

                   Comprehensive General Liability                 $5,000
                   Fire Legal Liability                            $5,000
                   Comprehensive Automobile Liability               -0-
                   Workers' Compensation                            -0-
                   Property - All Risk                             $ 500

11.1.3             The Board of Governors, Wayne State University, shall be named as an additional
                   insured but only with respect to accidents arising out of said contract.

11.1.2.1           The Contractor shall either 1) require each of his Subcontractors to procure and to
                   maintain during the life of his subcontract, Subcontractors' Comprehensive General
                   Liability, Automobile Liability and Property Damage Liability Insurance of the type and in
                   the same amounts as specified in the Subparagraph, or 2) insure the activity of his
                   subcontractors in his own policy.
11.2               OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE

                   Delete Article 11.2 in its entirety.

11.3               PROPERTY INSURANCE


SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS                                                                                      00800 - 9
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY          Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                    WSU Project No. 089-169976



            Delete Article 11.3 in its entirety and replace with the following:

11.3.1      The Contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the entire work at
            the site to the full insurable value thereof. This insurance shall include the interests of
            the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors, and sub-subcontractors in the work and shall
            insure against the perils of Fire, Extended Coverage, Vandalism, and Malicious Mischief.

11.3.2      The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other for damages caused by
            fires or other perils to the extent covered by insurance provided under Subparagraph
            11.3.1. The Contractor shall require similar waivers by Subcontractors and sub-
            subcontractors in accordance with Clause 5.3.1.5.

ARTICLE 12 - CHANGES IN THE WORK

12.1        CHANGE ORDERS

12.1.8      Percentage markups in pricing under Subparagraphs 12.1.3.1, 12.1.3.3, and 1.2.4 shall
            be as limited in the Contract Documents. Unit price of Subparagraph 12.1.3.2 shall
            represent total unit cost to the Owner and shall include the Contractor's markup for
            overhead and profit.

ARTICLE 14 - TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT

14.1        TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR

14.1.1      If the work is stopped for a period of thirty days under any order of any court or other
            public authority having jurisdiction, or as a result of any act of government, such as a
            declaration of a national emergency making materials unavailable, through no act or fault
            of the contract or a subcontractor or their agents or employees or other persons
            performing any of the Work under a contract with the contractor, then the contractor may,
            upon seven days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the contract
            and recover from the Owner payment for all Work executed and for any proven loss
            sustained upon any materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment, and machinery,
            including reasonable profit and damages.

ARTICLE 15 - ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS

15.1        SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

15.1.1      Whenever a material, article, or piece of equipment is identified on the Drawings or in the
            Specifications by reference to manufacturers' or vendors' names, trade names, catalog
            numbers, or the like, it is so identified for the purpose of establishing a standard, and any
            material, article, or piece of equipment of other manufacturers or vendors, which will
            perform adequately the duties imposed by the general design will be considered equally
            acceptable provided the material, article, or piece of equipment so proposed is, in the
            opinion of the Architect, of equal substance, appearance, and function. It shall not be
            purchased or installed by the Contractor without the Architect's written approval.


15.2        NON-DISCRIMINATION PROVISION AND WAGE AND HOUR ACT

15.2.1      During the performance of this contract, the Contractor agrees as follows:

15.2.1.1    The Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS                                                             00800 - 10
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY        Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                  WSU Project No. 089-169976


           because of sex, race, creed, color, age, or national origin. The Contractor will take
           affirmative action to insure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated
           during employment without regard to their sex, race, age, creed, color, or national origin.

15.2.1.2   Such action shall include but not be limited to, the following: employment; upgrading;
           demotion; or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or terminations; rates
           of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including
           apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to
           employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided setting forth the
           provisions of this non-discrimination clause.

15.2.1.3   The Contractor will, in all solicitations, or advertisements for employees, placed by or on
           behalf of the contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for
           employment without regard to sex, race, creed, color, age or national origin.

15.2.1.4   The Contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which he
           has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice
           advising the labor union or worker's representative of the Contractor's commitments
           under Section 202 of Executive Order No. 11246 of October 27, 1965, and shall post
           copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for
           employment.

15.2.1.5   The Contractor will comply with all provisions of the Executive Order No. 11246 of
           October 27, 1965, and of the rules, regulations and relevant orders of the Secretary of
           Labor or other government agency or authority having jurisdiction.

15.2.1.6   The Contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order No.
           11246 of October 27, 1965, and by the rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of
           Labor or other government agency or authority having jurisdiction, and will permit access
           to his books, records, and accounts by the administrative agency and the Secretary of
           Labor for the purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules,
           regulations and orders.

15.2.1.7   In the event of the Contractor's noncompliance with the non-discrimination clauses of this
           contract, or with any of the said rules, regulations, or orders, this Contract may be
           canceled, terminated or suspended in whole or in part, and the Contractor may be
           declared ineligible for further University contracts or federally-assisted contracts in
           accordance with procedure authorized in Executive Order No. 11246 of October 27,
           1965, or by rule, regulation, or order of the Secretary of Labor or other government
           agency or authority having jurisdiction.

15.2.1.8   The Contractor will include in the provisions of Subparagraph 15.2.1.1 through 15.2.1.8 in
           every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules, regulations or orders of
           the President's Committee on Equal Employment Opportunity issued pursuant to Section
           204 of Executive Order No. 11246 of September 14, 1965, so that provisions will be
           binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The Contractor will take such action with
           respect to any subcontract or purchase order as the administering agency may direct as
           a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for noncompliance: Provided,
           however, that in the event the Contractor becomes involved as a result of such direction
           by the administering agency, the Contractor may request the United States to enter into
           such litigation to protect the interest of the United States.

15.3       COMPLIANCE WITH COPELAND ANTI-KICKBACK ACT AND REGULATIONS

15.3.1     The Contractor shall comply with the Copeland Anti-Kickback Act and Regulations of the


SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS                                                           00800 - 11
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY        Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                  WSU Project No. 089-169976


           Secretary of Labor (29CFR, Part 3) which are herein incorporated by reference.

15.4       PREVAILING WAGES

15.4.1     Contractors and subcontractors shall pay all mechanics and laborers, including
           apprentices and trainees, no less than the wage and fringe benefit rates prevailing in the
           locality in which the work is performed. Wage and fringe benefit rates are determined by
           the Federal Government Department of Labor.

15.4.2     Classifications not provided in the schedule shall be determined prior to the award of the
           contract and shall be no less than the wage and fringe benefit rates determined by the
           Federal Department of Labor.

15.4.3     Contractors and subcontractors shall adhere to the ratios of apprentices to journey
           workers as determined by the Federal Department of Labor.

15.4.4     Contractors and subcontractors shall keep a copy of the prescribed wage and benefit
           rates posted at the construction site in a conspicuous place.

15.4.5     Contractors and subcontractors shall keep an accurate record of the name, occupation,
           and the actual benefits paid to each mechanic or laborer for the contract. This record
           shall be made available for reasonable inspection by the Federal Department of Labor
           and the Owner.




SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS                                                          00800 - 12
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY            Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                      WSU Project No. 089-169976


DRAWINGS


The Technical Specifications dated 12-17-2009, and the following List of Drawings represent the scope of
work as defined in the Contract Documents from Article 4.

DRAWINGS

Drawing No.            Description




DRAWINGS                                                                               00850 - 1
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY            Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                      WSU Project No. 089-169976



                                     GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


GENERAL

A.   CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY

     It is not the responsibility of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative to notify the Contractor
     or subcontractors when to commence, to cease, or to resume work; nor in any way to superintend so
     as to relieve the Contractor of responsibility or of any consequences of neglect or carelessness by him
     or his subordinates. All material and labor shall be furnished at times best suited for all Contractors
     and subcontractors concerned, so that the combined work of all shall be properly and fully completed
     on the date fixed by the Contract.

     The Contractor shall be responsible for all items contained in both the specifications and on the
     drawings for all trades. He shall be responsible for the proper division of labor according to current
     labor union agreements regardless of the division of responsibility implied in the contract documents.

B.   CODES AND STANDARDS

     Reference to standard specifications for workmanship, apparatus, equipment and materials shall
     conform to the requirements of latest specifications of the organization referenced, i.e., American
     Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), American National
     Standards Institute, Inc. (NSI), and others so listed in the Technical Specifications.

C.   PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES

     See Supplementary General Conditions.

D.   MEASUREMENTS

     Before proceeding with each Work Item, Contractor shall locate, mark and measure any quantity or
     each item and report quantities to Engineer. If measured quantities exceed Engineer’s estimate,
     Contractor shall obtain written authorization to proceed from Owner before executing Work required
     for that Work Item.

     Measurement of quantities for individual Work Items will be performed by Contractor and reviewed by
     Engineer. Coordinate measurements with inspection as required in Section “Coordination.”

     Cost of Work included in Work Item for quantities as indicated in Contract Documents shall be
     included in Base Bid.

     1.      Additions to or deductions from lump sum price for quantities of each Work Item added to or
             deducted from Work respectively shall be at unit prices indicated in Bid Form and shall
             constitute payment or deductions in full for all material, equipment, labor, supervision and
             incidentals necessary to complete Work.

E.   CONTRACTOR'S MEASUREMENTS

     Before ordering material, preparing Shop Drawings, or doing any work, each Contractor shall verify, at
     the building, all dimensions which may affect his work. He assumes full responsibility for the accuracy
     of his figures. No allowance for additional compensation will be considered for minor discrepancies
     between dimensions on the drawings and actual field dimensions.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS                                                                                01000 - 1
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY            Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                      WSU Project No. 089-169976



F.   CONTINUITY OF SERVICE

     Continuity of all existing services in the building shall be maintained throughout the construction
     period. Where it is necessary to tie into the existing electrical service, water or waste systems, it shall
     be done as directed by the Architect/Engineer. This Contract shall also provide temporary lines or
     bypasses that may be required to maintain continuous service in the building. All utility shutdowns
     must be approved by the Owners Representative / Project Manager, not less than 48 hours prior to the
     event, so that proper notification can be posted.

G.   SUBMITTALS

     All submittals (except Shop Drawings) and samples required by the Specifications shall be submitted
     in triplicate unless otherwise specified for a particular item under an individual Specification Section.

     Each sample shall be clearly identified on a tag attached, showing the name of the Project Consultant,
     the project number and title, the names of the Contractor, manufacturer (and supplier if same is not the
     manufacturer), the brand name or number identification, pattern, color, or finish designation and the
     location in the work.


     Each submittal shall be covered by a transmittal letter, properly identified with the project title and
     number and a brief description of the item being submitted.

     Contractor shall be responsible for all costs of packing, shipping and incidental expenses connected
     with delivery of the samples to the Project Consultant or other designated address.

     If the initial sample is not approved, prepare and submit additional sets until approval is obtained.

     Materials supplied or installed which do not conform to the appearance, quality, profile, texture or other
     determinant of the approval samples will be rejected, and shall be replaced with satisfactory materials
     at the Contractor's expense.

H.   GENERAL/STANDARD ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT AND INFRASTRUCTURE
     REQUIREMENTS (Revised 11-2008)

         1. Compliance with WSU Standards for Communications Infrastructure

             A. All applicable work, products, materials and methods shall comply with the latest
                version of the “WSU Standards for Communications Infrastructure” except as where
                noted.

             B. This document is available at the following website/URL:
                http://networks.wayne.edu/WSU-Communications-Standards.pdf

         2. Automation System Program Code

             A. All automation system uncompiled and compiled program codes, source codes,
                custom modules, graphical user interface screen shots and any other automation
                system programming data and material (Program Code) shall be provided to the
                UNIVERSITY in hard copy and on CD Rom in an unencrypted format acceptable to
                the UNIVERSITY.




GENERAL REQUIREMENTS                                                                                  01000 - 2
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY             Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                       WSU Project No. 089-169976


              B. Copyright for the Program Code shall be assigned to the UNIVERSITY for purposes
                 of system maintenance.

PROTECTION OF OCCUPANCY (Revised 3-2006)

A.    FIRE PRECAUTIONS

      Take necessary actions to eliminate possible fire hazards and to prevent damage to construction work,
      building materials, equipment, temporary field offices, storage sheds, and other property.
      During the construction, provide the type and quantity of fire extinguishers and fire hose to meet safety
      and fire prevention practices by National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Codes and Standards
      (available at http://www.nfpa.org/ )

      In the event that construction includes "hot work", the contractor shall provide the Owner's
      Representative with a copy of their hot work policy, procedures, or permit program. No hot work
      activity (temporary maintenance, renovation, or construction by operation of a gas or electrically
      powered equipment which produces flames, sparks or heat that is sufficient to start a fire or ignite
      combustible materials) shall be performed until such documents are provided. During such
      operations, all highly combustible or flammable materials shall be removed from the immediate
      working area, and if removal is impossible, same shall be protected with flame retardant shield.

      Not more than one-half day's supply of flammable liquids such as gasoline, spray paint and paint
      solvent shall be brought into the building at any one time. Flammable liquids having a flash point of
      100 degrees F. or below which must be brought into the building shall be confined in an Underwriters
      Laboratories (UL) labeled safety cans. The bulk supply of flammables shall be stored at least 75 feet
      from the building and other combustible materials. Spigots on drums containing flammable liquids are
      prohibited on the project site. Drums shall be equipped with approved vented pumps, and be
      grounded and bonded.


      Only a reasonable working supply of combustible building materials shall be located inside the
      building.

      All oil-soaked rags, papers, and other similar combustible materials shall be removed from the building
      at the close of each day's work, or more often if necessary, and placed in metal containers, with self-
      closing lids.

      Materials and equipment stored in cardboard cartons, wood crates or other combustible containers
      shall be stored in an orderly manner and accessibly located, fire-fighting equipment of approved types
      shall be placed in the immediate vicinity of any materials or equipment stored in this type of crate or
      carton.

      No gasoline, benzene, or like flammable materials shall be poured into sewers, manholes, or traps.

      All rubbish shall be removed from the site and legally disposed of. Burning of rubbish, waste materials
      or trash on the site shall not be permitted.

      The contractor shall be responsible for the conduct of employees relative to smoking and all smoking
      shall be in the area designated by the Architect/Engineer.

B.    GENERAL SAFETY AND BUILDING PRECAUTIONS

      Provide and maintain in good repair barricades, railings, etc., as required by law for the protection of
      the Public. All exposed material shall be smoothly dressed.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS                                                                                 01000 - 3
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY             Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                       WSU Project No. 089-169976



     At dangerous points throughout the work environment provide and maintain colored lights or flags in
     addition to above guardrails.

     Isolate Owner's occupied areas from areas where demolition and alteration work will be done, with
     temporary, dustproof, weatherproof, and fireproof enclosures as conditions may require and as
     directed by the Architect/Engineer.

     Cover and protect furniture, equipment and fixtures to remain from soiling, dust, dirt, or damage when
     demolition work is performed in rooms or areas from which such items have not been removed.

     Protect openings made in the existing roofs, floors, and other construction with weatherproof
     coverings, barricades, and temporary fire rated partitions to prevent accidents.

     Repair any damage done to existing work caused by the construction and removal of temporary
     partitions, coverings, and barricades.

     The Contractor will be held responsible for all breakage or other damage to glass up to the time the
     work is completed.

     Provide protection for existing buildings, interior and exterior, finishes, walls, drives, landscaping, lawns
     (see below), etc. All damages shall be restored to match existing conditions to the satisfaction of the
     Architect/Engineer.

     The Contractor and Owner will define the anticipated area of lawn damage at the project Pre-
     Construction Meeting. Whether the lawn is sparse or fully developed, any lawn damaged due to the
     Contractor's work will be replaced with sod by the University. The University's unit cost of $10.00 per
     square yard and landscaping at a rate of 1.5 times the cost of the sod repairs, the full cost of which will
     be assessed against the Contractor. At the completion of the project, a deductive Change Order
     reflecting this cost will be issued.
     The Contractor is to include an allowance in his bid for this corrective work.

C.   INTERFERENCE WITH OWNER'S OPERATIONS

     The Owner will be utilizing the Building Facilities to carry on his normal business operation during
     construction. The Contractor shall schedule performance of the work necessary to complete the
     project in such a way as to interfere as little as possible with the operation during construction. The
     Contractor shall schedule performance of the work necessary to complete the project in such a way as
     to interfere as little as possible with the operation of the Owner.

     Work which will interfere with the Owner's occupancy, including interruptions to the Owner's
     mechanical and electrical services, and essentially noisy operations (such as jackhammering) shall be
     scheduled in advance. The schedule of alterations shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer and
     the work shall be done in accordance with the approved schedule.

     It is understood that the work is to be carried through to completion with the utmost speed consistent
     with good workmanship and to meet the construction schedule.

     The Contractor shall begin work under the Contract without delay upon receipt of the fully-executed
     contract and shall substantially complete the project ready for unobstructed occupancy and use of the
     Owner for the purposes intended within the completion time stated in the contract.




GENERAL REQUIREMENTS                                                                                   01000 - 4
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                          WSU Project No. 089-169976


        The Contractor shall, immediately upon award of contract, schedule his work and expedite deliveries
        of materials and performance of subcontractors to maintain the necessary pace to meet the
        construction schedule.

CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION AND COORDINATION

A.      FIELD SUPERINTENDENT

        Contractor shall assign a full time project manager/superintendent for the duration of the project. This
        person shall be experienced and qualified in all phases of the work and shall be present at the site
        during Contractor’s working hours. The project manager shall have Contractor’s full authority to
        represent Contractor in all routine operations including payment, changes to the work, and scheduling.
        Contractor shall not re-assign this individual without prior written permission of the Owner.

B.      MEETINGS

        When directed by the Architect/Engineer, meetings shall be held for the purpose of coordinating and
        expediting the work. The invited contractors or subcontractors will be required to have qualified
        representatives at these meetings, empowered to act in their behalf.

C.      COORDINATION

        The Contractor shall also provide a staff adequate to coordinate and expedite the work properly and
        shall at all times maintain competent supervision of its own work and that of its subcontractors to
        insure compliance with contract requirements.

        The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques,
        sequences, and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the work under the Contractor.

D.      CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

        The Construction Schedule shall be prepared after the award of contract. Soon after, a pre-
        construction meeting is held with the Owner and the Architect/Engineer to determine the areas to
        which the Contractor will be allowed access at any one time.

The Contractor is alerted to the fact that areas in which he will be working will be occupied by students and
employees of the University as well as the general public. The Contractor's access, to and from the project
site, will be confined to limited areas so as not to unduly disrupt the normal activities of the University.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A.      GENERAL

        The following temporary facilities descriptions represent standard conditions. Verify accuracy with
        Architect/Engineer at time of bids.

B.      CONTRACTOR’S OFFICE

        Provide field offices as required.       Locate temporary field offices on site where directed by
        Architect/Engineer.

        Appearance and location of field offices shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer.

        Provide for all other administrative facilities and storage off the Owner's property.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS                                                                                  01000 - 5
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY            Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                      WSU Project No. 089-169976



C.   STORAGE OF MATERIALS

     All materials shall be stored in areas designated by the Architect/Engineer. All stored materials shall be
     arranged for the minimum disruption to occupants and to allow full access to and throughout the
     building. Materials stored outdoors shall be neat and orderly and covered to prevent damage or
     vandalism.

D.   PARKING

     1.      GENERAL

             University parking regulations will be strictly enforced.

             Maintain Owner's parking areas free of dirt and debris resulting from operations under the
             contract.

     2.      STANDING AND UNLOADING/LOADING VEHICLES

             All Contractors are to call Wayne State University Public Safety at 577-2222, and give at least
             24 hours advance notice that they have vehicles that must be at the job site.

             Vehicles will be permitted at the project site only as long as the vehicles are needed for
             loading/unloading, and must be immediately moved upon completion.

             All unauthorized and/or unattended standing vehicles will be subject to ticketing and removal
             by University Police. Towed vehicles may be reclaimed by calling 577-2222, and paying any
             assessed charges.

     3.      COMPLIMENTARY PARKING

             There is no complimentary parking for Contractor’s employee vehicles.

     4.      WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY PUBLIC/STUDENT PARKING AREAS

             Public Parking, on a first-come first-served basis is available. Contact the office of the
             One Card System, at 313.577.9513 for information on availability of parking on a
             contractual basis.

E.   TOILET FACILITIES

     The Owner's designated existing toilet facilities may be used by workers on the project. Contractor
     shall maintain such facilities in a neat and sanitary condition.

F.   TELEPHONE USE

     If required, the Contractor shall provide and pay for a temporary telephone within the building for his
     use and that of his subcontractors.

     No use of the Owner's telephone (except pay telephones) will be permitted.

G.   ACCESS DEVICES




GENERAL REQUIREMENTS                                                                                 01000 - 6
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY            Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                      WSU Project No. 089-169976


     The Contractor shall furnish and maintain temporary hoists, ladders, railings, scaffolds, runways, and
     the like as required for safe, normal access to the permanent construction until the permanent facilities
     are complete. Each trade shall furnish such additional means of access as may be required for the
     progress and completion of the work. Such temporary access devices shall meet all applicable local,
     state, and federal codes and regulations.

H.   HEAT AND VENTILATION

     Provide cold weather protection and temporary heat and ventilation as required during construction to
     protect the work from freezing and frost damage.

     Provide adequate ventilation as required to maintain reasonable interior building air conditions and
     temperatures, to prevent accumulation of excess moisture, and to remove construction fumes.

     Tarpaulins and other materials used for temporary enclosures. Coverings and protection shall be
     flameproofed.

I.   WATER SERVICE

     Sources of water are available at the site. The Owner will pay for reasonable amounts of water used
     for construction purposes.

     The Contractor shall provide, at the earliest possible date, temporary connections to the water supply
     sources and maintain adequate distribution for all construction requirements. The Contractor shall
     protect sources against damage.

     Methods of conveying this water shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer and shall not interfere
     with the Owner's operations.

J.   ELECTRICAL SERVICES

     All charges for reasonable amounts of electrical power energy used for temporary lighting and power
     required for this work will be paid by the Owner.

     The Contractor shall provide and maintain any temporary electrical lighting and power required for this
     work. At the completion of the work, all such temporary electrical facilities shall be removed and
     disposed of by the Contractor.

     Temporary lighting and power shall comply with the regulations and requirements of the National
     Electrical Code

                                      INSPECTIONS AND TESTS

     The Architect/Engineer shall at all times have access to the work wherever it is in preparation or in
     progress and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and for observation.

     No failure of the Architect/Engineer, during the progress of the work, to discover or reject materials or
     work not in accordance with the Contract Specifications and Drawings shall be deemed an
     acceptance thereof nor a waiver of defects therein. Likewise, no acceptance or waiver shall be inferred
     or implied due to payments made to contractor or by partial or entire occupancy of the work, or
     installation of materials that are not strictly in accordance with the Contract Specifications and
     Drawings.




GENERAL REQUIREMENTS                                                                                01000 - 7
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY            Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                      WSU Project No. 089-169976


     Where tests are specifically called for in the Specifications, the Owner shall pay all costs of such tests
     and engineering services unless otherwise stated in the contract.

     Where tests are not specifically called for in the Specifications, but are required by the
     Architect/Engineer or Consultant, the Owner shall pay all costs of such tests and engineering services
     unless the tests reveal that the workmanship or materials used by the Contractor are not in conformity
     with the Drawings, Specifications, and/or approved shop drawings. In such event, the Contractor shall
     pay for the tests, shall remove all work and materials so failing to conform and replace with work and
     materials that are in full conformity.

CLEAN-UP

     The Contractor shall at all times keep the Owner's premises and the adjoining premises, driveways
     and streets clean of rubbish caused by the Contractor's operations and at the completion of the work
     shall remove all the rubbish, all of his tools, equipment, temporary work and surplus materials, from
     and about the premises, and shall leave the work clean and ready for use. If the contractor does not
     attend to such cleaning immediately upon request, the Architect/Engineer may cause such cleaning to
     be done by others and charge the cost of same to the Contractor.

     The Contractor will be responsible for all damage from fire that originates in, or is propagated by,
     accumulations of rubbish or debris.

     All rubbish and debris shall be disposed of off the Owner's property in an approved sanitary landfill
     site. No open burning of debris or rubbish will be permitted. Job site shall be left neat and clean at the
     completion of each day's operation.

                                        PROJECT CLOSE-OUT

A.   RECORD DRAWINGS

     At beginning of job, provide one copy of Working Drawings, and record changes, between Working
     Drawings and "As Builts", including changes made by Addenda, Change Orders, Shop Drawings, etc.
     These shall be kept up to date. Update to indicate make of all mechanical and electrical equipment
     and fixtures installed. Keep these Record Prints in good condition and available for inspection by the
     Architect/Engineer.

     Upon completion of the job, turn over to the Architect/Engineer Record Prints of Working Drawings
     showing all job changes.

B.   OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA

     Prepare and furnish to the Architect/Engineer three (3) bound copies of "Operating and Maintenance
     Manual" on all equipment installed under this Contract.

     Manual shall include copies of all Manufacturers' "Operating and Service Instructions", including Parts
     List, Control Diagrams, Description of Control Systems, Operating, Electrical Wiring, and any other
     information needed to understand, operate and maintain the equipment. The names and addresses of
     all subcontractors shall be included. These instructions shall be custom-prepared for this job -- catalog
     cuts will not be accepted. Equipment shall be cross-referenced to Section of Specifications and to
     location shown and scheduled on drawings.

     Include Test-Adjust-Balance Report in the Manual.

C.   FINAL INSPECTION

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS                                                                                 01000 - 8
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY           Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                     WSU Project No. 089-169976



     Secure final inspections from the State of Michigan as soon as the work is completed and immediately
     submit such Certificates to the Architect/Engineer.

D.   GUARANTEES (See Sections 00510 and 01781)

     Guarantees on material and labor from the General Contractor and his subcontractors shall be as
     required in Sections 00510 and 01781.

E.   SWORN STATEMENT AND WAIVER OF LIENS (revised 12-2007)

     Prior to final payment, the General Contractor shall provide a Contractor's Sworn Statement and Full
     Waiver of Liens from all subcontractors for material and labor and from all suppliers. Signed waivers
     from all Subcontractors must accompany Pay Applications or they will be returned for such
     documentation prior to approval

                                        ASBESTOS HAZARD

A.   The contractor shall not start any work in any area that has not been inspected for asbestos by the
     Owner's Industrial Hygiene Department, or a qualified representative of the Owner, and approval is
     given for work to be done. If asbestos is found, safety measures as recommended by the Owner's
     Industrial Hygiene Department, or a qualified representative of the Owner, shall be completed, or
     approval given for work to be done before work is started. The contractor shall not perform any
     asbestos removal or containment work under the contract.

                                                KEYS

A.   The Owner shall provide the contractor keys on loan to have access to the various spaces in order to
     complete the contract. Contractor will sign for and be responsible for each key on loan, returnable to
     Owner upon completion of the contract. In case of any lost keys, the Owner will backcharge the
     contract $250.00 for each core change. In the event that a Contractor wants access to a secured
     area, he shall give the Owner a minimum 48-hour notice.




GENERAL REQUIREMENTS                                                                             01000 - 9
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                   Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178
                                                                                             WSU Project No. 089-169976


                                                                        SUMMARY OF WORK



SUMMARY OF WORK

PROJECT: Bio-Sciences Restoration Project for Fire Damage - Labs 5168 & 5178

WSU PROJECT NO. 089-169976

PROJECT MANAGER: Clement R. Prabakaran


1.           EXAMINATION

             The Contractor shall visit the site and become familiar with conditions under which he will be working.
             Also meet with the project manager and review site access, storage areas, etc.

2.           Description of Work – Project includes Restore and renovate fire damaged interior of Labs 5168 and
             5178 in the Bio-Science Building including finishes, equipment, electrical, mechanical and
             plumbing work. May include an alternate for construction of an Office and Microscopy Room. The
             building is located at:

             Wayne State University
             5047 Gullen Mall
             Detroit, Michigan 48202




\\tss3\finance$\PU\a FP&M Projects\2009 Calendar Year\FPM Bio Sciences Labs 5168 & 5178 Renovation 2009\FPM_Bio_Sciences_Labs_5168_5178_Renovation_Frontend_Vendors.doc
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                        SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                    22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                    REV 0
-




                             PROJECT MANUAL

                             BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION

                             WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY
                             DETROIT, MICHIGAN




                             SmithGroup Incorporated
                             500 Griswold
                             Suite 1700
                             Detroit, Michigan 48226

                             Project No.: 22511.000
                                           BIDS

                             Issued:      December 17, 2009
TITLE PAGE                                                        00001 - 1
00001.doc
saved 12.17.2009 8:27 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:28 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                   SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                               22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                               REV 0
-


                                     SECTION 00010
                                   TABLE OF CONTENTS
Number       DOCUMENT/SECTION TITLE

             INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION

00001        TITLE PAGE
00010        TABLE OF CONTENTS

             CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

00801        TRADE CONTRACTOR’S USE OF INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE IN ELECTRONIC FORM
00801A       APPENDIX ‘A’ – TRADE CONTRACTOR ELECTRONIC FILES AGREEMENT

           SPECIFICATIONS

           DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01310      COORDINATION
01310A     APPENDIX 'A' - REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI)
01320      SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
01330      SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
01330A     APPENDIX 'A' - SUBMITTALS REVIEW STAMP
01330B     APPENDIX 'B' - PROJECT SUBMITTAL FORM
01330B.    APPENDIX ‘B.CONT’ - PROJECT SUBMITTAL FORM CONTINUATION
cont
01350      ALTERATIONS PROCEDURES
01350A     APPENDIX 'A' - REQUEST FOR SERVICE/OCCUPANCY INTERRUPTION
01420      REFERENCES
01630      PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
01630A     APPENDIX 'A' - SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
01660      PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE
01780      RECORD DOCUMENTS

           DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

06070      FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT
06100      CARPENTRY

           DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07200      INSULATION (ORIGINAL BUILDING SPECIFICATION)
07250      FIREPROOFING (ORIGINAL BUILDING SPECIFICATION)
07840      FIRESTOPPING
07842      FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
07920      JOINT SEALANTS

           DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

TABLE OF CONTENTS                                                            00010 - 1
00010.doc
saved 12.17.2009 9:19 AM
printed 12.17.2009 9:20 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                             SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                         22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                         REV 0
-


Number       DOCUMENT/SECTION TITLE


08110      STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08800      GLASS AND GLAZING (ORIGINAL BUILDING SPECIFICATION)
08900      GLAZED CURTAIN WALL (ORIGINAL BUILDING SPECIFICATION)

           DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09260      GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09510      ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09651      RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09653      RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
09910      PAINTS

           DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

12305      GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CASEWORK AND FUME HOODS
12351      METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK
12353      WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK
12494      BLACKOUT ROLLER SHADES
12500      WINDOW TREATMENT (ORIGINAL BUILDING SPECIFICATION)

           DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13850      FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

           DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL

15010      BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15075      MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15090      MECHANICAL RESTORATION AND RETROFIT
15110      VALVES
15840      AIR TERMINAL UNITS
15850      AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
15855      LAMINAR FLOW SYSTEMS
15900      INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
15910      LABORATORY HOOD INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
15952      TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS

           DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL

16050      BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16060      GROUNDING
16070      SUPPORTING DEVICES
16075      ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16080      ELECTRICAL TESTING
16090      ELECTRICAL RESTORATION AND REPAIR
16122      WIRE AND CABLE

TABLE OF CONTENTS                                                      00010 - 2
00010.doc
saved 12.17.2009 9:19 AM
printed 12.17.2009 9:20 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                       SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                   22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                   REV 0
-


Number       DOCUMENT/SECTION TITLE

16132      CONDUIT, WIREWAYS AND ACCESSORIES
16141      WIRING, DEVICES AND MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
16411      CIRCUIT BREAKERS, DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND FUSES
16422      PANELBOARDS
16510      LIGHTING
16530      EMERGENCY LIGHTING

           DIVISION 17 – TELECOMMUNICATIONS

17010      TELECOMMUNICATIONS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
17110      TELECOMMUNICATIONS INTERIOR PATHWAYS
17150      TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
17170      CABLE PLANT ADMINISTRATION AND TESTING

                                      END OF SECTION




TABLE OF CONTENTS                                                00010 - 3
00010.doc
saved 12.17.2009 9:19 AM
printed 12.17.2009 9:20 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                             SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                         22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                         REV 0
-


                                   SECTION 00801
         TRADE CONTRACTOR'S USE OF INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE IN ELECTRONIC FORM


     1.1 TRADE CONTRACTOR’S USE OF INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE IN ELECTRONIC FORM
          A.    With the concurrence of the Owner, the Architect may furnish to the Trade Contractor
                versions of the Drawings, Specifications, and other Instruments of Service in electronic form.
                The Trade Contractor shall expect, and shall so agree, to execute the Architect’s Trade
                Contractor Electronic Files Agreement before the transfer of such Instruments of Service See
                Appendix ‘A.’

          B.    The Architect's fee for providing electronic files to the Trade Contractor is as follows:
                1.   1 to 10 drawings:    $250 set-up charge plus $25 per drawing
                2.   11 to 100 drawings: $500 set-up charge plus $5 per drawing
                3.   101 to 500 drawings: $1,000 set-up charge plus $2 per drawing
          C.    Trade Contractor requests for electronic files shall be made in writing and sent directly to the
                Architect at:
                      SmithGroup Incorporated
                      500 Griswold Street
                      Suite 1700
                      Detroit, Michigan 48226-3804
                      Attn: Michelle Kussurelis
                      Ph. (313) 442-8231
          D.    Trade Contractor requests shall include a list of drawings and specifications required, an
                executed copy of the Section 00801A, Appendix ‘A’ - Trade Contractor Electronic Files
                Agreement, and a check made payable to SmithGroup Incorporated for the fee stipulated in
                Article B.


                                               END OF SECTION




TRADE CONTRACTOR'S USE OF INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE IN ELECTRONIC FORM                                         00801 - 1
00801.doc
saved 12.16.2009 10:42 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:28 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


                                        SECTION 00801A
                 APPENDIX 'A' - TRADE CONTRACTOR ELECTRONIC FILES AGREEMENT


The Undersigned Trade Contractor has requested that SmithGroup Incorporated (SmithGroup) provide
certain electronic files (Files) from SmithGroup’s Instruments of Service for the Project identified above. The
electronic Files are requested for the purpose of providing convenience in the preparation of submittals, such
as shop drawings and coordination drawings.
Trade Contractor covenants and agrees that: 1) the electronic Files are Instruments of Service of
SmithGroup, the author. 2) in providing the Files, SmithGroup does not transfer common law, statutory law,
or other rights, including copyrights; and 3) the Files provided are not Contract Documents, in whole or in
part.
Acceptance Period: Trade Contractor agrees to review the Files and report to SmithGroup, within 7 days of
initial Files transmittal date, defects in the Files. It is understood that SmithGroup will correct such defects
in a timely manner and retransmit the Files. Trade Contractor further agrees to compensate SmithGroup for
the cost of correcting defects reported after the acceptance period.
Trade Contractor understands that the following are not defects: 1) the Files have been prepared to
SmithGroup criteria and may not conform to Trade Contractor’s drafting or other documentation standards;
and 2) the Project’s electronically-produced Contract Documents may contain some manually-drafted or
written information that will not appear in the Files provided.
Trade Contractor agrees to waive all claims against SmithGroup resulting in any way from any unauthorized
changes to, or any unauthorized use of, the Files.
          Unauthorized Changes: Changes made to the Files by entity other than SmithGroup.
          Unauthorized Use: Transfer or use the Files provided, in whole or in part, or files derived therefrom,
          for any other purpose or any other project.
Trade Contractor agrees: 1) that the use of the Files provided does not reduce Contract responsibilities for
submitting complete and coordinated shop drawings and other submittals; and 2) to coordinate as
necessary changes to the Files provided with future modifications, if any, to the Contract Documents.
Trade Contractor agrees, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to indemnify and hold SmithGroup harmless
from any damage, liability, or cost (including protection from loss due to reasonable attorney’s fees and
costs of defense), arising from, allegedly arising from, or in any way connected with: 1) unauthorized
changes to the Files provided; 2) unauthorized use of the Files provided; or 3) Trade Contractor’s failure to
coordinate the electronic Files provided with modifications to the Contract Documents.
Under no circumstances shall transfer of electronic Files to Trade Contractor be deemed a sale by
SmithGroup. SmithGroup makes no warranties, express or implied, of merchantability or fitness for any
particular purpose.
Accepted for the Trade Contractor:

Company



By                                                      Title




APPENDIX 'A' - TRADE CONTRACTOR ELECTRONIC FILES AGREEMENT                                          00801A - 1
00801a.doc
saved 12.16.2009 10:42 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:29 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                         SECTION 01310
                                                                          COORDINATION

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS..................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           EXISTING BUILDING DRAWINGS AND LAYOUTS........................................................................................................ 1
  1.3           COORDINATION OF SPAC            E......................................................................................................................................... 1


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS
           A.       Carefully study and compare Contract Documents before proceeding with fabrication and
                    installation of Work. Promptly advise Architect of error, inconsistency, omission, or apparent
                    discrepancy discovered.

           B.       Request For Interpretation: RFI: Allow time in construction scheduling for liaison with
                    Architect. Establish procedures for handling queries and clarifications. Use "Request for
                    Interpretation" form for requesting information. Copy of form is Section 01310A. The form is
                    intended to be completed electronically and emailed.

           C.       Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of various Specification Sections to avoid
                    conflicts and ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent
                    construction elements.

           D.       Coordinate Work of various Specification Sections having interdependent responsibilities for
                    installation, connection, and operation.

           E.       Verify that characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities and
                    services. Promptly advise Architect of incompatibilities.

           F.       Except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, conduit and wiring in construction.
                    Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

           G.       Make provision to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

     1.2 EXISTING BUILDING DRAWINGS AND LAYOUTS
           A.       Existing building drawings available from Wayne State University, Facilities, Planning and
                    Management.

     1.3 COORDINATION OF SPACE
           A.       Coordinate use of Project space and sequence of installation of mechanical and electrical
                    Work. Follow routings shown for pipes, ducts, and conduits as closely as practicable, with
                    due allowance for available physical space. Make runs parallel with building lines. Utilize
                    space as efficiently as possible to maximize accessibility for other installations, for
                    maintenance, and for repairs.


COORDINATION                                                                                                                                                                01310 - 1
01310.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:29 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


                1.    Allow a minimum clearance of 150 mm (6 inches) above cable trays for installation of
                      other Work.
           B.   Layout of mechanical and electrical systems and related products indicated on Drawings is
                diagrammatic. Variations in alignment, elevation, and details required to avoid interferences
                and satisfy architectural and structural limitations are not necessarily shown.

           C.   Prior to installation of materials and equipment, review and coordinate Work with
                Architectural and Structural Drawings to establish exact space conditions. Where available
                space is inadequate or where reasonable modifications are not possible, request information
                from Architect before proceeding.

           D.   Coordinate installation to prevent conflicts and cooperate in making, without extra charge,
                reasonable modifications in layout as needed.

           E.   Provide clear access to control points, valves, strainers, control devices, and specialty items
                of every nature related to such systems and equipment to obtain maximum head room.
                Provide adequate clearances as necessary for operation and maintenance.


                                              END OF SECTION




COORDINATION                                                                                         01310 - 2
01310.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:29 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                             SECTION 01310A
                             APPENDIX 'A' - REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI)

DATE TRANSMITTED:                     BP No:             Trade Contractor:                                        RFI NO:
RESPONSE REQUESTED FROM:                        Civil     Struct.      Arch.      Mech.        Elect.        Other:
Brief Description of RFI [give details below]
PROVIDE                    Section          Section          Section           Section          Section             Section
SPECIFICATION              No.              No.              No.               No.              No.                 No.
REFERENCES ==>             Paragraph        Paragraph        Paragraph         Paragraph        Paragraph           Paragraph
                           No.              No.              No.               No.              No.                 No.
PROVIDE DRAWING REFERENCES:
Contractor requests interpretation of the following from SmithGroup:
[NOTE: Request only 1 interpretation per RFI. This permits individual handling and expedites response.]




    This box, if checked, indicates a potential change to the Contract Sum associated with this RFI.
         The change is in the range of $        to $     .
    This box, if checked, indicates a potential change to the Contract Time associated with this RFI.
         The change is in the range of         to       days.
Requested By: [name]:
After saving file, email to [SG project secretary]_____________ (or fax:____________)

SmithGroup response:                                                                                    Date Received:


Response By:                                                                                              Date:
Date Transmitted:                                         Indicate the recipients and the means of transmittal below:
Distributed to: Name, Email Address, Fax Number                                                      Email        Fax    Hand   Mail

                                                                                                        T
                                                                                                        T
                                                                                                        T
                                                                                                        T
                                                                                                        T


SmithGroup: MOF
[NOTE: This form is formatted for completion on screen using MS Word. Only form revisions by SmithGroup are valid.]

                                                    END OF SECTION




APPENDIX 'A' - REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI)                                                                         01310A - 1
01310a.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:29 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                             SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                     SECTION 01320
                                                                   SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

   1.1          GENERAL PROVISIONS ............................................................................................................................................... 1
   1.2          LEGEND ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1
   1.3          EXAMPLE SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE .......................................................................................................................... 2


     1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
           A.       Within 30 calendar days after Notice to Proceed, and before submittal of any Shop
                    Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or other required submittals, submit a schedule
                    identifying each document required by the Specifications to be submitted, and stating the
                    Contractor's planned latest possible date of submittal for that document.

           B.       Categorize submittal items by type, and designate the respective types by type code. Type
                    codes and their respective meanings are specified in the Article "Legend," following.

           C.       The Submittals Schedule shall be essentially in the form exhibited in the Article, "Example
                    Submittal Schedule," following, and shall list all Sections of the Specifications of Divisions
                    1 through 16, whether or not containing submittals requirements.

           D.       “Latest possible date” means the date on which the item may be submitted and be
                    expected to be received by Contractor in return in time to meet the construction schedule.

     1.2 LEGEND

                     Type                                  Code Explanation
                     SD                                    Shop Drawings: refer to Section 01340 for
                                                           description.
                     PD                                    Product Data.
                     S                                     Sample.
                     DC                                    Design calculations.
                     L                                     Letter.
                     SoC                                   Statement of Compliance.
                     Cer                                   Certificate/Certification.
                     Q                                     Qualifications statement: such as for Contractor,
                                                           fabricator, or erector.
                     SC                                    Sample construction.
                     InI                                   Installation instructions.
                     AT                                    Acceptance Test.
                     OpI                                   Operating instructions.
                     MaI                                   Maintenance instructions.
                     MAA                                   Maintenance agreement.
                     MaM                                   Maintenance materials.
                     Rcp                                   Receipt: such as for keys, tools, and other detached
                                                           or detachable parts, including delivery tickets.
                     RD                                    Record Documents.
                     SW                                    Special Warranty.
                     TR                                    Test Report.

SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE                                                                                                                                                           01320 - 1
01320.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:37 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                             SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                        REV 0
-



     1.3 EXAMPLE SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
         Section   Paragraph   Type Code           Description                         Latest Possible
         Number    Number                                                              Submittal Date-

           02300             --
           02770             1.02A.   PD, DC, TR   Approval: concrete design mix
                             1.02A.   PD           Approval: curing method
                             1.02A.   PD           Approval: joint filler
                             1.02B.   S            Joint filler
           04810             1.02A.   SoC, TR      Concrete masonry units
                                      SoC, TR      Facing brick
                             1.02B.   S            Concrete masonry units
                                      S            Facing brick
                                      S, PD        Wall reinforcement
                                      S, PD        Anchors and ties
                                      S, PD        Control joint filler

                                       END OF SECTION




SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE                                                                    01320 - 2
01320.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:37 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                                SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                            22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                            REV 0
-


                                                      SECTION 01330
                                          SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES

                                                                             SECTION INDEX
   1.1          SUBMITTALS, GENERAL.............................................................................................................................................. 1
   1.2          REVIEW STAMP ........................................................................................................................................................... 1
   1.3          TIMING.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
   1.4          DEFINITIONS................................................................................................................................................................. 2
   1.5          PREPARING SUBMITTAL.............................................................................................................................................. 3
   1.6          AFFIXING REVIEW STAM               P........................................................................................................................................... 4
   1.7          ARCHITECT REVIEW .................................................................................................................................................... 5
   1.8          SUBMITTAL FORM INSTRUCTIONS.............................................................................................................................. 6
   1.9          OBTAINING AND USING SUBMITTAL FORM ................................................................................................................ 7

     1.1 SUBMITTALS, GENERAL
           A.       Refer to the Conditions of the Contract for basic submittals responsibilities.

           B.       Requirements specified for submittals are intended to provide efficient handling, while
                    permitting review responsibilities to be carried out.

           C.       Refer to Appendix 'A', Contract Submittals Review Stamp; Appendix 'B', Project Submittal
                    Form.

           D.       Architect will accept submittals only from the Contractor.                                                             Only items specified to be
                    submitted will be accepted.

           E.       Bind submittals in a manner suitable for 215 x 275-mm (8-1/2 x 11-inch) file folder storage,
                    except where doing so is not workable.

           F.       Transmit submittals with all transportation charges prepaid.

           G.       Avoidable Resubmittals
                    1.       The first two reviews of each specified submittal will be processed without cost to the
                             Contractor. After the second review, the Owner may charge the Contractor for the cost
                             of such additional processing, unless the processing results from approved Change
                             Orders causing revisions to previously approved submittals.
     1.2 REVIEW STAMP
           A.       Contractor shall purchase one or more rubber stamps of the Review Stamp form shown in
                    Appendix 'A' in as many copies as Contractor may require.

           B.       The Review Stamp form may be reproduced on adhesive-backed transparencies ("sticky-
                    backs"), or electronically embedded on Shop Drawings. An electronic file is available through
                    request to the Architect’s Project Manager.

           C.       Affix the Review Stamp form to submittals. Refer to Affixing Review Stamp heading in this
                    Section.



SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES                                                                                                                                         01330 - 1
01330.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:30 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


           D.   Do not revise Review Stamp wording or format. Change in the size of the stamp shall be
                approved prior to use.

           E.   Do not include additional review stamps or notes that contradict the Review Stamp wording.

           F.   The General Contractor shall sign and date each instance of the Review Stamp, providing
                evidence that s/he has reviewed the submittal and fulfilled contractual requirements for
                verification and coordination.

     1.3 TIMING
           A.   Allocate not less than 14 calendar days, plus applicable transmittal time, to each submittal
                for processing by the Architect. To that allocation, add 7 calendar days for submittals
                requiring review by the Architect’s consultant or multiple engineering diciplines.

           B.   Related Items:
                1.    Schedule submittal items that are inter-related to be submitted at the same time.
                2.    The Architect may hold a partial (incomplete) submittal until after receipt of the
                      submittal(s) covering the remainder of the items in a Section, or items requiring inter-
                      related review, when needed for complete and proper review.
           C.   Finish Samples: Submit Samples for approval of color, texture, graining, or other finish at
                least 30 days before purchase, assembly, or fabrication.

           D.   The following shall not be deemed cause for an extension in the Contract Time or for a
                change in the Contract Amount:
                1.    Required resubmittal due to failure to meet product or submittal process requirements.
                2.    Delay by Contractor in submitting or resubmitting.
     1.4 DEFINITIONS
           A.   Shop Drawings: Drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the
                Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or
                distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work.

           B.   Product Data:        Illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, color charts,
                instructions, brochures, diagrams, and other information furnished by the Contractor to
                illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work.

           C.   Samples: Physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship and
                establish standards by which the Work will be judged.

           D.   Sample Installation: A portion of the Work, provided by the Contractor to serve as a sample
                of subsequent work. Obtain prior written approval of the location and quantity of sample
                installation. Obtain written approval of sample installation before continuing with the
                remainder of installation. Except as otherwise specified or directed, approved sample
                installation may remain in place as permanent construction.




SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES                                                             01330 - 2
01330.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:30 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


           E.   Mockup: Full-size, temporary, representative portion(s) of building system(s), provided by the
                Contractor to permit study, test permanent construction, or serve as a sample of subsequent
                work. Mockups shall be erected on the site, or elsewhere such as a testing facility, separate
                from the permanent construction. Obtain prior written approval of the location of on-site
                mockup. Except where otherwise specified or directed: completely remove mockup and
                legally dispose of it off Owner’s property; restore disturbed area and construction at the end
                of the Work. Prior to constructing a mockup, make related submittals and obtain approvals.
                Comply with submittal requirements specified in the section(s) where the mockup is
                described.

     1.5 PREPARING SUBMITTAL
           A.   Shop Drawings:
                1.    Submit Shop Drawings in the form of one reproducible transparency (e.g., sepia) and 2
                      prints of each submittal item. Do not send more than the specified number; additional
                      copies will be discarded.
                2.    Each sheet of the same item or system shall be uniform in size and numbered
                      consecutively.
                3.    Each sheet shall contain the title block specified below plus an unobstructed space at
                      the right side or bottom, of size not less than 150 x 200 mm (6 by 8 inches) for
                      submittal review stamps and notations.
                4.    Affix the Review Stamp to each sheet.
                5.    Dimensioning on Shop Drawings shall be the same system of measure (i.e., metric or
                      inch-pound) as on the Contract Drawings.
           B.   Product Data
                1.    Submit the manufacturer’s Product Data, 3 copies of each submittal item. Bind the
                      material to form identical bound copies to each of which is attached a 215 x 275-mm (8-
                      1/2 x 11-inch) cover sheet containing the title block specified below plus an
                      unobstructed space for submittal review stamps and notations.
                2.    If the Review Stamp cannot be placed on the submittal item without obstructing
                      information, affix the Review Stamp to a separate piece of paper for that item, same size
                      as cover sheet.
                3.    Where the publication displays more products than the product intended to be
                      submitted, prominently mark to indicate the exact product and product options and
                      accessories being submitted, and strike-out non-applicable information.
                      a. Mark where selections are to be made.
                      b. Tailor large catalogs so that excessive unrelated products are not included.
                4.    To highlight and mark-up Product Data information, use bold markings that will be easily
                      seen after photocopying. Do not use highlighter.
                5.    Clearly convey the differences between similar products included in the submittal.
                      a. Clearly highlight information that differs for different sizes or grades.
                6.    Correlate Product Data with Contract Documents:
                      a. Where the Contract Documents include designations such as types or marks,
                           mark Product Data with these designations and include them on the Submittal
                           Form. For example: glass types; fixture item numbers.




SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES                                                              01330 - 3
01330.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:30 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                        SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                    22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                    REV 0
-


                      b.   Clearly highlight information on Product Data that shows compliance with specified
                           requirements. For example: manufacturer (not supplier, distributor, etc.); model
                           number; rating; performance characteristics.
                7.    If multiple manufacturers or products are being submitted for similar items, include
                      manufacturer or product name in line item descriptions on the Submittal Form.
                8.    Dimensioning on Product Data shall be the same system of measure (metric vs. inch-
                      pound) as on the Contract Drawings. If preprinted catalogues display only the system
                      not used in the Contract Drawings, mark-up the Product Data with the other system’s
                      dimensions.
           C.   Samples
                1.    Submit Samples in triplicate, except where a different number is specified, with
                      identifying labels firmly attached.
                      a. Labels shall be of a size to contain the title block specified below plus
                            unobstructed space for submittals review stamps and notations.
                      b. Each sample shall display, as a minimum, the Architect’s project number, and the
                            submittal and item numbers. Where Sample size does not permit the full title
                            block and Review Stamp without obstructing information, provide a separate sheet
                            of paper, 215 x 275-mm (8-1/2 x 11-inch), securely attached to each sample (or
                            sample set), with the Review Stamp affixed.
                2.    Sample Sets Showing Range of Variation: Where variations are unavoidable due to
                      nature of the materials, submit sets of samples of not less than three units showing
                      extremes and middle of range. Attach samples in sets together unless doing so is not
                      reasonably practical.
                3.    Recording of Sample Installation: Note and preserve the on-site indicators of each area
                      constituting a sample installation, but remove indicators at final clean-up of Project
                4.    When color, texture, or pattern is specified by naming a particular manufacturer and
                      style, include one sample of the specified product for comparison if another product is
                      submitted.
           D.   Title Block
                1.    Shop Drawings, the cover sheets for Product Data, and the labels for Samples shall
                      each have an identifying title block containing:
                      a. Project title.
                      b. Architect’s name, Project Number, and Contract Package title.
                      c. Brief description of submittal item matching the description on the Submittal Form.
                      d. Contractor's name and project or contract number.
                      e. Name of manufacturer, supplier, subcontractor, or other such organization
                          furnishing the submittal to the Contractor.
     1.6 AFFIXING REVIEW STAMP
           A.   Separate Line Items: Affix an image of the Review Stamp to each separately-reviewable item
                of the submittal package. For example:
                1.    On each separate Shop Drawing sheet, affix a Review Stamp image.
                2.    For each separate item appearing on a Contract Document schedule, affix a separate
                      Review Stamp image. For example: lighting fixture; plumbing fixture.



SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES                                                            01330 - 4
01330.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:30 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                              SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                          22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                          REV 0
-


                3.    For each separate type of a product identified for the specified item, affix a separate
                      Review Stamp image. For example, glass type; masonry unit type; metal panel type.
           B.   When affixed, the Review Stamp shall not obscure information contained in the submittal.

           C.   Fill in name of Contractor and Contractor’s project or contract number, if not already entered
                on stamp.

           D.   In the section of the stamp titled "Contractor Action," fill in the following information:
                1.    Section number of the Specification Section for which the submittal is being made, and
                      Paragraph number of specific submittal requirement within the Section. Do not include
                      items from more than one Specification Section on one form.
                2.    Submittal number: Refer to Submittal Form Instructions for submittal numbering.
                3.    Item number as shown on the Submittal Form.
                4.    Date submitted by Contractor.
                5.    Mark to signify whether item is Shop Drawing, Product Data, or Sample, or, if ‘Other,’
                      enter descriptive words on the blank line.
                6.    Signature of authorized representative of the Contractor who has performed the
                      Contractor's review and approval of the submittal item, and the date.
     1.7 ARCHITECT REVIEW
           A.   Architect’s staff and consultants will review the submittals, and mark the Review Stamp on
                                             n
                each submittal item with a action code number . When more than one action code is
                assigned to the item, the highest code number (i.e., least acceptable designation) marked on
                the stamp will govern what next shall be done with the item. The code meanings are
                described below.

           B.   Action Codes Permitting Use
                1.    When an action code permitting use is assigned to a submittal, it does not authorize
                      work that does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
                      Acceptance of the Work will depend on compliance.
                2.    Code No. 1 – Approved: The Work covered by the submittal item may proceed.
                3.                                                he
                      Code No. 2 – Approved as Noted: T Work covered by the submittal item may
                      proceed, provided it complies with the Architect's notations and Contract Document
                      requirements.
                4.    Code No. 2R - Approved as Noted - Resubmit: The Work covered by the submittal item
                      may proceed, provided it complies with the Architect's notations and Contract Document
                      requirements. Resubmit the corrected submittal item as soon as possible, and do so
                      before delivery and installation of the item.
           C.   Action Code Prohibiting Use
                1.    Action Code No. 3 – Not Approved: The Work covered by the submittal item, including
                      purchasing, fabrication, delivery, and other activity, shall not proceed. Revise the
                      submittal item or prepare a new item in accordance with the Architect's notations.
                      Resubmit the corrected or new item without delay; do not permit submittal items
                      marked "Not Approved" to be used. Work incorporating such items will be rejected.
           D.   Action Code for Items Not Required

SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES                                                                      01330 - 5
01330.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:30 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


                1.                                                                  he
                      Action Code X – Not Requested by Contract Documents: T submittal item is not
                      called for by the Contract Documents and is being returned unreviewed by the Architect
                      except to the extent necessary to determine its status.
     1.8 SUBMITTAL FORM INSTRUCTIONS
           A.   General: The Contractor initiates and fills out the Form. Note: the Submittal Form is also
                available as an MS Word file in electronic format for use as a template. It is recommended,
                to expedite the submittal review, that the electronic form be used to generate a hardcopy
                Submittal Form to accompany the submittal; email an exact copy as early as possible.
                1.    Submittal Numbering (at top right of form): See below.
                2.    Routing: The purpose of the Routing section is to record the dates when recipients
                      receive and forward the submittal.
                3.    Contact Information: Fill out completely with Project information.
           B.   Submittal Definition
                1.    Each submittal consists of items from only ONE Specifications section.
                2.    Complete Submittal: If ALL the items required by the Specifications section are listed
                      on one Submittal Form (including continuation sheet), it is a complete submittal.
                3.    Partial Submittals: If it is necessary to divide the required items of a given
                      Specifications section into two or more submittals to meet schedule or handling
                      requirements, the separate submittals are partial submittals. All partial submittals have
                      the same submittal number, and are differentiated by sequential P-numbers (see below).
                4.    All items in each submittal, whether complete or partial, will be processed together:
                      Individual items will not be ‘broken out’ for special handling. Arrange submittals
                      accordingly.
           C.   Submittal Numbering
                1.    Number submittals as described below to permit tracking.
                2.    Submittal Number: Assign a permanent, five-digit number to each submittal. Begin
                      with 00001 and advance the number by one for each new submittal throughout the
                      Project. Do not use the same submittal number for more than one submittal package,
                      that is, for the submittals from more than one section.
                3.    P-Number for Partial Submittals: Number each partial submittal in the P space.
                      Begin with 1 and advance the number by one for each subsequent partial. If the
                      submittal is a complete submittal, leave the P space blank.
                4.    R-Number for Re-submittals: Number each re-submittal in the R space. Begin with 1
                      for the first re-submittal and advance the number by one for each subsequent
                      resubmittal. Make no entry for the initial submittal.
                5.    If the GC or CM has an established submittals numbering system approved by the
                      Owner, consult with the Architect before first submittal to work out a coordinated
                      system.
           D.   Item Kind: Identify each submittal item using the following abbreviations:




SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES                                                              01330 - 6
01330.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:30 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                        REV 0
-


                      SD           for Shop Drawing
                      CAT          for complete catalog, booklet or brochure
                      PD           for product data, i.e., catalog cut or partial catalog, booklet or brochure
                      LTR          for letter of certification or Substitution Request Form 01630A
                      MU           for mock-up
                      SAM          for sample
                      TR           for test report
           E.   Shop Drawings: Show the number of transparencies and prints included for the item as
                ‘T+P’, where T equals the number of sepias and P equals the number of prints of that sepia,
                [e.g.: 1 + 2]. In addition to the drawing number, include a description of each drawing,
                matching the description on the drawing itself

           F.   Description: Provide a brief, clear generic description of each line item, using the Drawings
                or Specifications as a guide. If more than one manufacturer’s model numbers are included in
                the submittal package, indicate the model numbers in parentheses in the affected line items.

           G.   Resubmittals: In addition to providing the R-number, enter the information using the same
                line item number as the original submittal package. Doing so will avoid delay in handling the
                resubmittal package. Resubmit only those items that previously received Code No. 2R or 3.

     1.9 OBTAINING AND USING SUBMITTAL FORM
           A.   Obtain Form through Architect’s Contract Administrator.
                1.    During Project start-up, discuss changes to the Form that can be made to customize
                      the template to the Project e.g., routing, contact names, project numbers, etc. and
                      reduce entry of repetitious information.
                2.    Note that the Form will be supplied in a 1-sheet hardcopy or electronic file, each with a
                      continuation sheet for use with larger submittals.

                                              END OF SECTION




SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES                                                                 01330 - 7
01330.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:30 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                       SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                   22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                   REV 0
-


                                               SECTION 01330A
                                    APPENDIX 'A' - SUBMITTALS REVIEW STAMP
         Architect:                      SmithGroup Incorporated
         SG Project Number:
         Project Title:
         Package Title:
         General Contractor:
         Project or contract number:
         General Contractor Action
         Specs Section & Para No’s: __ __ __ __ __|__ __ / __.__.__
         Submittal No. /P No. /R No.:      __ __ __ __ __ /P __ /R __
         Item No.: __________________________________________
         Date Submitted:                                  ___/___/200_
         Contractor affirms that:
         (1) It is responsible for quantities, weights, and dimensions
         to be confirmed and correlated at the site; for information
         that pertains solely to the fabrication processes and to the
         means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of
         construction; and for coordination of the work of all trades.
         (2) The          Shop Drawing         Product Data Sample
         [Other]:

         to which this stamp is affixed is in conformance with
         information given and the design concept expressed in the
         Contract Documents.       Reviewed and approved for
         Contractor by:

         [Signed/Date] ____________________________      ___/___/200_
         Architect Action
         Architect’s review is only for the limited purpose of checking
         for conformance with information given and the design
         concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The results
         of Architect's review are entered in the table below; highest
         code number prevails.
         Legend - Submittal is:                            Action Code
         APPROVED                                                     1
         APPROVED AS NOTED                                            2
         APPROVED AS NOTED - RESUBMIT                                2R
         NOT APPROVED                                                 3
         NOT REQUESTED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS                          X
         Discipline        Reviewed By               Date Action Code
         Architect:        ___________________________________
         Civil/Landscpg: ___________________________________
         Structural:       ___________________________________
         Mechanical         ___________________________________
         Electrical:         __________________________________
         Design:            ___________________________________
         Intrs/Grph/Sgn:
         ___________________________________
         Building                                                 Tech:
         ___________________________________
         Consultant:        ___________________________________
         _________________________________________________


APPENDIX 'A' - SUBMITTALS REVIEW STAMP                                          01330A - 1
01330a.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:30 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                                                                     SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                                                                 22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                                                                 REV 0
-

GC or CM Project No.:                                                                           Submittal No.:                                            P            R              Total Pages This Submittal:
or CM Submittal No.:                                                                            Spec. Section No.:                                        Title:
                                                       DO NOT COVER THIS ROUTING TRANSMITTAL WITH A SEPARATE TRANSMITTAL
Refer to Section - Submittal Form Instructions.                                                                                2. CONTACT INFORMATION
1. ROUTING                                                                                                                                     Manufacturer or Supplier                 Trade Contractor
                                                                                                                              Firm Name
Step From                     Date Sent                          To                     Date Received
                                                                                                                              Contact; Email          ;                                       ;
     Trade Contractor,            M/D/yy                          General Contractor or
1                                                                                                                             Phone; Fax
     Manufacturer, Supplier                                       CM
2    General Contractor or CM                                     SmithGroup                                                                   GC or CM                                 Owner
3    SmithGroup                                                   GC or CM and Owner                                          Firm Name
                                                                 Trade Contractor,                                            Contact
4        General Contractor or CM                                                                                             Phone; Fax
                                                                 Manufacturer, Supplier

SmithGroup Contact: _____________________________________ Email: _____________________________@SmithGroup.com                                                                         Phone: ___.___.____ Fax: ___.___.____
3. SUBMITTAL INFORMATION                                                                                                        FOR SMITHGROUP USE: Route as indicated; fill in Action Code
          All items listed below are specified in the SAME Specifications Section                                                 Civil   Struct   Arch.       Mech            Elect        Other
          identified at the top of this page                                                                                    Date           Date         Date           Date            Date         Date             Final
Item Kind Description or Drawing Number and Title                                                                               Initials       Initials     Initials       Initials        Initials     Initials         Code
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Codes:      1: Approved   2: Approved As Noted   2R: Approved As Noted - Resubmit   3: Not Approved   X: Not Requested By Contract Documents

If there are more than 10 items, use the Continuation Sheet


APPENDIX 'B' - PROJECT SUBMITTAL FORM                                                                                                                                                                              01330B - 1
01330b.doc
saved 12.17.2009 9:40 AM
printed 12.17.2009 9:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                      22511.000
-                                                                                                                                                      REV 0

                                                                             Continuation Sheet
GC or CM Project No.:                                               Submittal No.:                       P        R                        Page No.:
 or CM Submittal No.:                                               Spec. Section No.:                   Title:
. SUBMITTAL INFORMATION cont’d                                                         FOR SMITHGROUP USE: Route as indicated; fill in Action Code
           All items listed below are specified in the SAME Specifications Section      Civil   Struct   Arch.      Mech     Elect           Other
           identified at the top of the page                                           Date     Date     Date       Date     Date            Date       Final
 Item Kind Description or Drawing Number and Title                                     Initials Initials Initials   Initials Initials        Initials   Code




Codes:   1: Approved   2: Approved As Noted   2R: Approved As Noted - Resubmit   3: Not Approved   X: Not Requested By Contract Documents




APPENDIX 'B.CONT' - PROJECT SUBMITTAL FORM CONTINUATION                                                                                          01330B.CONT
01330b.cont.doc
saved 8.31.2004 10:14 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:31 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                   SECTION 01350
                                                              ALTERATIONS PROCEDURES

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           RELATED SECTIONS:................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.3           DEFINITIONS................................................................................................................................................................. 1
  1.4           CLASSIFICATIONS ....................................................................................................................................................... 2
  1.5           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 3
  1.6           SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING................................................................................................................................. 3

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 3
  2.1           FASTENER MATERIALS............................................................................................................................................... 3

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
  3.1           EXAMINATION.............................................................................................................................................................. 4
  3.2           PREPARATION ............................................................................................................................................................. 4
  3.3           CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES................................................................................................................................... 4
  3.4           TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................................................................... 4
  3.5           BUILDING ALTERATIONS ............................................................................................................................................. 5


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 RELATED SECTIONS:
           A.       01350A - Request for Service/Occupancy Interruption

           B.       15090 - Mechanical Restoration and Retrofit

           C.       16090 – Electrical Restoration and Repair

     1.2 REFERENCES
           A.       American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
                    1.       A307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength.
           B.       Federal Specification (Fed. Spec.)
                    1.       FF-S-325 - Shield, Expansion; Nail, Expansion; and Nail, Drive Screw (Devices,
                             Anchoring, Masonry).
           C.       Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
                    1.       Surface Preparation Specification SSPC-SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning.
     1.3 DEFINITIONS
           A.       Item: Material, fixture, device, system, equipment, or other part of existing construction
                    classified in this Section, including incidental parts, pieces, supports, and attachments.

           B.       Abandon: Leave item in place. Disconnect item from all existing system connections.
                    Permanently plug or cap openings in item and former connections to system or systems.

ALTERATIONS PROCEDURES                                                                                                                                                      01350 - 1
01350.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:31 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                              SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                          22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                          REV 0
-


           C.   Remove
                1.    Extract item from its position. Then, do with item as specified for its classification.
                      a.     If item is part of an existing system, disconnect item from system before
                             extraction. Permanently plug or cap openings of system. Dispose of supports and
                             other items left behind. Leave existing system to remain in undamaged and
                             operative condition.
                      b.     Remove concrete and masonry in small sections and dampen to keep down dust
                             during removal.
                      c.     Promptly remove debris resulting from removal operations. Do not let debris
                             accumulate on the site.
                2.    After item is removed, inspect the structure to remain in place and notify the Architect of
                      defects uncovered. Repair of such defects and required additional Work will be
                      compensated by Contract adjustment in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract.
           D.   Reinstall: Set item in position in accordance with the Contract Documents; make
                connections to systems, if any, and otherwise prepare item for use in the Work.

           E.   Match existing/match original: Provide new products that exactly match existing products
                with respect to function, appearance, details, joints and profiles, color, material, texture,
                sheen and finish. Where custom products are required to achieve these results, off-the-shelf
                products are not acceptable.

           F.   Gentlest means possible (for cleaning): Employ the gentlest means of effectively removing
                soil, stain and grime without deterioration, erosion, or discoloration of the subject material.
                Harsher methods may be employed only if gentler methods fail to produce satisfactory
                results, and then only if such harsher methods do not demonstrate a deleterious effect on the
                subject material and receive approval for their use prior to the use.

     1.4 CLASSIFICATIONS
           A.   Restore
                1.    This term may be applied to any item removed under the alteration operation that meets
                      the requirements of the applicable Section of the Specifications, subject to the approval
                      of the Architect.
                2.    Carefully remove each item designated ‘restore,’ then thoroughly refurbish the item as
                      specified in the applicable Section of the Specifications, and reinstall it as specified for a
                      new product.
                3.    Protect item prior to its removal and throughout all activities in connection with the item,
                      including removal, restoration, storage, and reinstallation, and through completion of the
                      Contract.
                4.    Immediately upon removal, durably tag each item and on a written log record the action
                      of removal and all subsequent activities in connection with the item through final
                      disposition. Submit log to the Owner when and in the number of copies requested.
                5.    When restoration is complete, reinstall item where shown.
                6.    When procedure of the Work prevents the reinstallation of an item immediately after
                      restoration is complete, store the item until reinstallation is possible, including
                      transportation to and from storage.

ALTERATIONS PROCEDURES                                                                                    01350 - 2
01350.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:31 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                        REV 0
-


                7.    In lieu of restoring an existing item, the Contractor may replace the item with a new
                      item, subject to the Architect's approval, and reclassify the original item as Trash.
           B.   Salvage
                1.    This term may be applied to useful items that will not be reused as part of the Project.
                2.    Immediately upon removal, durably tag each item designated 'salvage,' and record on a
                      written log the action of removal and all subsequent activi ties in connection with the item
                      through final disposition. Submit log to the Owner when and in the number of copies
                      requested.
                3.    Dismantle each item to useful sizes, shapes, or components and deliver the item to the
                      Owner on the site, set up or packaged for storage as directed or as specified. Place
                      equipment on wood skids for ease of handling. Removal of paint, degreasing, or
                      cleaning, except that required for normal handling, will not be required. Salvaged items
                      shall remain the property of the Owner.
           C.   Trash
                1.    Classify as Trash all used items not classified as Restore or Salvage.
                2.    Trash shall become property of the Contractor.
                3.    Remove Trash as the Work progresses, and legally dispose of Trash off the site.
     1.5 SUBMITTALS
           A.   Schedule and Method
                1.    Before start of the Project, submit for review and approval by the Architect a schedule of
                      the alteration work including the timing and method proposed to maintain service during
                      the construction period.
     1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
           A.   Owner's Occupancy
                1.    Consistent with the Contract progress schedule, schedule in advance work that will
                      interfere with Owner's occupancy. Obtain approval from the Owner of the schedule of
                      alterations and perform the Work in accordance with the approved schedule. Correlate
                      all activities, including mechanical and electrical work, to provide minimum interference
                      to the Owner's occupancy and use of the premises.
                2.    To make request for service or occupancy interruption, use Section 01350A, “Request
                      for Service/Occupancy Interruption,” unless Owner requires otherwise.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 FASTENER MATERIALS
           A.   Steel bolts: ASTM A307.

           B.   Expansion shields: Fed. Spec. FF-S-325, machine bolt type, tubular type, or self-drilling
                tubular type.

           C.   Capsule anchors: Emhart Fastening Systems Group "Molly Parabond" capsule anchors, Hilti
                Fastening Systems "HVA" adhesive anchors, or as approved.



ALTERATIONS PROCEDURES                                                                                  01350 - 3
01350.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:31 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 EXAMINATION
           A.   Prior to beginning Work, survey existing construction, including structure, finish, and
                equipment, adjacent to Work to be removed. Submit a written report of defects found in such
                work to the Architect.

           B.   Prior to cutting existing construction, investigate the presence of active utilities, including
                electrical conduits, telecommunication lines, and piping, which may be damaged by such
                cutting.

     3.2 PREPARATION
           A.   Preparation by Owner
                1.    Insofar as practicable, the Owner will vacate the areas of existing building in which
                      alterations are to be made or new Work installed. In such areas and in parts
                      immediately adjacent thereto and affected by the Work, the Owner will remove portable
                      furniture, portable fixtures and furnishings prior to commencement of the Work.
     3.3 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
           A.   Conduct alteration operations in a manner to create a minimum of noise, dust, and other
                disturbance.

           B.   Protection
                1.    Protect existing construction remaining in place and items to be restored or salvaged.
                      Repair damage to such construction caused by Work under the Contract.
                2.    Wherever travel by workers is necessary in a part of the existing building, provide
                      approved runways and protection. Keep all such parts clean.
     3.4 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION
           A.   Fire Exits
                1.    Provide temporary construction, including stairs, protected walkways, railings, lights,
                      and exit and direction signs, as required to maintain adequate exits from the existing
                      building meeting the approval of the State and local fire marshals.
                2.    Place no obstructions to impede traffic through the exits.
           B.   Temporary Supports
                1.    Be responsible for the structural integrity of the existing structure throughout the
                      alteration Work.
                2.    Provide shoring, bracing, and other temporary supports as necessary for the support of
                      existing structures supported by walls and other supporting structures that are to be
                      removed. Provide supports that are substantial and adequate to prevent movement of
                      the structures supported.
                3.    Attach to or support by temporary substantial supports services, equipment and other
                      items required, in the Owner's opinion, to maintain the normal function of the existing
                      building until new permanent construction is completed for their support, or until



ALTERATIONS PROCEDURES                                                                               01350 - 4
01350.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:31 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


                      otherwise directed. Included in this item is Owner's equipment built into or supported by
                      walls to be removed.
                4.    Submit details of supports and removal procedure to the Architect for examination prior
                      to beginning work.
                5.    Remove temporary supports when existing structure is supported by new Work.
           C.   Temporary Partitions
                1.    Provide dust-tight temporary partitions as required to separate parts of the building in
                      which Work, including work under separate contract, is being done from adjoining parts
                      occupied by the Owner.
                2.    Provide partition construction that has a fire resistance classification of one hour
                      minimum and is approved by the State fire marshal or other authority having jurisdiction.
                      Protect openings in such partitions by fire doors.
                3.    Remove temporary partitions upon completion of the Work for which separation was
                      provided. Repair damage to existing finish materials caused by partition construction
                      and attachments.
     3.5 BUILDING ALTERATIONS
           A.   Patching
                1.    Where existing walls have been removed, patch floors and ceilings with new materials to
                      match existing or specified materials, unless otherwise indicated.
                2.    Where walls, wainscoting, floors, or ceilings, and associated construction, are removed,
                      and adjacent surfaces, such as walls, floors, bases and ceilings, are to remain in place,
                      do all necessary additional removal and patching as needed so that disturbed surfaces
                      to remain will match existing adjacent undisturbed surfaces.
                3.    Where finish materials are removed for replacement by new materials, prepare the
                      substrate as required to receive the new finish materials.
                4.    Where openings in existing walls or partitions are to be closed, including openings left
                      by removal of ductwork, close the openings with new materials to match existing
                      materials, including wall finish where exposed. Patch such openings that occur in fire
                      rated partitions as required to maintain the fire resistance rating.
                5.    Where items that penetrate existing ceilings are removed, such as diffusers and lighting
                      fixtures, close the openings with new materials to match existing materials, including
                      suspension system.
                6.    Replace fireproofing material that has been removed from structural steel members with
                      equal material as required to maintain the existing fire resistance rating.
           B.   Connections to Existing Work
                1.    Make proper and approved connections of new Work to existing construction and all
                      necessary adjustments of either or both as required to produce a complete job.
                2.    Clean areas of existing structural steel to which new work is to be welded free of
                      fireproofing, paint and other foreign matter for a space of not less than 75 mm (3 inches)
                      around each weld, using power brushing in accordance with SSPC-SP 3. Do not use
                      solvents.
                3.    Make anchorages into existing concrete and masonry with steel bolts and expansion
                      shields, except where capsule anchors are indicated. Use no powder-actuated anchors



ALTERATIONS PROCEDURES                                                                                01350 - 5
01350.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:31 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


                      for anchorages into existing construction unless approval to do so is obtained from
                      Owner.
           C.   Alterations Related to Mechanical and Electrical Work
                1.    Cut and patch existing construction as required for mechanical and electrical demolition
                      and alteration work.
                2.    Remove abandoned mechanical and electrical services and equipment where such
                      items are in existing construction to be removed.
                3.    Support, temporarily, mechanical and electrical servi ces and equipment that are
                      attached to walls or other structures to be removed and which are to remain in service.
                      Remove temporary supports when so directed.
                4.    Perform cutting, demolition, and the work of providing temporary supports in which
                      mechanical and electrical work is involved only under supervision of the respective
                      mechanical and electrical trades.
                5.    Refer also to specification sections 15090 and 16090.

                                              END OF SECTION




ALTERATIONS PROCEDURES                                                                              01350 - 6
01350.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:31 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                      SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                  22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                  REV 0
-


                                                SECTION 01350A
                          APPENDIX 'A' - REQUEST FOR SERVICE/OCCUPANCY INTERRUPTION

DATE OF PROPOSED INTERRUPTION: ___________                         DATE TRANSMITTED: _________________

RE:         ___________ ___________________________________________________________________
            Project No.      Project/Package Title
Previously Scheduled? ______ No ______Yes               __________________________________________
                                                        Scheduled Date(s)


The Undersigned requests the following Service/Occupancy Interruption:
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________

BY:         ___________________________________       ___________________________________________
            Name                                      Signature
____________________________________________________________________________________
Organization
____________________________________________________________________________________
Address
___________________ ___________________              ___________________________________________
Telephone                        Fax                 Attachments


____________________________________________________________________________________

REQUEST APPROVED: _____ NO _____ YES                               DATE TRANSMITTED: _________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Comments
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________

BY:         _________________________________         ___________________________________________
            Name                                      Signature
____________________________________________________________________________________
Organization
____________________________________________________________________________________
Address
___________________ __________________               ___________________________________________
Telephone                        Fax                 Attachments




APPENDIX 'A' - REQUEST FOR SERVICE/OCCUPANCY INTERRUPTION                                      01350A - 1
01350a.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:31 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                         SECTION 01420
                                                                          REFERENCES

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           REFERENCE STANDARDS ........................................................................................................................................... 1


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
           A.       General
                    1.       Reference standards are incorporated into the Specifications by referring to a number,
                             title, or other designation of the standard referenced. The provisions of a standard so
                             referenced are a part of the Section of the Specifications in which the reference is made,
                             and thus part of the Contract Documents, just as though the standard were duplicated in
                             the Section in its entirety.
           B.       Incorporation of Standards into the Specifications
                    1.       Part 1 - General, of a Section of the Specifications contains a list of the standards that
                             are referenced in Part 2 - Products, and Part 3 - Execution, of the Section. The list is
                             usually under a heading titled "References," and contains the following information:
                             a. the full names of the standards organizations that have authored the specified
                                  standards;
                             b. the initials or acronyms by which the respective organizations are referred in Parts
                                  2 and 3 of the Section; and
                             c. the number/letter designations and full titles of the referenced standards.
                    2.       The list in Part 1 is only a form of index; it is not the place where the standards are
                             incorporated into the Section, unless there are words in that location which specifically
                             say so.
                    3.       The reference standards listed in Part 1 are incorporated into the Section in Parts 2 and
                             3 (unless the specific wording to do so is included in Part 1, as mentioned in the
                             preceding paragraph).
                    4.       In Parts 2 and 3, the standard is generally referred to simply by the acronym of the
                             authoring standards organization and the number/letter designation of the standard
                             proper (e.g., ASTM A36). The wording of the reference provision may be as explicit as,
                             "Provide structural steel that complies with the provisions of ASTM A36", or it may only
                             say, "Structural steel: ASTM A36". Both approaches are of equal validity in making the
                             standard a part of the Section.
                    5.       Some Sections may not contain the Part I article "References." Lack of the article
                             "References," or text of a similar intent, in a Section does not invalidate the
                             incorporation into the Section of the standards which may be referenced in Parts 2 or 3
                             of the Section.

                                                                          END OF SECTION




REFERENCES                                                                                                                                                                  01420 - 1
01420.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:32 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                      SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                  22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                  REV 0
-


                                                          SECTION 01630
                                                 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

                                                                         SECTION INDEX
   1.1          PRODUCT OPTIONS ..................................................................................................................................................... 1
   1.2          PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST AND SUBSTITUTION REQUESTS................................................................................... 1
   1.3          SUBSTITUTIONS DURING CONSTRUCTION.................................................................................................................. 3
   1.4          SUBSTITUTIONS DURING THE BIDDING PERIOD OR AS VOLUNTARY ALTERNATES ................................................ 4


     1.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS
           A.       Products are generally specified by reference standard (reference to a standard specification,
                    method of testing, trade association standard, or other similar standard) or by manufacturer's
                    name and product model number or trade name.
                    1.       When specification is by reference standard only, Contractor may select any product by
                             any manufacturer meeting the standard.
                    2.       When only one manufacturer's product is specified, such is the basis of the Contract
                             without substitution or exception.
                    3.       When two or more manufacturers' products are specified, they shall be considered as
                             being equally acceptable, and Contractor has the option of using any product named.
                    4.       When one or more manufacturers' products are specified followed by the words "as
                             approved," or words to that effect, including “or equal” and “equal to,” comply with
                             specified submittal and approval requirements for product substitutions.
           B.       Product Uniformity: It is the intent of the Documents that the completed construction be
                    uniform throughout the Project. For each type of product, the manufacturer and model shall
                    not vary. When a particular product has been identified and approved for an application, that
                    product shall be used for that application without change across all the subcontracts and
                    other Work-related contracts held by the Contractor or Construction Manager. This provision
                    applies equally to accepted substitutions.
                    1.       Exceptions: Product uniformity is not required if all of the following conditions are met:
                             a. There is no difference in appearance, as determined by the Architect.
                             b. There is no difference in performance, as determined by the Architect; this includes
                                 compatibility with other products, and may include criteria not specified.
                             c. There is no difference in the spare parts and other maintenance supplies involved
                                 with the product variation.
           C.       A product specified by reference standard shall comply with the requirements of the standard
                    in effect on the date of the Bidding Documents, unless a date is specified with the standard;
                    then the edition of the standard so dated shall govern.

     1.2 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST AND SUBSTITUTION REQUESTS
           A.       The intent of the Documents is:
                    1.       To fully identify, prior to beginning the Work, the products Contractor intends to provide
                             and the product substitutions Contractor requests.
                    2.       To facilitate submittal processing by avoiding the submittal of unspecified and
                             unacceptable products.


PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS                                                                                                                                     01630 - 1
01630.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:32 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


           B.   Proposed Products List
                1.    Within 30 calendar days after date of receipt of notice to proceed and before submittal of
                      any Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples, submit for approval, in four copies, the
                      List of the products proposed for installation. Include the name of the manufacturer for
                      each product and, where applicable, the names of Subcontractors.
                2.    The List shall be tabulated by and be complete for each Specification Section.
                3.    Include in the List products selected from the Contract Documents and, where the
                      Contract Documents allow, products proposed as substitutions. Clearly mark the
                      products proposed as substitutions.
                4.    Attach to the List a completed Substitution Request Form for each proposed
                      substitution, and check the box in each Form that says the request is being submitted
                      in conjunction with the Proposed Products List.
           C.   Substitution Requests With the Proposed Products List
                1.    A requests for substitution will be considered, subject to the following requirements:
                      a. That the proposed substitution is submitted using a separate copy of Section
                           01630A, Appendix ‘A’ - Substitution Request Form.
                      b. That the substitution request is submitted at the time the proposed products list is
                           submitted. A request submitted after the time set for submittal of the proposed
                           product list is subject to automatic rejection.
                      c. That complete data on the proposed substitution are included with the request
                           proving its compliance with the Contract Documents. Such data shall include:
                           1) product identification and description, including Product Data highlighted to
                                  show applicability to the proposed substitution and project conditions;
                           2) performance and test data;
                           3) references, and samples, where applicable; and
                           4) an itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the product
                                  specified in the Contract Documents, including data relating to design and
                                  artistic effect, where applicable. .
                      d. That copies of the pertinent Contract Documents are included with the request,
                           marked and highlighted to show changes related to the proposed substitution.
                      e. That if the proposed substitution is due to unavailability of a specified product, a
                           written statement accompanies it from the supplier of the specified product
                           confirming lack of availability.
                      f.   That Contractor (Requester) understands by submitting the request for substitution,
                           it is affirming that 1) the proposed substitution conforms to the required dimensions
                           and meets or exceeds the standards of required function, appearance, and quality
                           set by the specified product, and 2) the burden of proof rests with the Contractor.
                      g. That Contractor understands by submitting a request for substitution, it is agreeing
                           to absorb all costs resulting from acceptance of the proposed substitution,
                           including both known and subsequently discovered revisions to other construction
                           to accommodate the substitution, and unforeseen costs, such as delays and
                           additional architectural services.
                      h. That Contractor understands by submitting a request for substitution, it is agreeing
                           to absorb all costs resulting from acceptance of the proposed substitution,
                           including
           D.   A request for a substitution forwarded by the Contractor means that Contractor:

PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS                                                                     01630 - 2
01630.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:32 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


                1.    Has investigated the proposed substitution.
                2.    Has determined that the substitution is equal to or superior in quality and serviceability
                      (performance) to the product specified in the Contract Documents.
                3.    Will provide the same guarantee for the substitution that is required for the product
                      specified in the Contract Documents.
                4.    Waives all claims for additional costs that subsequently become apparent as a result of
                      the substitution.
                5.    Will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitution into the Work, and will make
                      such changes in the Work of the various trades as may be required to provide a
                      completed condition.
           E.   A request for a substitution will not be considered if:
                1.    The substitution is merely indicated or implied on the Shop Drawing or Product Data
                      submittal without the specified formal request and documented proof of conformance.
                2.    Implementation requires a major revision of the Contract Documents in order to
                      accommodate the substitution.
                3.    The submittal request is substantially incomplete.
           F.   Architect’s Review of Proposed Products List and Substitution Requests
                1.    The Architect will review the Proposed Products List in conjunction with the substitution
                      requests.
                2.    The Architect will evaluate each substitution request and inform Contractor in writing
                      whether the proposed substitution is accepted, accepted as noted, or not accepted.
                      a.     Substitution requests that do not conform to requirements, including timing, are
                             subject to return without review.
                      b.     A substitution will not be considered accepted by the Owner until it has been
                             documented by Change Order.
                3.    The Architect's decision as to conformance and acceptability will be consistent with the
                      intent of the Contract Documents.
                4.    In the absence of written acceptance of a substitution request, proposed substitutions
                      shall be understood as not accepted.
     1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS DURING CONSTRUCTION
           A.   Use no product in the Work that is not specified or shown in the Contract Documents or
                approved by the Architect as a substitution.

           B.   If during construction of the Work, a situation requires or suggests use of a substitute
                product, submit to the Architect a request for approval of the substitution.

           C.   Make each request on a Substitution Request Form (electronic version of Section 01630A
                available from the Architect) fully executed in accordance with the provisions of Article,
                Proposed Products List and Substitution Requests, except for the provisions relating to the
                Proposed Products List, and check the box in the Form that says the Bidder’ request is
                being submitted separate from and after submittal of the Proposed Products List..




PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS                                                                     01630 - 3
01630.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:32 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                            22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                            REV 0
-


     1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS DURING THE BIDDING PERIOD OR AS VOLUNTARY ALTERNATES
           A.   Refer to the Instructions to Bidders.


                                              END OF SECTION




PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS                                         01630 - 4
01630.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:32 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                        SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                    22511.000
-                                                                                                    REV 0

                                                   SECTION 01630A
                                      APPENDIX 'A' - SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
This substitution request is governed by the provisions of Section 01630.
Date of Substitution Request:           Bid Package No:          or  n.a. Submittal No:         or    n.a.
   This Substitution Request is submitted during the bidding period.
   This Substitution Request is submitted in conjunction with Proposed Products List dated
   This Substitution Request is submitted separate from and after submittal of the Proposed Products List.
RE:
       Specifications Section Title                                           Section No.   Page      Paragraph

PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION:
Reason for Substitution:

General Description:




The accompanying attachments, per 01630, provide a full description of the proposed substitution.
Proposed change:
   To Contract Sum:                      None              Add:              Deduct:                  $
   To Contract Time:                     None              Add:              Deduct:                      days
Assumption Of Responsibility For Equal Performance
Requester affirms that the proposed substitution conforms to required dimensions and meets or exceeds the
standards of required function, appearance, and quality set by the specified product. Requester
understands and affirms compliance with the provisions of Section 01630.

                      Requester’s Name                                                                     Date


                      Requester’s Firm


ARCHITECT’S EVALUATION:
The proposed substitution is:
  Not Reviewed;               Not Acceptable;                    Acceptable As Noted;              Acceptable
Remarks:



                      Name                                                                                 Date
cc:   Owner; Requester; Contractor; SmithGroup Specs Group
Note: Owner’s Acceptance of substitution request is not valid until documented through addendum or
contract modification.
                                                   END OF FORM




APPENDIX 'A' - SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM                                                           01630A - 1
01630a.doc
saved 12.24.2003 2:18 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:32 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                    SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                REV 0
-


                                                           SECTION 01660
                                                     PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE

                                                                        SECTION INDEX

   1.1          RECEIVING OF PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................................................... 1
   1.2          PRODUCT STORAGE................................................................................................................................................... 1
   1.3          TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION OPENINGS .................................................................................................................. 2
   1.4          PRODUCT PROTECTION............................................................................................................................................... 2


     1.1 RECEIVING OF PRODUCTS
           A.       Owner-Furnished Items
                    1.      Give receipts to the Owner for items received from the Owner for storage, erection, or
                            installation. Be responsible for the care and storage of such items and pay for the cost
                            of replacing or repairing any items damaged or stolen.
           B.       Delivery to Owner
                    1.      Do not deliver construction products to the Owner’s receiving facilities. The Owner will
                            not accept or be responsible in any way for Contractor-purchased products.
     1.2 PRODUCT STORAGE
           A.       Storage Area
                    1.      Establish a staging area, and product storage area in location designated by the Owner.
           B.       Storage of Products
                    1.      Store products in a neat and orderly manner, whether on or off the site, to prevent
                            damage thereto and to facilitate inspection and taking of inventories.
                    2.      Store unpacked products on shelves or in bins, unless of such size and weight as to
                            require storage at ground level.
                    3.      Support products stored at ground level clear of ground on supports that will not transmit
                            moisture to the stored products..
           C.       Storage Identification
                    1.      Conspicuously tag or otherwise mark stored products for ready identification.
           D.       Storage Layout
                    1.      Maintain a current layout of all storage facilities.
                    2.      Allocate the available storage areas and coordinate their use by the trades on the
                            Project.
           E.       Storage of Perishable Items
                    1.      Store products that may be affected by weather or atmospheric conditions in locations
                            protected from weather and under controlled conditions of temperature and humidity in
                            accordance with the respective manufacturers’ requirements or as specified. In case of
                            conflict between a manufacturer’s requirements and the Specifications, follow the more
                            restrictive requirements.


PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE                                                                                                                                       01660 - 1
01660.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:32 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                              SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                          22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                          REV 0
-


     1.3 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION OPENINGS
           A.   Openings
                1.    Provide access openings in floors, roof construction, walls and partitions, where required
                      for moving in products for Work within existing building or buildings. Coordinate
                      requirements for access openings with Owner.
           B.   Restoration of Openings
                1.    Close or restore access openings made for the moving in of products when such access
                      is no longer required, and finish to match adjacent construction. Do not make structural
                      modifications without written approval by Architect.
     1.4 PRODUCT PROTECTION
           A.   General
                1.    In addition to the requirements for protection of persons and property specified in the
                      Conditions of the Contract and the Specifications, provide and maintain proper and
                      sufficient protection and coverings for stored and installed products from malicious
                      damage, construction- and weather-related damage, and from loss by theft.
           B.   Missing and Damaged Items
                1.    In the event products are stolen, misplaced or damaged prior to their installation in the
                      Work, replace those items that are missing and repair or replace those items that are
                      damaged at no additional expense to the Owner.
           C.   Mechanical and Electrical Products
                1.    Set pipe, fittings, trim and valves off the ground or floors on racks or in bins to prevent
                      dirt or water from entering any part. Cover these items with tarpaulins or plastic sheets
                      to protect them at all times from rain, snow, or construction dirt. Insert plastic caps in all
                      connections until joints are made.
                2.    Set machinery and equipment, whether boxed or crated, on skids or pallets at least four
                      inches off the floor or ground and cover with plastic or canvas. Maintain covers free of
                      holes or leaks.
                3.    Do not remove crated or boxed equipment from their containers until ready for
                      installation, unless containers become moisture soaked, then containers shall be
                      removed immediately and material dried and recovered with moisture proof covering.
                4.    Maintain seals or covers over inlet and outlet connections of valves, pumps, fans and
                      other equipment until installed.
                5.    Cover factory-finished surfaces, finned elements and coils, rotating devices, control
                      instruments, faces of thermometers and gauges, fuel burners, bearings, belts and
                      sheaves, flexible drive couplings, ground or polished surfaces, mechanical seals and
                      electric motors with a durable plastic or fabric material that will prevent the entry of
                      plaster, mortar, cement dust, water or other foreign materials, wherever possible.
                      Maintain the covers until the items are thoroughly cleaned, painted and ready for final
                      operation. Apply covers in a manner to provide maximum protection against marring of
                      finishes. If necessary provide padding behind protective cover.




PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE                                                                              01660 - 2
01660.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:32 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                       SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                   22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                   REV 0
-


                6.    Should inspection indicate the formation of ice in a system component that might cause
                      damage to that component, replace the component at no additional expense to the
                      Owner.

                                              END OF SECTION




PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE                                                                       01660 - 3
01660.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:32 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                       REV 0
-


                                                                      SECTION 01780
                                                                    RECORD DOCUMENTS

                                                                           SECTION INDEX

   1.1          GENERAL PROVISIONS ............................................................................................................................................... 1
   1.2          RECORDING................................................................................................................................................................. 1
   1.3          RECORD DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................................................... 2
   1.4          RECORD SPECIFICATIONS AND ADDENDA ................................................................................................................. 2
   1.5          COMPLETION................................................................................................................................................................ 2
   1.6          TRANSMITTAL LETTER................................................................................................................................................ 3


     1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
           A.       Maintain at the Project Site, one copy of the:
                    1.       Drawings
                    2.       Specifications
                    3.       Addenda.
                    4.       Approved Shop Drawings.
                    5.       Change Orders and other Modifications.
                    6.       Field test records.
                    7.       Other documents referenced in the Contract
           B.       Such documents shall be known as "Record Documents," and shall be marked by the
                    Contractor to reflect an accurate and up-to-date record of actual construction of the Work as
                    it progresses.

           C.       Label each Record Document, "Record Document", in highly visible printed letters.

           D.       Store the Record Documents in files or on racks as appropriate, in the field office or at other
                    approved location, and apart from documents used for construction.

           E.       Maintain the Record Documents in clean, dry, legible condition.

           F.       Do not use the Record Documents for construction purposes.

           G.       Make the Record Documents readily available for reference by the Architect.

           H.       Contractor is fully and totally responsible for the accuracy and completeness of the Record
                    Documents.

     1.2 RECORDING
           A.       Record all instances where actual field construction differs from the Work as shown on the
                    Drawings, and identify origin of change.

           B.       Keep the Record Documents up-to-date concurrent with the progress of the Work. Updating
                    shall be performed, with the concurrence of the Architect:
                    1.       Prior to concealment of Work;

RECORD DOCUMENTS                                                                                                                                                           01780 - 1
01780.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:33 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


                2.    When directed by the Architect; and
                3.    Not less than every two weeks.
     1.3 RECORD DRAWINGS
           A.   Make drawing changes on a set of escolene sepias purchased from the Architect for cost of
                reproduction; or on a set of blue-line prints, from which the Contractor then transfers the
                information to the Record Drawing sepias prior to submittal.

           B.   Carefully draw information and letter notes of explanation on the Record Drawing
                transparencies. If, in the Architect's opinion, the record indications are not legible or are
                                                 h
                otherwise unsatisfactory for t e purpose, make new Record Drawings to accomplish the
                desired result to the satisfaction of the Architect.

           C.   In the case of a Change Order issuance, replace the Record Drawings with the revised
                Drawings incorporating the Contract Modifications.

           D.   Locate all moved and concealed items with reference to approved, visible horizontal and
                vertical reference datum.

           E.   The following items are representative, but not all-inclusive, of the information which shall be
                recorded on the record drawings:
                1.    Changes in depth, shape, location, or other characteristics of foundations, columns,
                      beams, openings, concrete reinforcing, lintels, and concealed anchorages.
                2.    Changes in plan, sections, elevations and details, such as shifts in location of walls,
                      doors, windows and stairs.
                3.    Final locations and arrangement of mechanical equipment and concealed plumbing,
                      including supply and circulating mains, vent stacks, and sanitary and storm water
                      drainage.
                4.    Changes made in electrical design, final arrangement of electric circuits, light switches,
                      and telephone and other outlets.
                5.    Final location and arrangement of underground utilities, connections to buildings and
                      rerouting of existing utilities, including sanitary, storm, heating, electric, signal, gas,
                      water and telephone. Horizontal location of underground utilities shall be by dimension
                      to established elevation at invert from permanent benchmark. Points of vertical location
                      shall be located horizontally.
     1.4 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS AND ADDENDA
           A.   Legibly annotate Specification Sections and Addenda and Change Order items to record
                manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product actually installed.

     1.5 COMPLETION
           A.   Submit the Record Drawing sepias and other Record Documents to the Architect with the
                request for final payment. Each drawing shall be stamped "Record Drawing" or "Record
                Document" and a notation made on the drawing or other document certifying its
                completeness. Shop Drawings will not be acceptable as Record Drawings.




RECORD DOCUMENTS                                                                                       01780 - 2
01780.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:33 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                       SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                   22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                   REV 0
-


     1.6 TRANSMITTAL LETTER
           A.   Accompany the Record Document submittal with a transmittal letter containing:
                1.    Date.
                2.    Project title and Architect's Project number.
                3.    Name of Contract.
                4.    Contractor's name and address.
                5.    Title and number of each Record Document.
                6.    Certification that each Record Document, as submitted, is complete and accurate.
                7.    Signature of the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative.

                                             END OF SECTION




RECORD DOCUMENTS                                                                                  01780 - 3
01780.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:33 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                   SECTION 06070
                                                             FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................................................. 1
  1.3           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 1
  1.4           QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.5           STORAGE AND PROTECTION...................................................................................................................................... 2

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 2
  2.1           MATERIALS.................................................................................................................................................................. 2
  2.2           FABRICATION .............................................................................................................................................................. 2

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 2
  3.1           INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................................................. 2


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 REFERENCES
           A.       American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
                    1.       D3043 - Methods of Testing Structural Panels in Flexure.
           B.       American Wood-Preservers' Association (AWPA)
                    1.       C20 - Structural Lumber - Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes.
                    2.       C27 - Plywood - Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes.
           C.       Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL).
                    1.       Building Materials Directory.

     1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
           A.       General
                    1.       Wood products specified to be fire-retardant-treated: AWPA C20 for lumber and C27 for
                             plywood, Interior Type A performance rating, including the requirements for moisture
                             content and fire hazard classification test extended to 30 minutes duration.
                    2.       Listing of formulations per AWPA P-17 is not required.
           B.       Finished Surfaces
                    1.       Provide treatment materials which do not bleed through finished surfaces.

     1.3 SUBMITTALS
           A.       Warranty
                    1.       Submit a statement of compliance with the performance requirements.



FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT                                                                                                                                                    06070 - 1
06070.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:33 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                      SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                  22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                  REV 0
-


     1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
           A.   Provide treated wood products which bear the classification marking of an approved
                independent inspection agency having a follow-up inspection service at the treatment plant
                and the mark of a national evaluation report provided by National Evaluation Service, Inc.

     1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
           A.   Keep interior fire-retardant-treated wood products dry at all times and ventilated to avoid
                moisture condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 MATERIALS
           A.   Refer to Section 06100 for lumber and plywood.

           B.   Treated lumber and plywood: listed in the UL Building Materials Directory with FR-S
                designation, or maximum smoke developed rating of 30, kiln dried after treatment.

     2.2 FABRICATION
           A.   Perform milling parallel to the grain of lumber prior to pressure impregnation. Field cuts
                across the grain require no further treatment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 INSTALLATION
           A.   Refer to Section 06100.


                                            END OF SECTION




FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT                                                                         06070 - 2
06070.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:33 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                         SECTION 06100
                                                                           CARPENTRY

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING...................................................................................................................... 2
  1.3           PROJECT CONDITIONS................................................................................................................................................. 2

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 2
  2.1           MATERIALS.................................................................................................................................................................. 2
  2.2           FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED WOOD ........................................................................................................................... 4

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
  3.1           INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS.......................................................................................................................... 4
  3.2           ROUGH CARPENTRY ................................................................................................................................................... 4
  3.3           FINISH CARPENTRY ..................................................................................................................................................... 4
  3.4           PROTECTION................................................................................................................................................................ 5


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 REFERENCES
           A.       American Plywood Association (APA)
                    1.       Design/Construction Guide: Residential and Commercial.
           B.       American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
                    1.       A153 - Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
                    2.       A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
                             Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
                    3.       C220 - Specification for Flat Asbestos-Cement Sheets.
                    4.       E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
           C.       American Wood-Preservers’ Association (AWPA)
                    1.       C2 - Lumber, Timbers, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties - Preservative Treatment by Pressure
                             Processes.
                    2.       C9 - Plywood - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes.
                    3.       M4 - Care of Preservative-Treated Wood Products.
           D.       Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.)
                    1.       TT-P-38D - Paint, Aluminum, Ready-Mixed.
                    2.       TT-V-121H - Varnish, Spar, Water-Resisting.
           E.       National Forest Products Association (NFPA)
                    1.       National Design Specification for Wood Construction.
           F.       Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB)
                    1.       Grading Rules.


CARPENTRY                                                                                                                                                                   06100 - 1
06100.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:33 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


           G.   U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology
                1.    PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood
           H.   West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLB)
                1.    Standard Grading Rules.
     1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
           A.   Storage and Protection
                1.    Protect lumber and plywood and keep under cover both in transit and at the job site.
                2.    Lumber, plywood, and other wood materials shall not be stored in the building or other
                      storage area unless it is sufficiently dry so that the wood materials will not be damaged
                      by excessive changes in moisture content.
                3.    Store plywood flat with provision for good circulation of air.
     1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
           A.   Environmental Requirements
                1.    Install finished woodwork only when normal temperature and humidity conditions
                      approximate the interior conditions that will exist when the building is occupied.
           B.   Field Measurements
                1.    Take field measurements to verify and supplement dimensions indicated. Be responsible
                      for accurate fit of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 MATERIALS
           A.   Grading Rules
                1.    Provide wood which conforms to and is graded in accordance with the current grading
                      rules of the lumber association or inspection bureau having jurisdiction for the wood
                      species specified, as listed by the national lumber manufacturers association "Grade
                      Mark". Apply a "Trade Mark" and "Mill Identification Mark" of the association or
                      inspection bureau having jurisdiction on each piece of lumber and plywood delivered to
                      the Project. Grade, trade and mill marks will not be required if shipments are
                      accompanied by a certificate of inspection (grading) issued by the lumber association or
                      inspection bureau having jurisdiction.
           B.   Moisture Content
                1.    For dimension lumber: conform to the rules of the lumber association or inspection
                      bureau under which it is graded.
                2.    For finish lumber, and boards used as grounds: kiln dried to provide, at time of delivery
                      to the Project site, a maximum of 15 percent for material one inch thick. For board
                      lumber used for other nailers and blocking: kiln dried or air dried to provide a maximum
                      of 19 percent.
           C.   Common Lumber




CARPENTRY                                                                                            06100 - 2
06100.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:33 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


                1.      Boards and dimension lumber: Standard grade Douglas Fir or Spruce or No. 2 grade
                        Southern Pine, surfaced 4 sides.
           D.   Finish Lumber
                1.      D Select grade Ponderosa Pine or Quality grade Idaho Pine or Norway Pine.
           E.   Plywood
                1.      Douglas Fir plywood complying with PS 1, B-D or C-D plugged grade, unless otherwise
                        specified.
                2.      Plywood specified to receive preservative or fire-retardant treatment: exterior type or
                        interior type with exterior adhesive.
           F.   Rough Hardware
                1.      General
                        a.   Provide all items of rough hardware, such as spikes, nails, bolts, toggle bolts,
                             anchor bolts, wood screws, straps, and clips necessary for the installation of the
                             Work and of suitable type and size.
                        b.   Rough hardware for attachment of fire-retardant-treated wood: galvanized in
                             accordance with ASTM A153.
                        c.   Straps, clips, and similar connectors in contact with preservative-treated wood:
                             hot-dip galvanized to minimum G185 per ASTM A653
                2.      Anchor bolts
                        a. For wood blocking to concrete and masonry: steel, 13 mm (1/2 inch) diameter, 200
                            mm (8 inches) long for concrete and 400 mm (16 inches) long for masonry, unless
                            otherwise indicated, and provided with washer and nut both ends.
                        b. For wood blocking to steel members: steel, 10 mm (3/8 inch) diameter and
                            provided with washer and nut.
                3.      Fasteners for Wood Nailers and Blocking
                        a.   To solid masonry and concrete: one of the following:
                             1)   8-mm (5/16-inch) or 10-mm (3/8-inch) steel bolts and medium duty or heavy
                                  duty Ackerman Johnson Fasteners.
                             2)   8-mm (5/16-inch) flat-head drop-in expansion bolts, such as ANKR-TITE
                                  Fastening Systems "Wej-It" or ITW Ramset/Redhead "Dynabolt".
                             3)   Powder-actuated fasteners, 6 -mm (1/4-inch) head diameter, 75-mm (3-inch)
                                  drive pin high velocity for concrete, and 63-mm (2-1/2-inch) drive pin low
                                  velocity for masonry.
                        b.   To cells of hollow masonry: 8-mm (5/16-inch) toggle bolts or toggle screw anchors.
                        c.   To metal deck and metal studs: No. 12 self-drilling self-tapping screws.
                        d.   To rolled or formed steel members: powder-actuated fasteners, 6      -mm (1/4-inch_
                             head diameter, 63-mm (2-1/2-inch) drive pin.
           G.   Nails
                1.      For plywood: 8d common.
           H.   Wood Primer


CARPENTRY                                                                                             06100 - 3
06100.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:33 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                              SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                          22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                          REV 0
-


                1.    Aluminum linseed oil paint conforming to Fed. Spec. TT-P-38D or water-resisting spar
                      varnish conforming to Fed. Spec. TT-V-121H.
     2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED WOOD
           A.   Refer to Section 06070.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
           A.   Furnish necessary templates for anchor bolts and other items specified to be built into
                concrete, masonry, and other Work.

           B.   Be responsible for the accurate location of built-in anchorage devices and other items as
                required.

     3.2 ROUGH CARPENTRY
           A.   General
                1.    Execute rough carpentry in accordance with best trade practices.
                2.    Provide common lumber for rough carpentry.
           B.   Wood Nailers and Blocking for Flashings
                1.    Provide continuous wood nailers and blocking, cut with square edges, and in as long
                      lengths as practicable. Cut wood nailers where they cross a building control joint.
                      Provide wood blocking over nailers where indicated, securely nailed in place.
                      Countersink heads of bolts flush with the top surface of the nailer.
                2.    Secure nailers to concrete and masonry with fasteners located at uniform spacing of
                      750 mm (30 inches) maximum and at 150 (6 inches) maximum from each end of nailer.
                      Embed anchor bolts in grout at top of masonry wall.
                3.    Anchor nailers to steel and metal deck where indicated. Locate anchors at uniform
                      spacing of 600 mm (24 inches) maximum and at 150 mm (6 inches) maximum from
                      each end of nailer.
           C.   Miscellaneous Wood Blocking
                1.    Coordinate wood blocking embedded in concrete or with anchors embedded in masonry
                      with concrete and masonry Work respectively.
                2.    Provide wood blocking to receive tracks suspended from overhead building construction,
                      including all inserts, anchor bolts, fasteners, hangers, bracing and other components
                      necessary for a rigid installation.
     3.3 FINISH CARPENTRY
           A.   General
                1.    Carefully erect interior finish carpentry flat, plumb and true, with tight joints, coped where
                      possible. Secure Work with finishing nails or screws and glue. On surfaces exposed to
                      view, set nail heads and countersink screw heads. Sand interior woodwork to remove
                      machine marks and irregularities. Provide finish carpentry items which are free from
                      defects and blemishes.


CARPENTRY                                                                                                 06100 - 4
06100.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:33 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                    SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                REV 0
-


     3.4 PROTECTION
           A.   Protect the Work, including Work furnished under other Sections and installed under this
                Section, and adjacent construction against damage until completion.


                                            END OF SECTION




CARPENTRY                                                                                      06100 - 5
06100.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:33 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                 SECTION 07200
                                                                  INSULATION
                                                       (ORIGINAL BUILDING SPECIFICATION)

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           RELATED DOCUMENTS................................................................................................................................................ 1
  1.2           DESCRIPTION OF WORK .............................................................................................................................................. 1
  1.3           QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.4           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.5           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:..................................................................................................................... 2

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 2
  2.1           ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ............................................................................................................................... 2
  2.2           INSULATING MATERIALS............................................................................................................................................. 3
  2.3           AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS ......................................................................................................................... 4

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
  3.1           INSPECTION AND PREPARATION................................................................................................................................. 4
  3.2           INSTALLATION, GENERA L........................................................................................................................................... 4
  3.3           INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION:............................................................................... 4
  3.4           INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION:................................................................................................ 5
  3.5           PROTECTION................................................................................................................................................................ 5



PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
           A.       Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
                    Conditions and Division-1 specification sections, apply to work of this section.

     1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
           A.       Extent of insulation work is shown on drawings and indicated by provisions of this section.

           B.       Applications of insulation specified in this section include the following:
                    1.       Insulation under slabs-on-grade.
                    2.       Board-type building insulation, concealed.
                    3.       Blanket-type building insulation.
           C.       Safing insulation for curtainwall work, is specified in this section. Refer to Section 08900.

           D.       Extruded polystyrene board insulation for cavity walls is specified in Division 4 section “Unit
                    Masonry”.

           E.       Roof insulation in specified in the Division 7 section in which other roofing products, including
                    roofing membrane is covered.




INSULATION                                                                                                                                                                  07200 - 1
07200.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:55 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:33 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                             SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                         22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                         REV 0
-


           F.   Sound attenuation blankets installed as part of metal-framed gypsum drywall assemblies are
                specified in Division 9 section “Gypsum Drywall”.

     1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
           A.   Thermal Resistivity: Where thermal resistivity properties of insulation materials are designed
                by r-values they represent the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1”
                thick, measured by test method included in reference material standard or otherwise
                indicated. They are expressed by temperature difference in degrees F between the two
                exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at mean
                temperatures indicated.

           B.   Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials which are identical to those
                whose fire performance characteristics, as listed for each material or assembly of which
                insulation is a part, have been determined by testing, per method indicated below, by UL or
                other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
                1.    Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
                2.    Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
                3.    Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
     1.4 SUBMITTALS
           A.   Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product literature and installation instructions for each
                type of insulation and vapor retarder material required.
                1.    Certified Test Reports: With product data, submit copies of certified test reports
                      showing compliance with specified performance values, including r-values (aged values
                      for plastic insulations), densities, compression strengths, fire performance
                      characteristics, perm ratings, water absorption ratings and similar properties.
     1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
           A.   General Protection: Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet,
                soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for
                handling, storage and protection during installation.

           B.   Protection for Plastic Insulation
                1.    Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and
                      concealment.
                2.    Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to project
                      site ahead of installation time. Complete installation and concealment of plastic
                      materials as rapidly as possible in each area of work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
           A.   Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
                products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
                1.    Manufacturers of Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation:
                      a. Amoco Foam Products Co.

INSULATION                                                                                               07200 - 2
07200.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:55 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:33 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


                      b. Dow Chemical U.S.A.
                      c. Minnesota Diversified Products, Inc.
                      d. UC Industries.
                2.    Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation:
                      a. CetainTeed Corp.
                      b. Manville Corp.
                      c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
     2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS
           A.   General: Provide insulting materials which comply with requirements indicated for materials,
                compliance with referenced standards, and other characteristics.
                1.    Performed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer’s
                      standard thicknesses, widths and lengths.
           B.   Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation with closed-cells
                and integral high density skin, formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in a    n
                extrusion process to comply with ASTM C 578 for Type indicated; with 5-year aged r-values
                of 5.4 and 5 at 40 and 75 deg. F (4.4 and 23.9 deg.C), respectively; and as follows:
                1.    Type IV, 1.6 lb./cu. ft. min. density, unless otherwise indicated.
                2.    Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of
                      5 and 165, respectively.
           C.   Unfaced Glass Fiber Board Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by combining glass
                fibers with thermosetting resin binders to comply with ASTM C 612 for Class indicated; and
                as follows:
                1.    Medium Density Semi-Rigid Board: Class 1 and 2, nominal density of 3.0 lbs. per cu.
                      ft., r-value of 4.3 at 75 deg. F.
                2.    Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136 test.
           D.   Semi-Refractory Fiber Board Safing Insulation: Semi-rigid boards designed for use as a fire
                stop at openings between edge of slab and exterior wall panels, produced by combining
                semi-refractory mineral fiber manufactured from slag with thermosetting resin binders to
                comply with ASTM C 612, Class 1 and 2; nominal density of 4.0 lbs. per cu. ft.; passing
                ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; r-value of 4.0 at 75 deg. F.
                1.    Low Density Semi-Rigid Board: Class 1 and 2, nominal density of 4.0 lbs. per cu. ft., r-
                      value of 4.0 at 75 deg. F (23.9 deg. C).
                2.    Medium Density Semi-Rigid Board: Class 3, nominal density of 6 lbs. per cu. ft., r-value
                      of 4.16 at 75 deg. F (23.9 deg. C).
           E.   Unfaced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by combining
                mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665
                for Type I (blankets without membrane facing); and as follows:
                1.    Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass or slag.
                2.    Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136 test.
                3.    Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of
                      25 and 50, respectively.



INSULATION                                                                                          07200 - 3
07200.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:55 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:33 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


           F.   Faced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by combining
                mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665
                for Type III, Class A (blankets with reflective vapor-retarder membrane facing with flame
                spread of 25 or less); foil-scrim-kraft vapor-retarder membrane on one face, respectively and
                as follows:
                1.    Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass and slag.
                2.    Combustion Characteristics: Unfaced blanket/batt passes ASTM E 136 test.
                3.    Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of
                      25 and 50, respectively.
     2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
           A.   Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer, and
                complying with requirements for fire performance characteristics.

           B.   Mechanical Anchors: Type and size indicated or, if not indicated as recommended by
                insulation manufacturer for type of application and condition of substrate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
           A.   Require Installer to examine substrates and conditions under which insulation work is to be
                performed. A satisfactory substrate is one that complies with requirements of the section in
                which substrate and related work is specified. Obtain Installer’s written report listing
                conditions detrimental to performance of work in this section. Do not proceed with
                installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

           B.   Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removal of
                projections which might puncture vapor retarders.

     3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
           A.   Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case.
                If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult
                manufacturer’s technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with
                work.

           B.   Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly
                around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections which interfere with
                placement.

           C.   Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to
                make up total thickness.

     3.3 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION:
           A.   On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied in accordance with manufacturer’s
                instructions. Use type of adhesive recommended by manufacturer of insulation.



INSULATION                                                                                           07200 - 4
07200.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:55 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:33 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


           B.   Protect top surface of horizontal insulation (from damage during concrete work) by application
                of protection board.

     3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION:
           A.   Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with manufacturer’s
                recommendations. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive
                or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

     3.5 PROTECTION
           A.   General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from harmful weather exposures and
                from possible physical abuses, where possible by nondelayed installation of concealing work
                or, where that is not possible, by temporary covering or enclosure.

                                                   END OF SECTION




INSULATION                                                                                          07200 - 5
07200.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:55 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:33 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                 SECTION 07250
                                                                 FIREPROOFING
                                                       (ORIGINAL BUILDING SPECIFICATION)

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           RELATED DOCUMENTS................................................................................................................................................ 1
  1.2           DESCRIPTION OF WORK .............................................................................................................................................. 1
  1.3           QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................................................ 1
  1.4           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.5           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:..................................................................................................................... 2
  1.6           PROJECT CONDITIONS................................................................................................................................................. 2
  1.7           SEQUENCING ............................................................................................................................................................... 3

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 3
  2.1           CONCEALED SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING MATERIALS:.......................................................................................... 3
  2.2           AUXILIARY FIREPROOFING MATERIALS:.................................................................................................................... 4

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
  3.1           INSPECTION.................................................................................................................................................................. 4
  3.2           PREPARATION ............................................................................................................................................................. 5
  3.3           INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................................................. 5
  3.4           FIELD QUALITY CONTROL........................................................................................................................................... 5
  3.5           CLEANING, REPAIR AND PROTECTION........................................................................................................................ 6



PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
           A.       Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
                    Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

     1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
           A.       Extent of sprayed-on fireproofing is indicated on drawings and by provisions of this section.

           B.       Definitions: the following definitions apply to this section.
                    1.       Concealed spray-on fireproofing refers to applications where sprayed-on materials are
                             applied to surfaces which will be concealed from view behind other construction when
                             the Work is completed.
           C.       Gypsum board-based fireproofing is specified in Division-9 sections.

     1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
           A.       Single Source Responsibility: Obtain sprayed-on fireproofing materials from a single
                    manufacturer for each different product required.

           B.       Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide materials and construction which are identical to
                                                        erformance characteristics, according to test method
                    those tested for the following fire p

FIREPROOFING                                                                                                                                                                07250 - 1
07250.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:56 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:34 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


                indicated, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
                jurisdiction.
                1.    Fire Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to design designation in UL “Fire
                      Resistance Directory” for fire-rated assemblies in which sprayed-on fireproofing serves
                      as direct- applied protection, tested per ASTM E 119.
                2.    Surface Burning Characteristics: As indicated for each sprayed-on fireproofing product
                      required, tested per ASTM E 84 and listed in UL “Building Materials Directory”.
     1.4 SUBMITTALS
           A.   Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each sprayed-on fireproofing product
                indicated.

           B.   Test Reports: Submit the following test reports:
                1.    Certified test results from an independent testing laboratory indicating compliance of
                      sprayed-on fireproofing products with performance requirements indicated, including
                      asbestos content where applicable.
                2.    Test results of in-place performance as required under Part 3 of this section for field
                      quality control.
           C.   Certificates: Submit the following certificates:
                1.    Where primers are applied to steel in shop or field, submit statement from primer
                      manufacturers, certifying that primers are compatible with sprayed-on fireproofing and
                      will not impair its performance under fire exposed for applications indicated, as proved
                      by ASTM E 119 test. Include test and other data as evidence; distribute data to
                      sprayed-on fireproofing manufacturer.
                2.    Acceptance of steel primers by sprayed-on fireproofing manufacturer, based on data
                      submitted by primer manufacturer.
                3.    Sprayed-on fireproofing manufacturers’ certification that their products comply with
                      specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
     1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
           A.   Deliver products to project site in original, unopened packages with manufacturers’ labels
                identifying products legible and intact.          Include on labels names of products and
                manufacturers, date of manufacture and shelf life, where applicable. Also include UL labels
                for fire-resistance ratings applicable to project.

           B.   Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from project site and
                discard any materials which shelf life has expired.

           C.   Store materials inside, under cover, above ground and in a manner to keep them dry until
                ready to use. Remove from project site and discard any materials that have been exposed to
                moisture or have otherwise deteriorated.

     1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
           A.   Environmental Conditions: Do not install sprayed-on fireproofing when ambient or substrate
                temperatures are 40 deg. F and falling, unless temporary protection and heat can be provided


FIREPROOFING                                                                                        07250 - 2
07250.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:56 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:34 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


                to maintain temperatures of both at or above this temperature level for 24 hours before, during
                and for 24 hours after application of sprayed fireproofing. Ventilate spray fireproofing by
                means of natural or, where this inadequate, of forced air circulation during and after
                application until it dries thoroughly.

     1.7 SEQUENCING
           A.   Sequence and coordinate application of sprayed-on fireproofing with other, related work
                specified in other sections to comply with the following requirements:
                1.    Prevent deterioration of sprayed-fireproofing for interior applications due to exposure to
                      unfavorable environmental conditions.
                2.    Avoid unnecessary exposure of sprayed-on fireproofing to abrasion and other damage
                      likely to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application.
                3.    Ensure that sprayed-fireproofing is installed prior to installation of enclosing or
                      concealing work, with sufficient time allowed for inspection, testing and correction of
                      defective fireproofing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 CONCEALED SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING MATERIALS:
           A.   General: For concealed applications of sprayed-on fireproofing provide manufacturer’s
                standard products complying with requirements indicated below fore material composition
                and physical properties representative of installed products.

           B.   Material Composition: One of the following products.

           C.   Cementitious Fireproofing: Factory-mixed dry formulation of inorganic binders and lightweight
                                                                   ite
                mineral aggregates mixed with water at project s to form a slurry for pumping and for
                dispersal by compressed air introduced at spray nozzle.

           D.   Mineral Fiber Fireproofing: Factory-mixed dry formulation of inorganic binders, mineral fibers,
                fillers and additives for sprayed-on application by conveying dry mixture by low pressure air
                through hose and mixing it with water at spray nozzle.

           E.   Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, measured per standard
                test methods referenced with each property, as follows:
                1.    Bond Strength: 80 lbf., per sq. ft. per ASTM E 736.
                2.    Compressive Strength: 3.47 lbf., per sq. in. per ASTM E 761.
                3.    Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937.
                4.    Deflection: No cracking, spalling, delamination or the like per ASTM E 759.
                5.    Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, delamination or the like per ASTM E
                      760.
                6.    Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 grams per sq. ft. per ASTM E 859.
                7.    Dry Density: Values for average and individual densities as required foir fire-resistance
                      rating indicated, per ASTM E 605, but less than the following:
                      a. For cementitious fireproofing: 14 lbs. per cu. ft.
                      b. For mineral fiber fireproofing: 13 lbs. per cu. ft.
                8.    Hardness: 0.50” max. penetration per ASTM C 569.

FIREPROOFING                                                                                          07250 - 3
07250.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:56 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:34 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                        REV 0
-


                9.    Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values
                      of 10 and 0, respectively.
           F.    Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
                1.    Cementitious Fireproofing:
                      a. “Monokote”; Grace Construction Products Div., W.R. & Co.
                2.    Mineral Fiber Fireproofing:
                      a. “SprayDon Standard J”; American Energy Products Corp.
                      b. “Cafco Blaze-Shield”; United States Mineral Products Co.
     2.2 AUXILIARY FIREPROOFING MATERIALS:
           A.   General: Provide auxiliary fireproofing materials which are compatible with sprayed-on
                fireproofing products and substrates, approved for use indicated by manufacturer of sprayed-
                on fireproofing, and which have been approved by UL or other acceptable testing and
                inspecting agency for use in fire-resistance rated designs indicated.

           B.   Substrate Primers (If required by Fireproofing materials manufacturer): Type approved by
                manufacturer of sprayed-on fireproofing for substrate and for conditions of exposure indicated.

           C.   Adhesive for Bonding Fireproofing: Type recommended by manufacturer of sprayed-on
                fireproofing manufacturer.

           D.   Metal Lath: (If Required) Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration
                and finish required to comply with fire- resistance rated designs indicated and fireproofing
                manufacturer’s recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories, and other anchorage
                devices required to attach lath to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 INSPECTION
           A.   Require Installer to examine substrates to determine if they are in satisfactory condition to
                receive sprayed-on fireproofing. A satisfactory substrate is defined as follows:
                1.    Substrate complies with requirements of the section in which the substrate and related
                      work is specified and is free of oil, grease, rolling compounds, incompatible primers,
                      loose mill scale, dirt or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing
                      with substrate under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.
                2.    Objects which will penetrate fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves and
                      similar items have been securely attached to substrates.
                3.    Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment and other suspended
                      construction that could interfere with application of fireproofing.
           B.   For steel or other substrates suspected of being coated with oil, rolling compounds or other
                substances not readily identifiable but potentially capable of impairing bond, conduct tests
                recommended by fireproofing manufacturer to determine their presence and effect on
                adhesion of fireproofing.

           C.   Do not proceed with installation of fireproofing until unsatisfactory conditions have been
                corrected.

FIREPROOFING                                                                                            07250 - 4
07250.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:56 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:34 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                        REV 0
-


     3.2 PREPARATION
           A.   Clean substrates of substances which could impair bond of fireproofing, including oil, grease,
                rolling compounds, incompatible primers, and loose mill scale.

           B.   Prime substrates where recommended by fireproofing manufacturer, except where compatible
                shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing.

           C.   Cover other work which might be damaged by fall-out or overspray of fireproofing materials
                during application. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations,
                protect the environment, and to ensure adequate ambient conditions for temperature and
                ventilation.

     3.3 INSTALLATION
           A.   General: Comply with fireproofing manufacturer’s instructions for mixing materials, for
                application procedures and for types of equipment used to convey and spray-on fireproofing
                materials; as applicable to the particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve
                fire-resistance ratings indicated.

           B.   Coat substrates with adhesive prior to application of fireproofing where required to achieve fire-
                resistance rating or recommended by fireproofing manufacturer for material and application
                indicated.

           C.   Install metal lath as required to comply with fire resistance ratings and recommendations of
                fireproofing manufacturer for conditions of exposure and intended use. Securely attach latch
                to substrate in position required for fire-resistance rating indicated and to support as well as
                to reinforce fireproofing, using anchorage devices of type recommended by fireproofing
                manufacturer. Attach lathing accessories where indicated or required.

           D.   Extend fireproofing full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. Unless
                otherwise recommended by fireproofing manufacturer, install body of fireproof covering in a
                single course.

           E.   Apply fireproofing in thickness and densities as required to achieve fire resistance ratings
                designated for each condition, unless greater thicknesses and densities are indicated.
                1.    For steel columns: 3 hour rating.
                2.    For steel beams: 2-hour rating.
                3.    For 5th level and headhouse roofs: 1-1/2-hour rating.
           F.   Apply fireproofing materials by sprayed-on method to maximum extent possible. Following
                spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other
                placement method acceptable to manufacturer.

     3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
           A.   Testing Laboratory: Contractor shall employ and pay an independent testing laboratory
                experienced in the testing of sprayed-on fireproofing and acceptable to Architect, to perform
                field quality control testing.


FIREPROOFING                                                                                            07250 - 5
07250.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:56 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:34 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


           B.   Extent and Testing Methodology: Arrange for testing of completed fireproofing in successive
                stages in areas of extent described below; do not proceed with fireproofing of next area until
                test results for previously completed work evidence compliance with requirements.
                1.    Extent of Each Test Area: Not greater than one floor of 10,000 sq. ft., whichever
                      produces the greater number of test areas.
                2.    Within each area, testing laboratory shall randomly selected a typical bay, and test
                      each fireproofed structural element within it for thickness and density per ASTM E 605.
           C.    Repair or replace fireproofing within areas where test results indicate fireproofing does not
                comply with requirements.

     3.5 CLEANING, REPAIR AND PROTECTION
           A.   Cleaning: Immediately upon completion of spraying operations in each containable area of
                project, remove over-spray and fall-out of materials from surfaces of other work and clean
                exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.

           B.   Protect fireproofing according to advice of fireproofing manufacturer and Installer from damage
                resulting from construction operations or other causes so that fireproofing will be without
                damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.

           C.   Coordinate installation of fireproofing with other work in order to minimize the need for other
                trades to cut or remove fireproofing. As other trades successively complete installation of
                their work, maintain protection of structure afforded by fireproofing by patching any areas
                which have been removed or damaged prior to concealment of fireproofing by other work.

           D.   Repair or replace work which has not been successfully protected.


                                              END OF SECTION




FIREPROOFING                                                                                         07250 - 6
07250.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:56 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:34 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                                SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                            22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                            REV 0
-


                                                                           SECTION 07840
                                                                            FIRESTOPPING

                                                                             SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 2
  1.3           PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................................................. 2
  1.4           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 3
  1.5           QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................................................ 3
  1.6           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING...................................................................................................................... 4
  1.7           PROJECT CONDITIONS................................................................................................................................................. 4
  1.8           COORDINATION ........................................................................................................................................................... 4

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 4
  2.1           MANUFACTURERS....................................................................................................................................................... 4
  2.2           FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................... 5
  2.3           FILL MATERIALS.......................................................................................................................................................... 5
  2.4           MIXING.......................................................................................................................................................................... 6

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 6
  3.1           EXAMINATION.............................................................................................................................................................. 6
  3.2           PREPARATION ............................................................................................................................................................. 6
  3.3           THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION................................................................................... 7
  3.4           IDENTIFICATION............................................................................................................................................................ 7
  3.5           CLEANING AND PROTECTION...................................................................................................................................... 7


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 SUMMARY
           A.       This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through the
                    following fire-resistance-rated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings
                    containing penetrating items:
                    1.       Floors.
                    2.       Walls and partitions.
           B.       To the greatest extent possible, provide firestopping products of one manufacturer. Engage
                    that manufacturer to do the following:
                    1.       Provide selection and coordination of proper firestopping designs as necessary to obtain
                             approval of authorities having jurisdiction, including products of other manufacturers
                             where necessary.
                    2.       Prepare submittals under the company’s letterhead.
                    3.       Instruct installers.
                    4.       Review installation at times as appropriate to provide reasonable assurance that
                             firestopping is installed per approved submittals. Provide a letter from the manufacturer
                             indicating that such review has been performed.
                    5.       Attend meetings with authorities having jurisdiction to discuss firestopping requirements
                             and deficiencies.


FIRESTOPPING                                                                                                                                                                    07840 - 1
07840.doc
saved 12.10.2009 9:39 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:34 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


     1.2 REFERENCES
           A.   American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
                1.    E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
                2.    E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
           B.   Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
                1.    Fire Resistance Directory.

     1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
           A.   General: For the following constructions, provide through-penetration firestop systems that
                are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist
                passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly
                penetrated.
                1.    Fire-resistance-rated non-load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire-protection-
                      rated openings.
                2.    Fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies.
           B.   F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, as
                determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance
                rating of constructions penetrated.

           C.   T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems
                with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where
                systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in
                occupiable floor areas:
                1.    Penetrations located outside wall cavities.
                2.    Penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures.
                3.    Penetrations located in construction containing fire-protection-rated openings.
                4.    Penetrating items larger than 4-inch- (100-mm-) diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. (100
                      sq. cm) in overall cross-sectional area.
           D.   For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical
                damage, provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these
                conditions both during and after construction.
                1.    For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-
                      resistant through-penetration firestop systems.
                2.    For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) in width and
                      exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting
                      floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means.
                3.    For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems
                      not requiring removal of insulation.
           E.   For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread
                ratings of less than 25 and smoke-developed ratings of less than 450, as determined per
                ASTM E 84.



FIRESTOPPING                                                                                          07840 - 2
07840.doc
saved 12.10.2009 9:39 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:34 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


           F.   Paintability: Where through-penetration firestop systems will be exposed to view after
                construction is complete, the exposed system materials shall be readably capable of
                accepting a painted finish. Provide firestop manufacturer’s recommended primer and other
                preparation if necessary to obtain adhesion of primer specified in Division 09 for surrounding
                painted surface.


     1.4 SUBMITTALS
           A.   Manufacturer Involvement: With pre-construction submittals, include letter from primary
                firestopping manufacturer recording its preparation of submitted materials.

           B.   Product Data: For each type of through-penetration firestop system product indicated.

           C.   Shop Drawings:       For each through-penetration firestop system, show each kind of
                construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and kind of
                penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency
                acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidences compliance with requirements for
                each condition indicated.

           D.   Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency
                that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for construction
                and penetrating items.

           E.   Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
                demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
                                                                                               nd
                project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, a other
                information specified.

           F.   Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of through-penetration firestop system
                products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

           G.   Installed Firestopping Review: Letter from primary firestopping manufacturer.

           H.   Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop
                system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.


     1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
           A.   Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed through-penetration
                firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and
                whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

           B.   Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration
                and construction condition indicated, from a single manufacturer.

           C.   Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:   Provide through-penetration firestop systems that
                comply with the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements"
                Article:

FIRESTOPPING                                                                                         07840 - 3
07840.doc
saved 12.10.2009 9:39 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:34 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


                1.    Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A
                      qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, Warnock Hersey, or another agency
                      performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to
                      authorities having jurisdiction.
     1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
           A.   Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened
                containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and
                manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and
                inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing
                instructions for multicomponent materials.

           B.   Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to
                moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.

     1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
           A.   Environmental Limitations
                1.    Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate
                      temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system
                      manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other
                      causes.
           B.   Ventilation
                1.    Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturers' instructions by
                      natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced air circulation.

     1.8 COORDINATION
           A.   Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration
                firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

           B.   Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate
                through-penetration firestop systems.

           C.   Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed
                behind other construction until Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector, if required
                by authorities having jurisdiction, have examined each installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 MANUFACTURERS
           A.   Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
                1.    Hilti Corp.
                2.    Specified Technologies Inc.
                3.    3M Fire Protection Products.
                4.    Tremco



FIRESTOPPING                                                                                         07840 - 4
07840.doc
saved 12.10.2009 9:39 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:34 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                        SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                    22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                    REV 0
-


     2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
           A.   Compatibility: Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each
                other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping
                under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping manufacturer
                based on testing and field experience.

           B.   Accessories: Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill
                materials and to comply with "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1. Use
                only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified
                testing and inspecting agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems. Accessories
                include but are not limited to the following items:
                1.    Permanent forming/damming/backing materials including the following:
                      a.     Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation.
                      b.                                                                               o
                             Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials t
                             prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
                      c.     Fire-rated form board.
                      d.     Fillers for sealants.
                2.    Temporary forming materials.
                3.    Substrate primers.
                4.    Collars.
                5.    Steel sleeves.
           C.   Applications: Provide firestopping systems composed of materials specified in this Section
                that comply with system performance and other requirements.

     2.3 FILL MATERIALS
           A.   General: Fill materials are those referred to in directories of the referenced testing and
                inspecting agencies as fill, void, or cavity materials.

           B.   Cast-in-Place Firestop Devi ces: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete
                floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial
                extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a
                neoprene gasket.

           C.   Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify
                during exposure to moisture.

           D.   Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with
                intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

           E.   Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric
                sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet.

           F.   Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents,
                inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.



FIRESTOPPING                                                                                       07840 - 5
07840.doc
saved 12.10.2009 9:39 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:34 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


           G.   Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum
                foil on one side.

           H.   Mortars: Prepackaged, dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic
                cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to
                form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

           I.   Pillows/Bags: Reusable, heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases
                filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and fire-retardant
                additives.

           J.   Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed,
                expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

           K.   Silicone Sealants:      Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing
                elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below:
                1.    Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal
                      surfaces and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a
                      nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag
                      grade for both opening conditions.
     2.4 MIXING
           A.   For those products requiring mixing prior to application, comply with firestopping
                manufacturer's directions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of
                mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other
                procedures needed to produce firestopping products of uniform quality with optimum
                performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 EXAMINATION
           A.   Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
                for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
                performance.

           B.   Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

     3.2 PREPARATION
           A.   Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration
                firestop systems to comply with written recommendations of firestop system manufacturer
                and the following requirements:
                1.    Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign
                      materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.
                2.    Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces
                      capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove
                      loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.


FIRESTOPPING                                                                                          07840 - 6
07840.doc
saved 12.10.2009 9:39 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:34 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                        REV 0
-


                3.    Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
           B.   Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop
                system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods.
                Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

           C.   Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from
                contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would
                otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used
                to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without
                disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.

     3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION
           A.   General:    Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with "Performance
                Requirements" Article and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and
                published drawings for products and applications indicated.

           B.   Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support
                fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional
                shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
                1.    After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other
                      accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.
           C.   Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:
                1.    Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
                      penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
                2.    Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
                      penetrating items.
                3.    For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce
                      smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
     3.4 IDENTIFICATION
           A.   Identify through-penetration firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprinted
                vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides
                of each firestop system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove
                penetrating items or firestop systems. Include the following information on labels:
                1.    The words: "Warning--Through-Penetration Firestop System--Do Not Disturb. Notify
                      Building Management of Any Damage."
     3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
           A.   Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with
                cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system
                manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

           B.   Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure
                through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of
                Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out

FIRESTOPPING                                                                                            07840 - 7
07840.doc
saved 12.10.2009 9:39 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:34 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                   SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                               22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                               REV 0
-


                and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and
                install new materials to produce through-penetration firestop systems complying with
                specified requirements.


                                           END OF SECTION




FIRESTOPPING                                                                                  07840 - 8
07840.doc
saved 12.10.2009 9:39 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:34 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                      REV 0
-


                                                                  SECTION 07842
                                                         FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

                                                                          SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL.................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................. 1
  1.3           PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS............................................................................................................................ 2
  1.4           SUBMITTALS............................................................................................................................................................... 2
  1.5           QUALITY ASSURANCE............................................................................................................................................... 3
  1.6           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ................................................................................................................... 3
  1.7           PROJECT CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................................................. 3
  1.8           COORDINATION ......................................................................................................................................................... 3

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS................................................................................................................................................................. 3
  2.1           MANUFACTURERS ..................................................................................................................................................... 3
  2.2           FIRE- RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS ............................................................................................................................ 4
  2.3           PERIMETER FIRE- CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS .......................................................................................................... 4

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................ 5
  3.1           EXAMINATION ............................................................................................................................................................ 5
  3.2           PREPARATION............................................................................................................................................................ 5
  3.3           INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................................................ 5
  3.4           CLEANING AND PROTECTION.................................................................................................................................. 6


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 SUMMARY
           A.       This Section includes fire-resistive joint systems for the following:
                    1.       Floor-to-wall joints.
                    2.       Head-of-wall joints.
                    3.       Joints between perimeter edge of fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies and back of
                             non-fire-resistance-rated, exterior, glazed aluminum curtain walls.
     1.2 REFERENCES
           A.       American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
                    1.       E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
           B.       International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO)
                    1.       Evaluation Service
                             a.       AC30 – Joint Systems.
           C.       Uniform Building Code (UBC)
                    1.       Standard 26-9 – Method of Test for the Evaluation of Flammability Characteristics of
                             Exterior, Nonload-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components
                             Using the Intermediate-Scale, Multistory Test Apparatus.
           D.       Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
                    1.       2079 – Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.
                    2.       Fire Resistance Directory



FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS                                                                                                                                               07842 - 1
07842.doc
saved 12.10.2009 9:30 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:34 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                        SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                    22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                    REV 0
-


     1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREM ENTS
           A.   General: For joints in the following constructions, provide fire-resistive joint systems that
                are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated,
                resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of
                assembly in which fire-resistive joint systems are installed:
                1.    Fire-resistance-rated non-load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire rated
                      openings.
                2.    Fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies.
                3.    Exterior curtain-wall assemblies and fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies.
           B.   Fire Resistance of Joint Systems: Assembly ratings indicated, but with assembly ratings
                not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions in which
                joints are located, as determined by UL 2079.
                1.    Load-bearing capabilities as determined by evaluation during the time test.
           C.   Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems: Integrity and insulation ratings
                indicated as determined by UBC Standard 26-9 and/or UL 2079.

           D.   For fire-resistive joint systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage,
                provide products that do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and
                after construction.

           E.   For fire-resistive joint systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread ratings
                of less than 25 and smoke-developed ratings of less than 450, as determined per
                ASTM E 84.

           F.   Paintability: Where fire-resistive joint systems will be exposed to view after construction is
                complete, the exposed system materials shall be readably capable of accepting a painted
                finish. Provide firestop manufacturer’s recommended primer and other preparation if
                necessary to obtain adhesion of primer specified in Division 09 for adjacent painted
                surfaces.

     1.4 SUBMITTALS
           A.   Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

           B.   Shop Drawings: For each fire-resistive joint system, show each kind of construction
                condition in which joints are installed and relationships to adjoining construction. Include
                fire-resistive joint system design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable
                to authorities having jurisdiction that demonstrates compliance with requirements for each
                condition indicated.
                1.    Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting
                      agency that is applicable to each fire-resistive joint system configuration for
                      construction and penetrating items.
           C.   Product Certificates:    For each type of fire-resistive joint system, signed by product
                manufacturer.

           D.   Qualification Data: For Installer.



FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS                                                                        07842 - 2
07842.doc
saved 12.10.2009 9:30 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:34 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                       SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                   22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                   REV 0
-


     1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
           A.   Source Limitations:     Obtain fire-resistive joint systems for each kind of joint and
                construction condition indicated through one source from a single manufacturer.

           B.   Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with
                the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article:
                1.    Fire-resistance tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A
                      qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, Omega Point or another agency
                      performing testing and follow-up inspection services for fire-resistive joint systems
                      acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
     1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
           A.   Deliver fire-resistive joint system products to Project site in original, unopened containers
                or packages with qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable
                to Project and with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and
                manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, curing time, and mixing
                instructions for multicomponent materials.

           B.   Store and handle materials for fire-resistive joint systems to prevent their deterioration or
                damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.

     1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
           A.   Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or
                substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system
                manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other
                causes.

           B.   Ventilate fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural
                means or, if this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

     1.8 COORDINATION
           A.   Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed
                according to specified requirements.

           B.   Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 MANUFACTURERS
           A.   Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
                1.    Fire-Resistive Joint Systems:
                      a.     Hilti, Inc.
                      b.     International Protective Coatings Corp.
                      c.     Johns Manville.
                      d.     Nelson Firestop Products.
                      e.     Specified Technologies Inc.
                      f.     3M Fire Protection Products.


FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS                                                                       07842 - 3
07842.doc
saved 12.10.2009 9:30 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:34 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                     SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                 22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                 REV 0
-


                      g.     Tremco, Inc.
                2.    Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems:
                      a.     International Protective Coatings Corp.
                      b.     Johns Manville.
                      c.     Specified Technologies Inc.
                      d.     3M Fire Protection Products.
                      e.     USG Corp.
     2.2 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
           A.   General
                1.    Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates, under
                      conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire-resistive joint system
                      manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
                2.    Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including forming materials, that
                      are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance
                      Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system
                      manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems
                      indicated.
                3.    Where UL-classified fire-resistive joint systems are indicated, they refer to
                      alphanumeric designations listed in the UL “Fire Resistance Directory" under product
                      Category XHBN.
           B.   Floor-to-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint System FRJS-1:
                1.    UL-Classified Products: FW-D – 1000 Series.
                2.    Assembly Rating: 2 hours.
                3.    Joint Width: 100 mm (4 inches) maximum
                4.    Movement Capabilities: Class II – 25 percent compression and/or extension.
           C.   Head-of-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint System FRJS-2:
                1.    UL-Classified Products: HW-D – 0000 Series or 1000 Series
                2.    Assembly Rating: 1 hour.
                3.    Joint Width: 19 mm (¾ inch) for 0000 Series, 100 mm (4 inches) maximum for 1000
                      Series.
                4.    Movement Capabilities: Class II - 33 percent compression and/or extension. for 0000
                      Series, 12.5 percent compression and/or extension for 1000 Series.
     2.3 PERIMETER FIRE-CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS
           A.   Where UL-classified perimeter fire-containment systems (or safing insulation) are
                indicated, t hey refer to alphanumeric designations listed in the UL "Fire Resistance
                Directory" under product Category XHDG.

           B.   Perimeter Fire-Containment System PFCS-3:
                1.    UL-Classified or Omega Point-Classified Products:
                      a.     CW-S 1000 Series (UL)
                      b.     CEJ – 100 Series (Omega Point)
                2.    Integrity Rating: 2 hours.
                3.    Insulation Rating: 1 hour.


FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS                                                                       07842 - 4
07842.doc
saved 12.10.2009 9:30 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:34 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                       SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                   22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                   REV 0
-


                4.    Linear Opening Width: 200 mm (8 inches) maximum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 EXAMINATION
           A.   Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
                requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting
                performance.

           B.   Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

     3.2 PREPARATION
           A.   Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to
                comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following
                requirements:
                1.    Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with
                      adhesion of fill materials.
                2.    Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing
                      optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning
                      operation.
                3.    Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
           B.   Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system
                manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine
                primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

           C.   Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from
                contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that
                would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
                methods used to remove smears from fire-resistive joint system materials. Remove tape
                as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates.

     3.3 INSTALLATION
           A.   General:      Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance
                Requirements" Article and fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation
                instructions for products and applications indicated.

           B.   Install forming/packing/backing materials and other accessories of types required to
                support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-
                sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

           C.   Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the
                following results:
                1.    Fill voids and cavities formed by openings and forming/packing/backing materials as
                      required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
                2.    Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.
                3.    For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce
                      smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.



FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS                                                                          07842 - 5
07842.doc
saved 12.10.2009 9:30 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:34 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                      SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                  22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                  REV 0
-


     3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
           A.   Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with
                cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers
                and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

           B.   Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure
                fire-resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
                Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove
                damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials
                to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.


                                             END OF SECTION




FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS                                                                      07842 - 6
07842.doc
saved 12.10.2009 9:30 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:34 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                           SECTION 07920
                                                                          JOINT SEALANTS

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 1
  1.3           QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.4           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING...................................................................................................................... 2
  1.5           PROJECT CONDITIONS................................................................................................................................................. 3
  1.6           WARRANTY................................................................................................................................................................. 3

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 3
  2.1           SEALANTS................................................................................................................................................................... 3
  2.2           SEALING ACCESSORIES ............................................................................................................................................. 3

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
  3.1           PREPARATION ............................................................................................................................................................. 4
  3.2           JOINT OPENING PREPARATION ................................................................................................................................... 4
  3.3           SEALANT INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................................ 6
  3.4           SEALANT USAGE........................................................................................................................................................ 7



PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 REFERENCES
           A.       American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
                    1.       C794 - Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
                    2.       C834 - Specification for Latex Sealants.
                    3.       C919 - Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications.
                    4.       C920 - Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
                    5.       C1021 - Practice for Laboratories Engaged in the Testing of Building Sealants.
                    6.       C1087 - Test Method for Determining Compatibility of Liquid-Applied Sealants with
                             Accessories Used in Structural Glazing Systems.
                    7.       C1115 - Specification for Dense Elastomeric Silicone Rubber Gaskets and Accessories.
                    8.       C1193 - Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
                    9.       C1311 – Specification for Solvent Release Sealants.
     1.2 SUBMITTALS
           A.       Product Data
                    1.       Submit the following:
                             a.       Joint sealant manufacturer's product descriptions with instructions, including
                                      limitations, for storage, joint opening preparation, and installation of sealants and
                                      joint components. Indicate where primers will be used, or submit printed statement
                                      from sealant manufacturer that no primers are required for adequate adhesion.
                             b.       SWRI Validation Certificate for each sealant specified to be validated by SWRI’s
                                      Sealant Validation Program.

JOINT SEALANTS                                                                                                                                                              07920 - 1
07920.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:35 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


                      c.     Joint sealant backing and bond breaker manufacturer's product description with
                             instructions, including limitations, for storage, handling and installation.
                      d.     Joint sealant manufacturer's standard color range for color selection unless
                             indicated otherwise.
           B.   Samples
                1.    Submit the following:
                      a.     Cured sealants after color selection has been made.
                      b.     Sealant backing materials, minimum 300 mm (12 inches) long.
                      c.     Sealant bond breaker materials.
           C.   Quality Control
                1.    Submit statement written on joint sealant manufacturer's official letter head and signed
                      by the responsible representative, indicating that sealants proposed for use have been
                      tested and conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and the following:
                      a.     The sealant meets applicable referenced specification requirements.
                      b.     The sealant is compatible with specified sealant backing materials as determined
                             by ASTM C1087.
                      c.     The sealant is compatible with and does not adhere to specified bond breaker as
                             determined by ASTM C1087.
                      d.     The sealant is compatible with and has been tested for adequate adhesion to each
                             respective substrate. Include identification of any primer(s) required to obtain
                             adequate adhesion.
                2.    Furnish manufacturer's statement dated no earlier than one year prior to submittal.
                      Submit test reports, as partial fulfillment of these requirements, from the manufacturers
                      or an independent laboratory. Testing of sealants shall comply with ASTM C1021 and be
                      dated within one year of submittal. Include a listing of tests made and their result. Test
                      data more than one year old may be submitted provided manufacturer indicates in the
                      statement of compliance that the tested sealants have not changed in formula or
                      manufacture sufficient to produce different results.
     1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
           A.   Contractor's Qualifications
                1.    Require the Work to be provided by a sealing contractor that has specialized in the type
                      of Work specified and indicated on the Drawings for at least the past 5 years. If
                      requested by Architect, submit evidence of successful experience on projects similar in
                      size and scope to this Work.
     1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
           A.   Deliver products to the Project site in their original unopened containers bearing the name of
                the manufacturer and brand. Store and handle products as recommended by the
                manufacturer to prevent damage and deterioration. Additionally, store sealants at a
                temperature between 4 and 27 degrees C (40 and 80 degrees F) and store sealant backing
                and bond breaker in clean dry areas at 70 degrees F. so they will not become damp, wet or
                frost covered.



JOINT SEALANTS                                                                                        07920 - 2
07920.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:35 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


     1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
           A.   Do not install interior sealants until after substrate surfaces have thoroughly dried. Do not
                install sealant when ambient temperature is below 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) unless
                approved in writing, with appropriate application procedures, by the sealant manufacturer.

     1.6 WARRANTY
           A.   Special Warranty
                1.    Provide installation warranty for a period of 5 years against defective materials and
                      workmanship.
                2.    During the warranty period restore defective Work to the standard of the Contract
                      Documents without additional compensation, including all materials, labor, refinishing
                      and other costs incidental to the Work. Within 24 hours after receipt of notice from the
                      Owner, inspect the Work and immediately repair leaks. Restore Work found to be
                      defective, as defined in the Contract Documents, within 10 days after receipt of notice
                      from the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 SEALANTS
           A.   Furnish sealants meeting the following requirements:
                1.    Sealant A: single-component, elastomeric sealant having a current validation certificate
                      from the Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute (SWRI) complying with ASTM
                      C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, a silicone material: Dow Corning, 790 or
                      795; GE Silicones, SCS 2000; Pecora, 864; or as approved.
                2.    Sealant B: Multi-component, elastomeric, sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type M,
                      Class 25, Use T. Provide primer recommended by sealant manufacturer.
                      a. For Grade NS, a urethane material: LymTal International, Inc. 881NS.
                3.    Sealant C: Single-component latex sealant complying with ASTM C834. DAP, 230
                      sealant; Pecora, AC-20 + silicone; PTI, 738; or as approved.
                4.    Sealant D: Single-component, non-sag butyl sealant complying with ASTM C1311. PTI,
                      707, 757 or 808; Tremco, Acoustical Sealant; Pecora, BA-98; or as approved.
                5.    Sealant E: Single-component silicone sealant complying with ASTM C920. Dow
                      Corning, 786; GE Silicones Sanitary SCS1700; Pecora, 898; or as approved.
                6.    Color
                      a. Furnish color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color range
                           unless otherwise indicated.
     2.2 SEALING ACCESSORIES
           A.   Solvent
                1.    Oil-free cleaning solvent (for example: toluene, xylene, methyl ethyl ketone, acetone,
                      50/50 mixture of isopropyl alcohol and water, and mineral spirits) as recommended by
                      sealant manufacturer.
           B.   Primer
                1.    Where required a nonstaining product recommended by the sealant manufacturer.



JOINT SEALANTS                                                                                      07920 - 3
07920.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:35 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                        REV 0
-


           C.   Sealant Backing
                1.    Furnish sealant backing material for the application as recommended by the sealant
                      manufacturer, of the following types:
                      a. Open cell: Expanded open cell polyurethane shape compressed a minimum of 25
                           percent of its dimension at time of installation in the joint opening. Furnish Plateau
                           Supply Co., “Denver Foam”; Industrial Thermo Polymers Limited, “Tundra Foam” or
                           as approved.
                      b. Closed cell: Expanded closed cell polyethylene shape compressed no more than
                           25 to 33 percent of its dimension at the time of installation in the joint opening.
                           Furnish Industrial Thermo Polymers Limited, ITP Standard Backer Rod; Nomaco,
                           Inc., Green Rod; W.R. Meadows, Inc., Sealtight Backer Rod or as approved.
                      c. Bicellular: Open and closed cell polyethylene-based or polyolefin foam with a non
                           absorbing outer skin shape, compressed a minimum of 25 percent of its dimension
                           at the time of installation in the joint opening. Furnish Industrial Thermo Polymers
                           Limited, ITP Soft Type Backer Rod; Applied Extrusion Technologies, Soft Rod or
                           as approved.
                      d. Foam tape: Self-adhesive, rectangular shape, expanded open cell polyurethane or
                           closed cell polyethylene, sized for the application and as manufactured by
                           Williams Products Inc.; H-O Products Corp.; Norton Co.; or as approved.
           D.   Bond Breaker
                1.    Heavy duty, 0.20-mm (8-mil) minimum thickness, colored, polyethylene or teflon, self-
                      adhesive bond breaker tape of type recommended by sealant manufacturer and suitable
                      for conditions of usage. Liquid bond breaker and duct tape are not permitted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 PREPARATION
           A.   Protection
                1.    Protect the Work and adjacent construction against damage. Clean Work adjacent to
                      joints free of smears of sealant as Work progresses. Protect surfaces difficult to clean
                      with masking tape or other suitable means not injurious to surfaces being protected.
     3.2 JOINT OPENING PREPARATION
           A.   Substrates
                1.    General
                      a.     Prepare joint openings in conformance with manufacturer's written instructions and
                             ASTM C1193, C919 for sealants in acoustical applications, and as specified.
                      b.     Dry, sound and thoroughly clean sealant substrates are required when primer
                             (where required by manufacturer for optimum adhesion) and sealant are installed.
                             Protect surfaces that have been cleaned from contamination by deleterious
                             materials such as oil, dust and rain, until primer (where required) and sealant are
                             applied.
                      c.     Use cleaning solvents as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Furnish
                             containers for cleaning solvent storage that are clean, oil-free and suitable for use
                             with the solvent.


JOINT SEALANTS                                                                                          07920 - 4
07920.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:35 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                             SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                         22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                         REV 0
-


                2.    Masonry, concrete or other porous substrates.
                      a.     Remove loose particles, dirt, paint, foreign matter, and concrete curing compound
                             by sandblasting, nylon bristle brush or other sealant manufacturer approved method
                             not injurious to the substrate material and that will not change the appearance of
                             the exposed surfaces adjacent to the sealant joint opening. Expose fine aggregate
                             of concrete substrates to be sealed. Remove dust created by cleaning by repeated
                             brushing with a soft bristle brush or by blowing dust from the substrate with oil-free
                             compressed air.
                      b.     Clean sealant joint opening of mortar droppings and any other materials that affect
                             finished sealant joint performance prior to installation of sealant backing material.
                3.    Metal substrates
                      a.     Remove oils, residues from forming processes, corrosion and oxide build-up by
                             nylon bristle brush, chemical cleaners or other sealant manufacturer approved
                             method. Following removal, clean the substrate surface using the two-cloth system
                             with a clean, lint free, white cloth soaked in solvent which is poured, not dipped,
                             onto the cloth, followed by wiping the substrate surface dry, with the second clean,
                             lint free, dry, white cloth before the solvent evaporates. Change to clean rags
                             frequently. Brush application of solvents is not permitted.
                4.    Coated metal or other non-porous substrates
                      a.     Clean the substrate surface using the two-cloth system with a clean, lint free, white
                             cloth soaked in solvent which is poured, not dipped, onto the cloth, followed by
                             wiping the substrate surface dry with the second dry, clean, lint free, white cloth
                             before the solvent evaporates. Change to clean rags frequently. Brush application of
                             solvents is not permitted.
                      b.     Clean organically coated (PVF, silicone-polyester, etc.) panels or other similar
                             factory applied finishes with sealant and finish manufacturer approved solvent that
                             is compatible with organic coating system.
                5.    Elastomeric rubber and other organic substrates
                      a.     Submit organic materials to sealant manufacturer for compatibility testing by ASTM
                             C1087 and adhesion testing by ASTM C794.
                      b.     Remove lubricants, release agents, dusting agents, and other materials from the
                             substrate surface, using cleaning procedures based on the successful completion
                             of the above testing, as provided in writing by the sealant manufacturer.
           B.   Primer
                1.    Apply primer, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer, only to previously cleaned
                      substrate surfaces to which sealants will be applied. The preferred method for
                      application is with a clean, lint-free cloth for non-porous substrates and a clean natural
                      bristle brush for porous substrates. Apply primer to the cloth or brush by pouring;
                      dipping is not permitted. Take adequate measures, such as masking joint opening
                      edges, to prevent primer from being applied to the face of adjacent surfaces. Allow
                      primer to cure as recommended by the sealant manufacturer before installation of
                      sealant.



JOINT SEALANTS                                                                                           07920 - 5
07920.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:35 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                              SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                          22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                          REV 0
-


                2.    Prime only those substrate surfaces that can be sealed immediately after the
                      recommended primer curing period to preclude dust, oil, rain, condensation or other
                      deleterious conditions to contaminate primer.
           C.   Sealant Backing Material
                1.    Install sealant backing, of proper type and size, at proper depth in joint to provide
                      specified joint dimensions. Place sealant backing into the joint to avoid lengthwise
                      stretching, twisting, braiding or lapping. Provide continuity with tight butt joints. Install
                      dry sealant backing immediately prior to installing sealant. Apply sealant with sealant
                      backing in place unless otherwise indicated.
                2.    Install closed cell sealant backing using good practices to avoid compression in excess
                      of that specified or puncturing of the sealant backing material.
                3.    Install open cell and bicellular sealant backing using good practices to avoid folding of
                      the sealant backing material.
                4.    If the sealant backing is to function as a temporary joint seal for weather protection or
                      other reasons, for a period of time before sealant installation, remove the backing and
                      replace it immediately prior to sealant installation with new sealant backing.
                5.    Installation of sealant backing using tooling devices or putty knives is not permitted.
           D.   Bond Breaker
                1.    Install properly sized bond breaker tape so that the entire surface is covered. One tape
                      may be lapped over another to achieve total coverage. Do not extend bond breaker tape
                      onto the substrate surfaces to interrupt or prevent adhesion of the sealant to the
                      substrate.
           E.   Joint Dimensions
                1.    Create joint opening depth (as measured at the sealant and substrate interface) for
                      sealant contacting and bonded to substrate surfaces no less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) in
                      depth. Minimum sealant depth at the mid-point of the joint width: 3 mm (1/8 inch).
                2.    Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, for joint opening widths from 6 mm (1/4
                      inch) up to 13 mm (1/2 inch) wide, provide joint opening depth of 6 mm (1/4 inch); for
                      joint opening widths over 13 mm (1/2 inch) to 19 mm (3/4 inch) wide, provide joint
                      opening depth of one half the width; for joint opening widths over 19 mm (3/4 inch) to 50
                      mm (2 inches) wide, provide joint opening depth no greater than 10 mm (3/8 inch); and
                      for joint opening widths exceeding 50 mm (2 inches), provide depth as determined by
                      the sealant manufacturer.
     3.3 SEALANT INSTALLATION
           A.   General
                1.    Provide sealant in conformance with manufacturer's written instructions and ASTM
                      C1193, ASTM C919 for sealants in acoustical applications and as specified.
                2.    Inspect joint opening prior to sealant installation for proper installation of sealant backing
                      or bond breaker, proper opening depth and proper substrate preparation, cleaning and
                      (where required) priming.
                3.    Do not apply sealant to damp, wet or frost covered substrates, sealant backing or bond
                      breaker.



JOINT SEALANTS                                                                                            07920 - 6
07920.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:35 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                             SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                         22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                         REV 0
-


                4.    Dry-tool exposed sealant surface immediately using no lubricant such as soap and
                      water. A lubricant is allowed, if permitted by the sealant manufacturer and is a solvent or
                      similar type product as recommended in writing by the sealant manufacturer.
                5.    Where required or specified, to avoid smearing sealant on surfaces adjacent to joint
                      opening, use masking tape or other suitable means and remove after tooling sealant
                      surface and before sealant begins to cure. Organically coated (pvf, silicone-polyester,
                      etc.) panels or other similar factory applied finishes shall be protected.
                6.    Use drop cloths to cover horizontal or other surfaces likely to receive sealant droppings
                      during installation.
           B.   Non-Sag or Gunnable Sealant
                1.    Apply non-sag sealant into joint opening with hand- or air-powered sealant gun so as to
                      fill void completely. Use gun nozzle of proper size to fit joint opening.
                2.    Take care not to smear adjoining surfaces with sealant. Force sealant, by tooling, fully
                      into joint opening and intimate contact with substrate surface. Tool exposed joint
                      surface so that a slight concave surface is formed. Use of the sealant gun for tooling is
                      not allowed.
     3.4 SEALANT USAGE
           A.   Interior Sealant Joints
                1.    Install sealant A in the following joint openings, except for joints in connection with fire-
                      rated construction:
                      a.     Control joints in interior masonry.
                      b.     Joints between masonry non-bearing walls or partitions and under side of floors,
                             beams and slabs.
                      c.     Joints around pipes, conduits and ducts which penetrate interior walls and
                             partitions above and below ceilings.
                      d.     Other joints as indicated.
                2.    Install sealant B, Grade NS, in the following joint openings:
                      a.     Isolation and control joints in exposed concrete floors.
                      b.     Expansion joints in tile.
                3.    Install sealant C in the following joint openings:
                      a.     Joints at perimeter of steel door and borrowed light frames.
                4.    Installation of sealant D is specified in other Sections, including 09260.
                5.    Install sealant E in joints at perimeter of vanities and counters.

                                                 END OF SECTION




JOINT SEALANTS                                                                                           07920 - 7
07920.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:35 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                  SECTION 08110
                                                              STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.3           QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.4           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING...................................................................................................................... 2

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 2
  2.1           MANUFACTURERS....................................................................................................................................................... 2
  2.2           MATERIALS.................................................................................................................................................................. 2
  2.3           METAL GAGES ............................................................................................................................................................ 3
  2.4           WORKMANSHIP AND FABRICATION ........................................................................................................................... 3
  2.5           SHOP PAINTING ........................................................................................................................................................... 5
  2.6           STEEL FRAMES............................................................................................................................................................ 5
  2.7           STEEL DOORS ............................................................................................................................................................. 6
  2.8           LABELED DOORS AND FRAMES ................................................................................................................................. 7
  2.9           ASTRAGALS ............................................................................................................................................................... 8

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 8
  3.1           INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................................................. 8


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 REFERENCES
           A.       American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
                    1.       A366/A366M - Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Commercial Quality.
                    2.       A554 - Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing.
                    3.       A569/A569M - Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled
                             Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality.
                    4.       A653/A653M - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-
                             Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
                    5.       A666 - Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.
                    6.       C236 - Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by
                             Means of a Guarded Hot Box.
                    7.       C509 - Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material.
                    8.       C976 - Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a
                             Calibrated Hot Box
           B.       American Welding Society (AWS)
                    1.       D9.1 - Sheet Metal Welding Code.
           C.       Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.)
                    1.       QQ-L-201F - Lead Sheet.
           D.       Military Specification (Mil. Spec.)


STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES                                                                                                                                                      08110 - 1
08110.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:35 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


                1.    DOD-P-21035A - Paint, High Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing Repair.
           E.   National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
                1.    80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Windows.
     1.2 SUBMITTALS
           A.   Shop Drawings
                1.    Submit Shop Drawings showing details of each frame type, elevations of each door type,
                      location in building of each item, conditions at openings with various wall thicknesses
                      and materials, typical and special details of construction, method of assembling
                      sections, location and installation requirements for hardware, size, shape and thickness
                      of materials, joints and connections.
                2.    Furnish approved Shop Drawings of steel frames for prefitted doors specified elsewhere.
     1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
           A.   Labels
                1.    Provide metal Testing Agency classification markings for application to labeled steel
                      doors and frames, mechanically applied with drive screws or rivets.
     1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
           A.   Deliver doors and frames palleted, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and
                job storage.

           B.   Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided
                refinished items match new work and are acceptable to the Architect; otherwise, remove and
                replace damaged items as directed.

           C.   Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 100-mm- (4-
                inch-) high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create
                a humidity chamber. If wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide
                minimum 6-mm (1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 MANUFACTURERS
           A.   Ceco Door Products; Curries Co.; Artek Door Ltd.; S.W. Fleming Ltd.; Overly Door Co.;
                Pioneer Industries; Steelcraft; Trussbilt, Inc.; Windsor Door; or as approved.

     2.2 MATERIALS
           A.   Steel Sheet
                1.    Cold-rolled, complying with ASTM A366; hot-rolled, complying with ASTM A569, pickled
                      and oiled; or galvannealed complying with ASTM A653, A25 coating designation, unless
                      otherwise specified; mill phosphatized.
                2.    Free from surface or internal defects, and with clean smooth surfaces.
                3.    Steel sheet for doors, in addition to the above: stretcher leveled.



STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES                                                                              08110 - 2
08110.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:35 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


           B.   Stainless Steel
                1.    Stainless steel tubes: ASTM A554.
                2.    Flat sheet and plate: ASTM A666, Type 316, No. 4 finish, unless otherwise specified.
                3.    Filler metal for welding: the type recommended by manufacturer of stainless steel.
           C.   Fasteners
                1.    Screws, nuts, washers, bolts, rivets, anchors, and other miscellaneous fastening
                      devices used in fabrication of stainless steel doors and frames: stainless steel and of
                      sufficient size and strength to perform the function for which they are used.
           D.   Sound-Deadening Liner for Doors
                1.    For non-labeled doors: rockwool or other approved synthetic resin based liner.
                2.    For labeled doors: as required by the labeling authority.
           E.   Integral Seal
                1.    Closed cell neoprene complying with ASTM C509.
           F.   Zinc-Rich Paint
                1.    ZRC Products Co., "Z.R.C." or other acceptable product complying with DOD-P-21035A.
     2.3 METAL GAGES
           A.   Metal gages for steel sheets and strips for steel door and frame work: manufacturer's
                standard, minimum as follows:
                1.    Frames for doors, transoms and side lights

                       Interior frames                                                   16 ga.
                       Rough bucks                                                       12 ga.
                       Mullions and transom bars same as frame
                       Moldings                                                           20 ga.
                2.    Frames for borrowed lights

                       Frames and mullions                                                16 ga.
                       Moldings                                                           18 ga.

                3.    Full flush doors (metal core reinforcement)

                       Face sheets for interior doors                                     18 ga.
                       Face sheets for exterior doors                                     16 ga
                       Core stiffener channels or "Z" members                             20 ga.
                       Optional core - continuous trusscore                               28 ga.
                       Moldings                                                           18 ga.
     2.4 WORKMANSHIP AND FABRICATION
           A.   General
                1.    Insofar as practicable, fabricate the Work at shop, ready for delivery and erection at
                      building. Trial-fit Work impossible to completely fabricate in shop. Assemble at shop to

STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES                                                                                 08110 - 3
08110.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:35 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


                      insure proper assembly at building. Provide holes, connections, fastenings for and to
                      work of other trades abutting, adjoining or intersecting the Work.
           B.   Welding
                1.    Comply with AWS D9.1, Gas tungsten arc equipment for stainless steel.
           C.   Fabrication
                1.    Fabricate the Work with all joints and connections continuously welded, surfaces in
                      alignment, straight and free from defects such as warp, or buckling. Unless indicated
                      otherwise, make all corners square and edges sharp. Join molding neatly and weld.
                      Dress all joints flush with base metal surface. Provide bracing necessary to support
                      movable parts.
           D.   Reinforcement
                1.    Provide concealed reinforcement of sheet or bar steel for hardware, including automatic
                      devices, and other attached work, where and as required by conditions. Hinge
                      reinforcement: not less than 5 mm (3/16 inch) thick by not less than 38 mm (1-1/2
                      inches) wide by not less than 150 mm (6 inches) longer than hinge. Reinforcement for
                      other hardware and attached work: not less than 12 gage and of sufficient size to
                      receive fastenings. Secure hinge, door closer and door holder reinforcements with at
                      least 6 spot welds. Secure other reinforcement with at least 2 spot welds.
                2.    Provide stainless steel for doors indicated to be stainless steel.
           E.   Hardware Preparation
                1.    Drill and tap Work as required for mortised hardware. Locate by template, specified in
                      "Finish Hardware" Section.
                2.    Prepare steel door frames and steel doors for finish hardware. Coordinate fitting of
                      hardware on frames for doors specified in other sections, which require factory fitting of
                      hardware. Provide sinkages or mortises, as required, formed accurately to template so
                      that mortised hardware will fit neatly into depressions, with hardware member surface
                      flush with surface of door or frame, unless otherwise required.
                3.    Provide reinforcing plates, less drilling and tapping, for doors and frames to receive
                      surface applied hardware, except push plates and kick plates.
                4.    Provide plaster guards or mortar boxes in back of hardware cutouts welded to frame.
                5.    Punch interior door frames to receive door silencers. For single door frames, provide for
                      3 silencers in lock side jambs. For double door frames, provide for one silencer for each
                      leaf in frame head.
                6.    For double door frames with flush transom panels, provide continuous sponge neoprene
                      silencer at transom rabbeted stop.
                7.    Provide necessary additional space, cut-outs, reinforcements and provisions for
                      fastening in doors and frame heads to receive overhead door closers concealed in frame
                      members.
                8.    Provide stainless steel for doors indicated to be stainless steel.
           F.   Sound Rated Doors and Frames: At locations scheduled, provide doors fabricated as sound-
                insulating door assemblies.




STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES                                                                                08110 - 4
08110.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:35 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


     2.5 SHOP PAINTING
           A.   Cleaning
                1.    Remove oil, grease, sand, dirt and other foreign substances. After cleaning, chemically
                      treat cold-rolled and galvanized metal surfaces to assure maximum paint adherence.
           B.   Galvanized Surfaces
                1.    Touch up welds and abrasions in galvannealed and galvanized surfaces with zinc-rich
                      paint.
           C.   Primed Finish
                1.    Apply dip or spray coat of rust-inhibitive metallic oxide or synthetic resin metal primer,
                      baked on or oven-dried, to ferrous metal surfaces, including galvanized and galvannealed
                      surfaces, which are smooth and free from irregularities and rough spots.
           D.   Bituminous Paint Finish
                1.    In addition to primed finish, paint back surfaces of frames, reinforcing struts and other
                      ferrous parts concealed by building construction one heavy coat of approved bituminous
                      paint.
     2.6 STEEL FRAMES
           A.   General
                1.    Form frames for doors, transoms, side-lights, borrowed lights, interior glazed panels and
                      other items indicated as being steel or hollow metal of steel sheets. Fabricate frames as
                      indicated. Vary forming from that indicated where special conditions necessitate
                      changes from indicated details, as approved.
           B.   Type and Construction
                1.    Unless otherwise indicated, provide combination type frames with integral buck, integral
                      seal where indicated, jamb and trim, welded construction, with all contact edges of
                      corner joints closed tight, and with trim faces mitered and continuously welded. Provide
                      plaster flanges and keys for frames located in plastered walls.
           C.   Mullions and Transom Bars
                1.    Provide mullion and transom bars in frames using closed or tubular construction with
                      rabbets for doors, glass, and transom panels. Fasten mullions and transom bars at
                      crossings and to jambs by butt welding. Reinforce joints between members with
                      concealed clip angles of same metal gage as frame.
           D.   Frame Reinforcing
                1.    Reinforce heads of frames in non-load bearing masonry partitions less than 200 mm (8
                      inches) thick. Unless otherwise indicated, provide continuous channel head reinforcing
                      formed from not less than 12 gage steel sheet, of width and depth the greatest
                      dimensions possible to suit frame head condition, and welded to back of frame at head.
                      Other methods of reinforcing may be employed subject to the approval of the Architect.
                2.    Provide stainless steel for frames indicated to be stainless steel.
           E.   Wall Anchors

STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES                                                                                08110 - 5
08110.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:35 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


                1.    General: Provide metal anchors of shape and sizes required for adjoining wall
                      construction. Fabricate wall anchors of steel, not less than 18 gage.
                2.    For frames set in masonry, except labeled openings: Use adjustable, flat or perforated
                      or corrugated, T -type sliding anchors, 75 mm (3 inches) by 250 mm (10 inches) long,
                      with anchor head of width and length to fill void in back of frame. Locate anchors on
                      each jamb near top and bottom of frame and at intermediate points not over 600 mm (24
                      inches) apart.
                3.    For labeled openings: Use anchors approved by the Testing Agency as required by wall
                      construction. At new masonry walls, use masonry "tee" anchors. At previously placed
                      concrete or masonry walls, provide approved spacers. Locate anchors in accordance
                      with Testing Agency requirements.
                4.    For frames set in metal stud partitions: Use metal jamb anchor clips, notched and
                      punched type at truss type studs, and with turned down edge at channel type studs.
                      Weld clips to inside of each jamb. Provide anchors which are suitable for type of metal
                      studs specified under another section. Provide 4 anchors per jamb for frames 2130 mm
                      (7 feet) or less in height. Locate anchors immediately above and below top hinge
                      reinforcement and above other hinge reinforcements. Locate anchors on strike side
                      directly opposite the anchors on the hinge side. For frames over 2130 mm (7 feet) high,
                      use additional anchors per jamb spaced not more than 450 mm (18 inches) apart.
                5.    Provide stainless steel anchors for frames indicated to be stainless steel.
           F.   Floor Anchors and Spreaders
                1.    For frame jambs, and mullions extending to floor, use floor anchor clips of not less than
                      10 gage steel, with 2 holes for anchoring to floor, and welded to trim flanges. Where
                      separate topping is indicated, extend door frames and mullions to concrete subslab.
                      Provide temporary removable steel spreaders or shipping bars across bottom of frames
                      and tack weld to jambs and mullions.
           G.   Moldings
                1.    Provide moldings with steel frames having openings for glass, panels and other locations
                      where trim moldings are indicated. Fabricate glazing moldings of steel, removable type,
                      square or rectangular, suitable for 6-mm-thick (1/4-inch-thick) glass assembled with
                      butted corners, and secured with countersunk oval-head Phillips machine screws,
                      uniformly spaced not more than 300 mm (12 inches) apart.
                2.    Fabricate moldings for panels other than glass of shape indicated, suitable for panel
                      thickness indicated. Assemble molded shapes with mitered corners and square or
                      rectangular shapes with butted corners. Secure as specified for glazing moldings.
                3.    Locate removable moldings on room side for frames facing corridors, on interior side for
                      exterior frames.
     2.7 STEEL DOORS
           A.   General
                1.    Fabricate steel doors of full flush door construction.
                2.    Leaf thickness, unless otherwise indicated: 45 mm (1-3/4 inches).
           B.   Full Flush Door Construction




STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES                                                                               08110 - 6
08110.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:35 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


                1.    Construct doors of 2 outer steel sheets with edges continuously welded and finished
                      flush, without visible seams or joints on door faces or edges. Reinforce doors with metal
                      core framing consisting of interlocking steel channels, or Z     -shaped members, placed
                      vertically and extending through full door height, spaced not more than 6 inches on
                      centers and spot-welded not more than 3 inches on centers to interior surfaces of outer
                      sheets. Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors horizontally full width of door by steel
                      channels spot welded to outer sheets. Provide weep holes in bottom channel. Fill
                      spaces between metal core framing members with approved sound-deadening liner.
                2.    Optional framing core: Inner core may be continuous truss formed from not less than 28
                      gage sheet metal and spot-welded to interior surfaces of outer sheets not more than 75
                      mm (3 inches) on centers horizontally and vertically over entire surface on both sides.
                      Fill spaces with approved sound-deadening liner.
                3.    Doors indicated to be stainless steel shall be full stainless steel construction.
           C.   Door Clearances
                1.    For non-labeled doors: 2.4 mm (3/32 inch) at jambs and heads, 3 mm (1/8 inch) at
                      meeting stiles of pairs of doors, and 19 mm (3/4 inch) at bottom, including thickness of
                      resilient floor covering.
                2.    For labeled doors: in accordance with NFPA 80.
           D.   Stile Edges
                1.    Beveled at 1 to 16 slope, unless otherwise specified.
                2.    Lock stile edges for double-acting doors: rounded.
           E.   Edge Closures
                1.    Top and bottom edges of exterior steel doors: closed with flush cap to produce a
                      weatherseal.
                2.    Top and bottom edges of all interior doors: closed and filled flush to provide a sanitary
                      surface.
                3.    Provide closure as part of door construction or by the addition of inverted steel channels
                      or other suitable shapes welded to face.
           F.   Glass Openings
                1.    Provide open panels in doors for glazing, of sizes indicated. Provide rabbets as part of
                      door construction or by the addition of steel stops. Secure glass with removable glazing
                      moldings on room side for doors facing corridors, on interior side for exterior doors.
                      Fabricate glazing moldings of steel, square or rectangular stops, suitable for 6-mm (1/4-
                      inch) glass, assembled with butted corners, and secured with countersunk oval-head
                      Phillips machine screws spaced not more than 225 mm (9 inches) apart.
     2.8 LABELED DOORS AND FRAMES
           A.   Approved Construction
                1.    Details of construction and requirements for labeled steel doors and frames, as required
                      by the Testing Agency, for each fire class of opening, shall take precedence over project
                      details and specifications, except for gages of metal when the Project Specifications
                      require thicker gages than those required for labeled doors and frames. In the case of an
                      inconsistency between Testing Agency's requirements and the requirements indicated


STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES                                                                                08110 - 7
08110.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:35 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                             SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                         22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                         REV 0
-


                      or specified, or both, submit the matter to the Architect for adjustment before fabricating
                      such work. Rated construction without label will not be accepted.
           B.   Labeled Openings
                1.    For steel doors and frames in labeled openings, provide the Testing Agency's
                      classification marking for the fire class of opening indicated.
                2.    Rate Class B labels for stair tower doors with temperature rise in 30 minutes to 230
                      degrees C (450 degrees F) maximum.
                3.    Where authorities having jurisdiction over the Project require deviation from the Testing
                      Agency's requirement for latching device, reinforce doors and frames for surface
                      mounted exit device.
     2.9 ASTRAGALS
           A.   Furnish astragals for pairs of labeled doors, pairs of doors in fire-rated partitions, and pairs of
                exterior doors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 INSTALLATION
           A.   General
                1.    Install steel door and frame work in correct locations, in alignment, plumb and to true
                      planes. Make breaks, angles and corners square with walls. Where coordination with
                      adjoining work is necessary, take job measurements. Installation shall be in accordance
                      with approved Shop Drawings.
           B.   Frames
                1.    Install steel frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Brace frames
                      securely until permanent anchors are set. Anchor bottom of frames with anchor bolts
                      and lead expansion shields, or with drop-in expansion bolts. Build wall anchors into
                      walls, or secure wall anchors to adjoining construction. Provide required wedging or
                      blocking for frames. Remove and reinstall frames which exceed the recommended
                      tolerances.
                2.    Provide steel shims required under floor anchors.

                                               END OF SECTION




STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES                                                                                   08110 - 8
08110.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:35 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                               SECTION 08800
                                                              GLASS AND GLAZING
                                                       (ORIGINAL BUILDING SPECIFICATION)

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           RELATED DOCUMENTS................................................................................................................................................ 1
  1.2           SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.3           SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.4           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.5           QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.6           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING...................................................................................................................... 3
  1.7           PROJECT CONDITIONS................................................................................................................................................. 3
  1.8           WARRANTY................................................................................................................................................................. 3

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 4
  2.1           MANUFACTURERS....................................................................................................................................................... 4
  2.2           GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL:................................................................................................................................... 5
  2.3           PRIMARY GLASS PRODUCTS: .................................................................................................................................... 6
  2.4           HEAT-TREATED GLASS PRODUCTS........................................................................................................................... 6
  2.5           LAMINATED GLASS PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................. 6
  2.6           SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS........................................................................................................................... 7
  2.7           ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS AND PERFORMED GLAZING TAPES................................................................ 7
  2.8           MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS.................................................................................................................... 9

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 9
  3.1           EXAMINATION.............................................................................................................................................................. 9
  3.2           PREPARATION ............................................................................................................................................................. 9
  3.3           GLAZING, GENERAL.................................................................................................................................................... 9
  3.4           GLAZING.................................................................................................................................................................... 10
  3.5           PROTECTION AND CLEAN             ING.................................................................................................................................... 11


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
           A.       Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
                    Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

     1.2 SUMMARY
           A.       Extent of glass and glazing work is indicated on drawings and schedules.

           B.       Types of work in this section include glass and glazing for:
                    1.       Window units, not indicated as “preglazed”.
                    2.       Glazed curtain wall.
                    3.       Structural glazed curtain wall, except as otherwise indicated.
                    4.       Storefront construction.
                    5.       Entrances and other doors, not indicated as “preglazed”.



GLASS AND GLAZING                                                                                                                                                           08800 - 1
08800.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:56 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


           C.   Requirements of this section apply to windows, doors and entrances as specified in other
                Division 8 sections.

     1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
           A.   Provide glass and glazing that has been produced, fabricated and installed to withstand
                normal thermal movement, wind loading and impact loading (where applicable), without failure
                including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and
                airtight, deterioration of glass and glazing materials and other defects in the work.
                1.    Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from an ambient temperature
                      range of 120 deg. F and from a consequent temperature range within glass and glass
                      framing members of 180 deg. F.
                2.    Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal due to other
                      causes than breakage which results in intrusion of dirt or moisture, internal
                      condensation or fogging, deterioration of protected internal glass coating, if any,
                      resulting from seal failure, and any other visual evidence of seal failure or performance.
                3.    Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as the development of manufacturing defects
                      including edge separation or delamination which materially obstructs vision through
                      glass.
                      a. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as the development of manufacturing
                           defects including peeling, cracking or other indications of deterioration in metallic
                           coating due to normal conditions of use.
     1.4 SUBMITTALS
           A.   Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data for each glazing material and fabricated
                glass product required, including installation and maintenance instructions.

           B.   Samples: Submit, for verification purposes, 12” square samples of each type of glass
                indicated except for clear single pane units, and 12” long samples of each color required
                (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket
                sample between two strips of material representative of adjoining framing system in color.

           C.   Certificate: Submit certificates from respective manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing
                materials furnished for project comply with requirements.
                1.    Separate certification will not be required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer’s
                      permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a
                      quality control program involving a recognized certification agency or independent testing
                      laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
           D.   Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: Submit statement from sealant manufacturer
                indicating that glass and glazing materials have been tested for compatibility and adhesion
                with glazing sealants and interpreting test results relative to material performance, including
                recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.

     1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
           A.   Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association
                (FGMA) “Glazing Manual” and “Sealant Manual” except where more stringent requirements


GLASS AND GLAZING                                                                                     08800 - 2
08800.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:56 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


                are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and glazing terms not
                otherwise defined in this section or other referenced standards.

           B.   Safety Glazing Standard: Where safety glass is indicated or required by authorities having
                jurisdiction, provide type of products indicated which comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing
                requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials.

           C.   Fire-Resistance Rated Wire Glass: Provide wire glass products that are identical to those
                tested per ASTM E 163 (UL 9) and are labeled and listed by UL or other testing and
                inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

           D.   Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked
                either on spacers or at least one component pane of units with appropriate certification label
                of inspecting and testing organization indicated below:
                1.    Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC).
                2.    Associated Laboratories, Inc. (ALI).
           E.   Single Source Responsibility for Glass: To ensure consistent quality of appearance and
                performance, provide materials produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator for each kind
                and condition of glass indicated and composed of primary glass obtained from a single
                source for each type and class required.

     1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
           A.   Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage and handling to comply with
                manufacturer’s directions and as required to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage to
                glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture including condensation, of temperature
                changes, of direct exposure to sun, and from other causes.

     1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
           A.   Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
                temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing material manufacturer or
                when joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation or other causes.
                1.    Install liquid sealants at ambient and substrate temperatures above 40 deg. F.
     1.8 WARRANTY
           A.   General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner
                may have under the Contract Documents.

           B.   Manufacturer’s Special Project Warranty on Laminated Glass: Provide written warranty
                signed by manufacturer of laminated glass agreeing to furnish f.o.b. point of manufacture,
                freight allowed project site, within specified warranty period indicated below, replacements for
                thos laminated glass units which develop manufacturing defects. Manufacturing defects are
                defined as edge separation or delamination which materially obstructs vision through glass.
                1.    Warranty Period: Manufacturer’s standard but not less than 4 years after date of
                      substantial completion.



GLASS AND GLAZING                                                                                      08800 - 3
08800.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:56 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


           C.   Manufacturer’s Special Project Warranty on Insulating Glass: Provide written warranty
                signed by manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish f.o.b. point of manufacture,
                freight allowed project site, within specified warranty period indicated below, replacements for
                those insulating glass units developing manufacturing defects. Manufacturing defects are
                defined as failure or hermetic seal of air space (beyond that due to glass breakage) as
                evidence by intrusion of dirt or moisture, internal condensation or fogging, deterioration of
                protected internal glass coatings, if any, and other visual indications of seal failure or
                performance; provided the manufacturer’s instructions for handling, installing, protecting and
                maintaining units have been complied with during the warranty period.
                1.    Warranty Period: Manufacturer’s standard but not less than 10 year after date of
                      substantial completion.
           D.   Manufacturer’s Special Project Warranty on Coated Glass Products: Provide written
                warranty signed by manufacturer of coated glass agreeing to furnish f.o.b. point of
                manufacture, freight allowed project site, within specified warranty period indicated below,
                replacements for those coated glass units which develop manufacturing defects.
                Manufacturing defects are defined as peeling, cracking or deterioration in metallic coating due
                to normal conditions and not due to handling or installation or cleaning practices contrary to
                glass manufacturer’s published instructions.
                1.    Warranty Period: Manufacturer’s standard but not less than 5 years after date of
                      substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 MANUFACTURERS
           A.   Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
                products which may be incorporated in the work include; but are not limited to, the following:
                1.    Manufacturers of Clear and Tinted Float Glass:
                      a. AFG Industries, Inc.
                      b. Ford Glass Division.
                      c. Guardian Industries Corp.
                      d. LOF Glass, Inc.
                      e. PPG Industries, Inc.
                2.    Manufacturers of Wire Glass:
                      a. AFG Industries, Inc.
                      b. Guardian Industries Corp.
                      c. Hordis Brothers, Inc.
                      d. Pilkington Sales (North America) Limited.
                3.    Manufacturers of Heat-Treated Glass:
                      a. AFG Industries, Inc.
                      b. Cardinal IG.
                      c. Environmental Glass Products.
                      d. Falconer Glass Industries.
                      e. Ford Glass Division.
                      f.  Guardian Industries Corp.
                      g. Hordis Brothers, Inc.
                      h. LOF Glass, Inc.


GLASS AND GLAZING                                                                                     08800 - 4
08800.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:56 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


                      i.  PPG Industries, Inc.
                      j.  Saint-Gobain/Euroglass.
                      k. Spectrum Glass Prod. Div., H. H. Robertson Co.
                      l.  Viracon, Inc.
                4.    Manufacturers of Laminated Glass
                      a. Advanced Coating Technology.
                      b. Environmental Glass Products.
                      c. Falconer Glass Industries.
                      d. Ford Glass Division.
                      e. Guardian Industries Corp.
                      f.  Hordis Brothers, Inc.
                      g. PPG Industries, Inc.
                      h. Viracon, Inc.
                5.    Manufacturers of Insulating Glass:
                      a. Cardinal IG.
                      b. Environmental Glass Products.
                      c. Falconer Glass Industries.
                      d. Ford Glass Division.
                      e. Guardian Industries.
                      f.  Hordis Brother, Inc.
                      g. PPG Industries, Inc.
                      h. Viracon, Inc.
                6.    Manufacturers of Coated Glass:
                      a. Advanced Coating Technology.
                      b. Cardinal IG.
                      c. Environmental Glass Products.
                      d. Falconer Glass Industries.
                      e. Ford Glass Division.
                      f.  Guardian Industries Corp.
                      g. Hordis Brothers, Inc.
                      h. LOF Glass, Inc.
                      i.  PPG Industries, Inc.
                      j.  Viracon, Inc.
     2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL:
           A.   Primary Glass Standard: Provide primary glass which complies with ASTM C 1036
                requirements, including those indicated by reference to type, class, quality, and if applicable,
                form, finish, mesh and pattern.

           B.   Heat-Treated Glass Standard: Provide heat-treated glass which complies with ASTM C 1048
                requirements, including those indicated by reference to kind, condition, type, quality, class,
                and, if applicable, form, finish, and pattern.

           C.   Sizes: Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing operating indicated, with edge clearances
                and tolerances complying with recommendations of glass manufacturer. Provide thicknesses
                indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by glass manufacturer for
                application indicated.



GLASS AND GLAZING                                                                                     08800 - 5
08800.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:56 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                             SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                         22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                         REV 0
-


     2.3 PRIMARY GLASS PRODUCTS:
           A.   Clear Float Glass:    Type I, (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing
                select).

           B.   Wire Glass: Type II (patterned and wired glass, flat), Class 1 (translucent), Quality q8
                (glazing); complying with ANSI Z97.1; 1/4” thick; of form and mesh pattern indicated below:
                1.    Polished Wire Glass: Form 1 (wired, polished both sides), Mesh m2 (square).
     2.4 HEAT-TREATED GLASS PRODUCTS
           A.   Manufacturing Process: Manufacture heat-treated glass as follows:
                1.    By vertical (tong-held) or horizontal (roller hearth) process, at manufacturer’s option,
                      except provide horizontal process where indicated as “tongless” or “free or tong marks”.
           B.   Uncoated Clear Heat-Treated Float Glass: Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I
                (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), kind as indicated below.
                1.    Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated.
           C.   Uncoated Tinted Heat-Treated Float Glass: Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I
                (transparent glass, flat), Class 2 (tinted heat absorbing and light reducing), Quality q3
                (glazing select), with tint color and performance characteristics for 1/4” thick glass matching
                those indicated for non-heat-treated tinted float glass; kind as indicated below:
                1.    Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated.
           D.   Ceramic-Coated Heat-Treated Spandrel Glass: Condition B (spandrel glass, one surface
                ceramic coated), Match PPG “Spandrelite”, with ceramic coating applied to second surface
                and complying with the following requirements:
                1.    Kind HS (heat strengthened).
                2.    Color: Custom. Match Architect’s sample.
     2.5 LAMINATED GLASS PRODUCTS
           A.   General: Refer to primary and heat-treated glass requirements relating to properties of
                uncoated glasses making up laminated glass products.

           B.   Plastic Interlayer: Provide glass fabricator’s standard polyvinyl butyral interlayer for laminating
                panes of glass, with a proven record of showing no tendency to bubble, discolor or lose
                physical or mechanical properties after laminating and installation, in clear or colors and of
                thickness indicated.
                1.    Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be
                      incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
                      a. “Saflex”; Monsanto Co.
                      b. “Butacite”; E. I. DuPont De Nemours & Co., Inc.
           C.   Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass using laminator’s standard heat-plus-
                pressure process to produce glass free from foreign substances and air/glass pockets.




GLASS AND GLAZING                                                                                        08800 - 6
08800.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:56 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


           D.   Laminate Safety Glass: Two panes of glass of equal thickness, laminated together with no
                less than 0.030” thick plastic interlayer and complying with requirements indicated below:
                1.    Glass Characteristics: Float glass, complying with requirements for class, tint, kind and
                      thickness of each pane (ply) indicated below:
                      a. Class 1 – clear for both panes.
     2.6 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS
           A.   General: Provide preassembled units consisting of organically sealed panes of glass
                enclosing a hermetically sealed dehydrated air space and complying with ASTM E 774 for
                performance classification indicated as well as with other requirements specified for glass
                characteristics, air space, sealing system, sealant, spacer material, corner design and
                dessicant.
                1.  For properties of individual glass panes making up units, refer to product requirements
                    specified elsewhere in this section applicable to types, classes, kinds and conditions of
                    glass products indicated.
                2. Provide heat-treated panes of kind and at locations indicated or, if not indicated, provide
                    heat-strengthened panes where recommended by manufacturer for application indicated
                    and tempered where indicated or where safety glass is designed or required.
                3. Performance characteristics designated for coated insulating glass are nominal values
                    based on manufacturer’s published test data for units with 1/4” thick panes of glass and
                    1/2” thick air space.
                    a. U-values indicated are expressed in the number of Btu’s per hour per sq. ft. per
                          degree F difference.
                4. Performance Classification per ASTM E 774: Class A.
                5. Thickness of Each Pane: 1/4”.
                6. Air Space Thickness: 1/2".
                7. Sealing System: Manufacturer’s standard.
                8. Spacer Material: Manufacturer’s standard metal.
                9. Dessicant: Manufacturer’s standard; either molecular sieve or silica gel or blend of both.
                10. Corner Construction: Manufacturer’s standard corner construction.
           B.   Pyrolytic-Coated Insulating Glass U   nits: Manufacturer’s standard units with exterior pane
                impregnated with a metallic oxide coating on glass surface indicated by manufacturer’s
                standard pyrolytic deposition process, either at time of manufacturer or during heat
                treatment, and complying with the following requirements:
                1.    Exterior Pane: Match PPG reflective “Solarcool (1) Gray” on first surface.
                      a. Kind: As indicated.
                2.    Interior Pane: Clear float glass, uncoated.
                      a. Kind: As indicated.
                3.    Performance Characteristics: U     -value of 0.49, shading coefficient of 0.33 and outdoor
                      reflectance of 36 percent.
     2.7 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS AND PERFORMED GLAZING TAPES
           A.   General: Provide products of type indicated and complying with the following requirements:
                1.    Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other
                      materials with which they will come into contact, including glass products, seals of


GLASS AND GLAZING                                                                                     08800 - 7
08800.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:56 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


                      insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation
                      and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience.
                2.    Suitability: Comply with recommendations of sealant and glass manufacturers of
                      selection of glazing sealants and tapes which have performance characteristics suitable
                      for applications indicated and conditions at time of installation.
                3.    Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer’s standard chemically curing,
                      elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920
                      requirements, including those for Type, Grade, Class and Uses.
                4.    Colors: Provide color of exposed sealants indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as
                      selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.
           B.   Two-Part Polysulfide Glazing Sealant: Type M; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, M, G, A, and,
                as applicable to uses indicated, O.

           C.   One-Part Acid-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G,
                A, and, as applicable to uses indicated, O.

           D.   Structural Silicone Glazing Sealant and Adhesive: As indicated.

           E.   Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape: Provide manufacturer’s standard solvent-free
                butyl-polyisobutylene formulation with a solids content of 100 percent; complying with AAMA
                A 804.1; in extruded tape form; non-staining and non-migrating in contact with nonporous
                surfaces; packaged on rolls with a release paper on one side; with or without continuous
                spacer rod as recommended by manufacturers of tape and glass for application indicated.

           F.   Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
                1.    Two-Part Polysulfide Glazing Sealant:
                      a. “Chem-Calk 200”; Bostik Construction Products Div.
                      b. “Synthacalk GC-5”; Pecora Corp.
                2.    One-Part Acid-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant:
                      a. “Chem-Calk 1200”; Bostik Construction Products Div.
                      b. “Dow Corning 999”; Dow Corning Corp.
                      c. “SCS 1200”; General Electric Corp.
                      d. “863”; Pecora Corp.
                      e. “Proglaze”; Tremco.
                3.    Silicone Structural Glazing Sealant and Adhesive:
                      a. “Dow Corning 983”; Dow Corning Corp.
                      b. “Construction 1200”; General Electric Corp.
                4.    Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape Without Spacer Rod:
                      a. “Chem-Tape 40”; Bostick Construction Products Div.
                      b. “Extru-Seal”; Pecora Corp.
                      c. “PTI 303” Glazing Tape; Protective Treatments, Inc.
                      d. “Tremco 440 Tape”; Tremco Inc.
                5.    Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape With Spacer Rod:
                      a. “Chem-Tape 60”; Bostik Construction Products Div.
                      b. “Shim-Seal”; Pecora Corp.
                      c. “PTI 303” Shim Tape; Protective Treatments, Inc.
                      d. “Pre-shimmed Tremco 440 Tape”; Tremco Inc.

GLASS AND GLAZING                                                                                   08800 - 8
08800.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:56 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


     2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
           A.   Compatibility: Provide materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in
                installation.

           B.   Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturers.

           C.   Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing
                sealants, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness.

           D.   Spacers: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks, or continuous extrusions as required for
                compatibility with glazing sealant, of size, shape and hardness recommended by glass and
                sealant manufacturers for application indicated.

           E.   Edge Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing
                sealant, of size and hardness required to limit lateral movement (side-walking) of glass.

           F.   Compressible Filler Rods: Closed-cell or waterproof-jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or
                plastic foam, flexible and resilient, with 5-10 psi compression strength for 25 percent
                deflection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 EXAMINATION
           A.   Require Glazier to inspect work of glass framing erector for compliance with manufacturing
                and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners; for
                presence and functioning of weep system; for existence of minimum required face or edge
                clearances; and for effective sealing of joinery. Obtain Glazier’s written report listing
                conditions detrimental to performance of glazing work. Do not allow glazing work to proceed
                until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

     3.2 PREPARATION
           A.   Pre-Installation Meeting: At Contractor’s direction, Glazier, sealant and gasket
                manufacturers’ technical representatives, glass framing erector and other trades whose work
                affects glass and glazing shall meet at project site to review procedures and time schedule
                proposed for glazing and coordination with other work.

           B.   Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before
                glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer from
                metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are indicated for use.

     3.3   GLAZING, GENERAL
           A.   Comply with combined printed recommendations of glass manufacturers, of manufacturers of
                sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are
                indicated, including those of referenced glazing standards.

           B.   Use silicone structural glazing sealant and adhesive for curtainwall work.


GLASS AND GLAZING                                                                                    08800 - 9
08800.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:56 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                        REV 0
-


           C.   Use two-part polysulfide glazing sealant for interior glazing.

           D.   Use one-part acid-curing silicone glazing sealant for exterior glazing except curtainwall.

           E.   Glazing channel dimensions as indicated in details are intended to provide for necessary bit
                on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with
                reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at time of installation.

           F.   Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation; use a rolling block in
                rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal
                framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with
                a pry bar. Rotate glass with flares or bevels along one horizontal edge which would occur in
                vicinity of setting blocks so that these are located at top of opening. Remove from project
                and dispose of glass units with edge damage or other imperfections of kind that, when
                installed, weakens glass and impairs performance and appearance.

           G.   Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
                preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.

     3.4 GLAZING
           A.   Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located one quarter of glass width from each
                corner, but with edge nearest corner not closer than 6” from corner, unless otherwise
                required. Set blocks in thin course of sealant which is acceptable for heel bead use.

           B.   Provide spacers inside and out, of correct size and spacing to preserve required face
                clearances, for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height), except where
                gaskets or glazing tapes with continuous spacer rods are used for glazing. Provide 1/8”
                minimum bit of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with
                sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

           C.   Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing standard, except
                where otherwise required by glass unit manufacturer.

           D.   Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar
                characteristics.

           E.   Provide compressible filler rods or equivalent back-up material, as recommended by sealant
                and glass manufacturers, to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep systems
                and from adhering to joints back surface as well as to control depth of sealant for optimum
                performance, unless otherwise indicated.

           F.   Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete “wetting” or
                bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

           G.   Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial “wash” away from glass. Install
                pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel, so as to eliminate dirt and
                moisture pockets.


GLASS AND GLAZING                                                                                     08800 - 10
08800.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:56 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


     3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
           A.   Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation by use of crossed
                streamers attached to framing and held away from glass. Do not apply markers to surfaces
                of glass. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

           B.   Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
                operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
                glass, remove immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer.

           C.   Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces
                at frequent intervals during construction, but not less often than once a month, for build-up of
                dirt, scum, alkali deposits or staining. When examination reveals presence of these forms of
                residue, remove by method recommended by glass manufacturer.

           D.   Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other
                ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.

           E.   Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections
                intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Wash glass by
                method recommended by glass manufacturer.


                                              END OF SECTION




GLASS AND GLAZING                                                                                    08800 - 11
08800.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:56 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                               SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                           22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                           REV 0
-


                                                               SECTION 08900
                                                             GLAZED CURTAIN WALL
                                                       (ORIGINAL BUILDING SPECIFICATION)

                                                                             SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           RELATED DOCUMENTS................................................................................................................................................ 1
  1.2           DESCRIPTION OF WORK .............................................................................................................................................. 1
  1.3           SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:................................................................................................................. 2
  1.4           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.5           QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................................................ 3
  1.6           WARRANTY................................................................................................................................................................. 3

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 4
  2.1           MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS................................................................................................................................. 4
  2.2           FABRICATION: ............................................................................................................................................................. 4
  2.3           FINISHES ...................................................................................................................................................................... 5

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 5
  3.1           INSPECTION.................................................................................................................................................................. 5
  3.2           INSTALLATIONS .......................................................................................................................................................... 5
  3.3           FIELD QUALITY CONTROL........................................................................................................................................... 6
  3.4           CLEANING.................................................................................................................................................................... 6


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
           A.       Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
                    Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

     1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
           A.       The extent of glazed curtain wall work is indicated on the drawings and schedules.

           B.       Types of glazed curtain walls required include the following:
                    1.       Metal stick-framed systems with interior and exterior exposed metal framing.
                             a. Primary System Expanse: Multi-story and multi-bay.
                    2.       Metal framed ribbon window system.
           C.       Primary components of glazed curtain wall work include the following, including work cross-
                    referenced to other specification sections for requirements:
                    1.       Aluminum curtain wall framing system.
                    2.       Glass and glazing work in curtain wall system; refer to “Glass and Glazing” section.
                    3.       Column covers, soffits, sills and similar border and filler items indicated as integral
                             components of the curtain wall system.
                    4.       Building entrances and aluminum entrance doors at ground floor. Refer to Division-8
                             section “Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts” for requirements.
                    5.       Interior curtain wall work and vestibules that basically matches exterior curtain wall
                             work.

GLAZED CURTAIN WALL                                                                                                                                                            08900 - 1
08900.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:56 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


                6.    Joint sealer work that is associated with components of the curtain wall system; refer to
                      “Joint Sealers” section.
                7.    Anchorages, shims, fasteners, accessories and support brackets for components of the
                      curtain wall system.
                8.    Insulation and firestopping indicated in a direct relation with the curtain wall system.
                      Refer to Section 07200, Insulation for requirements.
     1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
           A.   Load-bearing Strength (Wind Resistance): Provide the manufacturer’s shock system,
                adapted to the application indicated, which has been tested in accordance with ASTM E 330
                to withstand at least an uniform pressure of 25 psf inward and 25 psf outward or as required
                by applicable codes.
                1.    Deflections and Thermal Movements: Provide manufacturer’s stock products and
                      system which are capable of withstanding building movements and weather exposures
                      including wind loading, and which are capable of performing within the following
                      limitations:
                      a. Normal-to-wall deflection not exceeding 1/175 of the span.
                      b. Parallel-to-wall deflections of framing members not exceeding 75 percent of glass
                            bite and edge clearance of less than 25 percent of design dimension or 1/8”,
                            whichever is greater.
                      c. Thermal movements resulting from an ambient temperature range of 120 deg. F,
                            which may cause curtain wall framing range of 180 deg. F.
                2.    Leakage Resistance, Water and Air: Provide the manufacturer’s standard curtain wall
                      system that has b      een tested to demonstrate permanent resistance to leakages as
                      follows with a test pressure differential of 20 percent of design loading (excluding
                      operable window or door edge joints, if any):
                      a. Air Leakage: Not more than 0.06 cfm per sq. ft. of wall area when tested in
                            accordance with ASTM E 283.
                      b. Water Penetration: No uncontrolled leakage when tested in accordance with ASTM
                            E 331.
                3.    Condensation Requirements: Provide the manufacturer’s standard or improved thermal-
                      break construction which has been tested and certified by the manufacturer, in
                                                                            -
                      accordance with AAMA 1502.7 with 0 deg. F (18 deg. C) outside and 25 percent
                      relative humidity inside, to provide a condensation resistance factor (CRF) of at least 45.
                4.    Structural Sealant: Provide the manufacturer’s standard structurally glazed system that
                      has been tested to demonstrate that tensile or shear stress in structural silicone joints
                      is not in excess of 20 psi with modulus of elasticity to allow no more than 25%
                      movement of joint width, or less if required by sealant manufacturer.
                      a. Provide supports and setting blocks at each light panel to support weight of glass;
                            structural silicone sealant shall not carry dead load of glass or spandrel panels.


     1.4 SUBMITTALS
           A.   Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing adaptation of the manufacturer’s standard
                system to the project; include typical unit elevations at ½” scale and details at 3” scale, to
                show dimensioning, member profiles, anchorage system, interface with building construction,
                and glazing. Indicate the section moduli of wind-load-bearing members, and calculations of


GLAZED CURTAIN WALL                                                                                    08900 - 2
08900.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:56 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                              SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                          22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                          REV 0
-


                stresses and deflections for performance under design loading. Show clearly where and how
                the manufacturer’s system deviates from contract drawings and these specifications.

           B.   Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications for materials and fabrication of curtain
                wall, and instructions and recommendations for installation and maintenance. Include
                certified test reports showing compliance with requirements where a test method is indicated.

           C.   Samples: Submit samples of each type and color of aluminum finish, on 12” long sections of
                extrusions or formed shapes and on 6” squares of sheet or plate. Include 2 or more samples
                in each set, showing near-limits of variations, if any, in color and texture of finish.
                1.    The    Architect reserves the right to require fabrication samples showing the following:
                      a.     Prime members.
                      b.     Joinery.
                      c.     Anchorage.
                      d.     Expansion provisions.
                      e.     Glazing and similar details.
                      f.     Profiles.
                      g.     Intersections.
     1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
           A.   Drawings and Specifications are based on “Vistawall Architectural Products”, CW-600 curtain
                wall system, including custom fabricated members. Ribbon windows are based on “Vistawall
                Architectural Products”, RW-600 Butt Glazed system. Another standard system of a similar
                and equivalent nature may be acceptable when the differences do not materially detract from
                the design concept or intended performance as judged solely by the Architect.

           B.   Single Source Responsibility: Provide glazed curtain wall system for the project that is the
                product of a single manufacturer.

           C.   Installer Qualifications: Glazed curtain wall shall be installed by a firm with not less than 5
                years of successful experience in the erection of stock curtain wall systems similar to
                systems required for this project.

           D.   Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of the “Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store
                Front and Entrance Guide Specifications Manual” by AAMA.

     1.6 WARRANTY
           A.   General: Provide written warranty, signed by the Contractor and Installer, agreeing to repair or
                replace defective materials and workmanship of glazed curtain wall work during 1-year
                warranty period (see primary components listing in this section).
                1.    Defective is defined to include the following:
                      a. Abnormal deterioration.
                      b. Abnormal againg.
                      c. Abnormal weathering.
                      d. Glass breakage.
                      e. Failure of operational parts to function normally.


GLAZED CURTAIN WALL                                                                                      08900 - 3
08900.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:56 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


                      f.  Deterioration or discoloration of finishes.
                      g.  Failure of the system to meet performance requirements (including structural and
                          infiltration).
                2.    Repairs or replacements required because of the following shall be completed by the
                      Contractor/Installer and paid for by the Owner at reasonable prevailing rates mutually
                      agreed upon at the time of such repair or replacement work:
                      a. Acts of God exceeding performance requirements.
                      b. Vandalism.
                      c. Inadequate maintenance.
                      d. Alterations.
                      e. Failure of the structure supporting the curtain wall work.
                      f.  Other causes beyond the control of the Manufacturer, Fabricator, Installer or
                          Contractor, as judged by the Architect.
                3.    Warranty and enforcement shall not deprive the Owner of other available action, rights or
                      remedies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
           A.   Aluminum Members: Provide members such as extrusions, formed members, sheet and
                plate, of the alloy, temper and thickness recommended by the manufacturer to comply with
                the requirements of ASTM B 221 for extrusions, and ASTM B 209 for sheet or plate.

           B.   Glazing sealants and fillers are specified in “Glass and Glazing” section.

           C.   Glass is specified in “Glass and Glazing” sections.

           D.   Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide cadmium coating no less than .0002 for all steel
                fasteners. Provide manufacturer’s standard shop applied zinc chromate coating to all steel
                anchors, clips etc.; touch up all field welds with same coating. Provide non-staining, non-
                ferrous shims for installation and alignment of curtain wall work.

           E.   Concealed Flashing: Provide dead-soft 26-gage stainless steel concealed flashings, of type
                selected for compatibility by the manufacturer.

           F.   Fasteners and Accessories: Provide manufacturer’s standard non-corrosive fasteners and
                accessories that are compatible with materials used in the framing system and with exposed
                portions that match finish of the curtain wall system. Where movement should be expected,
                provide slip-joint linings of sheets, pads, shims, or washers of fluorocarbon resin or a similar
                material recommended by the manufacturer.

           G.   Firestopping Materials: Provide mineral fiber insulation as specified, suitable for permanent
                placement and complying with governing regulations.

     2.2 FABRICATION:
           A.   General: Fabricate curtain wall system at manufacturer’s shop to the fullest extent possible,
                and prior to application of finishes. Unless otherwise indicated provide concealed fasteners.
                Make provisions to weep penetrating water and condensation to the exterior.

GLAZED CURTAIN WALL                                                                                   08900 - 4
08900.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:56 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


     2.3 FINISHES
           A.   Special Coatings: (Exterior)

           B.   Fluoropolymer Coating: Provide the manufacturer’s special pigmented 2-coat baked system
                of 33 percent thermoplastic polymer of vinylidine fluoride (59 percent fluorine by weight), 1.2
                mils dry film thickness, medium gloss at 60 deg. in accordance with ASTM D 523. Match
                PPG Duranar UC54434 Aged Copper. Comply with requirements of AAMA 605.2.

           C.   Interior Coating: Manufacturer’s standard thermosetting acrylic, color to match exterior.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 INSPECTION
           A.   Examine the supporting structure and conditions under which the work is to be erected, and
                notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do
                not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
                acceptable to the curtainwall Fabricator.

     3.2 INSTALLATIONS
           A.   Refer to Section 08800, Glass and Glazing, Section 08410, Aluminum Entrances and
                Storefronts and Section 07900, Joint Sealers for installation of curtainwall work specified
                therein.

           B.   Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for protection, handling and installation of fabricated
                curtain wall components, with particular care and attention to preservation of applied finishes.
                Discard or remove and replace damaged members.

           C.   Anchor components securely in place in the manner indicated, shimming and allowing for
                movement resulting from changes in thermal conditions. Provide separators and isolators to
                prevent corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent “freeze-up” of moving joints.

           D.   Firestopping: Clean debris from behind curtain wall during erection and provide temporary
                closures to prevent accumulation of debris. Install firestopping to comply with governing
                regulations and AAMA TIR-A3. Install firestopping with securely anchored metal flanges or
                equivalent provisions to prevent dislocation.

           E.   Glazing is specific in “Glass and Glazing” section. Sealants and joint fillers are specified in
                “Joint Sealers” sections.

           F.   Erection Tolerances: Install curtain wall components plumb, level, accurately aligned and
                accurately located in reference to column lines and floor levels. Adjust work to conform to
                the following tolerances:
                1.    Plumb: 1/8” in 10’; 1/4” in 40’.
                2.    Level: 1/8” in 20’; 1/4" in 40’.




GLAZED CURTAIN WALL                                                                                   08900 - 5
08900.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:56 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


                3.    Alignment: Limit offset of member alignment to 1/16” where surfaces are flush or less
                                       f
                      than 1/2” out o flush, and separated by less than 2” by a reveal or protruding work;
                      otherwise limit offsets to 1/8”.
                4.    Location: 3/8” maximum deviation from the measured theoretical location of any member
                      at any location.
     3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
           A.   Conduct on-site tests for w  ater infiltration with the manufacturer’s representative present.
                Test will be done in compliance with AAMA 501.2 “Field Check of Metal Curtainwalls for
                Water Leakage”. Joints not meeting specified requirements and other joints having similar
                deficiencies shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner. Testing shall be performed by an
                accredited testing agency.

     3.4 CLEANING
           A.   Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after erection and installation of glass
                and sealants, allowing for nominal curing of liquid sealants. The curtain wall installer shall
                advise the Contractor of proper and adequate procedures for protection and cleaning during
                the remainder of the construction period, so that the system will be without damage and
                deterioration at the time of acceptance.


                                              END OF SECTION




GLAZED CURTAIN WALL                                                                                 08900 - 6
08900.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:56 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                 SECTION 09260
                                                            GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................................................. 2
  1.3           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.4                                           D
                DELIVERY, STORAGE AN HANDLING....................................................................................................................... 3
  1.5           PROJECT CONDITIONS................................................................................................................................................. 3

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 3
  2.1           MANUFACTURERS....................................................................................................................................................... 3
  2.2           MATERIALS.................................................................................................................................................................. 3

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 5
  3.1           PREPARATION ............................................................................................................................................................. 5
  3.2           INSTALLATION - GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................... 5
  3.3           METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS........................................................................................................................................ 6
  3.4           SOUND-ATTENUATING CONSTRUCTION..................................................................................................................... 7
  3.5           CAVITY SHAFT WALL................................................................................................................................................. 7
  3.6           GYPSUM BOARD APPLICA TION.................................................................................................................................. 8
  3.7           GYPSUM BOARD ACCESSORIES................................................................................................................................ 9
  3.8           CONCEALMENT OF JOINTS AND DEPRESSIONS......................................................................................................... 9
  3.9           CLEANING.................................................................................................................................................................. 10


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 REFERENCES
           A.       American Insurance Association
                    1.       Fire Resistance Ratings.
           B.       American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
                    1.  A653/A653M - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-
                        Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
                    2. C36 - Specification for Gypsum Wallboard.
                    3. C475 - Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.
                    4. C630 - Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.
                    5. C645 - Specification for Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and
                        Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.
                    6. C665 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
                        Construction and Manufactured Housing.
                    7. C754 - Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-
                        Attached Gypsum Board.
                    8. C840 - Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
                    9. C1047 - Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer
                        Base.
                    10. E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.


GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES                                                                                                                                                     09260 - 1
09260.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:39 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


                11. E90 - Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of
                    Building Partitions.
                12. E1414 - Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms Sharing a
                    Common Ceiling Plenum.
          C.    Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA)
                1.   36 CFR 1191 - Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Final Guidelines.
          D.    Gypsum Association (GA)
                1.   GA-214 - Levels of Gypsum Board Finish.
          E.    Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
                1.   Building Materials Directory.
                2.   Fire Resistance Directory.
          F.    Specified gypsum wallboard materials manufacturer's printed specifications and product data.

     1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
          A.    Horizontal Load Resistance
                1.   Except for cavity shaft wall for elevator shafts, when a uniformly distributed horizontal
                     load of 240 Pa (5 pounds per square foot) is applied normal to one side of the wall, limit
                     the maximum deflection in the studs or furring to 1/360 of the unsupported span.
          B.    Fire-Rated Construction
                1.   Provide materials and methods of installation for fire-rated construction which comply
                     with requirements of American Insurance Association "Fire Resistance Ratings"
                     publication or UL "Fire Resistance Directory" for fire resistance classification specified
                     or indicated and UL design number or test number and authority submitted.
                2.   Submit deviations from the approved test assembly for approval and obtain written
                     approval of the State Fire Marshal and the Architect.
     1.3 SUBMITTALS
          A.    Submit a description of proposed use and safe working loads of ceiling hanger attachment
                devices.

          B.    Submit a statement of compliance for materials and methods of installation for fire-rated
                construction and sound-attenuating construction.

          C.    Submit in duplicate a testing laboratory report for fire-rated assemblies, showing details of
                construction, including control joints. One will be returned for use by the Contractor.

          D.    Submit in triplicate a notarized certificate, addressed to the State Fire Marshal or other
                authority having jurisdiction over the Project, stating that the materials for fire-rated
                assemblies for the Project have been installed in accordance with the UL design number or
                test authority test number submitted.




GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES                                                                              09260 - 2
09260.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:39 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                        SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                    22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                    REV 0
-


     1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
          A.    Packing and Shipping
                1.   Deliver manufactured materials to job in their original packages or containers or bundles
                     with manufacturer's name, brand name, grade, UL listing, and other pertinent d        ata
                     clearly marked thereon.
          B.    Storage and Protection
                1.   Store materials in a dry place providing protection from damage and exposure to the
                     elements. Stack gypsum board flat, supported its full width and length to prevent
                     sagging, and neatly to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces.
     1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
          A.    Maintain continuous and uniform heat, ventilation and humidity control as required in gypsum
                board application areas prior to, during and following application of gypsum board and joint
                finishing materials or the bonding of adhesives.

          B.    Maintain temperatures within the building, at the application areas, between 13 and 21
                degrees C (55 and 70 degrees F).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 MANUFACTURERS
          A.    Steel Framing and Furring
                1.   Dale Industries, Inc.
                2.   Dietrich Industries, Inc.
                3.   National Gypsum Co.
                4.   Unimast Inc.
          B.    Gypsum Wallboard and Related Products
                1.   Georgia-Pacific Corp. (G-P)
                2.   Lafarge Gypsum (LG)
                3.   National Gypsum Co. (National)
                4.   USG Corp. (USG)
          C.    Steel Reinforcing
                1.   Metal-Lite, Inc.
     2.2 MATERIALS
          A.    Suspension System and Metal Furring Materials
                1.   ASTM C754 and the following:
                     a.      Carrying channels: 38-mm (1-1/2-inch) size, cold-rolled steel, galvanized or
                             asphaltum-painted.
                     b.      Rigid furring channels: hat-shaped, minimum 66 mm (2-5/8 inches) wide by 22 mm
                             (7/8 inch) deep, roll-formed from 0.455-mm-thick (0.0179-inch-thick) electro-
                             galvanized steel sheets.


GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES                                                                             09260 - 3
09260.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:39 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


                     c.      Adjustable furring brackets: formed from 1.0-mm (20 gage) galvanized steel sheet,
                             25 mm (one inch) wide, designed to provide furring depth of up to 56 mm (2-1/4
                             inches) for braced furring attached to masonry or concrete.
                     d.      Hangers for supporting carrying channels from building construction: minimum
                             3.76-mm (9 gage) galvanized steel wire, soft temper, straightened.
                     e.      Tie wire for lacing and attaching rigid furring channels to carrying channels in
                             ceiling construction: 1.58-mm (16 gage) soft temper, galvanized steel wire. Zinc-
                             coated clips of cold drawn spring steel wire not lighter than 2.69 mm (12 gage) may
                             be substituted for tie wire when allowed by fire resistance test.
          B.    Metal Wall Framing Studs
                1.   Non-load-bearing-channel type, cold-formed from galvanized steel sheet, minimum 0.455
                     mm (0.0179 inch) thick (25 gage), unless otherwise specified or indicated, and
                     complying with ASTM C645.
                2.   Provide minimum 0.792-mm-thick (0.0312-inch-thick) (20 gage) studs for the following:
                     a.      Double stud assemblies.
                     b.      The first stud in the partition beyond door jamb.
                     c.      Studs to which wall-mounted equipment, including Owner-furnished equipment, is
                             fastened.
                3.   Furnish metal studs complete with floor and ceiling tracks, accessories including
                     suitable shapes and connections for framing around openings and elsewhere as may be
                     required for the anchorage of attachments, and other components standard with the
                     metal stud manufacturer for the type, sizes, and application of studs used.
                4.   Accessories: galvanized or factory prime coat painted with rust-inhibitive paint.
                5.   Except for fire-rated construction, provide standard web cutouts located 300 mm (12
                     inches) from each end, and additional cutouts in width not greater than 75 percent of
                     width of web, located at 600, 900, 1200 and 1500 mm (24, 36, 48 and 60 inches) from
                     bottom of stud.
                6.   For fire-rated construction, provide cutouts as in the approved test assembly.
          C.    Vertical Deflection Clips
                1.   Bypass clips, capable of accommodating up to 19 mm (¾ inch) of vertical displacement
                     of primary structure, with preinstalled step bushing to provide friction-free movement as
                     manufactured by The Steel Network, Inc. or the framing manufacturer.
          D.    Steel Reinforcing
                1.   For handrails and grab bars, comply with ADA, Section 4.26.
          E.    Acoustical Sealing Compound
                1.   Sealant D specified in Section 07920.
          F.    Gypsum Wallboard
                1.   ASTM C36, of thickness indicated, 1200 mm (48 inches) wide, in lengths as required to
                     suit the application and to minimize joints, with tapered edge and paintable exposed
                     face.
                2.   Gypsum wallboard for fire-rated construction: listed in the UL Building Materials
                     Directory and bear the UL classification marking or listing mark.

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES                                                                               09260 - 4
09260.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:39 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


          G.    Wallboard Accessories
                1.   Size wallboard accessories as required for the wallboard thickness and application.
                2.   Screws: self-drilling, self-tapping, gypsum wallboard screws.
                3.   Cornerbeads, edge trims, and control joints: ASTM C1047.
                4.   Flexible dust membrane: 0.10-mm (4-mil) polyethylene sheet or as recommended by
                     gypsum wallboard manufacturer.
          H.    Finishing Materials
                1.   Finishing materials, including joint tape and embedding and finishing types of joint
                     compound: the products of a single manufacturer and complying with ASTM C475.
          I.    Sound-Attenuating Blanket
                1.                                                               I
                     Glass or mineral fiber complying with ASTM C665, Type , 40.0 kg/cu. m (2.5 pcf)
                     density, of size to fit from web to web of metal studs, 63 mm (2-1/2 inches) thick and
                     having maximum fire hazard classification, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84,
                     of 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed.
          J.    Cavity Shaft Wall Materials
                1.   Comply with provisions below, unless otherwise required by indicated fire resistance
                     design requirements.
                2.   Metal components
                     a.      ASTM C645, except minimum yield strength of 276 MPa (40 ksi) for C-H studs and
                             228 MPa (33 ksi) for other components, zinc-coated per ASTM A653/A653M, G60
                             coating designation, minimum thickness as specified.
                     b.      Top and bottom runner tracks: 0.577 mm (0.0227 inch) thick, J     -shaped, same
                             depth as studs.
                     c.      "C-H" or "C-T" studs: 0.836 mm (0.0329 inch) thick, 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) wide by
                             depth indicated.
                     d.      "E" studs: 0.836 mm (0.0329 inch) thick, 25 mm (1 inch) wide by depth indicated.
                     e.      Jamb struts and headers for framing openings: not less than 0.836 mm (0.0329
                             inch) thick; 75-mm (3-inch) leg for jamb struts.
                3.   Gypsum liner: panels 25 mm (1 inch) thick and 600 mm (24 inches) wide, with beveled
                     edges, as manufactured by USG or G-P.
                4.   Fasteners for runner tracks to structure: power driven pins providing 890 n (200 lbs.) in
                     shear resistance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 PREPARATION
          A.    Protection
                1.   Protect adjacent construction with suitable covering or other method during progress of
                     the Work until completion.
     3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
          A.    Interface with Other Products



GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES                                                                             09260 - 5
09260.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:39 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                        REV 0
-


                1.   Coordinate this Work with Work specified under other Sections that penetrates or
                     otherwise disturbs this Work.
     3.3 METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS
          A.    General
                1.   Install metal support systems in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's
                     printed directions, unless otherwise specified.
          B.    Ceiling Suspension System
                1.   Where required to obtain the indicated ceiling heights or to meet specific conditions,
                     provide carrying channels attached to, or wire hanger suspended from building
                     construction. Provide approved hanger attachment devices. Do not support hangers from
                     roof deck.
                2.   Space and support carrying channels not more than 1200 mm (48 inches) each way,
                     unless otherwise required to meet fire resistance ratings.
                3.   Brace and secure carrying channels in position, true and rigid and in a manner to
                     prevent deflection. Keep carrying channels approximately 25 mm (one inch) free of wall
                     and other building elements.
                4.   Install furring channels at right angles to supporting members and secured with wire
                     clips or 2 loops of tie-wire at such intervals that the span of furring channels nowhere
                     exceeds 1200 mm (48 inches). Secure furring channels to structural members if
                     carrying channels are not used.
                5.   Space furring channels not more than 400 mm (16 inches) center-to-center. Join furring
                     channels by nesting channels not less than 200 mm (8 inches) and securely tied with
                     double loops of tie-wire. Locate the first and last furring channel and ends of furring
                     channels approximately 50 mm (2 inches) from walls and other building elements.
          C.    Vertical Furring
                1.   Provide all steel shapes, clips, crimped band iron, wire and other attachments
                     necessary to bring wallboard to lines indicated. Install metal furring at maximum spacing
                     of 600 mm (24 inches).
                2.   Install wall furring vertically and rigidly attached to the substrate, or to furring channels
                     attached to adjustable furring brackets where required to provide furring depth indicated.
          D.    Metal Stud Partitions
                1.   General
                     a.    Position metal studs vertically in tracks, spaced 400 mm (16 inches) on centers, or
                           less where otherwise indicated or required. Where indicated, connect vertical
                           deflection clips to bypassing studs and anchor to primary building structure. Install
                           double stud assemblies at jambs of hollow metal frames, accurately centered and
                           attached to anchor clips with bolts or screws. Install the next stud not over 150 mm
                           (6 inches) away from the double stud. Over openings, install a cut-to-length section
                           of track, with web flange bent at each end, to receive metal studs over the opening.
                     b. Construct partitions extending full height from floor to ceiling to interrupt the ceiling
                           system, unless otherwise indicated.
                2.   Soffits



GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES                                                                                 09260 - 6
09260.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:39 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                             SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                         22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                         REV 0
-


                     a.      Anchor tracks to steel framing. Position metal studs in tracks, spaced 400 mm (16
                             inches) on centers and not more than 50 mm (2 inches) from ends of soffit.
                3.   Do not enlarge existing holes or provide additional holes in studs.
          E.    Steel Reinforcing
                1.   Provide 18 ga. steel reinforcing, or fire-treated wood blocking specified in Section 06100,
                     for wall-mounted fixtures and equipment fastened to face of studs at locations indicated
                     and as follows:
                     a.      For attachment of wall cabinets.
                     b.      For attachment of wall-mounted door stops.
                     c.      At resilient base.
                     d.      At pipe cutouts.
                2.   Install reinforcing so that face of studs and face of reinforcing is flush.
          F.    Double Stud Assemblies
                1.   Provide double stud assemblies where indicated, consisting of two studs toe to toe,
                     anchored together with an 18 gage metal strap, 150 mm (6 inches) high, attached to
                     studs with sheet metal screws. Do not place sheet metal screws on side receiving
                     gypsum wallboard. Anchor studs together every 760 mm (30 inches) on center.
          G.    Penetrations
                1.   Box in items which penetrate fire-rated walls or ceilings with same materials that form
                     the wall or ceiling. Support box from structural system of wall or ceiling and not from the
                     penetrating object.
                2.   Provide framing in wall and suspension system for the support of:
                     a.      Lighting fixtures, except where grid suspension system is used.
                     b.      Grilles, diffusers, and other penetrating items.

     3.4 SOUND-ATTENUATING CONSTRUCTION
          A.    Partitions
                1.   Construct partitions indicated to be sound-attenuating to provide a minimum STC of 45
                     when tested in accordance with ASTM E90.
                2.   Attach sound attenuation blanket within the stud space to one side of the partition.
                3.   Install sound attenuating blanket between studs from floor to ceiling in partitions which
                     contain plumbing supply or drain lines.
                4.   Apply acoustical sealing compound in two parallel beads, 10 mm (3/8 inch) in diameter,
                     at each side of runner tracks at juncture with floors, construction above, dissimilar walls,
                     structural elements, and around perimeter and back of outlet boxes and other items
                     penetrating the wallboard, and concealed by subsequent construction.
     3.5 CAVITY SHAFT WALL
          A.    Structural Components
                1.   Accurately align metal runner tracks and secure to concrete slabs and structural
                     framing members with fasteners at 600-mm (24-inch) spacing and within 100 mm (4


GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES                                                                                09260 - 7
09260.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:39 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                        REV 0
-


                     inches) of the end of track segments. Provide runner tracks as required to close space
                     between joists of pan joist construction.
                2.   Cut "C-H" or "C-T" and "E" studs accurately to engage the short leg of top and bottom
                     runner tracks. Use "E" studs where shaft wall abuts columns or partitions, as a starting
                     member, at duct openings as a vertical framing member and in the field of the wall where
                     "C-H" or "C-T" studs cannot be used. Use "C-H" or "C-T" studs in the field of the wall at
                     600-mm (24-inch) spacing, unless otherwise indicated.
                3.   Cut gypsum liner panels just slightly short of the short leg of top runner track to allow
                     tilting in place when inserted in bottom track. Panel edges shall tightly abut the stud
                     webs.
     3.6 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION
          A.    General
                1.   Apply gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840, unless otherwise specified.
          B.    Ceilings and Soffits
                1.   Apply gypsum board with the long dimension at right angles to furring channels or
                     studs, unless otherwise required by the testing authority for the fire-rated system
                     approved for use on the Project. Abutting ends and edges shall occur over a furring
                     channel or stud. Use wallboard of the maximum practicable length to minimize end
                     joints. End joints shall be neatly fitted and staggered. Properly support boards around all
                     cutouts. At completion, make surface of gypsum board flush and level. Do not use felt
                     pens or other marking media on exposed face of gypsum board that will bleed through
                     final finishing.
          C.    Partitions and Vertical Surfaces
                1.   Apply board with long or short dimension against stud flanges and furring channels, with
                     joints on opposite sides of partition arranged to occur on different studs and end joints
                     neatly fitted and staggered. Properly support boards around all cut-outs.
                2.   For double layer fire-rated partitions, apply second layer of board vertically over the first
                     layer, with joints offset from first layer, and laminated thereto with joint compound, or
                     otherwise secured by a method allowed by the testing authority for the fire-rated system
                     approved for use on this Project.
          D.    Grouting Frames
                1.   Spot grout hollow metal frames in stud partitions with joint compound at jamb anchor
                     inserts.
          E.    Fastening Gypsum Board
                1.   Space screw fasteners a maximum of 300 mm (12 inches) on centers in board field and
                     400 mm (8 inches) on centers staggered along abutting edges and ends. Space
                     fasteners not less than 10 mm (3/8 inch) from edges and ends of board. Screws shall be
                     power-driven in accordance with gypsum board manufacturer's directions.
          F.    Penetrations




GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES                                                                                 09260 - 8
09260.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:39 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                               SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                           22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                           REV 0
-


                1.   Provide holes in non-rated GWB partitions for penetrating items not indicated to be
                     sleeved by clearly cutting holes in GWB no more than ½-inch larger than penetrating
                     item. Refer to Section 07920 for sealant requirements.
     3.7 GYPSUM BOARD ACCESSORIES
          A.    Control Joints
                1.   Isolate gypsum board from all structural elements except floors, by control joint beads
                     or edge trim. Locate control joints where indicated and as follows:
                     a.      At all changes in type of substrate.
                     b.      At control or expansion joints occurring in building construction.
                     c.      In large ceiling areas, not over 15.2 meters (50 feet) in either direction and to divide
                             ceiling into rectangular areas of not over 230 square meters (2500 square feet).
                     d.      In long partition runs, such as corridors, at maximum spacing of 9 meters (30 feet).
                     e.      Where gypsum board abuts a wall or ceiling of dissimilar construction.
                     f.      At door frames in stud partitions and furred walls from top of frame to top of board,
                             at both jambs and both sides of partition.
                2.   Construct control joints in fire-rated assemblies as detailed in the submitted testing
                     laboratory report.
          B.    Corner Beads
                1.   Provide corner beads at vertical and horizontal external corners.
          C.    Edge Trim
                1.   Provide edge trim at the intersection of gypsum board surfaces with exterior walls,
                     including furred gypsum board construction.
                2.   Provide edge trim where ceiling abuts a structural element, dissimilar wall or partition
                     assembly or other vertical penetration, except interior metal stud and gypsum board
                     partitions.
          D.    Flexible Dust Membrane
                1.   Provide flexible dust membrane at internal corner formed by gypsum board ceiling and
                     gypsum board furring on exterior wall.
          E.    Installation
                1.   Set gypsum board accessories plumb and level and secure in a substantial manner.
                     Make exposed joints of gypsum board accessories close and tight.
     3.8 CONCEALMENT OF JOINTS AND DEPRESSIONS
          A.    General
                1.   Finish gypsum board, including sanding of final coat, in accordance with ASTM C840.
          B.    Levels of Finish
                1.   Provide levels of finish, as defined in GA-214, at the following locations:
                     a.      Level 1: above ceilings and other concealed locations.
                     b.      Level 4: exposed surfaces, unless otherwise specified.


GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES                                                                                    09260 - 9
09260.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:39 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                       SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                   22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                   REV 0
-


     3.9 CLEANING
          A.    At the completion of the Work leave finished space clean and in acceptable condition.


                                             END OF SECTION




GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES                                                                           09260 - 10
09260.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:39 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:36 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                      SECTION 09510
                                                                    ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................................................. 2
  1.3           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.4           QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.5           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING...................................................................................................................... 3
  1.6           PROJECT CONDITIONS................................................................................................................................................. 3
  1.7           WARRANTY................................................................................................................................................................. 3

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 3
  2.1           SUSPENSION SYSTEM MEMBERS ............................................................................................................................... 3
  2.2           ACOUSTICAL UNITS .................................................................................................................................................... 4
  2.3           ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS ................................................................................................................................ 5

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 5
  3.1           PREPARATION ............................................................................................................................................................. 5
  3.2           INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................................................. 5
  3.3           ADJUSTING.................................................................................................................................................................. 7
  3.4           CLEANING.................................................................................................................................................................... 7


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 REFERENCES
           A.       American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
                    1.       C423 - Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the
                             Reverberation Room Method.
                    2.       C635 - Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension
                             Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
                    3.       C636 - Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile
                             and Lay-In Panels.
                    4.       C665 - Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
                             Construction and Manufactured Housing.
                    5.       E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
                    6.       E580 - Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and
                             Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint.
                    7.       E1264 - Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.
                    8.       E1414 - Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms Sharing a
                             Common Ceiling Plenum.
           B.       Ceilings & Interior Systems Contractors Association (CISCA)
                    1.       Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings -- Seismic
                             Zones 0-2.
                    2.       Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies --
                             Seismic Zones 3 & 4.


ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS                                                                                                                                                         09510 - 1
09510.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:41 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:37 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                        SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                    22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                    REV 0
-


          C.    Lead Industries Association, Inc.
                1.   Acoustical Plenum Barriers and How to Install Them.
          D.    National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
                1.   90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
          E.    Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
                1.   Fire Resistance Directory.

     1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
          A.    General
                1.   Minimum performance requirements for completed acoustical ceiling installations as
                     tested by an approved independent testing laboratory:
                     a. Noise reduction coefficient (NRC) range: as specified, when tested in accordance
                          with ASTM C423, mounting no. 7 suspension system.
                     b. Ceiling attenuation class (CAC): as specified, when tested in accordance with
                          ASTM E1414.
                     c. Light reflectance coefficient: minimum 0.75 per ASTM E1264.
                     d. Fire hazard classification: maximum of 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke
                          developed, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
          B.    Suspension System Members
                1.   Support all applied dead loads without exceeding a deflection of 1/360 of the
                     unsupported span.

     1.3 SUBMITTALS
          A.    Samples
                1.   Submit Samples of each type of the following to be used on the Project:
                     a. Acoustical units, full size, illustrating manufacturer's standard range in color and
                         texture.
                     b. Grid system components, full size in section, approximately 300 mm (12 inches)
                         long.
          B.    Test Data
                1.   Submit test data for suspension members as outlined in ASTM C635 and performed by
                     an approved independent testing laboratory. Submit data in log form as outlined in C635,
                     Article 10.
                2.   Submit shear and pull-out test data for hanger devices to be used.

     1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
          A.    Contractor's Qualifications
                1.   Employ the acoustical materials manufacturer, or his authorized representative, as
                     approved, to install the Work with the use of workmen skilled in the trade.



ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS                                                                                09510 - 2
09510.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:41 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:37 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                        SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                    22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                    REV 0
-


     1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
          A.    Deliver materials in their original packages or containers or bundles with manufacturer's
                name, brand name, grade, UL listing (when specified) and other pertinent data clearly marked
                thereon.

          B.    Store materials in original containers in dry area at not less than 18 degrees C (65 degrees
                F) for at least 24 hours before installation.

     1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
          A.    Prior to start of the Work, maintain the spaces to receive the work at minimum temperature
                of 18 degrees C (65 degrees F).

          B.    Install acoustical materials only when normal temperature and humidity conditions
                approximate the interior conditions that will exist when the building is occupied and maintain
                those conditions during and after the installation.

     1.7 WARRANTY
          A.    Special Warranty
                1.   Warrant the Work for 2 years against defective materials and workmanship, including
                     shrinkage of acoustical units and discoloration, except where such failure is due to
                     abuse or failure of related work installed by other parties.
                2.   During the warranty period, restore defective Work to the standard of the Contract
                     Documents, including materials, labor, refinishing and other costs incidental to the
                     Work. Inspect the Work within 24 hours after receipt of notice from the Owner. Restore
                     Work found to be defective as defined in the Contract Documents within 10 days after
                     receipt of notice from the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MEMBERS
          A.    General
                1.   Fabricate members and devices from materials and conform to design criteria for
                     intermediate-duty systems, as specified in ASTM C635 and as modified in this Section.
                2.   No aluminum members or devices will be permitted in UL fire-rated systems. Provide
                     members and devices used in UL fire-rated systems of size and cross section required
                     by the approved UL classification design.
          B.    Hanger Attachment Devices:
                1.   General: Provide anchors, fasteners, hooks, eyebolts and other devices designed for
                     fastening to building construction, for support of ceiling suspension systems, which are
                     sized for maximum loads that may be transmitted by the completed ceiling system.
                2.   Powder Driven Fasteners: Tempered steel pins, minimum 3.7 mm (0.145 inch)
                     diameter, with corrosive-resistant plating or coating, provided with guide washers to
                     accurately control penetration, minimum 32 mm (1-1/4 inches) unless otherwise noted.
                     Accomplish fastening by low-velocity piston-driven powder-actuated tool. Pins and tool:



ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS                                                                                 09510 - 3
09510.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:41 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:37 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


                     as manufactured by Hilti Corp.; ITW Ramset/Redhead; Impex Tool Corp.; Powers
                     Fasteners, Inc.; or as approved.
                3.   Expansion Anchors: Hilti Corp. "Kwik-Bolt II Concrete Expansion Anchors and Hilti
                     Drop-In Anchors"; ITW Ramset/Redhead "Trubolt Wedge Anchors and Multi-Set II
                     Anchors"; Powers Fasteners, Inc. “Power-Stud and Steel Drop-In”; or as approved.
                4.   Expansion Eye Anchors: ITW Ramset/Redhead "Dynabolt, Tie Wire TW -1614"; Powers
                     Fasteners, Inc. “Tie-Wire Power-Stud; or as approved.
          C.    Hanger Materials

                1.   Provide anchors, fasteners, hooks, eyebolts and other devices designed for fastening to
                     building construction, for support of ceiling suspension systems, which are sized for
                     maximum loads that may be transmitted by the completed ceiling system. Furnish
                     devices that are to be set in concrete complete with approved placement and location
                     drawings.
                2.   Hanger wire: galvanized carbon steel, soft temper, prestretched, with a yield stress load
                     of at least 3 times design load, but not less than 2.6-mm (12 gage).
          D.    Runners for Exposed Grid Lay-In System
                1.   Main and cross runners: fabricated from sheet steel or aluminum, designed for direct
                     hanging and have exposed flanges factory finished, white, type as follows:
                     a. Act 1: "T" cross section, designed for interlocking with cross members, having face
                         width of 24 mm (15/16 inch).
                2.   Frame for support of lighting fixtures: rigid pvc with a white finish.
          E.    Wall Molding
                1.   Angle or channel shaped; unless indicated otherwise, exposed flange of same width as
                     main runners; factory finished to match main runners.
                2.   Provide special shadow line wall molding as indicated.
          F.    Accessories
                1.   Accessories to complete each system such as spring clips, splicers, hold down clips
                     and connectors: of the type and design recommended by the manufacturer.
     2.2 ACOUSTICAL UNITS
          A.    Mineral Tile:
                1.   Homogeneous mineral fiber, blended and cast with cementitious binder; Armstrong
                     World Industries, Inc. or equivalent product as manufactured by Celotex Corp.; USG
                     Interiors, Inc.
                     a. Tile size: ACT-1- 2’ x 4’.
                     b. Thickness: 16 mm (5/8 inch).
                     c. Edge treatment: square.
                     d. NRC range: 0.55.
                     e. CAC: ACT-1 40.
                     f.    Face pattern: medium texture, fine fissured.
                     g. Finish: Scrubbable factory-applied vinyl plastic paint.
                2.   Types

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS                                                                                 09510 - 4
09510.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:41 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:37 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                        SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                    22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                    REV 0
-


                     a.      Refer to Finish and Material Schedule.
     2.3 ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS
          A.    General
                1.   Provide acoustical ceilings consisting of ceiling suspension systems and acoustical
                     elements, as indicated and specified.
          B.    Exposed Grid Lay-In System
                1.   Factory-finished exposed main runners and cross runners directly suspended from
                     overhead construction, mechanically interlocked. Acoustical lay-in panels (boards) sized
                     for laying in the grid openings and supported by the exposed flanges of the grid
                     members. Exposed angle or channel molding to support panels at wall line.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 PREPARATION
          A.    Protection
                1.                                                                               f
                     Protect this Work and adjacent construction against damage during progress o the
                     Work until completion of the Project.

     3.2 INSTALLATION
          A.    General
                1.   Install acoustical ceiling systems, of types specified in this Section, in conformance
                     with ASTM C636, modifications included in this Section, approved Shop Drawings,
                     material samples and printed information from material manufacturer.
          B.    Suspension System
                1.   Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit.
                     Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of
                     adjacent members. Do not splice hanger wire.
                2.   Do not attach to or suspend (support) from metal roof deck, which is not part of a metal
                     deck-concrete assembly, any part of ceiling suspension system.
                3.   Where overhead construction will not permit attachment to or the proper location of
                     hanging devices, provide additional support steel in the form of specified carrying
                     channels or other steel members of size required to safely support the completed ceiling
                     system.
                4.   Install entire ceiling system so additional bracing is not required to support movable
                     partitions at any point.
          C.    Hanger Attachment
                1.   Metal Decking with Structural Concrete Fill
                     a. Vertical Wires, Before Placing Concrete: Drill holes in bottom flutes of metal
                         decking and drop cast-in-place hanger wires (wire "pigtail" with 50-mm (2-inch) -
                         diameter loop and 100-mm (4-inch) tail through holes.
                     b. Vertical Wires After Concrete Fill: Attach wire to shot-in or expansion eye bolt
                         anchor or expansion bolt and steel strap.


ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS                                                                                09510 - 5
09510.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:41 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:37 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


                     c.   Diagonal Bracing Wires: Attach 25-mm (1-inch) -wide by 50-mm (2-inch) -long
                          sheet metal strap to metal decking with shot-in or expansion anchor. Attach wire
                          to sheet metal strap as noted.
                2.   New Concrete: Drill holes in form and drop cast-in-place hanger wires through holes, or
                     hanger inserts, prior to placing concrete. Attach h anger wires to reinforcing steel as
                     noted.
                3.   Existing Concrete
                     a. Attach hanger wires to powder-driven fasteners.
                4.   Fasten hanger wires with not less than 3 tight turns within a distance of 38 mm (1-
                     1/2 inches) for vertical wires and 4 tight turns within a distance of 38 mm (1-1/2 inches)
                     for diagonal wires. Install hanger or diagonal wire anchors to the structure in such a
                     manner that the direction of the wire aligns as closely as possible with the direction of
                     the forces acting on the wire.
                5.   Provide hanger wires at intersections of grid members at corners of light fixtures.
                6.   Provide additional wire supports for all flush or recessed light fixtures, air terminals or
                     services as follows:
                     a. Fixtures, Air Terminals or Services weighing less than 25 kg (56 pounds): Provide
                           minimum two 12 gauge hanger wires, as slack safety wires, attached at diagonal
                           corners for fixtures. Provide slack safety wires at each corner of 1200 by 1200-mm
                           (48 by 48-inch) light fixtures.
                     b. Fixtures, Air Terminals or Services weighing more than 25 kg (56 pounds): Provide
                           not less than four 12 gauge taut wires attached to the structure above, regardless
                           of the type of ceiling grid system used.
                     c. Provide 4 taut 12 gauge wires attached to the structure above, for fixtures and air
                           terminals or services supported on intermediate duty grid systems.
                     d. The 4 taut 12 gauge wires including their attachment to the structure above shall be
                           capable of supporting 4 times the weight of the unit.
                     e. Support surface-mounted light fixtures by at least 2 positive devices which surround
                           the ceiling runner and which are supported from the structure above by a 12 gauge
                           wire. Spring clips or clamps that connect only to the runner are not acceptable.
          D.    Acoustical Units
                1.   Install acoustical units in strict conformance with manufacturer's approved printed
                     installation instructions and this Section.
          E.    Sealing Wall Molding
                1.   Seal joints between wall or partition and wall molding for ceilings indicated to be sound
                     attenuated with acoustical sealant.
          F.    Wall Molding
                1.   In all locations where edges of acoustical units are exposed and at intersection of
                     acoustical units with all vertical surfaces, provide wall molding. Rest ends of runners on
                     extended leg of wall molding and wire-tie or clip the runners to the wall molding.
          G.    Framing Penetrating Features




ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS                                                                                   09510 - 6
09510.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:41 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:37 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                             SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                         22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                         REV 0
-


                1.   Provide all framing in acoustical ceilings for support of lighting fixtures, grilles, and other
                     penetrating features, as indicated and as required to complete the installation.
                     Coordinate the Work with that of mechanical and electrical work.
          H.    Pattern
                1.   Locate acoustical units in a straight pattern with border units not less than 1/2 unit in
                     width wherever possible. Center joints or center line of units on lighting fixtures or other
                     penetrations. Locate units accurately with joints parallel with room axis, and in line, in
                     both directions.
          I.    Cutting and Fitting
                1.   Do all cutting and fitting of acoustical materials as required to complete the Work and to
                     accommodate the work of other trades.

     3.3 ADJUSTING
          A.    Remove and replace acoustical units that are defective, or that have been damaged for any
                reason, with new matching acoustical units.

     3.4 CLEANING
          A.    Following completion of Work, clean dirty or discolored acoustical units and leave surfaces
                free from any foreign matter.


                                               END OF SECTION




ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS                                                                                      09510 - 7
09510.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:41 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:37 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                    SECTION 09651
                                                                 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 1
  1.3           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING...................................................................................................................... 2
  1.4           PROJECT CONDITIONS................................................................................................................................................. 2

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 2
  2.1           TILE MATERIALS.......................................................................................................................................................... 2

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 2
  3.1           EXAMINATION.............................................................................................................................................................. 2
  3.2           PREPARATION ............................................................................................................................................................. 3
  3.3           INSTALLATION OF RESILIENT TILE.............................................................................................................................. 3
  3.4           CLEANING.................................................................................................................................................................... 4
  3.5           PROTECTION................................................................................................................................................................ 4
  3.6           ALTERATIONS ............................................................................................................................................................. 4


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 REFERENCES
           A.       American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
                    1.       D2047 - Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces as
                             Measured by the James Machine.
                    2.       E648 - Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant
                             Heat Energy Source.
                    3.       F710 - Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors and Other Monolithic Floors to Receive
                             Resilient Flooring.
                    4.       F1066 - Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile.
                    5.       F 1344 – Standard Specification for Rubber Floor Tile.
           B.       Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.)
                    1.       MMM-A-110B - Adhesive, Asphalt, Cut-back Type (For Asphalt and Vinyl Asbestos
                             Tiles).
           C.       Resilient Floor Covering Institute (RFCI)
                    1.       Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings.
     1.2 SUBMITTALS
           A.       Warranty
                    1.       Submit a statement of compliance for materials.
                    2.       Submit a testing laboratory certificate for test for fire hazard classification. Date of test
                             shall be within two years of date of submittal.
           B.       Samples

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING                                                                                                                                                     09651 - 1
09651.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:37 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                        REV 0
-


                1.    Submit four full-size tile Samples of each material representing complete range of color
                      and pattern.
           C.   Maintenance Instructions
                1.    Furnish maintenance instructions for care and cleaning of flooring.
     1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
           A.   Deliver flooring materials to Project site in manufacturer's original unopened containers with
                manufacturer's name, brand name, grade, color, pattern and other pertinent information
                clearly marked thereon.

           B.   Store materials in their original containers at minimum temperature of 21 degrees C (70
                degrees F) for at least 24 hours before installation.

     1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
           A.   Maintain spaces to receive the Work at minimum temperature of 21 degrees C (70 degrees
                F) at floor level for at least 48 hours prior to, during, and for 48 hours after completion of the
                Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 TILE MATERIALS
           A.   Vinyl Composition Tile
                1.    As manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Congoleum Corp.; Domco Inc.;
                      Mannington Commercial; Marley Flexco; Tarkett, Inc.; VPI, LLC, or as approved.
                2.    ASTM F1066, Composition 1; having minimum critical radiant flux of 0.45, when tested
                      in accordance with ASTM E648; dimensionally stable, resistant to alkali and grease and
                      oil, factory-waxed, uniform in thickness, and cut with square edges; color and pattern
                      uniform throughout entire thickness.
                3.    Size: 300 x 300 mm (12 x 12 inches) by 3.2 mm (1/8 inch) thick.
                4.    Color and pattern: as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's range.
           B.   Adhesive
                1.    Alkali-resistant and moisture-resistant cut-back type asphaltic cement suitable for use
                      on below-grade concrete subfloor, and shall conform to Fed. Spec. MMM-A-110B.
           C.   Transition Accessories
                1.    Refer to Section 09653.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 EXAMINATION
           A.   Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur,
                with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements.           Verify that
                substrates and conditions are satisfactory for resilient product installation and comply with
                requirements specified.



RESILIENT TILE FLOORING                                                                                 09651 - 2
09651.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:37 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


           B.   Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F710 and the following:
                1.    Slab substrates are visibly dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and
                      other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine acceptable adhesion
                      characteristics by performing bond test recommended by flooring manufacturer. To
                      preclude an unacceptable level of moisture in or being emitted from slab substrates,
                      verify that they are acceptable for installation of adhesive and resilient products as
                      determined by flooring manufacturer's moisture testing procedures for slabs or other
                      substrates.
                2.    Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
           C.   Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

     3.2 PREPARATION
           A.   General: Comply with resilient product manufacturer's written installation instructions for
                preparing substrates indicated to receive resilient products, including existing flooring and
                substrates that have had existing flooring removed from them.

           B.   Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
                instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.

           C.   Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible
                with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical
                methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

           D.   Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation.
                After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not
                proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

     3.3 INSTALLATION OF RESILIENT TILE
           A.   General
                1.    Install materials in accordance with the manufacturer's printed directions, unless
                      otherwise specified.
                2.    Lay tile from the contents of at least two different containers so that the color,
                      marbleizing or other pattern will be uniform and not spotty, as caused by the variances
                      sometimes found in the different containers. If necessary, sort the tile from different
                      containers to provide uniform appearance in the area being laid. Spotty work will be
                      cause for rejection of the Work.
                3.    Lay tile so as to insure good contact with floor, with close even joints, and with finished
                      surfaces in true and smooth plane.
                4.    Lay tiles square with room axis and with pattern or grain in one direction, unless
                      otherwise indicated in the Finish Schedule. Tile at walls shall be not less than half full
                      size.
                5.    Fit tile neatly against wall at base, into breaks and recesses, and around pipes and
                      other penetrations. Cut, fit and scribe as required by field conditions.
           B.   Tile Over Underfloor Duct



RESILIENT TILE FLOORING                                                                                 09651 - 3
09651.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:37 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                             SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                         22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                         REV 0
-


                1.    Lay floor tile in junction box covers where underfloor duct occurs beneath resilient floor.
                      Remove and reset marker screws indicating future outlets for underfloor ducts.
           C.   Tile Under Casework
                1.    Extend flooring under floor-mounted laboratory casework.
           D.   Transition Accessories
                1.    Refer to Section 09653.
     3.4 CLEANING
           A.   Upon completion of Work in a space, remove manufacturing process coatings, and clean
                surfaces free of adhesive, dirt and other foreign materials within time periods and in manner in
                accordance with the instructions of the tile manufacturer.

     3.5 PROTECTION
           A.   Protect the Work with suitable coverings if traffic or construction work over the finished floor is
                necessary.

     3.6 ALTERATIONS
           A.   Removal of Existing Tile and Adhesive
                1.    Comply with the RFCI reference.
           B.   Patching
                1.    Install floor tile matching existing tile where required for patching existing floor where
                      walls have been removed and where existing floor is damaged.
                2.    Replace damaged tile with whole new tile, except where trimming is required to match
                      existing trimmed tile.
                3.    Remove damaged tile and pieces of tile adjacent to areas to be patched. Clean existing
                      substrates free of old adhesive. Fill with patching compound holes and depressions in
                      existing substrate.

                                                END OF SECTION




RESILIENT TILE FLOORING                                                                                  09651 - 4
09651.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:37 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                             SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                         22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                         REV 0
-


                                                              SECTION 09653
                                                      RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           COLORS....................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.3           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 1
  1.4           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING...................................................................................................................... 2
  1.5           PROJECT CONDITIONS................................................................................................................................................. 2

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 2
  2.1           RESILIENT BASE.......................................................................................................................................................... 2
  2.2           ACCESSORY MATERIALS........................................................................................................................................... 2

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 3
  3.1           EXAMINATION.............................................................................................................................................................. 3
  3.2           PREPARATION ............................................................................................................................................................. 3
  3.3           RESILIENT BASE.......................................................................................................................................................... 3
  3.4           FLOORING TRANSITION ACCESSORIES...................................................................................................................... 3
  3.5           CLEANING.................................................................................................................................................................... 4
  3.6           PROTECTION................................................................................................................................................................ 4


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 COLORS
           A.       Review Drawings and Schedules for specific, proprietary color requirements.

           B.       In the absence of specific color information, provide colors selected by the Architect from
                    manufacturer's standard range.

     1.2 REFERENCES
           A.       American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
                    1.       F 1861 – Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base.
                    2.       F2169 – Standard Specification for Resilient Stair Treads
     1.3 SUBMITTALS
           A.       Warranty
                    1.       Submit a statement of compliance for materials.
           B.       Samples
                    1.       Submit 300-mm-long (12-inch-long) Samples of each material representing complete
                             range of color and pattern.
           C.       Maintenance Instructions
                    1.       Furnish maintenance instructions for care and cleaning of base and accessories.



RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES                                                                                                                                               09653 - 1
09653.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:37 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                        REV 0
-


     1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
           A.   Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original unopened containers with
                manufacturer's name, brand name, grade, color, pattern and other pertinent information
                clearly marked thereon.

           B.   Store materials in their original containers at minimum temperature of 21 degrees C (70
                degrees F) for at least 24 hours before installation.

     1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
           A.   Maintain spaces to receive the Work at minimum temperature of 21 degrees C (70 degrees
                F) at floor level for at least 48 hours prior to, during, and for 48 hours after completion of the
                Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 RESILIENT BASE
           A.   Provide resilient wall base conforming to ASTM F1861, in as long lengths as practicable to
                minimize joints and suit conditions. Provide base in a material listed below. Comply with
                specific requirements as indicated on the Drawings or in Schedules.
                1.    Rubber: as manufactured by Allstate Rubber Corp.; Armstrong World Industries, Inc.;
                      BurkeMercer Flooring Products; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.; Johnsonite; R.C.
                      Musson Rubber Co.; Roppe Corp.; VPI, LLC; or as approved.
           B.   Where other requirements are not indicated, provide base that is:
                1.    100 mm (4 inches) high
                2.    Topset cove style with premolded smooth top and cove at non-carpeted flooring
                3.    Straight style at carpeted floors
           C.   Color and finish:
                1.    In the absence of specific color information: as selected by the Architect from
                      manufacturer's standard range
           D.   Adhesive for resilient base: waterproof adhesive recommended by the manufacturer of the
                base.

     2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
           A.   Transition Accessories
                1.    Vinyl as manufactured by the approved manufacturer of the resilient tile; Johnsonite;
                      Mercer Products Co. Inc.; R.C. Musson Rubber Co.; or VPI, LLC.
                2.    Color: In the absence of specific color information, provide color selected by the
                      Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
                3.    Adhesive: waterproof adhesive recommended by the manufacturer of the resilient tile.
           B.   Concrete Slab Primer
                1.    Non-staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer.



RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES                                                                          09653 - 2
09653.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:37 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                             SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                         22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                         REV 0
-


           C.   Leveling and Patching Compounds
                1.    Latex types as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 EXAMINATION
           A.   Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory. Do not allow resilient base and
                accessories work to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

     3.2 PREPARATION
           A.   Prepare substrate surfaces as follows:
                1.    Use leveling and patching compounds as recommended by the manufacturer for filling
                      small cracks, holes and depressions in substrates.
                2.    Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are
                      incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using
                      mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
           B.   Broom and or vacuum clean substrates to be covered, and inspect substrates for moisture,
                alkaline salts, carbonation or dust.

     3.3 RESILIENT BASE
           A.   Installation
                1.    Cut base material into accurate lengths as required for minimum number of joints.
                      Match edges at all seams or double-cut adjoining lengths.
                2.    Bond base to substrates in full bed of adhesive. Install with tight butt joints with no joint
                      widths greater than 0.4 mm (1/64 inch). Press down so that bottom cove edge follows
                      floor profile. Top and bottom edges shall have firm contact with floor and wall surfaces.
                3.    Form internal corners by mitering. Form external corners by coping and bending
                      material sufficient length around corner for anchorage.
                4.    Scribe base accurately to abutting materials.
                5.    Provide base against front and exposed sides of casework and on wall at knee spaces.
                6.    Provide base on wall behind casework where resilient flooring extends under casework.
                7.    Provide base on columns in areas scheduled to receive resilient flooring.
                8.    On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of
                      base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
     3.4 FLOORING TRANSITION ACCESSORIES
           A.   Resilient Edge Strips (Reducers)
                1.    Provide resilient edge strips where floor covering terminates exposing the edge of the
                      covering. Center under door where floor covering terminates at a door opening, or as
                      indicated.
           B.   Resilient Thresholds
                1.    Center resilient thresholds in door opening, unless otherwise indicated.




RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES                                                                           09653 - 3
09653.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:37 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                      SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                  22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                  REV 0
-


     3.5 CLEANING
           A.   Upon completion of Work in a space, clean surfaces free of adhesive, dirt and other foreign
                materials in accordance with the instructions of the tile manufacturer.

     3.6 PROTECTION
           A.   Protect the Work against mars, marks, indentations and other damage from construction
                operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of the construction
                period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by resilient product manufacturer.


                                             END OF SECTION




RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES                                                                    09653 - 4
09653.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:37 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                         SECTION 09910
                                                                             PAINTS

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           SURFACES NOT INCLUDED......................................................................................................................................... 2
  1.3           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 2
  1.4           DEFINITIONS................................................................................................................................................................. 3
  1.5           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 3
  1.6           QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................................................ 4
  1.7           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING...................................................................................................................... 4
  1.8           ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS................................................................................................................................... 4
  1.9           HAZARDOUS MATERIALS RESTRICTIONS.................................................................................................................. 5
  1.10          MAINTENANCE STOCK ................................................................................................................................................ 5

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 5
  2.1           ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ............................................................................................................................... 5
  2.2           INTERIOR COATING MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................. 6

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 7
  3.1           EXAMINATION.............................................................................................................................................................. 7
  3.2           PREPARATION ............................................................................................................................................................. 7
  3.3           PROTECTION................................................................................................................................................................ 7
  3.4           APPLICATION............................................................................................................................................................... 8
  3.5           PAINTING SCHEDULE - GENERAL................................................................................................................................ 9
  3.6           MIXING AND THINNING............................................................................................................................................... 10
  3.7           CLEANING.................................................................................................................................................................. 10
  3.8           INTERIOR COATING SCHEDULE................................................................................................................................. 10
  3.9           ALTERATIONS ........................................................................................................................................................... 11


PART 1 - GENERAL

     1.1 SUMMARY
           A.       Intent: The intent of this Section is to provide field-applied paint finish on all exposed
                    surfaces that are not otherwise finished. Where there is uncertainty in the interpretation of
                    this intent, request clarification. In the absence of such request and clarification, the
                    Contract Sum shall be understood to include painting surfaces in question. Do not proceed
                    with painting work until certain of the painting requirements.

           B.       This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed interior items and
                    surfaces, including the following:
                    1.       Those installed under the work of the Contract, except those specifically excluded. See
                             following Article, "Surfaces Not Included."
                             a.       Include field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts, hangers,
                                      exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical
                                      equipment, except as excluded.



PAINTS                                                                                                                                                                      09910 - 1
09910.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:07 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:38 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


                2.   Those that are existing, painted, and disturbed under the work of the Contract, including
                     surfaces that become exposed as part of the work.
                3.   Those that are noted or specified to be painted.
          C.    Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop
                priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.

          D.    Paint exposed surfaces, except where the Specifications required that the surface is not to
                be painted or is to remain natural. If a surface or item is not specifically mentioned, paint the
                surface or item the same as similar adjacent surfaces. If a color of finish is not specified or
                indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.

     1.2 SURFACES NOT INCLUDED
          A.    Prefinished Items
                1.   Unless otherwise indicated or specified, do not paint factory-finished or installer-finished
                     items such as metal toilet enclosures, prefinished partition systems, acoustic materials,
                     architectural woodwork and casework, elevator entrance doors and frames, elevator
                     equipment, and finished mechanical and electrical equipment, including light fixtures,
                     switchgear and distribution cabinets.
          B.    Concealed Surfaces
                1.   Unless otherwise indicated or specified, do not paint surfaces in concealed areas.
          C.    Finished Metal Surfaces
                1.   Unless otherwise indicated or specified, do not paint anodized aluminum, stainless
                     steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar metal surfaces specified to receive
                     decorative factory or shop finishes.
          D.    Operating Parts
                1.   Unless otherwise indicated or specified, do not paint moving parts of operating units,
                     mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing
                     devices, motor and fan shafts.
          E.    Special Coatings and Field-Applied Finishes
                1.   Do not paint items indicated to receive special coatings and other field-applied finishes
                     specified in other sections.
          F.    Other Surfaces Not Receiving Field Paint
                1.   Glass
                2.   Labels indicating UL or other code-related compliance
     1.3 REFERENCES
          A.    American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI)
                1.   A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping System.
          B.    American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
                1.   D16 - Terminology Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products.

PAINTS                                                                                                 09910 - 2
09910.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:07 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:38 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                        REV 0
-


          C.    SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings
                1.   SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning.
                2.   SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning.
                3.   SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning.
                4.   SSPC-SP 7 - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning.
                5.   SSPC-SP 10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning.

     1.4 DEFINITIONS
          A.    Definition of terms relating to paint, varnish, lacquer and related products shall be as set forth
                in ASTM D16.

          B.    The dry film thicknesses (dft) specified are in mm and (mils) for each coat of paint, unless
                specified otherwise.

          C.    Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces 1) exposed to view upon completion of construction or 2)
                subject to frequent human or potentially harmful environmental contact. The first item
                includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convection covers, covers for finned
                tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place in areas to be coated; extend
                coatings in these areas onto unexposed surfaces as necessary to maintain the coating
                system and desired protection. The second item includes areas where any of the following
                are present: physical abuse, high humidity, air erosion, a corrosive atmosphere, or other
                environmental condition potentially harmful to a surface not protected by the coating system.
          D.    Concealed Areas: Areas in which there is no regular human nor potentially harmful
                environmental contact. These areas include generally inaccessible areas, foundation
                spaces, furred areas, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, duct shafts, elevator shafts, and the areas
                above dropped ceilings.

     1.5 SUBMITTALS
          A.    Samples
                1.   Submit in triplicate, samples of all colors contained in the Finish Schedule.
                2.   Color samples shall be a minimum of 200 x 250 mm (8 x 10 inches).
                3.   Apply transparent finish to hardwood samples furnished under "Architectural Woodwork"
                     Section.
          B.    Sample Construction
                1.   On actual wall surfaces and other exterior and interior building components, duplicate
                     painted finishes of prepared samples. Provide full-coat finish samples on at least 9
                     square meters (100 square feet) of surface, as directed, until required sheen, color and
                     texture is obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place Work.
          C.    Product Data
                1.   Submit manufacturer's technical information including application instructions for each
                     material proposed for use. Submit data in a binder with sufficient quantities in order that
                     the Architect may retain three copies.
          D.    Substitutions

PAINTS                                                                                                  09910 - 3
09910.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:07 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:38 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                        REV 0
-


                1.   The products of manufacturers not named may be submitted for use provided they are
                     equal in quality and grade to the primers and finishes specified as approved by the
                     Architect. If substitute paint products are desired, submit a statement to the Architect
                     giving the manufacturer's name, proposed primer and finish for each paint system,
                     analysis of each type of paint, and the use or uses intended. Failure to submit such
                     statement will be cause for rejection.
                2.   The substitute manufacturer shall provide a letter of certification stating that all coatings
                     proposed are in compliance with the restrictions on the lead and chromium content in
                     the "Hazardous Restrictions" Article below.

     1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
          A.    Single Source Responsibility
                1.   Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish
                     coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and use only within
                     recommended limits.
          B.    Coordination of Work
                1.   Review other Sections of the Specifications in which prime paints are provided to ensure
                     compatibility of total coating systems for various substrates. Upon request from other
                     trades, furnish information or characteristics of finish materials provided for use, to
                     ensure that compatible prime coats are used.

     1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
          A.    Deliver materials to job in manufacturer's sealed containers with manufacturer's name, brand
                name, type of paint and analysis showing all important constituents of the paint, color of
                paint and application instructions.

          B.    Store material in the space designated for the storage and mixing of paint. Whenever it may
                be necessary to change the location of storage space, promptly move the stored materials to
                the newly designated space.

          C.    Protect paint materials storage space from damage and take necessary precautions to
                prevent fire.

     1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
          A.    Temperature
                1.   Unless otherwise recommended by the paint manufacturer, maintain the ambient
                     temperature between 7 and 35 degrees C (45 and 95 degrees F) when applying coatings
                     other than water-thinned coatings.
                2.   Apply water-thinned coatings only when ambient temperature is between 10 and 32
                     degrees C (50 and 90 degrees F).
          B.    Moisture




PAINTS                                                                                                  09910 - 4
09910.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:07 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:38 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                             SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                         22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                         REV 0
-


                1.   Apply paints, except water-thinned types, only to surfaces that are completely free of
                     moisture as determined by sight or touch. Do not apply paint to surfaces which have
                     visible frost or ice.
          C.    Fungicide
                1.   For all coats applied to fabrics and vapor barrier jackets over insulation, provide material
                     which contains a fungicide that will not adversely affect the color, texture, or durability of
                     the coating, incorporated into the paint by the manufacturer.

     1.9 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS RESTRICTIONS
          A.    Clean Air Standards
                1.   For paints and painting practices, comply with all applicable state and local laws
                     enacted to insure compliance with Federal Clean Air Standards.
          B.    Lead and Chromium
                1.   Do not use paints containing lead or chromium in excess of 0.06 percent by weight of
                     the total nonvolatile content (calculated as lead or chromium metal).
          C.    Mercury
                1.   Do not use mercurial fungicides.

     1.10 MAINTENANCE STOCK
          A.    At time of completed application, deliver stock of maintenance material to the Owner. Furnish
                not less than one properly labeled and sealed 1    -gallon can of each color, taken from lots
                furnished for the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
          A.    Paint systems: first line products manufactured by and as recommended for the substrate by
                one of the following:
                      ICI Paints (ICI)
                      Kurfees Coatings, Inc. (Kurfees)
                      Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore)
                      PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. (PPG)
                      Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W)
                      Standard Paint Co. (Standard)
                      Tnemec Co., Inc. (Tnemec)
                      The Valspar Corp. (Valspar)
                      Wellborn-DE Corp. (Wellborn)
          B.    Materials are specified to establish the standards of grade and quality desired for the Work.
                Unless otherwise specified, it is not intended to restrict paint products only to the
                manufacturers specified by name.




PAINTS                                                                                                   09910 - 5
09910.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:07 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:38 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


     2.2 INTERIOR COATING MATERIALS
          A.    Metal primer over ferrous metal:
                ICI                    4160 Devguard Multi-Purpose Metal Primer
                Kurfees                Fast Dry Red Oxide Alkyd Metal Primer 929-44
                Moore                  M05 Rapid Dry Metal Primer
                PPG                    6-208 Series Speedhide Rust Inhibitive Primer
                S-W                    Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50Z Series
                Standard               IPR-139 Rust Inhibitive Primer
                Tnemec                 10-99 Tnemec Primer Red or FD-88-555 Primer Red
                Valspar                13-R-78 Shop Primer Red
          B.    Latex primer sealer:
                ICI                    1020 Ultra-Hide Interior Wood Undercoater,
                                         or "Lifemaster 2000" LM9116 Interior Wall Primer
                Kurfees                Vinyl Primer-Sealer 223 or "Fresh Air" Acrylic Primer-Sealer
                                       225
                Moore                  Latex Prime Seal 216
                PPG                    6-2 Speedhide Interior Latex Primer-Sealer
                S-W                    PrepRite 200 Interior Latex Primer B28W200
                Standard               A-7013 Vinyl Primer
                Tnemec                 51-792 PVA Sealer
                Valspar                79-W-1 Latex Primer
          C.    Latex dry-fog enamel over ferrous metal:
                ICI                    1486 Spraymaster Pro Dryfall Semi-Gloss Enamel
                Moore                  M53 Sweep-Up Spray Latex Flat
                PPG                    6-714, 6-715 Speedhide Latex Dry Fog
                S-W                    Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall, B42 Series
                Standard               600 W.R. Flat Enamel
                Valspar                14-W-16 Dry Drop Flat
          D.    Latex semi-gloss enamel:
                ICI                    1416 Ultra-Hide Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel, or
                                         "Lifemaster 2000" Semi-Gloss Finish
                Kurfees                Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel 165 or "Fresh Air"
                                         Formula Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel 267
                Moore                  Moorcraft Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel 276
                PPG                    6-510 Series Speedhide Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel
                S-W                    ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel B31W200
                                       Series
                Standard               No. 7010 Stanglo Semi Gloss
                Tnemec                 Series 7 Tneme-Cryl
                Valspar                Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Type 2402




PAINTS                                                                                                09910 - 6
09910.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:07 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:38 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 EXAMINATION
          A.    Verify that substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed comply with
                requirements for application of paint. Beginning of application means acceptance of surfaces
                and conditions within a particular area.

          B.    Do not begin paint application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

     3.2 PREPARATION
          A.    Ferrous Metal Surfaces
                1.   Spot-prime exposed ferrous metals, including nails on or in contact with surfaces to be
                     painted with water-thinned paints, with a suitable corrosion-inhibitive primer capable of
                     preventing flash rusting and compatible with the coating specified for the adjacent areas.
                     Clean surfaces being painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil
                     and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvents prior to mechanical cleaning, using
                     cleaning solvents which are of low toxicity with a flashpoint in excess of 38 degrees C
                     (100 degrees F). Program cleaning so that dust and other contaminants will not fall on
                     wet, newly painted surfaces.
                2.   Solvent-clean ferrous surfaces not shop-coated. Clean surfaces that contain loose rust,
                     loose mill scale, and other foreign substances mechanically with power tools according
                     to SSPC-SP 3. After cleaning, apply one coat of ferrous metal primer to all ferrous
                     surfaces to receive paint other than asphalt varnish and vinyl paint. Do not consider the
                     semitransparent film applied to some pipes and tubing at the mill as a shop coat, but
                     overcoat such surfaces with the specified ferrous-metal primer prior to application of
                     finish coats. Protect shop-coated ferrous surfaces from corrosion by treating and
                     touching up corroded areas immediately upon detection.
          B.    Gypsum Board Surfaces
                1.   Before applying sealer, remove loose dirt and dust by brushing with a soft brusk or by
                     rubbing with a soft cloth. Allow joint treatment to thoroughly dry before application of
                     sealer or paint, 12 to 18 hours under normal conditions.

     3.3 PROTECTION
          A.    Before start of painting, remove finish hardware, accessories, plates, lighting fixtures and
                similar items in place, or provide ample protection of such items as approved by the
                Architect. Do not remove UL labels on fire doors and frames.

          B.    Mask the following items or protect them with suitable covering:
                1.   Sealing and glazing compounds (unless otherwise directed by the Architect). Conduct a
                     job site meeting before start of Work to review procedures.
                2.   Equipment identification, performance rating and other informational plates.
                3.   Moving parts of machinery and other mechanical equipment such as shafts, couplings,
                     valve stems, fire protection system sprinkler heads and similar items.
                4.   Factory finished items.



PAINTS                                                                                                09910 - 7
09910.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:07 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:38 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


          C.    Upon completion of painting in each space, reinstall removed items and remove protective
                coverings.

          D.                                                                              e
                Use only workmen skilled in the applicable building trade for removal and r installation of
                finished items in place.

          E.    Be responsible for insuring that UL labels are not painted.

          F.    Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting work.
                Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting as necessary to
                restore to original surface condition.

          G.    Provide "wet paint" signs to protect newly finished surfaces. Remove temporary protective
                wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting
                operations.

          H.    At completion of work of other trades, touch up and restore damaged and defaced painted
                surfaces.

     3.4 APPLICATION
          A.    General
                1.   Unless specified to remain unpainted or specified to receive other finishes, apply a finish
                     coating to exposed surfaces, including the following:
                     a.      Adjacent closets and storage rooms.
                     b.      Free-standing columns and piers.
                     c.      Primed athletic equipment.
                     d.      Free standing stub walls.
                     e.      Exposed overhead construction, including underside of roof and floor deck,
                             structural members, piping, conduit and ductwork.
                2.   Apply the same finish and color to such surfaces as adjacent rooms or surfaces.
                3.   Make spaces in which painting is to be done broom clean before painting is started.
                     Allow each coat of paint to dry at least 24 hours before succeeding coat is applied.
                     Provide finished work which is uniform, of approved color, smooth and free from runs,
                     sags, defective coverage, clogging and excessive flooding.
                4.   Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors sharp and clean without
                     overlapping.
          B.    Methods of Application
                1.   Apply paint by brush, roller or spray as required by the material used and surface to be
                     covered, using short nap rollers for applying enamel and spray equipment as
                     recommended by the manufacturer of the paint used. Coat areas inaccessible to spray
                     painting by brushing or other suitable method.
          C.    Barrier Coat




PAINTS                                                                                                09910 - 8
09910.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:07 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:38 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                               SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                           22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                           REV 0
-


                1.      Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect
                        in writing of any anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems with
                        substrates primed by others.
          D.    Wood Finishing
                1.      For wood receiving a transparent finish, apply stain or bleach as required and sealer as
                        soon as such items are delivered to the job. Seal ends to exclude moisture.
          E.    Defects in Masonry, Concrete, Gypsum Board and Plaster Surfaces
                1.      Before application of succeeding coats, fill with an approved spackling compound small
                        cracks, holes, and other similar imperfections in masonry, concrete, gypsum board and
                        plaster surfaces which show up after the primer-sealer or block filler has been applied to
                        the surface.
          F.    Piping
                1.      Do not paint piping until piping system has been tested and approved.

     3.5 PAINTING SCHEDULE - GENERAL
          A.    General
                1.      Apply paint systems to surfaces as scheduled herein.
                2.      Apply additional coats when undercoats or other conditions show through the final coat,
                        until the cured film is of uniform coating finish, color and appearance.
          B.    Colors and Gloss
                1.      Provide colors and gloss matching approved samples.
                2.      Unless otherwise indicated or specified by the Finish Schedule, provide colors and gloss
                        as follows:

                                       ASTM D523 test            AIA Masterspec            PPG
                 Flat                  85-deg. Meter             Below 15                  Below 15
                 Eggshell              60-deg. Meter             5 to 20                   5 to 20
                 Lo-Lustre             60-deg. Meter                                       15 to 25
                 Satin                 60-deg. Meter             15 to 35                  15 to 35
                 Semi-gloss            60-deg. Meter             30 to 65                  30 to 65
                 Gloss                 60-deg. Meter             Over 65                   Over 65

                        a.   Walls: semi-gloss.
                        b.   Top and bottom edges of doors: same finish as specified for faces.
                        c.   Surfaces to be painted in areas requiring alteration work: to match color and gloss
                             of existing finish.
                        d.   Primers and intermediate coats: each tinted a different color to distinguish between
                             the several coats and the color selected for the final coat.




PAINTS                                                                                                   09910 - 9
09910.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:07 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:38 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                             SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                         22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                         REV 0
-


     3.6 MIXING AND THINNING
          A.    Packaged paint, other than cement-emulsion filler, may be thinned immediately prior to
                application with not more than one pint of suitable thinner per gallon when necessary to suit
                conditions of surface, temperature, weather, and application methods. The use of thinner
                does not relieve the Contractor from obtaining complete hiding. Do not mix paints of different
                manufacturers.

     3.7 CLEANING
          A.    Once painting is started, perform no further broom cleaning. Use only commercial vacuum
                cleaning equipment.

          B.    During progress of Work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans, and rags
                at end of each work day.

          C.    At completion of Work in an area, remove paint spots from floors, glass and other surfaces.
                Leave finished space clean and in acceptable condition.


     3.8 INTERIOR COATING SCHEDULE
          A.    Gypsum Board and Plaster
                1.   Semi-gloss enamel: provide 2 finish coats with a total dry film thickness not less than
                     0.050 mm (2.0 mils) over a primer sealer.
                     a.      Primer sealer: latex primer sealer as recommended by coating manufacturer.
                     b.      First coat: latex semi-gloss enamel.
                     c.      Second coat: latex semi-gloss enamel.
          B.    Metals
                1.   Dry-fog enamel finish: provi de one coat over primer as recommended by coating
                     manufacturer with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.050 mm (2.0 mils).
                     a.      Prime coat: as recommended by coating manufacturer.
                     b.      Finish coat: latex flat dry-fog enamel.
                2.   For interior exposed-to-view steel, iron and galvanized metal items installed in or
                     mounted on or adjacent to walls and partitions, including metal frames, metal doors,
                     steel windows, steel stairs, structural steel columns and other steel below roof or floor
                     framing, guides and hoods for rolling steel doors, access doors, miscellaneous metal:
                     a.      Latex semi-gloss enamel finish: provide 2 coats latex enamel over metal primer,
                             with a total dry film thickness of not less than 0.050 mm (2.0 mils).
                             1)   Prime coat: metal primer as recommended by coating manufacturer.
                             2)   First coat: latex semi-gloss enamel.
                             3)   Second coat: latex semi-gloss enamel.
          C.    Miscellaneous Items
                1.   For interior of ducts exposed to view through grilles, registers, louvers or air intakes:



PAINTS                                                                                                 09910 - 10
09910.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:07 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:38 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


                     a.      1 coat primer as recommended by coating manufacturer.
                     b.      2 coats interior alkyd flat enamel.
                2.   Fabric coverings over thermal insulated piping, ducts and other mechanical items
                     exposed to view:
                     a. Latex primer sealer: provide one coat latex primer sealer under finish coats over
                          fabric insulation covering as recommended by coating manufacturer.

     3.9 ALTERATIONS
          A.    Surface Preparation
                1.   Clean existing surfaces being painted of dirt and other substances injurious to paint
                     coatings by means approved by the Architect. Paint patched surfaces with primer or
                     sealer specified for substrate material.
                2.   Wash glossy, greasy and grimy paint surfaces with a mild alkaline solution such as sal
                     soda or trisodium phosphate and rinse thoroughly. Remove loose, blistered or otherwise
                     defective paint.
                3.   Cut out and fill defects in existing plaster with plaster patching compound. Feather
                     edges of existing paint by sanding.
          B.    Previously Painted Surfaces
                1.   In preparing a previously painted surface, remove corrosion and all paint which shows
                     evidence of peeling, excessive thickness, brittleness, blistering, checking, scaling, or
                     general disintegration. Carry the removal of old paint back around the edges of the spot
                     or area until an area of completely intact and adhering paint film, with no rust or blisters
                     underneath, is reached. Feather edges of tightly adhering paint remaining around the
                     area to be recoated so that the repainted surface can have a smooth appearance. The
                     remaining old paint shall have sufficient adhesion so that it cannot be lifted as a layer by
                     inserting a blade of a dull putty knife under it. The rate of blast cleaning may vary from
                     one area to the next in order to achieve the sound surface.
                2.   If the old coating is deemed sound, carefully clean and prepare coating by water
                     blasting, with sand in order to slightly etch the old coating, or brush-off blast cleaning
                     (SSPC-SP 7).
          C.    Painting Schedule
                1.    Paint existing painted surfaces in areas requiring alteration work as indicated on the
                     Finish Schedule. Primer and intermediate coats are not required where substrate
                     surface is existing finish painted surface.
                2.   Repaint existing painted surfaces of walls, floors or ceilings as indicated. Such surfaces
                     of walls include painted doors, frames, windows, grilles, louvers and recesses.
                3.   For repainting, use paint system as specified herein, except provide a one-coat finish
                     system, unless otherwise recommended by the paint manufacturer and approved by the
                     Architect, and provide a finish system compatible with the existing paint system.

                                               END OF SECTION




PAINTS                                                                                               09910 - 11
09910.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:07 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:38 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                                SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                           22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                           REV 0
-


                                           SECTION 12305
                          GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CASEWORK AND FUME HOODS

                                                                             SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................................................. 2
  1.3           PROJECT CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................................................... 3

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................................................... 3
  2.1           GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3
  2.2           MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................................... 3
  2.3           CABINET CONSTRUCTION .......................................................................................................................................... 6
  2.4           CABINET HARDWARE .................................................................................................................................................. 8
  2.5           COUNTERTOPS ............................................................................................................................................................ 8
  2.6           SERVICE CHASE ASSEMBLIES .................................................................................................................................. 9
  2.7           SINKS ............................................................................................................................................................................ 9
  2.8           SERVICE FIXTURES ..................................................................................................................................................... 9
  2.9           DRYING RACKS .......................................................................................................................................................... 10

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................ 10
  3.1           PREPARATION ........................................................................................................................................................... 10
  3.2           INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................................................ 11
  3.3           ADJUSTING ................................................................................................................................................................. 12
  3.4           CLEANING ................................................................................................................................................................... 12


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 REFERENCES
           A.       American Hardboard Association (AHA)
                    1.        A135.4 - Basic Hardboard.
           B.       American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI)
                    1.        A208.1 - Particleboard.
           C.       American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
                    1.  A167 - Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate,
                        Sheet and Strip.
                    2. A366/A366M - Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Commercial
                        Quality.
                    3. B221 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,
                        Shapes and Tubes.
                    4. B221M - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,
                        Shapes, and Tubes [Metric].
                    5. B584 - Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications.
                    6. C1036 - Specification for Flat Glass.
                    7. D570 - Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
                    8. D635 - Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent of Time of Burning of Self-
                        Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position.
                    9. D695 - Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics.
                    10. D785 - Test Method for Rockwell Hardness of Plastics and Electrical Insulating
                        Materials.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CASEWORK AND FUME HOODS                                                                                                                                 12305 - 1
12305.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                       SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                  22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                  REV 0
-


                 11. D790 - Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics
                     and Electrical Insulating Materials.
           D.    Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI)
                 1.   Quality Standards
           E.    National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
                 1.   LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates.
           F.    U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology
                 1.   PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
                 2.   PS 51 - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.

     1.2 SUBMITTALS
           A.    Warranty
                 1.   Submit a statement of compliance for the following:
                      a. Performance requirements.
                      b. Hardwood.
                      c. Plywood.
                      d. Polyvinylchloride.
                      e. Molded resin.
                      f. White polyresin.
                      g. Plastic laminate.
                      h. Particleboard.
                      i. Hardboard.
                      j. Materials specified to have a maximum fire hazard classification.
           B.    Shop Drawings
                 1.   Submit Shop Drawings showing the following:
                      a. Location of assemblies in each room and layout for roughing-in.
                      b. Details of construction.
                      c. Details of connections between units and to adjacent work.
                      d. Location and size of holes and cutouts.
                      e. Dimensional locations for rough-in of mechanical and electrical services.
           C.    Samples
                 1.   Submit Samples which conform to specified requirements, including construction and
                      finishes. Samples will be retained for comparison with Work fabricated and will be
                      returned upon completion of the Contract.
                 2.   Submit the following Samples for approval:
                      a. One full size combination drawer and cupboard base cabinet with all hardware.
                      b. One of each top material of size sufficient for testing.
           D.    Maintenance Instructions
                 1.   Furnish maintenance instructions for finish materials and operating and maintenance
                      instructions for related equipment and fume hoods.
           E.    Receipts
                 1.   Furnish receipts for keys and other loose items.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CASEWORK AND FUME HOODS                                                 12305 - 2
12305.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                        SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                   22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                   REV 0
-


           F.    Coordination of Mechanical Fixtures
                 1.   Furnish faucets and valves for casework by the same manufacturer to unify
                      replacement parts. Coordinate the furnishing of such fixtures under each Section of
                      casework.
                 2.   If the bid is based on fixtures by different manufacturers, submit a separate price for
                      the mechanical fixtures for each type of casework prior to award of Contract.
                 3.   No adjustment in Contract price will be approved after award of Contract for
                      coordination of mechanical fixtures in casework.

     1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
           A.    Field Measurements
                 1.   Take field measurements to verify or supplement dimensions indicated. Be
                      responsible for accurate fit of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 GENERAL
           A.    Provide casework, including cabinets and countertops, which is the product of one of the
                 manufacturers specified for each type of casework.

           B.    Provide materials, construction and finishes in accordance with the manufacturer's latest
                 catalog published at time of bidding and with approved Samples.

           C.    Metal Gages
                 1.   Construct metal cabinets of sheet steel with minimum thickness in mm (U.S. standard
                      gage) as follows:
                 Corner gussets for leveling bolts and apron
                 corner braces 2.7 mm (12 gage)
                 Drawer support channels                                   1.9 mm (14 gage)
                 Hinge reinforcement                                       1.9 mm (14 gage)
                 Horizontal rails, and reinforcing gussets                 1.5 mm (16 gage)
                 Aprons                                                    1.5 mm (16 gage)
                 Support struts                                            1.5 mm (16 gage)
                 Cabinet tops, ends, bottom, backs,
                 vertical posts, shelves, glazed doors                     1.2 mm (18 gage)
                 Door panels, scribing strips, filler panels,
                 enclosures, drawer fronts and bodies                      0.9 mm (20 gage)

     2.2 MATERIALS
           A.    Molded Resin
                 1.   Modified epoxy resin as manufactured by Durcon Co., Inc.; Epoxyn Products;
                      Laboratory Tops, Inc.; or as approved, uniform in mixture throughout thickness, non-
                      glaring, black color, having the following minimum properties as tested in accordance
                      with referenced ASTM designations:




GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CASEWORK AND FUME HOODS                                                   12305 - 3
12305.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                      SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                 22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                 REV 0
-



                                                               Black
                        Flexural strength           D79    90 MPa (13,000 psi)
                                                    0
                        Compressive strength        D69    207 MPa (30,000 psi)
                                                    5
                        Hardness, Rockwell M        D78    100
                                                    5
                        Flammability                D63    self extinguishing
                                                    5
                        Water absorption, percent   D570   0.02
                        by weight, maximum in 24
                        hr.

                       Chemical resistance - following ratings when tested with indicated reagents
                       according to NEMA LD 3, test procedure 3.9.5:

                       Reagent                             Result

            Acetic acid, glacial                             no effect
            Acetone                                          moderate effect
            Ammonium hydroxide, 28%                          moderate effect
            Amyl acetate                                     no effect
            Benzene
            no effect
            Butyl alcohol                                    no effect
            Calcium hypochlorite                             no effect
            Chloroform                                       moderate effect
            Chromic acid, saturated                          severe effect
            Ethyl acetate                                    moderate effect
            Ethyl alcohol                                    no effect
            Dichromate cleaning solution                     severe effect
            Formaldehyde                                     moderate effect
            Hydrochloric acid, 37%                           no effect
            Hydrogen peroxide                                moderate effect
            Kerosene
            no effect
            Methyl alcohol                                   no effect
            Nitric acid, 70%                                 moderate effect
            Phenol
            moderate effect
            Silver nitrate, 10%                              no effect
            Sodium hydroxide, 10%                            no effect
            Sodium hydroxide, 50%                            moderate effect
            Sulfuric acid, 33%                               moderate effect
            Sulfuric acid, 96%                               severe effect
            Trichloroethylene                                no effect
            Xylene
            no effect
            Zinc chloride, saturated                         no effect


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CASEWORK AND FUME HOODS                                                 12305 - 4
12305.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                     SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                REV 0
-


           B.    Particleboard
                 1.   19-mm (3/4-inch) thick, smooth surface, complying with ANSI A208.1 and having a
                      minimum density of 720 kg per cubic meter (45 lbs. per cubic foot).
           C.    Hardboard
                 1.   AHA A135.4, Type I, tempered.
           D.    Stainless Steel
                 1.   ASTM A167, Type 304, No. 4 finish, unless otherwise specified.
           E.    Sheet Steel
                 1.   ASTM A366 and free from scale, pits, buckles and other imperfections. Sheet steel for
                      surfaces exposed to view: stretcher leveled.
           F.    Aluminum
                 1.   Extruded aluminum: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T42 or 6063-T5.
           G.    Hardwood
                 1.   AWI Quality Standards as specified. Moisture content at time of finishing: between 6
                      and 8 percent of oven dry weight.
           H.    Plywood
                 1.   Hardwood plywood: PS 51 requirements for Type II, water resistant bond, lumber or
                      veneer core construction.
                 2.   Softwood plywood: Douglas fir complying with PS 1, interior type.
           I.    Polyvinylchloride (pvc)
                 1.   Type I unplasticized polyvinylchloride.
           J.    Adhesive
                 1.   Adhesive for joining molded resin tops and backsplashes and for sealing sinks and
                      drain troughs to tops: two-component epoxy compound.
           K.    Glass
                 1.   ASTM C1036.
           L.    Sealant
                 1.   Epoxy sealant: two-component epoxy compound.
                 2.   Silicone sealant: one-part water base silicone sealing compound, Dow Corning Corp.
                      "Trademate" Tile & Fixture Sealant, or as approved, in custom color matching color of
                      surface to be sealed.
           M.    Table Leg Shoes
                 1.   63-mm-high (2-1/2-inch-high) vinyl with bottom coved, color to match base selected
                      by the Architect for the room finish.
           N.    Fixture Materials
                 1.   Chromium-plating: an electro-deposited copper-nickel-chromium coating. Minimum
                      thickness of chromium: 1.3 micrometers (0.000015 inch).
                 2.   Leaded red brass castings: ASTM B584.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CASEWORK AND FUME HOODS                                                 12305 - 5
12305.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                     SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                REV 0
-


     2.3 CABINET CONSTRUCTION
           A.    General
                 1.   Provide cabinets of modular construction so that the various units can be combined in
                      assemblies to fit the floor plan and functional requirements of the facility.
                 2.   Durable, sturdy, dust-tight.
                 3.   Designed to provide easy access for installation and maintenance of plumbing and
                      electrical work.
                 4.   Shut-off valves and plumbing traps in service chase assemblies accessible with
                      cabinets in place. Coordinate access panel requirements with plumbing work.
           B.    Drawers
                 1.   Operation
                      a. Smooth and quiet for a minimum of 10,000 in-out cycles with a 68-kg (150-lb.)
                          load evenly distributed in drawer.
                      b. Self-centering full width drawers in 900-mm (3-foot) and 1200-mm (4-foot) wide
                          cabinets operable from corner without racking or binding when loaded or empty.
                 2.   Maximum force required to open a drawer: 3 percent of unloaded or loaded drawer
                      weight.
                 3.   Type: one of the following:
                      a. Full drawer extension type.
                      b. Self-closing type, from a point 125 mm (5 inches) out from the closed position.
                      c. Partial drawer extension type with a minimum of 300-mm (12-inch) front to back
                          clearance, when extended.
           C.    Doors
                 1.   Support, without sagging, a 90-kg (200-lb.) load applied at top edge while door is
                      being swung. Swing: 180 degrees.
                 2.   Deflection: For a door 1980 mm (78 inches) high x 559 mm (22 inches) wide x 19-mm
                      (3/4 inch) thick when tested with an applied force of 178 N (40 lb) as follows: for
                      smaller doors, proportionately smaller deflection:

             Test                               Maximum temporary        Set
                                                deflection

             Center beam test                   1.5 mm (0.06")           0
             Corner torsion twist test          6.3 mm (0.25")           0.76 mm (0.03")
           D.    Closure Panels and Fillers
                 1.   Provide closure panels to enclose space between ceiling and cabinets and between
                      ceiling and fume hoods where indicated. Provide fillers between wall and cabinets and
                      between cabinets and fume hoods.
                 2.   Filler panels between metal cabinets and wall or between metal cabinets and fume
                      hoods: metal and finished to match metal cabinets. Closure panels: fabricated of
                      sheet steel, channel-shaped.
                 3.   Filler panels between wood cabinets and wall or between wood cabinets and fume
                      hoods: wood and finished to match wood cabinets.
           E.    Performance Requirements for Finish on Metal Cabinets



GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CASEWORK AND FUME HOODS                                                 12305 - 6
12305.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                    22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                    REV 0
-


                 1.   Perform chemical resistance tests by applying 10 drops of each of the following
                      reagents to the surface for one hour under watch glass, washing surface with soap
                      and water and drying before examination.
                       Sulfuric acid                                          38 percent
                       Hydrochloric acid                                      37 percent
                       Nitric acid                                            30 percent
                       Phosphoric acid                                        75 percent
                       Formic acid                                            88 percent
                       Acetic acid-glacial, sodium hydroxide                  20 percent
                       Ammonium hydroxide                                     28 percent
                       Hydrogen peroxide                                      5 percent
                       Ethyl alcohol, ethyl acetate, ethyl ether, xylene,     85 percent
                       acetone, phenol
                       Formaldehyde, carbon tetrachloride                     85 percent
                 2.   Perform moisture resistance tests as follows:
                      a. Soak sponge or felt in cold water and apply to surface for 100 hours and dry
                           surface before examination.
                      b. Trickle boiling water over surface inclined at 45 degrees for 5 minutes and dry
                           before examination.
                 3.   Provide a finish which shows no visible effect on finish film other than slight change of
                      gloss visible only from a grazing angle.
           F.    Performance Requirements for Finish on Wood Cabinets
                 1.   Perform chemical resistance tests by applying 5 drops of each reagent to the surface
                      for one hour under watch glass, washing surface with soap and water and drying
                      before examination.
                 2.   Perform moisture resistance tests as follows:
                      a. Cold water: soak sponge or felt in cold water and apply to surface for 100 hours
                           and dry surface before examination.
                      b. Boiling water: trickle boiling water over surface inclined at 45 degrees for 5
                           minutes and dry before examination.
                 3.   Rate test results as follows:
                      a. E (excellent): no visible effect on finish film other than slight change of gloss
                          visible only from a grazing angle.
                      b. G (good): no effect other than slight discoloration, change of gloss or temporary
                          slight softening of finish film with no loss of adhesion and film protection.
                 4.   Chemical resistance to reagents with percent concentration listed:
                                                   Test results
                             Sulfuric acid, 38 percent                  E
                             Hydrochloric acid, 37 percent              G
                             Nitric acid, 30 percent                    G
                             Acetic acid, glacial                       G
                             Sodium hydroxide, 20 percent               E
                             Ammonium hydroxide, 28 percent             E
                             Ethyl alcohol                              E
                             Ethyl acetate                              G
                             Ethyl ether                                G

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CASEWORK AND FUME HOODS                                                     12305 - 7
12305.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                       SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                  22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                  REV 0
-


                             Xylene                                  G
                             Acetone                                 G
                             Benzene                                 E
                             Formaldehyde, 37 percent                G
                             Carbon tetrachloride                    E
                 5.   Moisture resistance
                             Cold water                              G
                             Boiling water                           E
     2.4 CABINET HARDWARE
           A.    General
                 1.   Refer to casework sections for additional hardware requirements.
                 2.   Fit sliding doors with nylon rollers.
           B.    Pulls
                 1.   Provide two pulls on drawers wider than 710 mm (28 inches).
           C.    Hinges
                 1.   63-mm (2-1/2-inch) heavy duty institutional type, attached with flathead screws. For
                      doors over 910 mm (36 inches) high, provide 1-1/2-pair of hinges.

     2.5 COUNTERTOPS
           A.    General
                 1.   Provide countertops and backsplashes of the same material up to and including 2.4
                      meters (8 feet) in length in one piece. Where countertops exceed 2.4 meters (8 feet)
                      in length, provide concealed field joints of flush-bolt construction or other approved
                      construction.
                 2.   Provide cutouts for required service fixtures and sinks.
           B.    Molded Resin Tops
                 1.   25-mm-thick (one-inch-thick) top with 100-mm-high (4-inch-high) and 19-mm-thick
                      (3/4-inch-thick) curbs. Provide drip groove at underside of exposed edges and round
                      exposed corners.
                 2.   Curbs at sides of tops, fume hoods and casework components where indicated: butt
                      jointed and bonded to the surface of top to form a square joint.
                 3.   Backsplash curbs: butt jointed and bonded to the surface of top to form a square joint.
           C.    Stainless Steel Tops
                 1.   Fabricated of 1.511-mm (16 gage) stainless steel with the following provisions;
                      a. Exposed edges formed into channel shape. Edge of top 25 mm (one inch) high,
                          plus raised rim for tops with sinks.
                      b. Underside reinforced to prevent twisting, oil canning or buckling and coated with
                          sound deadener.
                      c. Backsplashes, curbs and integral sinks in one piece with top or continuously
                          welded to top, welds ground smooth and welding flash removed. Provide
                          drainboard adjacent to sinks.
                      d. Field joints tightly butted and held in alignment with steel reinforcement.
                      e. Wood inserts in edges of top for anchorage.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CASEWORK AND FUME HOODS                                                   12305 - 8
12305.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                    22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                    REV 0
-


                      f.     Strippable plastic coating on finished surfaces for protection.

     2.6 SERVICE CHASE ASSEMBLIES
           A.    General
                 1.   Provide horizontal service chase assemblies, and vertical pipe enclosures as
                      indicated and as follows:
           B.    Service Chase Assembly
                 1.   A horizontal pipe support strut assembly with following provisions:
                      a. Fabricated from steel components and secured to floor.
           C.    Vertical Pipe Enclosures
                 1.   A vertical pipe support strut assembly with following provisions:
                      a. Fabricated from steel components and secured to counter top or floor.

     2.7 SINKS
           A.    Stainless Steel Sinks
                 1.   1.3-mm (18 gage), unless otherwise specified, with joints welded, ground smooth and
                      polished, inside corners coved and bottom pitched to drain outlet. Provide sound-
                      deadener spray applied to underside of sinks. Form sinks integral with stainless steel
                      counter tops.
                 2.   Sinks more than 250 mm (10 inches) deep or more than 2430 mm (96 inches) in
                      perimeter: 1.6 mm (16 gage).
                 3.   Fit each stainless steel sink with a stainless steel sink plug, 38 mm (1-1/2 inches),
                      with integral cross bars, removable strainer, inlet tapered for overflow, and 1.6-mm
                      (16 gage) threaded tailpiece, complete with washer and locknut.
           B.    Molded Resin Sink
                 1.   Manufacturers: Durcon Co. Inc., Epoxyn Products, or as approved; color same as
                      countertops.
                 2.   One-piece construction with all inside corners coved and bottom pitched to drain
                      outlet and fitted with a molded resin sink plug, 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) with integral
                      cross bars, removable strainer, inlet machined for overflow, and threaded tailpiece,
                      complete with washer and locknut.
                 3.   Under-mount type sinks at countertops unless indicated otherwise.
                 4.   Provide proper hanger support for sink.
           C.    Sink Sizes (L x W x D)
                 1.   Single bowl: nominal 24 x 16 x 12 inches.
                 2.   Double bowl, each bowl: nominal 14 x 18 x 10 inches.

     2.8 SERVICE FIXTURES
           A.    General
                 1.   Furnish mechanical and electrical fixtures to be mounted in or in conjunction with
                      casework.
           B.    Mechanical Fixtures - General


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CASEWORK AND FUME HOODS                                                   12305 - 9
12305.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                    22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                    REV 0
-


                 1.   Identify mechanical services with full view colored index buttons in accordance with
                      U.S. Standard Color Code.
                 2.   Satin Chromium-plated brass by Water Saver Faucet Co. or equivalent models as
                      manufactured by Chicago Faucet Co. or T & S Brass and Bronze Works. Equip
                      faucets with laboratory serrated hose ends or aerators as indicated. Provide factory
                      assembled shanks for deck mounting or panel mounting.
           C.    Water Fixtures
                 1.   Provide renewable units containing all working parts, including a monel or stainless
                      steel replaceable seat. Provide an integral volume control in the renewable unit or in
                      the inlet or outlet of the fixture. Equip water fixtures that have serrated hose ends with
                      integral "Micro-Control" vacuum breakers with replaceable seats. Provide convertible
                      rigid/swing goosenecks with 180-degree stops.                       Provide 180-degree
                      handle/gooseneck configuration at cup sinks.
                 2.   Provide water fixtures as indicated and as follows:
                      a.     Item F-1: Mixing faucet with gooseneck, laboratory type, with serrated hose end.
                      b.     Item F-2: Gooseneck type faucet, with internal polypropylene lining, disk type
                             valve, teflon washer and self-closing operated handle; a serrated laboratory hose
                             end; used for deionized water.
                      c.     Item F-3: Gooseneck type faucet with single manual operated handle for cold
                             water only, with a serrated hose end.
           D.    Air, Gas and Vacuum Fixtures
                 1.   Floating needle cocks for non-flammable gases, ball type valves for flammable gases,
                      certified by AGA.
                 2.   Provide turret base for fixtures indicated to be deck mounted. For fixtures (GC-1),
                      provide one cock. For fixtures (GC-2), provide two cocks, each set at 180 degrees.
           E.    Specialty Gas Fixtures (Non-Flammable Gases)
                 1.   Floating Needle Cocks
                 2.   Provide turret base for fixtures to be deck mounted. Provide pressure regulator with
                      gauge and quick connect male plug for each cock. For fixtures (SGC-1), provide one
                      cock. For fixtures (SGC-2), provide two cocks each set at 180 degrees.
                 3.   Specialty gasses not identified, to be determined.
           F.    Electrical Fixtures
                 1.   Receptacles for casework are specified to be provided in Division 16.
                 2.   Faceplates: brushed stainless steel with configurations to mate with pedestals, wiring
                      devices and telecommunication devices as indicated.
     2.9 DRYING RACKS
           A.    Stainless steel back with polypropylene pegs, inclined at 45-degree angle upward.

           B.    Pegs at 6-inches long.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 PREPARATION
           A.    Protection


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CASEWORK AND FUME HOODS                                                    12305 - 10
12305.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                             SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                        REV 0
-


                 1.   Protect the Work and adjacent construction from damage during installation and
                      subsequent operations under the Contract.
     3.2 INSTALLATION
           A.    General
                 1.   Install casework and fume hoods in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
                      approved Shop Drawings, and under the supervision of the manufacturer's trained
                      personnel.
                 2.   Casework
                      a. Completely install casework less installation of mechanical and electrical service
                           fixtures and final connection to services.
                      b. Installation of service fixtures and final connection to services are specified in
                           Divisions 15 and 16.
                 3.   Fume hoods
                      a. Completely install fume hoods less final connection to services.
                      b. Final connection to services is specified in Divisions 15 and 16.
           B.    Casework Assemblies
                 1.   Assemble cabinets in the field with provision for future relocation, connected together
                      with concealed bolts and set level and in alignment.
                 2.   Install leg shoe on each table leg.
                 3.   Provide all fastening devices, supports, adhesive and fillers required for a complete
                      installation, including the following:
                      a. Metal grounds bolted to stud partitions for support of wall cabinets.
                      b. Hanger supports for sinks.
                      c. Bolts and expansion shields for items connected to masonry walls.
                      d. Strut assemblies for support of fume hood superstructures or other heavy
                           equipment and for drain troughs and piping.
                      e. Closure panels to ceiling, exposed ends closed.
                      f.   Fillers required to enclose space between wall and cabinets.
                 4.   Provide holes and cutouts required for installation of equipment indicated to be
                      mounted to casework, including items furnished under other Sections and items
                      indicated to be not included in the Contract. Coordinate location of utilities.
                 5.   Provide galvanized backer plates at toe kicks to receive applied base where floor
                      elevation deviations cause large gaps between bottom of cabinets and floor.
           C.    Countertops and Sinks
                 1.   Anchor tops to base cabinet (or support structure) and knee space assemblies with
                      concealed fastenings. Install drain troughs and sinks and sealant required to seal
                      against tops. Remove plastic coating from stainless steel surfaces.
                 2.   Use epoxy sealant for molded resin tops and sink plugs and silicone sealant for
                      stainless steel tops and sink plugs.
                 3.   Installation of sink fittings is specified in Division 15. Install sink plugs and fill annular
                      space around top of sink plugs with sealant.
                 4.   Set backsplashes and curbs in a full bed of adhesive. Seal joints in tops,
                      backsplashes and curbs with adhesive.
                 5.   Seal the following joints with silicone sealant:
                      a. Joints between backsplashes and vertical surfaces, including partitions and
                           column enclosures.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CASEWORK AND FUME HOODS                                                        12305 - 11
12305.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                      SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                 22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                 REV 0
-


           D.    Accessory Equipment
                 1.   Install accessory equipment ready for final connection to services.

     3.3 ADJUSTING
           A.    Make final adjustments required for proper operation as determined by the Architect.

     3.4 CLEANING
           A.    Following completion, clean finished surfaces and leave work free of imperfections. Touch
                 up damaged finish equal to original condition as approved.

                                              END OF SECTION




GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CASEWORK AND FUME HOODS                                                12305 - 12
12305.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                SECTION 12351
                                                         METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           RELATED WORK .......................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 1

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 1
  2.1           TYPE AND MANUFACTURERS..................................................................................................................................... 1
  2.2           METAL CABINET CONSTRUCTION............................................................................................................................... 1
  2.3           SERVICE MODULES ..................................................................................................................................................... 3
  2.4           ADJUSTABLE SHELVES WITH WALL FRAME ASSEMBLIES....................................................................................... 3
  2.5           PIPE CHASES ............................................................................................................................................................... 4

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
  3.1           GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 4
  3.2           ADJUSTABLE SHELVES, WALL MOUNTED................................................................................................................. 4
  3.3           PIPE CHASES ............................................................................................................................................................... 4
  3.4           DRYING RACKS........................................................................................................................................................... 4


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 RELATED WORK
           A.       Refer to Section 12305 for countertops, sinks and service fixtures.

     1.2 REFERENCES
           A.       National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
                    1.       30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 TYPE AND MANUFACTURERS
           A.       Flush front construction with doors, drawers and exterior members in same plane without
                    overlap, as manufactured by one of the following, or as approved:
                    1.       Fisher Hamilton Inc.
     2.2 METAL CABINET CONSTRUCTION
           A.       General
                    1.       Include completely enclosed vertical posts. Include the items of cabinet construction
                             listed. Exclude provisions for doors in open shelf cabinets.
           B.       Base Cabinets and Suspended Cabinets
                    1.       Front horizontal rail offset to form rebate for door and flanged down not less than one-
                             inch.
                    2.       Intermediate horizontal rails between drawers to be locked, and with security panel if
                             locks are keyed differently.

METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK                                                                                                                                                   12351 - 1
12351.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:38 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


                3.  Completely enclosed toe space.
                4.  Lower corner reinforcing gusset with 75-mm-high (3-inch-high) leveling bolts for each
                    corner.
                5. Sides or end panels die-formed with deep, channel-shaped, corner posts at the front and
                    flanged at top, bottom and back; exposed face of corner posts and stiles not less than
                    25 mm (one inch) wide and flanged inward to form a rebate for drawers and doors.
                6. Back consisting of top and bottom rail channel formed and welded to back flange of
                    side, with space between left open for access to utility lines; access space of cupboard
                    units closed with removable backs.
                7. One adjustable shelf per cupboard unit, adjustable on 13-mm to 27-mm (1/2-inch to 1-
                    1/16-inch) centers, edges formed down 19 mm (3/4 inch) and back into channel shape;
                    full-depth.
                8. Full-length hinge reinforcement concealed in corner posts.
                9. Recessed adjusting bolt access hole with removable cover.
                10. Slots for addition of case channels and notches for addition of intermediate horizontal
                    rails.
                11. Removable, die-formed case channel with hardened steel, cadmium-plated ball-bearing
                    roller for drawers.
           C.   Wall and Upper Cabinets
                1.    One-piece cabinet top and front horizontal rail with offset for door recess, flanged and
                      welded to back.
                2.    Removable or fixed interior cabinet bottom and finished flush exterior bottom.
                3.    End panels formed as specified for base cabinets, with full-length hinge reinforcement.
                4.    Shelves at full width with one adjustable shelf for cabinets up to 26” high and two
                      adjustable shelves for cabinets up to 37” high.
                5.    Rubber bumpers and extruded aluminum track with plastic insert for unframed sliding
                      glass doors.
                6.    Extruded aluminum overhead track and nylon bottom guides for framed sliding doors,
                      with track mounted to track support welded to cabinet top.
           D.   Knee Space Units
                1.    Apron formed with channel shape at top and bottom, bottom front edge rounded to 19-
                      mm (3/4-inch) radius, and openings for drawers where indicated, formed with rebate at
                      top of opening.
                2.    Apron division rails at 760-mm (30-inch) maximum spacing.
                3.    Corner brackets flanged on top, bottom and sides, and welded to apron members.
                4.    Corner top reinforcing gusset welded to top of apron.
                5.    Tubular legs where indicated, with welded studs for connection to corner brackets and
                      with bottom gusset fitted with leveling bolt.
                6.    Channel spreaders with 1.5-mm (16 gage) clip welded on for screw connection to legs.
                7.    70-mm (2-3/4-inch) apron height where countertop is 760 mm (30 inches) above floor, to
                      provide clear knee space 660 mm (26 inches) high.
           E.   Drawers
                1.    One-piece bottom and sides formed in channel shape at top and flanged at back and
                      front, welded to drawer back and drawer front.



METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK                                                                           12351 - 2
12351.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:38 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                        REV 0
-


                2.    Two-piece drawer front, 16-mm (5/8-inch) minimum thickness, fully sound deadened,
                      fitted with rubber bumpers, corners welded and ground smooth, painted on inside before
                      assembly.
                3.    Drawer channel die-formed and welded to drawer side, with formed drawer stop and
                      hardened steel, cadmium-plated, ball-bearing roller.
           F.   Doors
                1.    Hinged doors: double wall construction, 16-mm (5/8-inch) minimum thickness, fully
                                                                                 i
                      sound deadened, corners welded and ground smooth, with nside surfaces painted
                      before assembly; reinforced at hinge and pull locations and fitted with two rubber
                      bumpers.
           G.   Finish
                1.    After fabrication and before finishing, clean and treat sheet steel to prevent corrosion and
                      to provide proper bond of the finish.
                2.    Apply a prime coat baked on and sanded smooth and a synthetic enamel or resin base
                      finish system baked on. Provide a finish for surfaces exposed to view on exterior and
                      interior of cabinets which complies with performance requirements for moisture and
                      chemical resistance and is smooth, semi-matte finish, evenly covered without short or
                      thin coating on corners, runs, sags, or roughness.
                3.    Color: as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
                4.    Stainless steel cabinets as indicated on drawings.
           H.   Cabinet Hardware
                1.    Catches: nylon roller type or spring-actuated, roll point type.
                2.    Drawer guides: full extension, ball bearing roller, 100-pound class, epoxy-coated.
                3.    Full extension, ball bearing, 150-pound class for all file drawers.
                4.    Drawer and door pulls; stainless steel wire, mounted horizontally on drawers and on
                      doors.
     2.3 SERVICE MODULES
           A.   Design service modules in widths indicated, for free standing island installation, to permit
                future replacement of cabinets, and to accommodate piping, waste lines, and conduit, and to
                support countertops.

           B.   Fabricate service modules with the following provisions:
                1.    3.0-mm (11 gage) steel framing.
                2.    1.2-mm (18 gage) steel panel support system for closure panels.
                3.    1.2-mm (18 gage), removable, bottom and end closure panels with finish specified for
                      metal cabinets.
           C.   Provide stainless steel where indicated on drawings.

     2.4 ADJUSTABLE SHELVES WITH WALL FRAME ASSEMBLIES
           A.   Wall Frame Assemblies
                1.    Cross rails and cross rail brackets: 1.5 mm (16 gage) cold-rolled steel, resistance
                      welded. Nominal 1-inch depth.

METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK                                                                               12351 - 3
12351.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:38 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


                2.    Hanging components vertically adjustable in 25-mm (one-inch) increments.
                3.    Provide complete top and bottom rails for all assemblies.
           B.   Shelves
                1.    Nominal dimensions: as indicated.
                2.    Shelves, hat channel supports and separate shelf lip: 1.2 mm (18 gage) cold-rolled
                      steel unless indicated otherwise.
                3.    Shelf brackets: 3.0 mm (11 gage) rolled steel.
                4.    Vertical shelf adjustment: 25 mm (one inch).
                5.    Depth and weight capacity: 150-, 200- or 300-mm (6-, 8- or 12-inch) – 82 kg (180 lb);
                      450-mm (18-inch) – 59 kg (130 lb); 600-mm (24-inch) – 45 kg (100 lb).
                6.    Capable of being locked into position.
                7.    Brackets rise above the shelf surface to provide sides.
     2.5 PIPE CHASES
           A.   Steel framing members and removable metal closures fabricated of 1.2-mm (18 gage) sheet
                steel with finish specified for metal cabinets. Fabricate pipe chases to be attached to wall in
                one piece.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 GENERAL
           A.   Refer to Section 12305.

     3.2 ADJUSTABLE SHELVES, WALL MOUNTED
           A.   Anchor supports to supporting wall construction.

     3.3 PIPE CHASES
           A.   Anchor framing to wall, or to floor or countertop and ceiling as indicated. Attach closures to
                framing with self-tapping sheet metal screws painted to match closures.

     3.4 DRYING RACKS
           A.   Anchor rack to wall with painted steel hanger device.


                                              END OF SECTION




METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK                                                                            12351 - 4
12351.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:38 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                               SECTION 12353
                                                         WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           RELATED WORK .......................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 1

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 1
  2.1           MANUFACTURERS....................................................................................................................................................... 1
  2.2           DEFINITIONS................................................................................................................................................................. 1
  2.3           MATERIALS.................................................................................................................................................................. 1
  2.4           WOOD CABINET CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................................................................... 2

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
  3.1           INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................................................. 4


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 RELATED WORK
           A.       Refer to Section 12305 for countertops, sinks and service fixtures.

     1.2 REFERENCES
           A.       Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI)
                    1.       Quality Standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 MANUFACTURERS
           A.       Fisher Hamilton Inc.

     2.2 DEFINITIONS
           A.       Exposed Surfaces
                    1.       Surfaces visible when drawers and solid doors are closed.
                    2.       Surfaces visible behind clear glass doors.
                    3.       Interior surfaces of open units.
                    4.       Bottoms of cabinets 1060 mm (42 inches) or more above finished floor.
                    5.       Tops of cabinets less than 1980 mm (78 inches) above finished floor, or are visible from
                             an upper floor or staircase after installation.
           B.       Semi-Exposed Surfaces
                    1.       Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are open.
                    2.       Bottoms of cabinets 760 to 1060 mm (30 to 42 inches) above finished floor.
     2.3 MATERIALS
           A.       Hardwood


WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK                                                                                                                                                    12353 - 1
12353.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:38 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


                1.    Hardwood for exposed portions of casework: AWI Grade I red oak.
                2.    Hardwood for concealed and semi-exposed portions of casework: sound hardwood of
                      any species, AWI Grade II.
                3.    Grain direction: horizontal on drawers.
           B.   Plywood
                1.    Plywood for exposed portions of casework: hardwood plywood with solid hardwood
                      edge banding on exposed surfaces, veneer core and cross-banding allowing no open
                      defects, exposed face veneer of AWI Grade AA of rift-cut red oak.
                2.    Grain direction: vertical on doors and exposed-to-view end panels.
                3.    Plywood for semi-exposed portions of casework: hardwood plywood with Grade A face
                      veneer of same species as exposed portions.
     2.4 WOOD CABINET CONSTRUCTION
           A.   General
                1.    Interiors: flush and dustproof.
                2.    Unless otherwise specified, comply with AWI Quality Standards, for premium grade
                      work and flush overlay construction.
                3.    Exclude provisions for doors in open shelf cabinets.
                4.    Joinery: doweled, glued and screwed, unless otherwise specified..
           B.   Base Cabinets and Suspended Cabinets
                1.  End panels: 19-mm (3/4-inch) plywood with hardwood front edge facing, bored for
                    security panels and for shelf supports.
                2. Top rails: hardwood 25-mm (1-inch) -thick horizontal front rail, 19-mm (3/4-inch) -thick
                    vertical back rail, joined to end panels, and 19-mm (3/4-inch) -thick side rails attached to
                    front and back rails. Provide metal fasteners and holes in top rails for anchorage of
                    counter tops.
                3. Intermediate rails: 19-mm (3/4-inch) -thick hardwood, doweled and glued to end panels.
                4. Toe space rail: 19-mm (3/4-inch) -thick hardwood or plywood, doweled and glued to end
                    panels. Provide fully enclosed toe space.
                5. Concealed backs: 5-mm (3/16-inch) -thick hardboard, removable and attached with oval
                    head screws to a backing strip.
                6. Exposed backs: 19-mm (3/4-inch) plywood or inner and outer flush sheets of 6             -mm
                    (1/4-inch) plywood.
                7. Cupboard bottoms: 19-mm (3/4-inch) -thick plywood, doweled, glued and fastened to
                    end panels.
                8. Vertical dividers: 38-mm (1-1/2-inch) -thick plywood with 3       -mm-thick hardwood front
                    edge facing, glued and screwed in place. Provide dividers between drawers and
                    cupboards.
                9. Shelves: Plywood with 3-mm hardwood edge banding on front edge rounded or
                    eased/sanded, 19 mm (3/4 inch) thick for shelves up to and including 760 mm (30
                    inches) wide, 25 mm (1 inch) thick for shelves over 760 mm (30 inches) wide. Fit
                    dividers and end panels with stud type shelf brackets for adjustment on 32-mm centers.
                    Groove shelves at brackets to prevent movement; full-depth.
                10. One adjustable shelf per cupboard unit.
                11. Provide 3-mm (1/8-inch) minimum hardboard 1 security panel between locked drawers.


WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK                                                                              12353 - 2
12353.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:38 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                        REV 0
-


                12. Provide removable back panels; two piece behind drawers and one piece behind
                    cupboard.
                13. For sink cabinets, provide support rails with leveling screws to support sink.
           C.   Wall Cabinets
                1.    As specified for base cabinets, except as specified below.
                2.    Top: 25-mm (1-inch) -thick plywood with 3-mm hardwood edge banding on front edge.
                3.    Bottom of wall mounted cabinets: 25-mm (1-inch) -thick plywood with 3-mm hardwood
                      edge banding on front edge.
                4.    Backs: 6-mm (1/4-inch) -thick veneered hardboard, recessed and set into top, bottom
                      and end panels, sealed around entire perimeter.
                5.    Shelves at full-width with one adjustable shelf for cabinets up to 26-inches high and two
                      adjustable shelves for cabinets up to 37-inches high.
                6.    Shelves for open and glass door cabinets: 25-mm (1-inch) plywood with exposed edge
                      banding.
                7.    Fit wall and full height cabinets with tracks and guides for sliding doors. Fit vertical
                      jambs with applied moldings or dust strips.
           D.   Knee Space Units
                1.    Front and rear rails: 25-mm (one-inch) minimum hardwood with openings for drawers.
                2.    Cross rails: 19-mm (3/4-inch) minimum hardwood doweled and glued into front and rear
                      rails on each side of drawer openings and at 838 mm (33 inches) maximum spacing in
                      aprons without drawers.
                3.    Provide metal fasteners for anchorage of counter top.
                4.    Provide enameled steel wall brackets where indicated and attached to cross rails.
                5.    Fit drawer openings with 3-mm (1/8-inch) minimum hardboard dust compartment set in
                      grooves in rails and drawer supports.
           E.   Drawers
                1.    Drawer fronts: 19-mm (3/4-inch) minimum hardwood with solid hardwood banding on all
                      four edges.
                2.    Four-sided box construction of 11-mm (7/16-inch) minimum plywood with sides multiple
                      dovetailed and glued to front.
                3.    Bottoms: 6-mm (1/4-inch) tempered hardboard with smooth side up, all edges set in
                      grooves. Drawer fronts under 75 mm (3 inches) high may be mortised and tenon, glued
                      and screwed to drawer sides.
                4.    Provide backs, sides and fronts grooved to accept clips for partitions.
           F.   Doors
                1.    One of the following constructions with face veneer both sides, grain running vertically:
                      a.     Lumber core plywood with banded core, ¾-inch minimum with solid hardwood
                             banding on all four edges.
                      b.     For lipped overlay construction: hardwood edges radiused and routed to allow 6-
                             mm (¼-inch) minimum inset into door opening.
                      c.     Thickness: 21 mm (13/16 inch) for doors 1210 mm (48 inches) or less in height and
                             27 mm (1-1/16 inches) for doors over 1210 mm (48 inches) high.
                2.    For double doors, provide rabbeted astragal.

WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK                                                                               12353 - 3
12353.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:38 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


                3.    Fit sliding doors with nylon rollers. Groove the doors to fit guides, and apply wedge-
                      shaped moldings or dust strips at meeting stiles.
                4.    For glazed doors, provide nominal 25 by 75 mm (1 by 3        -inch) stiles and rails with
                      mitered joints. Set glass with removable stops applied on inside of door.
           G.   Finish
                1.    Sand wood surfaces smooth and free from mill marks resulting from machining. Remove
                      all dust and other foreign matter. Completely dry and sand undercoats before applying
                      subsequent coats.
                2.    Seal and finish exposed and semi-exposed portions of casework with manufacturer's
                      standard 2-coat synthetic resin varnish natural semi-gloss finish, unless otherwise
                      specified, complying with performance requirements for casework finish. Stain exposed
                      portions as required to match approved sample.
                3.    Finish for exterior of drawer fronts: 3-coat.
                4.    Finish concealed portions of casework with 2 coats of sealer, or one coat of sealer and
                      one coat of pigmented finish.
                5.    Seal and wax drawer guides or coat them with lubricating sealer.
           H.   Cabinet Hardware
                1.    Drawer guides: full extension, ball bearing roller, 100-pound class, epoxy-coated.
                2.    Full extension, ball bearing roller, 150-pound class for all fire drawers.
                3.    Drawer and door pulls; brushed aluminum with rectangular style design, mounted
                      horizontally on drawers and on doors.
                4.    Door hinges: 5-knuckle stainless steel.
                5.    Door catches: adjustable, spring-actuated nylon roller.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 INSTALLATION
           A.   Refer to Section 12305.

           B.   Level cabinets set on floor by means of wood or metal shims.


                                              END OF SECTION




WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK                                                                             12353 - 4
12353.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:38 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                  SECTION 12494
                                                              BLACKOUT ROLLER SHADES

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 1
  1.3           QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.4           DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING...................................................................................................................... 2
  1.5           PROJECT CONDITIONS................................................................................................................................................. 2

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 3
  2.1           ROLLER SHADES......................................................................................................................................................... 3
  2.2           ROLLER SHADE FABRICA TION ................................................................................................................................... 4

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 5
  3.1           EXAMINATION.............................................................................................................................................................. 5
  3.2           ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION.................................................................................................................................. 5
  3.3           ADJUSTING.................................................................................................................................................................. 5
  3.4           CLEANING AND PROTECTION...................................................................................................................................... 5
  3.5           DEMONSTRATION........................................................................................................................................................ 5


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 SUMMARY
           A.       This Section includes room darkening (black out) roller shades.

           B.       Related Sections include the following:
                    1.       Section 06100 - Carpentry for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and
                             accessories.
     1.2 SUBMITTALS
           A.       Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions,
                    construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and
                    operating instructions.

           B.       Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of roller shades. Include elevations, sections,
                    details, and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings,
                    attachments to other work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work.

           C.       Samples for Initial Selection: For each colored component of each type of shade indicated.
                    1.       Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.
           D.       Samples for Verification:
                    1.       Complete, full-size operating unit not less than 16 inches (400 mm) wide for each type
                             of roller shade indicated.
                    2.       For the following products:


BLACKOUT ROLLER SHADES                                                                                                                                                      12494 - 1
12494.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:09 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:39 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                        SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                    22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                    REV 0
-


                     a.      Shade Material: Not less than 12-inch- (300-mm-) square section of fabric, from
                             dye lot used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete
                             pattern repeat. Mark top and face of material.
                     b.      Valance: Full-size unit, not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long.
          E.    Window Treatment Schedule:         For roller shades.   Use same designations indicated on
                Drawings.

          F.    Product Certificates: For each type of roller shade, signed by product manufacturer.

          G.    Product Test Reports: For each type of roller shade.

          H.    Maintenance Data:       For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals.     Include the
                following:
                1.   Methods for maintaining roller shades and finishes.
                2.   Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to fabrics,
                     finishes, and performance.
                3.   Operating hardware.
     1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
          A.    Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer.

          B.    Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roller shade band materials with the fire-test-
                response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test
                method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
                authorities having jurisdiction:
                1.   Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701.
          C.    Mockups: Build mockups prior to project fabrication to verify selections made under sample
                submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
                execution.
                1.   Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
                     Substantial Completion.
     1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
          A.    Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, and
                location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings and in a window
                treatment schedule.

     1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
          A.    Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty
                finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity
                conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended
                use.




BLACKOUT ROLLER SHADES                                                                             12494 - 2
12494.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:09 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:39 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                       SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                   22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                   REV 0
-


          B.    Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of construction by field measurements before
                fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Notify Architect of discrepancies.
                Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 ROLLER SHADES
          A.    Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
                incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

          B.    Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
                1.   Draper Inc.; LightBloc Flexshade.
                2.   MechoShade Systems, Inc.; Room Darkening Systems.
          C.    Shade Band Material: Vinyl, room darkening.
                1.   Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
                2.   Bottom Hem: As indicated by manufacturer's designation.
                3.   Trim: As indicated by manufacturer's designation for style and color.
          D.    Rollers: Electrogalvanized or epoxy primed steel or extruded-aluminum tube of diameter and
                wall thickness required to support and fit internal components of operating system and the
                weight and width of shade band material without sagging; designed to be easily removable
                from support brackets; with manufacturer's standard method for attaching shade material.
                Provide capacity for one roller shade band per roller.

          E.    Direction of Roll: Regular, from back of roller.

          F.    Mounting Brackets:     Fascia end caps, fabricated from steel finished to match fascia or
                headbox.

          G.    Fascia: L-shaped, formed-steel sheet or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled;
                continuous panel concealing front and bottom of shade roller, brackets, and operating
                hardware and operators; removable design for access.

          H.    Top/Back Cover: L-shaped; material and finish to match fascia; combining with fascia and
                end caps to form a six-sided headbox enclosure sized to fit shade roller and operating
                hardware inside.

          I.    Bottom Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum Provide concealed, by pocket of shade material,
                internal-type bottom bar with concealed weight bar as required for smooth, properly balanced
                shade operation.

          J.    Audiovisual Light-Blocking Shades: Designed for eliminating all visible light gaps when
                shades are fully closed; fabricated from blackout shade band material with headbox and
                bottom bar extended and formed for light-tight joints among shade components and between
                shade components and adjacent construction.




BLACKOUT ROLLER SHADES                                                                             12494 - 3
12494.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:09 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:39 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


                1.   Side Channels, Sill Channel or Angle, and Perimeter Seals: Manufacturer's standard
                     design, including sill light seal attached to bottom bar, for eliminating light gaps when
                     shades are closed.
                2.   Shade Band Retention System: Manufacturer's standard design for guiding shade band
                     material through range of travel and holding shade band flat with edges of material within
                     side channels.
          K.    Mounting: Inside mounting permitting easy removal and replacement without damaging roller
                shade or adjacent surfaces and finishes.

          L.    Shade Operation: Manual; with continuous-loop bead-chain, clutch, and cord tensioner and
                bracket lift operator.
                1.   Position of Clutch Operator: Right side of roller, as determined by hand of user facing
                     shade from inside.
                2.   Clutch: Capacity to lift size and weight of shade; sized to fit roller or provide adaptor.
                3.   Lift-Assist Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard spring assist for balancing roller shade
                     weight and lifting heavy roller shades.
                4.   Loop Length: Length required to make operation convenient from floor level.
                5.   Bead Chain: Stainless steel.
                6.   Operating Function: Stop and hold shade at any position in ascending or descending
                     travel.
     2.2 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION
          A.    Product Description: Roller shade consisting of a roller, a means of supporting the roller, a
                flexible sheet or band of material carried by the roller, a means of attaching the material to
                the roller, a bottom bar, and an operating mechanism that lifts and lowers the shade.

          B.    Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.
                1.   Lifting Mechanism: With permanently lubricated moving parts.
          C.    Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows,
                measured at 74 deg F (23 deg C):
                1.   Shade Units Installed between (Inside) Jambs: Edge of shade not more than 1/4 inch (6
                     mm) from face of jamb. Length equal to head to sill dimension of opening in which each
                     shade is installed.
          D.    Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting
                roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method
                indicated.

          E.    Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal
                noncorrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to
                supporting substrate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal
                use.

          F.    Color-Coated Finish: For metal components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard
                baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation
                including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

BLACKOUT ROLLER SHADES                                                                               12494 - 4
12494.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:09 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:39 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


          G.    Colors of Metal and Plastic Components Exposed to View: As selected by Architect from
                manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 EXAMINATION
          A.    Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
                requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting
                performance.
                1.   Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
     3.2 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION
          A.    Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's
                written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 3 inches to interior face of
                glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.

     3.3 ADJUSTING
          A.    Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or
                malfunction throughout entire operational range.

     3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
          A.    Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

          B.    Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
                Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of
                Substantial Completion.

          C.    Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect,
                before time of Substantial Completion.

     3.5 DEMONSTRATION
          A.    Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
                adjust, operate, and maintain roller shades. Refer to Division 1 Section Demonstration and
                Training."


                                              END OF SECTION




BLACKOUT ROLLER SHADES                                                                                 12494 - 5
12494.doc
saved 12.10.2009 10:09 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:39 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                               SECTION 12500
                                                              WINDOW TREATMENT
                                                       (ORIGINAL BUILDING SPECIFICATION)

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           RELATED DOCUMENTS................................................................................................................................................ 1
  1.2           SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.3           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 1
  1.4           QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.5           EXTRA MATERIALS ..................................................................................................................................................... 2

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 2
  2.1           HORIZONTAL BLINDS .................................................................................................................................................. 2
  2.2           FABRICATION AND OPERATION.................................................................................................................................. 3

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
  3.1           INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................................................. 4


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
           A.       Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
                    Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

     1.2 SUMMARY
           A.       This Section includes basic window treatment as follows:
                    1.       Horizontal blinds.
     1.3 SUBMITTALS
           A.       General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
                    Specification Sections.

           B.       Product data and installation instructions for each type of window treatment unit required.
                    Include methods of installation for each kind of opening and supporting structure.

           C.       Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for special components and application conditions of
                    window treatment units which are not fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer’s product
                    data. Show relationships to adjoining work.

           D.       Include typical elevation layout indicating proposed division between blind units and meeting
                    edges at corners. Provide sections and details at head and sill between blind units and
                    corners.

           E.       Samples for initial selection of colors, in form of manufacturer’s color charts consisting of
                    sections of exposed components with integral or applied finishes showing full range of colors
                    and materials.

WINDOW TREATMENT                                                                                                                                                            12500 - 1
12500.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:57 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:39 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


     1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
           A.   General: Provide units produced by one manufacturer for each type required, with complete
                standard assemblies including hardware accessory items, mounting brackets, and
                fastenings.

     1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
           A.   Maintenance Stock: Furnish extra materials matching products installed, packaged with
                protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents.
                1.    Typical Window Treatment Units: Furnish quantity of full-size typical window treatment
                      units equal to 5 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 HORIZONTAL BLINDS
           A.   Headrail: Channel-shaped section complete with tilting mechanism, top and end braces, top
                cradles, cord lock, and accessory items required for type of blind and installation.

           B.   Bottom Rail: Tubular steel bottom rail, designed to withstand twisting or sagging. Contour
                top surface to match slat curvature, with flat or slightly curved bottom. Close ends with metal
                or plastic end caps of same color as rail. Finish rail in same color as slats.

           C.   Slats: Spring-tempered aluminum (louver blades), rounded corners with forming burrs
                removed, as follows:
                1.    Slat Width: 1-inch (25 mm) nominal slates, with other components sized to suit.
                2.    Provide slats designed and spaced to achieve maximum overlap and closure for
                      optimum light exclusion.
           D.   Ladders: Designed to support and maintain slats at proper spacing and alignment in open
                and closed positions, as follows:
                1.    Braided polyester cord design consisting of vertical components of not less than 0.043-
                      inch nor more than 0.068-inch in diameter and integrally braided ladder rungs of not less
                      than 4 threads; space ladders not further than 23 inches apart and 7 inches from ends of
                      slats.
           E.   Tilting Mechanism: Assembly including disengaging worm and gear mechanism to eliminate
                overdrive, low-friction gear tilter, drum and cradle at each ladder, tilt rod, tape clips, and
                grommet guides to prevent wear on ladder and cords; designed to hold slats at any angle and
                prevent movement of slats due to vibration, operated as follows:
                1.    Cord Operation: Cord of sufficient length for blind operation, matching lift cord in
                      material, size and appearance, fitted with tassels.
           F.   Lifting Mechanism: Crashproof cord locks with cord separators and braided polyester or nylon
                lift cords with tassels at ends. Size cord to suit blind type. Include self-aligning cord
                equalizers designed to maintain horizontal blind position.

           G.   Installation Brackets: Designed to facilitate removal of head channels. Provide intermediate
                brackets at spacing recommended by blind manufacturer. Include hardware necessary for

WINDOW TREATMENT                                                                                     12500 - 2
12500.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:57 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:39 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


                secure attachment of brackets to adjoining construction and to headrails. Design brackets to
                support safely the weight of blind assemblies plus forces applied to operate blinds.

           H.   Side Channels: Provide side channels identical in appearance to headrail and designed to
                reduce light leakage at edges of blinds.

           I.   Finish: Provide finishes indicated below. Finish exposed accessories and hardware to match
                rail color. Provide corrosion-resistant finish to concealed items of hardware.
                1.    Steel Components: Galvanize and either phosphate coat or prime exposed steel
                      surfaces. Finish with baked-on synthetic resin enamel finish.
                2.    Aluminum Slates: Chemical conversion coat then follow with baked-on synthetic resin
                      enamel finish coat.
           J.   Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
                products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
                1.    Graber Industries, Inc.
                2.    Hunter Douglas, Inc.
                3.    Kirsch Div., Cooper Industries.
                4.    Architectural Products Div., Levelor Lorentzen, Inc.
     2.2 FABRICATION AND OPERATION
           A.   Prior to fabrication, verify actual opening dimensions by accurate site measurements. Adjust
                dimensions for proper fit at openings.

           B.   Cooperate with other trades for securing tracks to substrates and other finished surfaces.

           C.   Fabricate window treatment components from noncorrosive, non-staining, nonfading materials
                which are completely compatible and do not require lubrication during normal expected life.

           D.   Fabricate blind units to openings fill openings from head-to-sill and jamb-to-jamb.

           E.                                                                                      ver
                For continuous window wall installations, fabricate blinds so that ends occur only o
                mullions or other defined vertical separation.

           F.   Space slats to provide overlap for light exclusion when fully closed.

           G.   Space louver blades to provide a minimum overlap of 3/8 inch for light exclusion when in fully-
                closed. Gear operating equipment to reduce ratio of hand movement to louver position so
                that blinds operate easily and can be set accurately and smoothly.

           H.   Equip horizontal blind units for the following operations.
                1.    Full-tilting operation with slats rotating approximately 180 deg. Place tilt operating
                      controls on left-hand side of blind units, unless otherwise indicated.
                2.    Full-height raising, to minimum stacking dimension, with lifting cord locks for stopping
                      blind at any point of ascending or descending travel. Place pull cords on right-hand side
                      of blind units unless otherwise indicated.



WINDOW TREATMENT                                                                                      12500 - 3
12500.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:57 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:39 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 INSTALLATION
           A.   General: Install window treatment units to comply with manufacturer’s instructions. Position
                units level, plumb, secure, and at proper height and location relative to adjoining window units
                and other related work. Securely anchor units with clips, brackets, and anchorages suited to
                type as substrate.

           B.   Provide clearance between sash and blinds to permit unencumbered operation of sash
                hardware.

           C.   Isolate metal parts from concrete and mortar to prevent galvanic action. Use thick coating or
                other means recommended by manufacturer to effect separation.

           D.   Protect installed units to ensure their being in operating condition, without damage,
                blemishes, or indication of use at substantial completion of project. Correct nonconforming
                damaged units. Replace units that cannot be field corrected.


                                              END OF SECTION




WINDOW TREATMENT                                                                                      12500 - 4
12500.doc
saved 12.9.2009 8:57 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:39 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                               SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                           22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                           REV 0
-


                                                                         SECTION 13850
                                                                       FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

                                                                             SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.3           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.4           QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................................................ 2

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 3
  2.1           ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES........................................................................................................................... 3
  2.2           WIRING......................................................................................................................................................................... 3

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
  3.1           INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................................................. 4
  3.2           FIELD QUALITY CONTROL........................................................................................................................................... 4


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 SUMMARY
           A.       Section Includes
                    1.       Provide an extension of the existing fire alarm system for the renovated areas consisting
                             of addressable alarm initiating devices, supervisory devices, alarm notification
                             appliances, wiring and accessories as specified, indicated and required for a code
                             compliant system.
           B.       Related Sections
                    1.       16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
                    2.       16075 - Electrical Identification
                    3.       16122 - Wire and Cable
                    4.       16132 - Conduit, Wireways and Accessories
     1.2 REFERENCES
           A.       Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA)
                    1.       36 CFR 1191 - Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Final Guidelines.
           B.       American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI)
                    1.       NECA 305 – 2001 – Standard for Fire Alarm System Job Practices.
                    2.       X3.64 - Additional Controls for Use with the American National Standard Code for
                             Information Interchange.
           C.       National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
                    1.       70 - National Electrical Code.
                    2.       72 - National Fire Alarm Code.
           D.       Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)


FIRE ALARM SYSTEM                                                                                                                                                              13850 - 1
13850.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:46 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:39 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                              SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                          22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                          REV 0
-


                1.    38 - Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes for Use with Fire-Protective Signaling Systems.
                2.    268 - Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
                3.    268a - Smoke Detectors for Duct Application.
                4.    464 - Audible Signal Appliances.
                5.    864 - Control Units for Fire-Protective Signaling Systems.
                6.    1480 - Speakers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
                7.    1638 - Visual Signaling Appliances - Private Mode Emergency and General Utility
                      Signaling.
     1.3 SUBMITTALS
           A.   Product Data
                1.    Submit manufacturer's technical product data on the fire alarm system components
                      including the following:
                      a.     Control unit.
                      b.     Initiating devices.
                      c.     Notification appliances.
                      d.     Miscellaneous products.
                      e.     Wire and cable.
           B.   Shop Drawings
                1.    Submit dimensioned layout drawings of fire alarm system products including conduit
                      and wire routing, device locations, and mounting types.
                2.    Submit wiring diagrams for fire alarm initiating, indicating, supervisory, and signaling
                      circuits.
                3.    Submit overall fire alarm system riser diagram, including devices, conduit and wire,
                      wiring color coding scheme and power sources, both primary and secondary.
                4.    Submit complete battery sizing calculation sheet(s) indicating electrical power
                      requirements of the entire fire alarm system, including the power consumption of the
                      individual devices, both in alarm and supervisory modes.
           C.   Quality Control Submittals
                1.    Submit proof of installer's and manufacturer's qualifications.
                2.    Submit acceptance and re-acceptance, if any, of test reports and certificate of
                      compliance per NFPA 72.
                3.    Submit certificate of compliance per NFPA 72.
                4.    Submit proof of certification, by the authority having jurisdiction, of the fire alarm system.
     1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
           A.   Manufacturer Qualifications
                1.    Firm regularly engaged in the manufacture and integration of fire alarm system
                      components, of types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory
                      use in similar services for not less than five years.
           B.   Installer Qualifications
                1.    Firm with at least five years of successful installation experience with projects utilizing
                      fire alarms systems similar to that required for this Project.


FIRE ALARM SYSTEM                                                                                         13850 - 2
13850.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:46 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:39 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
           A.   Speakers
                1.    High-grade type speakers, per UL 1480 and 1638, suitable for alarm purposes.
                2.    Construct speaker cone of insect-proof, phenolic material which is fire self-extinguishing
                      and resistant to moisture and age deterioration.
                3.    Re-entrant type design which prevents damage to the speaker diaphragm from fire
                      convection heat, foreign materials, rods and wires.
                4.    Minimum 90 dBA sound output at 2 watts, at 3 meters (10 feet).
                5.    Flared folded horn speaker with wattage taps from 2 to 15 watts.
                6.    Wall-mounted, semi-recessed, red finished enclosure or flush ceiling-mounted with white
                      finish.
           B.   Speakers With Visual Units
                1.    High-grade type speakers, per UL 1480 and 1638, suitable for alarm purposes.
                2.    Construct speaker cone of insect-proof, phenolic material which is fire self-extinguishing
                      and resistant to moisture and age deterioration.
                3.    Re-entrant type design which prevents damage to the speaker diaphragm from fire
                      convection heat, foreign materials, rods and wires.
                4.    Minimum 90 dBA sound output at 2 watts, at 3 meters (10 feet).
                5.    Flared folded horn speaker with wattage taps from 2 to 15 watts.
                6.    Integral strobe light with red “fire” lettering on white diffuser, 15 cd synchronized flash
                      output at one flash per second unless otherwise indicated.
                7.    Wall-mounted, semi-recessed, red finished enclosure.
           C.   Visual Units
                1.    Strobe lamp and flasher, per NFPA 72 and UL 1638, with red "fire" lettering on white
                      lens.
                2.    Self-synchronized 15 cd flash output at one flash per second unless otherwise
                      indicated.
                3.    Wall-mounted, semi-recessed, red finished enclosure.

     2.2 WIRING
           A.   Provide power wiring per Section 16122, "Wire and Cable".

           B.   Provide wiring and connections from fire alarm control modules to devices furnished and
                installed by other trades such as fire dampers, smoke/fire shutters, access control points
                electric door hold open devices, fire/smoke vents, EP switches, etc.

           C.   Provide fire alarm circuitry and junction box with terminal strip at the elevator controller for
                connection to fire alarm equipment in elevator cab.

           D.   Provide power limited, fire protective signaling cable as follows:
                1.    Minimum no. 18 AWG stranded, copper with insulation per NFPA 70.
                2.    Multiconductor cable for sizes no. 16 AWG and smaller.


FIRE ALARM SYSTEM                                                                                      13850 - 3
13850.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:46 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:39 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                        REV 0
-


                3.    Uniquely color-code the wires serving the following functions:
                      a.     Manual stations.
                      b.     Smoke detectors.
                      c.     Duct detectors.
                      d.     Water flow circuits.
                      e.     Signaling circuits.
                      f.     Sprinkler supervisory circuits.
                4.    When a circuit requires polarity for operation such as power for a smoke detector circuit,
                      stripe the conductor that is negative. (e.g., If blue was used, utilize a blue conductor
                      with a yellow stripe for the negative conductor.)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 INSTALLATION
           A.   General
                1.    Install and test Fire Alarm System per ANSI NECA-305-2001.
                2.    Install automatic detectors per NFPA 72.

           B.   Wire and Cable Installation
                1.    Install power wiring per Section 16122 "Wire and Cable".
                2.    Install fire alarm system wire and cable in dedicated conduit, with continuous factory-
                      applied red coating, separate from any other system wiring. Provide minimum 13-mm
                      (1/2-inch) conduit of type per Section 16132, "Conduit, Wireways, and Accessories".
                3.    Install wires and cables without splices and taps. Make connections at terminals in
                      cabinets, equipment, and devices.
           C.   Identification

                1.    Provide lettered plastic tape with the words "Fire Alarm System Wiring" at each outlet
                      and junction box associated with fire alarm system wiring.
                2.    Provide conduit markers for fire alarm system conduit, 3 meters (10 feet) on center, with
                      the words "Fire Alarm System Conduit".
     3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
           A.   Field Tests
                1.    Prior to connection to the fire alarm system, test conductors, per NFPA 72, for stray
                      voltages, ground faults, short circuits, and loop resistances.
                2.    After the complete installation of the fire alarm system, conduct an acceptance test, per
                      NFPA 72, of the fire alarm system. Conduct any required re-acceptance tests per NFPA
                      72.
           B.   Manufacturer's Field Service
                1.    Provide manufacturer's field instruction and supervision during the installation of the fire
                      alarm system.

                                                 END OF SECTION


FIRE ALARM SYSTEM                                                                                       13850 - 4
13850.doc
saved 11.13.2009 1:46 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:39 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                              SECTION 15010
                                                      BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.3           REFERENCE TO DESIGN DRAWING SCHEDULES ........................................................................................................ 2
  1.4           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.5           QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................................................ 3
  1.6           SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING................................................................................................................................. 4
  1.7           WARRANTIES .............................................................................................................................................................. 5

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS (NOT USED)............................................................................................................................................. 5

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 5
  3.1           ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION .................................................................................................................. 5
  3.2           PROTECTION................................................................................................................................................................ 8
  3.3           FLUSHING, CLEANING AND CHLORINATION............................................................................................................... 8


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 SUMMARY
           A.       Section Includes
                    1.       This Section includes the basic requirements peculiar to Division 15 and certain
                             Sections of Division 13 and common to more than one Section of those Divisions. This
                             Section supplements the General Requirements in Division 1.

     1.2 REFERENCES
           A.       Air Moving and Control Association (AMCA)
                    1.       204 – Balance Quality and Vibration Level for Fans
           B.       American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI)
                    1.       HI 1.1 - 1.5 - Centrifugal Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation.
           C.       American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
                    1.       B15.1 - Safety Standards for Mechanical Power Transmission Apparatus.
                    2.       B31.1 - Power Piping.
                    3.       Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
                             a. Section I - Power Boilers.
                             b. Section IX - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
           D.       American Society for Non-Destructive Testing, Inc. (ASNT)
                    1.       SNT-TC-1A - Recommended Practice for Personnel Qualification and Certification in
                             Nondestructive Testing.
           E.       American Welding Society (AWS)


BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS                                                                                                                                               15010 - 1
15010.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:47 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:40 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


                1.    D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
                2.    QC1 - Specifications for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors.
           F.   National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
                1.    70 - National Electric Code.
           G.   Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
                1.    1910.219 - Mechanical Power - Transmission Apparatus.

     1.3 REFERENCE TO DESIGN DRAWING SCHEDULES
           A.   Maximum and Minimum Requirements
                1.    Refer to equipment schedules for equipment identification number and corresponding
                      area location, capacity, and design requirements.
                2.    Wherever schedules or notes appear in the Contract Documents in which sizes and
                      capacities of equipment are indicated or specified, provide equipment under the Contract
                      which meets the following requirements under operating conditions:
                      a. The rpm, the outlet velocities, tip speeds and the NC ratings specified are the
                           maximum that will be accepted.

     1.4 SUBMITTALS
           A.   Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
                1.    Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples for the materials, equipment and
                      systems (products) so specified elsewhere in Divisions 2, 13 and 15.
                2.    Refer to Section 01330 for submittal requirements.
                3.    Refer to Section 01630 for product options and substitutions.
           B.   Coordination Drawings
                1.    Refer to Section 01310.
           C.   Operation and Maintenance Manuals
                1.    Submit operation and maintenance manuals only if the provided system or equipment
                      does not match the existing systems and equipment in the existing facility.
                2.    Submit 1 draft copy of each manual at least 15 days before requesting inspection for
                      Substantial completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory.
                      Architect will return the copy indicating whether scope and general content of manuals
                      are acceptable.
                3.    Include the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing
                      equipment and systems and of the local representatives for each item of equipment and
                      each system. Provide a table of contents, assemble the manual to conform to the table
                      of contents with the tab s    heets placed before instructions covering the subject. The
                      instruction sheets shall be legible and easy to read, with large sheets of drawings folded
                      in.
                4.    Include the following in the manual:
                      a. A system description and layout showing piping, valves, and controls.
                      b. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of
                            each component.

BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS                                                                           15010 - 2
15010.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:47 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:40 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


                      c.     A control sequence describing start-up, operation and shut-down.
                      d.     A detailed description of the function of each principal component of the system.
                      e.     The procedure for starting.
                      f.     The procedure for operation.
                      g.     Shut-down instructions.
                      h.     Installation instructions.
                      i.     Maintenance and overhaul instructions.
                      j.     Lubrication schedule including type, grade, temperature range, and frequency.
                      k.     List of size, location and number of filters.
                      l.     Safety precautions, diagrams, and illustrations.
                      m.     List of size and location of V-belts.
                      n.     Test procedures.
                      o.     Performance data.
                      p.     Parts lists.
                5.    In the parts lists for equipment, indicate the sources of supply, recommended spare
                      parts, and the service organization which is reasonably convenient to the building site.
                6.    Provide the manual complete in all respects for all equipment, controls, accessories,
                      and associated appurtenances provided.
           D.   Posted Operating Instructions
                1.    Furnish operating instructions for each system and each principal piece of equipment
                      that does not specifically match the existing system and equipment, for the use of
                      operation and maintenance personnel, including wiring and control diagrams showing
                      the complete layout of the entire system including equipment, piping, valves, and control
                      sequence, framed under glass or in approved laminated plastic and posted where
                      directed.
                2.    Provide printed or engraved operating instructions for each principal piece of equipment,
                      attached or posted adjacent to the piece of equipment, including start-up, proper
                      adjustment, operating, lubrication, shut-down safety precautions, procedure in the event
                      of equipment failure and any other necessary items of instruction as recommended by
                      the manufacturer of the unit.
                3.    For operating instructions exposed to the weather, use weather-resisting materials or
                      enclose suitably so as to be weather protected. Provide operating instructions which do
                      not fade when exposed to sunlight and are secured to prevent easy removal or peeling.

     1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
           A.   New Products
                1.    Provide all piping, valves, ductwork, equipment and miscellaneous accessories and
                      appurtenances which are new. Do not permit previously used material of any kind to be
                      incorporated into any of the building systems.
           B.   Equipment Design
                1.    Design equipment and accessories not specifically described or identified by
                      manufacturer's catalog numbers in conformity with applicable technical standards and
                      suitable for maximum working pressure, test pressure and temperatures required.
           C.   Equipment Installation

BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS                                                                          15010 - 3
15010.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:47 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:40 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


                1.    Obtain manufacturer's printed installation instructions to aid in properly executing work
                      of installing equipment whenever such instructions are available.
                2.    Erect equipment in a neat and workmanlike manner. Align, level and adjust for
                      satisfactory operation. Install so that connecting and disconnecting of piping and
                      accessories can be made readily, and so that parts are easily accessible for inspection,
                      operation, maintenance and repair. Minor deviation from arrangements indicated may be
                      made, as approved.
           D.   Packaged Equipment
                1.    Provide packaged equipment, where specified, which is completely factory assembled,
                      including all mechanical and electrical components mounted on a common base or in a
                      common enclosure with all piping, controls and wiring factory installed ready to be
                      incorporated into the mechanical system.
           E.   Quietness of Operation
                1.    Pumps, fans, motors and other equipment with moving parts have been especially
                      selected for quietness of operation.
                2.    For equipment other than that specified, submitted by the Contractor for approval,
                      submit written statements from the manufacturer and the Contractor that said equipment
                      is at least as quiet as that specified and include certified sound test data to support the
                      claims made.
           F.   Vibration Isolation
                1.    Vibration isolation devices for isolating equipment, ductwork and piping from the building
                      structure are specified under Section 15070. Procure these devices from a single
                      vibration materials manufacturer through a local representative. Furnish the local
                      representative with copies of Shop Drawings of all equipment requiring vibration isolation
                      and access to the Drawings that show the ductwork and piping that require vibration
                      isolation.
                2.    For equipment requiring factory installation of vibration isolators, furnish the equipment
                      manufacturer with the identity of the supplier of the vibration isolation manufacturer
                      selected for the Project. Submittals for equipment not equipped with the product of the
                      vibration isolation manufacturer selected for the Project will be rejected.
     1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
           A.   Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components.

           B.   Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
                construction to allow for mechanical installations.

           C.   Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place
                concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

           D.   Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for
                efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning
                before closing in building.




BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS                                                                          15010 - 4
15010.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:47 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:40 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


           E.   Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead
                utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service
                companies, and controlling agencies.

           F.   Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if devices
                are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and
                similar concealment.

     1.7 WARRANTIES
           A.   General
                1.    Submit Special Warranties for the products so specified elsewhere in Divisions 2, 13,
                      and 15.
                2.    Submit Statements of Compliance for the products so specified elsewhere in Divisions
                      2, 13, and 15.
           B.   Service During Contract Correction Period
                1.    In the event of the failure of any system or its component equipment items or the
                      improper functioning thereof, within the period provided in The Conditions of the Contract
                      for correction of the Work, or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by
                      law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required elsewhere in Division 15,
                      have available and "on call" within eight hours or less, competent service personnel for
                      the restoration of systems and equipment for complete operation.
                2.    Should the nature of the failure be such as to present an emergency, in the opinion of
                      the Owner, make such personnel promptly available, regardless of the hour of the day or
                      the day of the week.
                3.    Should the failure be such as to fall under this warranty, pay the cost of the services;
                      otherwise the Owner will pay for such service at the prevailing rate.
                4.    Should the Contractor fail to make such service personnel available "on call" within eight
                      hours or less, the Owner may employ such personnel as are available to the Owner, at
                      the expense of the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION
           A.   Dimensions and Design
                1.    Provide apparatus and equipment of such dimensions and design as to be adapted to
                      the arrangement of the installation and to fit within the limits of the space available.
           B.   Stand-Off Brackets
                1.    Provide insulated equipment, piping and duct work with stand-off brackets for attaching
                      components to allow full insulation thickness.
           C.   Special Tools




BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS                                                                          15010 - 5
15010.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:47 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:40 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


                1.    Provide tools required to operate, adjust, or make minor repairs to the equipment and
                      install them in a wall mounted wood or metal case. Provide the case with a lock and two
                      keys.
           D.   Standard Products
                1.    Provide products and equipment that are essentially the standard product of the
                      manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same product or type of equipment are
                      required, provide these units as products of the same manufacturer.
                2.    Where the requirements of the Contract Documents exceed that of a manufacturer's
                      standard product in terms of quality, performance or efficiency, the manufacturer shall
                      make special provisions to ensure that the product proposed meets the requirements of
                      the Contract Documents.
           E.   Substituted Items
                1.    Should a substitute item be offered and accepted and the substitute item requires
                      services or utilities other than required by the item substituted for, provide those other
                      services or utilities at no additional cost to the Owner.
           F.   Equipment Locations
                1.    Mechanical equipment and devices have been shown on the Drawings in the
                      approximate location required for reasons of access, noise control or maintainability.
                      Minor adjustments in location dictated by coordination with other work are permitted.
                      Major relocations for reasons other than these are not to be made without specific
                      written approval.
           G.   Interferences
                1.    Before proceeding with the installation of piping and ductwork, inspect the Contract
                      Documents and determine that the location of the Work does not interfere with other
                      work. In case of interference request clarification from the Architect in writing.
           H.   Holes Through Previously Constructed Walls and Floors
                1.    Cut holes for the passage of piping and ductwork through previously constructed walls
                      and floors in a neat workman-like manner.
                2.    Make holes through floors and masonry walls by coring or saw-cutting the hole with
                      minimum oversizing to allow for firesafing or caulking the peripheral space between the
                      pipe or duct and the structure.
                3.    Make holes through gypsum board walls by sawing with minimum oversizing to allow for
                      firesafing or caulking or for a flange or escutcheon to be placed in a manner to fill or
                      cover the peripheral space between the pipe or duct and the wall.
           I.   Piping Clearance Over Electrical Equipment
                1.    Do not run piping over electrical equipment such as transformers, switchgear and
                      panelboards.
           J.   Piping and Ductwork - Prohibited Locations
                1.    Do not install piping and ductwork of any kind in Electrical Rooms, tele-communications
                      rooms, or elevator equipment rooms, except that which serves these rooms.



BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS                                                                         15010 - 6
15010.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:47 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:40 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


           K.   Offsets and Transitions
                1.    In general, most main offsets and transitions of piping and duct work are shown on the
                                                                                 i
                      drawings in order to indicate approximate locations n plan and elevation where the
                      systems are intended to be run.
                2.    The Contract Documents are not intended to serve as coordinated construction drawings
                      showing all minor adjustments in locations and duct cross sections that are required for
                      a fully coordinated installation that respects the work of all trades.
                3.    Fully coordinate the mechanical work within itself and with the work of other trades to
                      ensure the avoidance of all interferences.
           L.   Lines and Grades
                1.    Construct Work in conformity with lines and grades as indicated.
                2.    Lay out the Work and be responsible for lines, elevations and measurements required
                      for the installation of the Work.
                3.    Space axis lines within building on each floor level so that mechanical work may be laid
                      out with metal tape measure having length of 30.5 meters (100 feet) maximum. The use
                      of cloth tape for lay-out will not be permitted.
                4.    Use bench marks outside building from which lines and grades required for installation of
                      mechanical work may be set.
           M.   Personnel Protection From Suspended Work
                1.    Where suspended equipment, piping or ductwork or any of their supporting or reinforcing
                      members extend 2.1 meters (7 feet) or less above the floor or any other walking surface,
                      cover all edges, projecting surfaces and sharp corners with pre-fabricated soft rubber
                      pads, elastomeric insulation, caps or equivalent to prevent injury to personnel.
           N.   Identification
                1.    For piping, ductwork, and equipment identification, refer to Section 15075.
                2.    Nameplates
                      a. For each component of equipment, provide the manufacturer's name, catalog
                           number and date of manufacture on a plate securely attached to the item of
                           equipment, or the name and catalog number and date of manufacture may be
                           stamped or cast into the body of the item. Also include data pertinent to the
                           operation and characteristics of the equipment.
                3.    Charts and diagrams
                      a. Provide as directed, the following framed and glass covered diagrams and charts:
                          1) Diagrammatic layout of piping systems, showing equipment and giving
                               location of each valve [and trap].
                          2) Diagrammatic layout of each fan duct system, giving location of each damper,
                               coil, humidifier, volume control box or other such devices.
                          3) Diagrammatic layout of automatic temperature control systems, giving
                               location of each instrument, damper and piece of equipment controlled.
           O.   Painting
                1.    Painting is specified in Section 09910.




BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS                                                                        15010 - 7
15010.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:47 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:40 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                       SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                   22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                   REV 0
-


     3.2 PROTECTION
           A.   Piping Systems
                1.    Provide only new pipe, equipment and appurtenances and maintain clean and free from
                      rust, dirt, scale, and other contaminants. Provide temporary air-tight covers at pipe
                      openings at all equipment.
                2.    Do not leave piping open. At the end of each work day cap over ends of piping wherever
                      they occur until such time as piping extensions or final connections are made to
                      equipment, fixtures, etc.
                3.    Before starting up piping systems, provide temporary 20 mesh screens in each strainer.
                      Remove temporary screens and replace them with permanent screens only after dirt and
                      scale has been removed from the piping system.
           B.   Air Handling Systems
                1.    Continuously maintain adequate protection to keep dirt and foreign matter from getting
                      into the air handling system.
                2.    Do not leave ductwork open. At the end of each work day seal open sections of duct
                      and open fittings wherever they occur until such time as duct extensions or final
                      connections are made to equipment, terminal units, grilles, registers and diffusers.
     3.3 FLUSHING, CLEANING AND CHLORINATION
           A.   Flushing
                1.    Before turning the systems over to the Owner, thoroughly flush piping systems of scale
                      and dirt.
                2.    Flush dead ends and other locations where debris may accumulate.
                3.    Operate all valves to dislodge any debris in the valve body.
                4.    Circulate water through piping at a minimum velocity of 1.8 meters (6 feet) per second
                      while draining off water to sewer until water is "Potable water clear" and there is no
                      sedimentation after an hour in a quiet standing sample.
                5.    Flush steam piping with steam, blowing to atmosphere.
           B.   Chlorination
                1.    Refer to Section 15140 for chlorination of domestic water systems.

                                              END OF SECTION




BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS                                                                      15010 - 8
15010.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:47 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:40 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                  SECTION 15075
                                                              MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.3           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 1
  1.4           QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.5           COORDINATION ........................................................................................................................................................... 2
  1.6           WARRANTY................................................................................................................................................................. 2

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 2
  2.1           PIPING MARKERS ......................................................................................................................................................... 2
  2.2           VALVE TAGS .............................................................................................................................................................. 2
  2.3           CEILING MARKERS....................................................................................................................................................... 3
  2.4           DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION....................................................................................................................................... 3
  2.5           EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION........................................................................................................................................ 3
  2.6           ACCESS IDENTIFICATION............................................................................................................................................. 3

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
  3.1           INSTALLATION OF PIPE MARKERS.............................................................................................................................. 4
  3.2           INSTALLATION OF VALVE TAGS ............................................................................................................................... 4
  3.3           INSTALLATION OF VALVE IDENTIFICATION CHA RTS................................................................................................. 4
  3.4           INSTALLATION OF CEILING MARKERS........................................................................................................................ 4
  3.5           APPLICATION OF DUCT LABELS................................................................................................................................. 4
  3.6           APPLICATION OF EQUIPMENT LABELS ....................................................................................................................... 5
  3.7           APPLICATION OF ACCESS IDENTIFICATION................................................................................................................ 5
  3.8           PIPE IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE................................................................................................................................. 5


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 SUMMARY
           A.       Section Includes
                    1.       This Section includes the provision of all labor, materials and equipment required to
                             furnish and install identification for piping, ductwork equipment and ceilings in
                             accordance with the Contract Documents.

     1.2 REFERENCES
           A.       American National Standards Institutes, Inc. (ANSI).
                    1.       A13.1 - Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems

     1.3 SUBMITTALS
           A.       Refer to Section 15010

           B.       Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification
                    material and device, including:


MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION                                                                                                                                                   15075 - 1
15075.doc
saved 11.19.2009 2:44 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:40 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


                1.    Colors for proposed pipe marker letters and fields.
                2.    Ceiling markers.
                3.    Ductwork markers.
                4.    Equipment markers.
           C.   Valve numbering scheme.

           D.   Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted
                copies) to include in maintenance manuals.

     1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
           A.   ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1 for letter size, length of color field, colors,
                and viewing angles of identification devices for piping.

     1.5 COORDINATION
           A.   Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
                surfaces where devices are to be applied.

           B.   Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

           C.   Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.


     1.6 WARRANTY
           A.   Refer to Section 15010

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 PIPING MARKERS
           A.   Provide pipe markers consisting of pipe contents identification name with flow direction
                arrows.

           B.   Pipe Markers
                1.    For piping with outside diameters (including insulation) from NPS ¾ (DN 20) to NPS 5
                      (DN 125), provide snap on, vinyl pipe markers consisting of coiled plastic sheets with
                      sealed color graphics: Brady Worldwide, Inc. B-915 (Style A through E) or approved
                      product of Seton Identification Products or MSI Marking Services, Inc.

     2.2 VALVE TAGS
           A.   Provide piping NPS 1 1/2 (DN 40), pre-stamped, black filled, brass valve tags. Provide the
                top line of each tag with 6-mm-high (1/4-inch-high) letters indicating the service designation
                (CHW, DCW, etc.). Provide the bottom line with 11-mm-high (7/16-inch-high) numbers.

           B.   Brady Worldwide, Inc. 23210 or approved Product of Seton Identification Products or Marking
                Services, Inc.



MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION                                                                              15075 - 2
15075.doc
saved 11.19.2009 2:44 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:40 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


           C.   For uninterruptible services, such as vacuum, provide square tags. Refer to Section 15216.

           D.   Provide duplicate valve identification charts mounted in a clear anodized aluminum frame with
                a clear plastic lens.

           E.   Include the following information on the identification charts:

                Job and Installer Name and Date
                System
                Valve number
                Location
                Purpose
     2.3 CEILING MARKERS
           A.   Provide ceiling markers consisting of color coded dots equal to Brady Worldwide, Inc. “Series
                23250” or approved product of Seton Identification Products or Marking Services, Inc.

     2.4 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION
           A.   Printed label bearing the name of the:
                1.    Service.
                2.    System designation.
                3.    Direction of flow.
           B.   Letter size: 89 mm (3-1/2 inches).

           C.   Letter type: Gothic bold style.

           D.   Lettering designations and color scheme:
                1.    Supply air: White letters on blue background.
                2.    Return air: Black letters on green background.
                3.    Exhaust: Black letters on yellow background.
           E.   Minimum length of label: 600 mm (24 inches).

           F.   Self sticking indoor/outdoor vinyl markers: Brady Worldwide, Inc. “B-946” or approved product
                of Seton Identification Products or Marking Services, Inc.

     2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
           A.   Identify all equipment installed under this Division with 50-mm-high (2-inch-high) Gothic vinyl
                film black letters or numbers with permanent adhesive and conforming to the equipment
                designation identification shown on the Drawings: Brady Worldwide, Inc. “B-933” or approved
                product of Seton Identification Products or Marking Services, Inc.

     2.6 ACCESS IDENTIFICATION
           A.   Provide identification labeling on all duct points where access is provided to fire dampers,
                smoke dampers and combination fire smoke dampers.


MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION                                                                            15075 - 3
15075.doc
saved 11.19.2009 2:44 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:40 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                        REV 0
-


           B.   Provide label lettering to be 25 mm (1 inch) in height, Gothic vinyl film, and red letters on
                white background, with permanent adhesive; Brady Worldwide, Inc. “B-933” or approved
                product of Seton Identification Products or Marking Services, Inc., reading:
                        Fire Damper
                        Smoke Damper
                        Fire/Smoke Damper
PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPE MARKERS
           A.   Identify the content and directional flow of all piping on the Project with the specified pipe
                markers.

           B.   Provide pipe marking that complies with ANSI A13.1 with respect to:
                1.    Letter color.
                2.    Letter size.
                3.    Background color.
                4.    Marker size (length).
           C.   Install pipe markers at the following pipe locations:
                1.    Adjacent to each valve.
                2.    At each change in direction.
                3.    At each branch connection.
                4.    Where pipe penetrates walls, ceilings, and floors.
                5.    Every 7.6 meters (25 feet) on horizontal and vertical pipe runs.
           D.   Apply markers after insulating and/or painting have been completed.

           E.   Where a service is indicated on the Drawings as a circulating system, provide the pipe
                marker legend for the particular service with the word "supply" or "return" as required to clarify
                the line function.

     3.2 INSTALLATION OF VALVE TAGS
           A.   Attach tags to all valves using a #16 brass jack chain.

     3.3 INSTALLATION OF VALVE IDENTIFICATION CHARTS
           A.   Mount the two valve identification charts at locations to be designated.

     3.4 INSTALLATION OF CEILING MARKERS
           A.   Where valves, traps, dampers, control boxes, and other such devices occur above accessible
                suspended ceilings, provide 22-mm-diameter (7/8-inch-diameter), color coded, ceiling, dot
                type marks in the ceiling tile where devices occur above.

     3.5 APPLICATION OF DUCT LABELS
           A.   Label ductwork as indicated above. Label ductwork in exposed areas including mechanical
                rooms and in accessible shafts, chases and above suspended ceilings.

MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION                                                                               15075 - 4
15075.doc
saved 11.19.2009 2:44 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:40 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


           B.   Label straight runs a maximum of 15 meters (50 feet) on center; label branch ductwork within
                900 mm (3 feet) of mains; label at each change in direction; label within 900 mm (3 feet) of
                each wall, floor, roof or ceiling penetration.

     3.6 APPLICATION OF EQUIPMENT LABELS
           A.   Apply equipment labels on a prominent surface of the equipment where they can be readily
                seen from the operating floor.

     3.7 APPLICATION OF ACCESS IDENTIFICATION
           A.   Place labels on the duct access door or grille intended to service the dampers.

     3.8 PIPE IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
           A.   Provide pipe identification markers in accordance with the following schedule:
                Service                        Background       Color
                                               Color            of Letters
                Water:
                Domestic cold water            Green            White
                Domestic hot water             Yellow           Black
                Heating hot water              Yellow           Black

                Industrial Gases:
                Lab Vacuum                     Blue             White
                Lab Air                        Blue             White

                Fuels:
                Natural gas                    Yellow           Black

                Oils and Industrial Waste:
                Laboratory waste               Yellow           Black

                Sanitary Drainage:
                Above ground vents
                    and drainage               Green            White

                                              END OF SECTION




MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION                                                                            15075 - 5
15075.doc
saved 11.19.2009 2:44 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:40 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                          SECTION 15090
                                                MECHANICAL RESTORATION AND RETROFIT

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           DEFINITIONS................................................................................................................................................................. 1
  1.3           CLASSIFICATIONS ....................................................................................................................................................... 2
  1.4           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.5           SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING................................................................................................................................. 3
  1.6           WARRANTY................................................................................................................................................................. 3

PART 2 -        NOT USED.................................................................................................................................................................... 3

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 3
  3.1           ALTERATION WORK .................................................................................................................................................... 3


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 SUMMARY
           A.       Section Includes
                    1.       This section includes the furnishing of labor, materials, equipment and services
                             necessary for removal of materials and equipment as indicated and specified, and
                             classification thereof as defined. Also all Work necessary for protection of existing
                             building and Owner's operations as required by the Contract Documents.
                    2.       Refer questions of classification to the Architect for decision.
     1.2 DEFINITIONS
           A.       Item: Material, fixture, device, system, equipment, or other part of existing construction
                    classified in this Section, including incidental parts, pieces, supports, and attachments.

           B.       Abandon: Disconnect item from all existing system connections. Plug or cap openings in
                    item and former connections to system. Leave item in place.

           C.       Remove
                    1.       Extract item from its position. Then do with item as specified for its classification.
                             a. If item is part of an existing system, disconnect item from system before
                                  extraction. Permanently plug or cap openings of system. Dispose of supports and
                                  other items left behind. Leave existing system to remain in undamaged and
                                  operative condition.
                             b. Remove concrete and masonry in small sections and dampen to keep down dust
                                  during removal.
                             c. Promptly remove debris resulting from removal operations. Do not let debris
                                  accumulate on the site.
                    2.       After item is removed, inspect the structure to remain in place and notify the Architect of
                             defects uncovered. Repair of such defects and required additional Work will be
                             compensated by Contract adjustment in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract.


MECHANICAL RESTORATION AND RETROFIT                                                                                                                                         15090 - 1
15090.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                              SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                          22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                          REV 0
-


           D.   Reinstall: Set item in position in accordance with the Contract Documents; make
                connections to systems, if any, and otherwise prepare item for use in the Work.

     1.3 CLASSIFICATIONS
           A.   Restore
                1.    This term may be applied to any item removed under the alteration operation that meets
                      the requirements of the applicable Section of the Specifications, subject to the approval
                      of the Architect.
                2.    Carefully remove, each item designated ‘restore,’ then thoroughly refurbish the item as
                      specified in the applicable Section of the Specifications, and reinstall it as specified for a
                      new product.
                3.    Protect item prior to its removal and throughout all activities in connection with the item,
                      including removal, restoration, storage, and reinstallation; and through completion of the
                      Contract.
                4.    Immediately upon removal, durably tag item and on a written log record the action of
                      removal and all subsequent activities in connection with the item through final
                      disposition. Submit log to the Owner when and in the number of copies requested.
                5.    When restoration is complete, reinstall the item where shown.
                6.    When procedure of the Work prevents the reinstallation of an item immediately after
                      restoration is complete, store the item until reinstallation is possible, including
                      transportation to and from storage.
                7.    In lieu of restoring an existing item, the Contractor may replace the item with a new
                      item, subject to the Architect's approval, and reclassify the original item as Trash.
           B.   Salvage
                1.    This term may be applied to useful items that will not be reused as part of the Project.
                2.    Immediately upon removal, tag each item designated 'salvage,' and record on a written
                      log the action of removal and all subsequent activities in connection with the item
                      through final disposition. Submit log to the Owner when and in the number of copies
                      requested.
                3.    Dismantle each item to useful sizes, shapes, or components and deliver the item to the
                      Owner on the site, set up or packaged for storage as directed or as specified. Place
                      equipment on wood skids for ease of handling. Removal of paint, degreasing, or
                      cleaning, except that required for normal handling, will not be required. Salvaged items
                      shall remain the property of the Owner.
           C.   Trash
                1.    Classify as Trash all used items not classified as Restore or Salvage.
                2.    Trash shall become property of the Contractor.
                3.    Remove Trash as the Work progresses, and legally dispose of Trash off the site.
     1.4 SUBMITTALS
           A.   Schedule and Method
                1.    Before start of the Project, submit for review and approval by the Architect a relocation
                      and alteration schedule, including the timing and method proposed to maintain service
                      during the construction period.


MECHANICAL RESTORATION AND RETROFIT                                                                       15090 - 2
15090.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


     1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
           A.   Owner's Occupancy
                1.    Consistent with the Contract progress schedule, schedule in advance work that will
                      interfere with Owner's occupancy. Obtain approval from the Owner of the schedule of
                      alterations and perform the Work in accordance with the approved schedule. Correlate
                      all activities to provide minimum interference to the Owner's occupancy and use of the
                      premises.
                2.    Maintain existing pipe lines, fire protection lines, sewers, and other facilities in
                      operation. When temporary disruption of such services is found necessary during the
                      course of alteration work, request permission for such disruption from the Owner and
                      schedule at times designated by the Owner.
                3.    To make request for service interruption, use Section 01350A, “Request for
                      Service/Occupancy Interruption,” unless Owner requires otherwise.
           B.   Sequencing
                                                                                 th
                1.    Prior to work, isolate heating hot water system for 5 floor only by closing isolation
                      valves for this floor.
                2.    Remove and trash ductwork and variable air volume boxes as indicated on demolition
                      drawings MD.1 through MD.3.
                3.    Prior to demolition of heating hot water piping, isolate all floors form the main system
                      and partially drain piping system.
                4.    After partial removal of ductwork, cap remaining ducts, and close manual dampers to
                      maintain integrity of the air distribution system for remaining floors.
     1.6 WARRANTY
           A.   Refer to Section 15010.

PART 2 - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 ALTERATION WORK
           A.   Construction Procedures
                1.    Conduct alterations operations in a manner to create a minimum of noise, dust, and
                      other disturbance.
                2.    Correlate all activities to realize to the Owner maximum usefulness of restored and
                      salvaged items.
                3.    Exercise care to ensure damage to items both removed and not removed is held to a
                      minimum consistent with the reasonable requirements of such removal.
                4.    Protect existing equipment and machinery from damage, dirt, water, and dust. Upon
                      completion, if existing equipment and machinery is dusty or otherwise dirty from
                      construction operations, clean the equipment and machinery.
           B.   Piping Removal
                1.    Remove partially existing domestic cold and hot water, gas, and vacuum lines and other
                      miscellaneous services within the area to be altered. Cap services as shown.



MECHANICAL RESTORATION AND RETROFIT                                                                 15090 - 3
15090.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


                2.    Classify as salvage mechanical equipment and materials, except sheet metal,
                      insulation, brackets, and piping, carrying gas or liquids, such as water and sewage.
                      Classify as trash sheet metal, insulation, brackets and water and sewage piping.
           C.   Ductwork Removal
                1.    Remove and trash ductwork in the area as shown. Remove automatic dampers and
                      classify as salvage.
           D.   Equipment Removal
                1.    Remove fixtures, piping, vents, drains, and other miscellaneous mechanical items from
                      the areas, and trash. Cap soil pipe below floors.
                2.    Floor drains and sumps
                      a.     Remove Type B floor drains and sumps and cap piping. Classify as trash.
                      b.     Abandon, plug, and fill with concrete Type A floor drains and sumps.
           E.   Insulation Repair
                1.    Where insulation on existing piping, ductwork or equipment is damaged or disturbed in
                      the process of material removal or the connection of new systems; patch, repair, or
                      replace any such affected insulation as needed to restore the insulation to its original
                      performance.
           F.   Restored and Salvaged Architectural Items
                1.    Disconnect from existing systems existing architectural items indicated or specified to
                      be restored or salvaged.
                2.    Reconnect restored items upon reinstallation.
           G.   Equipment with Associated Electrical Power
                1.    After electrical power has been shut off and disconnection from existing systems has
                      been completed under Division 16, remove the equipment and electrical items and
                      classify as trash, unless otherwise indicated or specified.

                                               END OF SECTION




MECHANICAL RESTORATION AND RETROFIT                                                                 15090 - 4
15090.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:48 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                                  SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                              22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                              REV 0
-


                                                                               SECTION 15110
                                                                                   VALVES

                                                                                  SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -              GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1                 SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2                 REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.3                 DEFINITIONS................................................................................................................................................................. 2
  1.4                 SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.5                 QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................................................ 3
  1.6                 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING...................................................................................................................... 3
  1.7                 WARRANTY................................................................................................................................................................. 3

PART 2 -   PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 3
  2.1      GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 3
  2.2      HEATING HOT WATER, DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER, AND LABORATORY COMPRESSED AIR,
  UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN OR SPECIFIED................................................................................................................................ 4
  2.3      NATURAL GAS............................................................................................................................................................ 4
  2.4      VACUUM...................................................................................................................................................................... 5

PART 3 -              EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 5
  3.1                 VALVE EXAMINATION................................................................................................................................................. 5
  3.2                 ADJUSTING.................................................................................................................................................................. 5
  3.3                 VALVE INSTALLATION................................................................................................................................................ 5


PART 1 - GENERAL
        1.1 SUMMARY
                 A.       This Section includes valves and other such products that are common to more than one
                          Section of Division 13 and 15.

                 B.       This Section also includes supplemental requirements and installation materials common to
                          more than one Section of Division 13 and 15.

                 C.       Refer to the other Sections of Division 13 and 15 and the Drawings to determine the extent of
                          the required Work. Mechanical materials and methods for other systems, not described in
                          this Section, are specified in the various Mechanical Sections.

        1.2 REFERENCES
                 A.       Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI)
                          1.       760 -Solenoid Valves for Use with Volatile Refrigerants.
                 B.       American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI)
                          1.                                   as
                                   Z21.15 - Manually Operated G Valves for Appliances, Appliance Connector Valves,
                                   and Hose End Valves.
                 C.       American Petroleum Institute (API)



VALVES                                                                                                                                                                            15110 - 1
15110.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:49 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                        SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                    22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                    REV 0
-


                1.    Standard 600 - Steel Gate Valve - Flanged and Butt-Welding Ends, Bolted and Pressure
                      Sealed Bonnets.
                2.    Standard 607 – Fire Test for Soft-Seated Quarter-Turn Valves.
           D.   American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
                1.    B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
                2.    B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
                3.    B16.10 – Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Valves.
                4.    B16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded.
                5.    B16.34 – Valves – Flanged, Threaded and Welding End.
                6.    B31.1 - Power Piping.
                7.    B31.9 - Building Services Piping Code.
           E.   American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
                1.    A105/A105M - Specification for Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Piping Components.
                2.    A216/A216M - Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for
                      High-Temperature Service.
                3.    A351/A351M - Specification for Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferric (Duplex) for
                      Pressure Containing Parts.
                4.    B584 - Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications.
                5.    D1784 - Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated
                      Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
           F.   American Water Works Association (AWWA)
                1.    C500 - Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems.
                2.    C508 - Swing Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2-inch (50-mm) through 24-inch
                      (600-mm) NPS.
           G.   Fluid Control Institute (FCI)
                1.    70-2 - Quality Control Standard for Control Valve Seat Leakage.
           H.   Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS)
                1.    SP-61 – Pressure Testing of Steel Valves.
           I.   National Sanitation Foundation (NSF)
                1.    61 – Drinking Water Components – Health Effects.
     1.3 DEFINITIONS
           A.   The following are standard abbreviations for valves:
                1.    CWP: Cold working pressure.
                2.    EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
                3.    NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
                4.    PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.
                5.    TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.

     1.4 SUBMITTALS
           A.   Refer to Section 15010.

VALVES                                                                                             15110 - 2
15110.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:49 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


           B.   Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials;
                valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement;
                dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include
                rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and
                accessories.

     1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
           A.   ASME Compliance: ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
                1.    Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold-water, sanitary waste, and piping valves, unless
                      referenced.
           B.   ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and
                design criteria.

           C.   NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.

     1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
           A.   Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
                1.    Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
                2.    Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
                3.    Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.
                4.    Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
                5.    Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
                6.    Block check valves in either closed or open position.
           B.   Use the following precautions during storage:
                1.    Maintain valve end protection.
                2.    Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If
                      outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

     1.7 WARRANTY
           A.   Refer to Section 15010.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 GENERAL
           A.   Provide valves of manufacturers listed below and of the figure numbers listed, or as updated
                by the manufacturer. Submittals containing outdated figure numbers will be rejected.
                Manufacturers and numbers not listed are unacceptable.

           B.   Grooved end valves may be substituted for the specified valves on service up to 93 deg C (200
                deg F) providing they meet all the criteria of the specified valves.

           C.   Provide butterfly, ball and plug valves of bubble-tight construction.

           D.   Valve packing containing asbestos material will not be permitted.

VALVES                                                                                               15110 - 3
15110.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:49 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


           E.   Equip bronze globe and gate valves with a hexagon gland follower.

           F.   Equip bronze globe and gate valves with malleable iron hand wheels.

           G.   Provide manually operated valves, pad-lockable in any position.

           H.   Provide gate and globe valves which are capable of being packed under pressure when wide
                open by means of a beveled backseat and bonnet.

           I.   Provide all gate and globe valves with four-sided stem to hand-wheel connection with self-
                locking nut.

     2.2 HEATING HOT WATER, DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER, AND LABORATORY
         COMPRESSED AIR, UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN OR SPECIFIED
           A.   Isolation and Throttling Valves – NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller
                1.    Class 150 psi swp; 600 psi cwp; two-piece, regular port; bronze body; blow-out proof
                      stem; chromium plated brass or bronze ball; TFE seats and packing; adjustable packing
                      gland; threaded ends; [lever] [oval] handle with lockable feature; stem extensions for
                      insulated service.
                              Conbraco/Apollo                70-100
                              Crane                          9302
                              Hammond                        8501
                              Kitz                           68
                              Milwaukee                      BA-100
                              Jamesbury                      14-00-TT
                              NIBCO                          T-585-70
                              Watts                          B-6000
           B.   Check Valves – NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller
                1.    Class 200 psi swp, 400 psi cwp; bronze body, disc and seat; regrinding; screwed end.
                              Crane                          36
                              Hammond                        IB944
                              Kitz                           19
                              Milwaukee                      508
                              NIBCO                          T-453-B
                              Stockham                       B-345
                              Walworth                       3420
                              Watts                          B-5020

     2.3 NATURAL GAS
           A.   NPS ½ (DN 15) to NPS 2 (DN 50): forged brass body and ball, manually operated gas valve,
                full port, 150 psi steam, 600 psi w.o.g., threaded ends, [Tee] [lever] handle, in full compliance
                with AGA 3-88-5 psi gas and ANSI Z21.15.
                              Conbraco                       Series GB-10
                              Hammond                        8901UL

VALVES                                                                                                 15110 - 4
15110.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:49 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


                               Kitz                         68
     2.4 VACUUM
           A.   NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller - Ball Type
                1.    600 psi w.o.g.; full port; three piece bronze body and bronze trim; reinforced T eflon
                      (TFE) seats; chromium plated steel ball; blow-out proof stem; 57-mm (2-1/4-inch) stem
                      extension; soldered ends.



                               Conbraco                     Apollo Series 82-200.
                               Kitz                         63
                               McCanna                      S-303-BR-R-S6-V
                               Milwaukee                    BA350
                               NIBCO                        S-595Y
                               Watts                        B-6801
                               Worcester                    5911T
PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 VALVE EXAMINATION
           A.   Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
                special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping
                and handling.

           B.   Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed and examine guides and seats
                made accessible.

           C.   Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

           D.   Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for
                proper size, length and material. Verify that gasket is of the proper size, that its material
                composition is suitable for the service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

           E.   Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

     3.2 ADJUSTING
           A.   Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service
                but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

     3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION
           A.   General
                1.    Provide isolation valves in piping services where branch lines connect to mains and
                      risers.
                2.    Provide isolation valves where service is fully open or closed.
                3.    Provide throttling valves where pressure regulation or modulating flow are required.
                4.    Provide throttling valves to serve as drain valves at low points and at piping dead ends.

VALVES                                                                                                15110 - 5
15110.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:49 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


                5.    Provide ball valves on strainer blow down service.
                6.    Provide plugs or caps on all drain, vent or other open ended lines and valves.
                7.    Provide NPS ¾ (DN 20) drain valves on piping up through NPS 4 (DN 100)
           B.   Isolation Valves and Unions at Equipment
                1.    Provide isolation valves and unions at the individual connections to equipment, PRV
                      stations and piping elements to permit complete servicing or removal of piping elements
                      and items of equipment.
           C.   Automatic Valves
                1.    Install automatic valves furnished as specified in Section 15900.
           D.   Copper Tubing Adapters
                1.    When connecting copper tubing to valves, install adapters as follows:
                      a.     Cast copper solder male adapter or union to screwed valves.
                      b.     Copper solder joint companion flange unit.
                2.    Solder joint valve substitutions for valves specified are not permitted.

                                                END OF SECTION




VALVES                                                                                                 15110 - 6
15110.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:49 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                        SECTION 15840
                                                                       AIR TERMINAL UNITS

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.3           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.4           WARRANTY................................................................................................................................................................. 2

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 2
  2.1           SINGLE DUCT VOLUME CONTROL BOXES.................................................................................................................. 2
  2.2           SINGLE DUCT VOLUME CONTROL BOXES - PNEUMATIC CONTROL.......................................................................... 3
  2.3           AIR TERMINAL UNIT HEATING COIL ............................................................................................................................. 4
  2.4           VOLUME CONTROL BOX CONTROL............................................................................................................................ 4

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 5
  3.1           AIR TERMINAL UNIT INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................ 5
  3.2           CONNECTIONS............................................................................................................................................................. 5
  3.3           FIELD QUALITY CONTROL........................................................................................................................................... 5
  3.4           CLEANING.................................................................................................................................................................... 5
  3.5           COMMISSIONING.......................................................................................................................................................... 5


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 SUMMARY
           A.       Work Includes
                    1.       The     Work provided under this Section shall include:
                             a.      Single Duct Volume Control Boxes
                             b.      Re-Heat Volume Control Boxes
                             c.      Tracking Volume Control Boxes
     1.2 REFERENCES
           A.       Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI)
                    1.       880 - Industry Standard for Air Terminals.
                    2.       885-98 (With 2002 Addendum) – Procedure for Estimating Occupied Space Sound
                             Levels in the Application of Air Terminals and Air Outlets.
           B.       American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
                    1.       C665 - Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
                             Construction and Manufactured Housing.
           C.       National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
                    1.       70 - National Electrical Code
                    2.       90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
           D.       Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
                    1.       181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.

AIR TERMINAL UNITS                                                                                                                                                          15840 - 1
15840.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:50 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


                2.    486A - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper Conductors.
     1.3 SUBMITTALS
           A.   Refer to Section 15010.

           B.   Submit Product Data on the following:
                1.    Single duct volume control boxes.
                2.    Single duct volume control boxes - pneumatic control.
                3.    Air terminal unit re-heat.
                4.    Volume control box control.
                5.    Static pressure control stations.
           C.   Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:
                1.    Data Sheet: For each type of air terminal, and accessory furnished; indicate
                      construction, finish, and mounting details.
                2.    Performance Data: Include static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for each type of air
                      terminal.
                3.    Schedule of air terminals indicating drawing designation, room location, quantity, model
                      number, size, and accessories furnished.
                4.    Assembly Drawing: For each type of air terminal, indicate materials and methods of
                      assembly of components.
     1.4 WARRANTY
           A.   Refer to Section 15010.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 SINGLE DUCT VOLUME CONTROL BOXES
           A.   Provide boxes in accordance with the equipment schedule as indicated. Provide boxes that
                meet the size, rate of flow, sound power levels and air pressure drop criteria. Provide variable
                volume type boxes unless otherwise scheduled or noted.

           B.   Manufacturers
                1.    Manufacturer to match the existing units in the facility.
           C.   Provide boxes that are certified under the ARI Standard 880 Certification program and carry
                the ARI Seal.

           D.   Fabricate the casing of minimum 22 gauge galvanized steel, internally lined with dual density
                glass fiber insulation which complies with UL 181 and NFPA 90A. Provide units with a
                separate discharge sound attenuator lined with not less than 50-mm-thick (2-inch-thick)
                insulation in compliance with the above standards. Line the insulation on both the box and
                sound attenuator with a non-porous skin liner meeting the requirements of UL 181, NFPA
                90A, and ASTM C665.

           E.   Provide the discharge connection of slip-and-drive construction for attachment to metal
                ductwork. Maximum casing leakage: 1 percent of the design volume.


AIR TERMINAL UNITS                                                                                    15840 - 2
15840.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:50 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


           F.   Fabricate the damper of heavy gauge steel with a solid steel shaft rotating in Delrin or bronze
                oilite self-lubricating bearings. Clearly mark the shaft on the end to indicate damper position.
                Incorporate a mechanical stop on the damper to prevent overstroking, and a synthetic seal to
                limit close-off leakage.

           G.   Provide actuators that are capable of supplying at least 4 Nm (35 in. lbf) of torque to the
                damper shaft, and mount externally for service access. Provide units with internal actuator
                mounting or linkage connection with gasketed a  ccess panel, removable without disturbing
                ductwork.

           H.   At an inlet velocity of 10 m/s (2000 fpm), the differential static pressure required to operate
                any box size is not to exceed 37.3 Pa (0.15 inch wg) for the terminal with attached
                attenuator.

           I.   Provide inlet collars with a velocity profile diverter consisting of a pivoted diverter ring, or
                similar device, which automatically compensates for distorted air flow conditions entering the
                terminal unit. The diverter is to ensure accurate air delivery within 5 percent of the maximum
                and minimum set air volumes as shown on the drawings, under all conditions.

           J.   Provide units which are pressure independent.

           K.   Require the unit manufacturer to furnish certified sound data for both casing discharge and
                radiated sound levels as tested in an ADC certified laboratory in strict accordance with ARI-
                885-98 and ADC test standard 1062 R4, including 2nd through 7th octave band data for all
                unit sizes basing both discharge and radiated NC levels on a 10 dB sound absorption as
                determined by subtraction from the highest point on the power level curve. Maximum sound
                levels: the NC scheduled on the Drawings.

           L.   Tracking
                1.    Where supply and exhaust tracking is indicated, provide boxes in both supply and
                      exhaust ducts with a control interconnection between them to maintain a fixed
                      relationship between supply and exhaust air quantities. Provide tracking boxes with the
                      required velocity sensitive control devices and connection ports to achieve this
                      performance. Differential to be adjustable b oth in amount and in sense, positive or
                      negative. Maintain normal temperature control along with tracking action.
     2.2 SINGLE DUCT VOLUME CONTROL BOXES - PNEUMATIC CONTROL
           A.   Equip the boxes with pressure independent pneumatic controls which can be reset to
                modulate airflow between zero and the maximum cataloged rate of flow.

           B.   Incorporate into the boxes multi-point, center-averaging velocity sensors. Provide a minimum
                of four measuring ports parallel to the take-off point from the sensor. The sensor is to provide
                a minimum differential pressure signal of 7.5 Pa (0.03 inch) wg. at inlet velocities of 2.54 m/s
                (500 fpm), and provide control signal accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent, with the same size
                inlet duct at any inlet condition.




AIR TERMINAL UNITS                                                                                    15840 - 3
15840.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:50 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


           C.   Provide velocity controllers with a constant reset span regardless of minimum and maximum
                rate of flow setpoints that is adjustable from 21 to 69 kPa (3 to 10 psi). Provide reset start
                point adjustable from 21 to 103 kPa (3 to 15 psi). Provide each controller capable of being
                field convertible for direct or reverse acting without recalibration. Acceptable controllers are
                Kreuter CSC 3004, or Kreuter, CSC 3011 with reversing relay and selector switch. Total air
                consumption for controls is not to exceed 9.44 mL/s (1.2 scfh) at 138 kPa (20 psig).

           D.   Factory set control devices for the scheduled minimum and maximum flow rates. Provide flow
                measuring taps and flow curves with each box for field balancing air flow. Provide all
                pneumatic tubing UL listed fire retardant (FR) type. Equip each box with labeling showing unit
                location, size, minimum and maximum rate of flow setpoints, damper fail position, and
                thermostat action.

     2.3 AIR TERMINAL UNIT HEATING COIL
           A.   Hot Water Heating Coil
                1.    On boxes requiring hot water heating coils, factory mount the coils to the unit casing
                      with performance as shown in the schedule. Construct coils of aluminum plate fin,
                      copper tube serpentine type with sweat connections, tested at 1720 kPa (250 psi) under
                      water.
     2.4 VOLUME CONTROL BOX CONTROL
           A.   Provide Volume Control box control modules with micro-processor based direct digital control
                (DDC) for each terminal unit. Provide the DDC temperature control to control air flow to meet
                zone thermostat setpoint by controlling the air valve or damper motor, and be pressure
                independent.

           B.   Provide the unit control modules to be capable of communication with a VAV control module
                via a twisted wire pair communications link. Provide each control module capable of
                communicating with groups of terminal units (63 max.) and interface via a twisted pair with
                the building management system.

           C.   Provide the Volume Control box DDC system capable of remotely monitoring, executing set
                points or changing operation of each terminal unit or groups thereof. Unit information shall
                include:
                1.    Cooling and heating temperature setpoints.
                2.    Current zone temperature.
                3.    Current primary air flow.
                4.    Diagnostics.
           D.   To provide various building management functions, execute the following commands, where
                applicable, at each unit:
                1.    Unoccupied mode.
                2.    Cooling/Heating changeover.
                3.    Flow control.
                4.    Heat enable or disable.
                5.    Control offset for demand limiting.


AIR TERMINAL UNITS                                                                                    15840 - 4
15840.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:50 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


           E.   Provide zone temperature sensors compatible with the unit controller and shall have setpoint
                adjustment and an "occupied" mode override button mounted on the sensor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 AIR TERMINAL UNIT INSTALLATION
           A.   Install air terminals level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, rough-in
                drawings, original design, and referenced standards; and maintain sufficient clearance for
                normal service and maintenance.

           B.   Connect ductwork to air terminals according to Division 15 ductwork Sections.

     3.2 CONNECTIONS
           A.   Install piping adjacent to air terminals to allow service and maintenance.

           B.   Hot-Water Piping: Connect heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer, control valve,
                and union or flange; and to return with balancing valve and union or flange.

           C.   Ground equipment.
                1.    Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
                      torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
                      those specified in UL 486A.
     3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
           A.   Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
                equipment.

     3.4 CLEANING
           A.   After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed
                finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes.

     3.5 COMMISSIONING
           A.   Verify that installation of each air terminal is according to the Contract Documents.

           B.   Check that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal manufacturer to
                achieve proper performance.

           C.   Check that controls and control enclosure are accessible.

           D.   Verify that control connections are complete.

           E.   Check that nameplate and identification tag are visible.

           F.   Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.




AIR TERMINAL UNITS                                                                                      15840 - 5
15840.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:50 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                        REV 0
-


                                 END OF SECTION




AIR TERMINAL UNITS                                    15840 - 6
15840.doc
saved 12.16.2009 2:50 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:41 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                      SECTION 15850
                                                                  AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.3           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 1
  1.4           QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.5           WARRANTY................................................................................................................................................................. 2

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 2
  2.1           GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS - GENERAL................................................................................................... 2
  2.2           SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSERS.............................................................................................................................................. 2
  2.3           EXHAUST AIR GRILLES AND REGISTERS ................................................................................................................... 3
  2.4           SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL...................................................................................................................................... 3

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 3
  3.1           EXAMINATION.............................................................................................................................................................. 3
  3.2           INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................................................. 3
  3.3           ADJUSTING.................................................................................................................................................................. 4
  3.4           CLEANING.................................................................................................................................................................... 4


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 SUMMARY
           A.       Section Includes
                    1.       All the interior and exterior air outlets and inlets for the Project.
     1.2 REFERENCES
           A.       American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE)
                    1.       70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets.
           B.       American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
                    1.       D737 – Test Method for Air Permeability of Textile Fabrics
                    2.       D751 – Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics
                    3.       D3776 – Standard Test Methods for Mass Per Unit Area (Weight) of Fabric
           C.       National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
                    1.       90A - Standard for Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
     1.3 SUBMITTALS
           A.       Refer to Section 15010.

           B.       Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:
                    1.       Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate
                             construction, finish, and mounting details.


AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS                                                                                                                                                      15850 - 1
15850.doc
saved 11.19.2009 4:47 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:42 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                        REV 0
-


                2.    Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for
                      each type of air outlet and inlet.
                3.    Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room
                      location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
                4.    Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and
                      methods of assembly of components.
     1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
           A.   Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers,
                registers, and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated.
                Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered.
                Refer to Section 01630.

           B.   NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A.

     1.5 WARRANTY
           A.   Refer to section 15010.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS - GENERAL
           A.   Provide grilles, registers and diffusers of sizes, types and capacities noise criteria (NC
                ratings), pressure drops, neck sizes, etc., as shown and specified.

           B.   Grilles, registers and diffusers are to be selected for the NC ratings shown on the Drawings
                with a maximum built-in room effect of 8 to 10 dB.

           C.   Construction: aluminum, as specified, as manufactured by Anemostat, Carnes, Krueger,
                Metalaire, Nailor, Price, Titus or Tuttle & Bailey (Hart & Cooley), equal to the Titus models
                listed.

           D.   Coordinate grilles, registers and diffusers with architectural ceiling plans and border style with
                type of ceiling in which installed.

           E.   Do not use ceiling panels to support air outlets. Be responsible for properly supporting grilles,
                registers and diffusers.

     2.2 SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSERS
           A.   Perforated Ceiling Diffusers (S-3, S-4, S-5)
                1.    Equal to Titus “PAS-AA” flush face, aluminum perforated air diffusers.
                2.    Provide the diffusers with vertical pattern adjustment and curved pattern adjusting
                      deflector blades mounted directly under the neck of the diffuser.
                3.    Provide the diffusers with an opposed blade volume control and round neck duct
                      connection.
                4.    Construct diffusers of aluminum back pan, painted black and perforated face, finished in
                      an off-white enamel.


AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS                                                                                  15850 - 2
15850.doc
saved 11.19.2009 4:47 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:42 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


           B.   Critical Environment Diffusers

                1.    High volume, low velocity, radial air diffusion diffusers (S-2).
                      a.     Equal to Titus "TriTec" all aluminum construction, upper presure induction
                             chamber, lower air dampening chamber, fixed directional blades and a perforated
                             face plate, to create a hemispherical air pattern. Finish: standard white.
           C.   Plenum Slot Supply Diffusers (S-1)
                1.    Existing (six ) slot diffusers as scheduled on the Drawings.
                2.    Design diffuser to fit into standard T-bar ceiling systems.
     2.3 EXHAUST AIR GRILLES AND REGISTERS
           A.   Return/Exhaust Air Grilles and Registers (E-1, E-2, E-3, E-4).
                1.    Equal to Titus “PAR” flush face steel, perforated faceplate returns to match the
                      perforated face plate supply air diffuser.
                2.    Provide registers with opposed blade volume control dampers.
                3.    Construct grilles/registers with a heavy gage back pan painted black and perforated face
                      plate finished in an off-white enamel.
     2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
           A.   Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 EXAMINATION
           A.   Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with
                requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
                equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
                corrected.

     3.2 INSTALLATION
           A.   Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written
                instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.

           B.   Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,
                and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
                requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make
                final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling
                panels, locate units in the center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items
                conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

           C.   Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service
                and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.




AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS                                                                                15850 - 3
15850.doc
saved 11.19.2009 4:47 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:42 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


     3.3 ADJUSTING
           A.   After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as
                directed, before starting air balancing.

     3.4 CLEANING
           A.   After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed
                surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that
                have damaged finishes.


                                             END OF SECTION




AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS                                                                              15850 - 4
15850.doc
saved 11.19.2009 4:47 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:42 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                    SECTION 15855
                                                                 LAMINAR FLOW SYSTEMS

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................................................................. 1
  1.3           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 1
  1.4           WARRANTY................................................................................................................................................................. 1

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 1
  2.1           VERTICAL LAMINAR FLOW......................................................................................................................................... 1

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 2
  3.1           INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................................................. 2


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 SUMMARY
           A.       This Section provides for the furnishing and installing of the laminar flow systems for the
                    Project.

     1.2 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
           A.       Provide a laminar flow unit in the ceilings of the treated area. Provide for the system to
                    discharge air vertically through the treated area in a true constant pressure/constant velocity
                    laminar air flow pattern.

     1.3 SUBMITTALS
           A.       Refer to Section 15010.

           B.       Submit Product Data on the following:
                    1.       Diffusers.
     1.4 WARRANTY
           A.       Refer to Section 15010.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 VERTICAL LAMINAR FLOW
           A.       Special Perforated Rectangular Diffusers
                    1.       Provide special perforated rectangular diffusers of the laminar flow type designed to
                             utilize two separate plenums to deliver air to the treated area with zero aspiration at the
                             face of the perforated plate with velocities in the plane of the perforated plate to vary no
                             more than ten percent.
                    2.       Fabricate diffusers of aluminum with a factory white baked epoxy including border trim to
                             have the same finish.

LAMINAR FLOW SYSTEMS                                                                                                                                                        15855 - 1
15855.doc
saved 11.19.2009 4:47 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:42 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


                3.    Provide diffusers complete with equalizing grids and with plaster frames where required.
                      Minimum neck lengths as recommended by the manufacturer.
                4.    Provide an adjustable balancing mechanism in the inlet collar to the initial plenum.
                      Provide for the balancing mechanism to be operated by means of a screw from the room
                      side of the diffuser. Provide the final plenum with a V-shaped, perforated diffusion basket
                      mounted within a rectangular perforated diffusion basket with both baskets fabricated
                      from 0.8mm (0.032 inch) aluminum. Fabricate the frame assembly of 1.6mm (0.063
                      inch) extruded aluminum with mitered, back welded corners and a 1mm (0.040 inch).
           B.   Wrap-Around Style Face Plate
                1.    Design perforated distribution plate to extend over and wrap around plate frame on all
                      four sides to provide for a continuous perforated surface appearance between ceiling tee
                      frames. Fabricate diffuser of 1.25mm (0.050 inch) aluminum with perforations 16 percent
                      open area for 203 or less l/s per square meter [40 or less cfm per square foot] of
                      module; 23 percent open area for 229-330 L/s per square meter [45-65 cfm per square
                      foot] of module; or 33 percent open area for higher velocities.
                2.    Retain the plate to the module frame by means of quarter-turn fasteners in addition to
                      safety retainers of vinyl-coated stainless steel cable or chain to prevent accidental
                      dropping of the plate.
           C.   Manufacturers: Titus “Tritec” model Tritec-AL.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 INSTALLATION
           A.   For vertical systems, verify exact locations of diffusers, registers and grilles with the
                architectural reflected ceiling plans and coordinate frame types with room finish schedule.


                                               END OF SECTION




LAMINAR FLOW SYSTEMS                                                                                   15855 - 2
15855.doc
saved 11.19.2009 4:47 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:42 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                                 SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                             22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                             REV 0
-


                                                                SECTION 15900
                                                         INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

                                                                             SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 2
  1.3           SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................................................................. 2
  1.4           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 3
  1.5           QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................................................ 4

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 4
  2.1           MANUFACTURERS....................................................................................................................................................... 4
  2.2           PIPING........................................................................................................................................................................... 4
  2.3           ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ........................................................................................................................................ 5
  2.4           CONTROL AIR.............................................................................................................................................................. 5
  2.5           DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) ............................................................................................................................... 5
  2.6           SENSOR-TRANSMITTERS FOR DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) ............................................................................. 5
  2.7           DDC-VAV BOX CONTROL........................................................................................................................................... 5
  2.8           THERMOSTATS............................................................................................................................................................ 6
  2.9           ROOM DIFFERENTIAL STATIC PRESSURE TRANSMITTER........................................................................................... 7
  2.10          PNEUMATIC-ELECTRIC SWITCHES............................................................................................................................... 7
  2.11          ELECTRIC-PNEUMATIC VALVES.................................................................................................................................. 7
  2.12          PNEUMATIC RELAYS AND SWITCHES ........................................................................................................................ 7
  2.13          COMBINATION FIRE SMOKE DAMPERS ....................................................................................................................... 7
  2.14          AUTOMATIC VALVES AND OPERATORS ................................................................................................................... 8
  2.15          PRESSURE GAGES ...................................................................................................................................................... 9

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 9
  3.1           INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................................................. 9
  3.2           FIELD QUALITY CONTROL......................................................................................................................................... 11


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 SUMMARY
           A.       Section Includes
                    1.       This Section provides for the instrumentation controls systems, complete with
                             components and accessories necessary for completely automatic operation, completely
                             installed, adjusted, fully tested and ready for full normal operation.
                    2.       It is not the purpose of this Specification to include the details of construction methods,
                             or a complete listing of the materials and equipment which will be required in the Work.
                    3.       Provide controllers, sensors, automatic control valves, automatic dampers and damper
                             motors, pressure gages, thermometers, piping, EP and PE switches, control wiring
                             panels, and other auxiliaries and appurtenances hereinafter specified or necessary to
                             obtain satisfactory control of mechanical systems.
                    4.       Provide for the entire control system to be installed, supervised and tested by personnel
                             regularly employed by the automatic control systems manufacturer.




INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                                                                                                                     15900 - 1
15900.doc
saved 12.17.2009 8:22 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:42 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


                5.    Provide controls that are electric, pneumatic, DDC electronic, or a combination system
                      of components necessary to accomplish the automatic control requirements of the
                      mechanical work to match the existing system.
                6.    Assume full responsibility for the integration of work required to achieve the specified
                      system performance as indicated in the specifications and on the Drawings.
                7.    Assume full responsibility for the integration and execution of the Work required in
                      Section 15910 to achieve the specified system performance.
           B.   Products furnished but not installed under this Section
                1.    Automatic control dampers.
                2.    Combination fire smoke dampers.
                3.    Automatic valves.
     1.2 REFERENCES
           A.   Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA)
                1.    Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
           B.   American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
                1.    B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings.
           C.   American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
                1.    B32 - Specification for Solder Metal.
                2.    B88 - Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
                3.    B88M - Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube [Metric].
                4.    D1693 - Test Method for Environmental Stress-Cracking of Ethylene Plastics.
                5.    E548 - Guide for General Criteria Used for Evaluating Laboratory Competence.
           D.   Fluid Control Institute (FCI)
                1.    70-2 - Quality Control Standard for Control Valve Seat Leakage.
           E.   InterNational Electrical Testing Association Inc. (NETA)
                1.    ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications

           F.   National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
                1.    70 - National Electrical Code.
                2.    90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
           G.   Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
                1.    555 (Sixth Edition) - Fire Dampers.
                2.    555S (Fourth Edition) - Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems.
                3.    864 - Control Units for Fire-Protective Signaling Systems.
     1.3 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
           A.   The mechanical systems controlled include:
                1.    Air terminal unit control.



INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                                         15900 - 2
15900.doc
saved 12.17.2009 8:22 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:42 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


           B.   Typical diagrams of automatic control systems and description of sequence of operation of
                systems are shown on the Drawings.

     1.4 SUBMITTALS
           A.   Refer to Section 15010.

           B.   General
                1.    Include with submittals, system piping and electrical connections (including wire
                      numbers and terminal numbers for connection to devices) and a written description of
                      operation. Include with equipment submittals, equipment used including flow measuring
                      devices, valves, and dampers.
                2.    Submit engineering data for automatic control dampers that states the amount of
                      leakage, flow characteristics and construction of dampers. Parallel dampers: linear flow
                      characteristics. Opposed blade dampers: equal percentage flow characteristics.
                3.    Furnish graphic flow diagram drawings for each system.
                4.    Label items and devices shown and indicate the following information:
                      a. Coordination with submitted catalog information.
                      b. Proper settings and adjustments of instruments.
                      c. Normal condition of devices, such as normally closed dampers, normally open
                           valves and contacts.
                      d. Sizes of devices and accessories included with devices.
           C.   System sequences
                1.    Provide the control diagram for each system with a complete written sequence of
                      operation pertaining to the diagram and shown on the same Drawing.
                2.    Write sequence in similar steps to the Specifications and as shown on the temperature
                      control sheets.
                3.    Incorporate symbol elements from diagrams into the sequence, such as T space -1
                      thermostat.
           D.   Catalog information
                1.    Provide control diagram submittals with catalog sheets for every item used in the
                      system.
                2.    Mark catalog sheets showing two or more devices or models of a device to show the
                      specific model and/or accessories being used in the control diagram.
                3.    Refer to Section 15010.
           E.   Certifications
                1.    Include in certification listings of personnel, dates, and times of supervision, and attest
                      that the level of supervision provided is sufficient to accomplish a quality and well
                      integrated installation.
                2.    Submit certification that the automatic control system provider has supervised the re-
                      installation of the control systems in the fume hoods.
                3.    Submit certification that the automatic control system provider has supervised the
                      installation of the interconnection of the laboratory hood control system with all other
                      building and system controls or construction, and attests that such construction is in



INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                                           15900 - 3
15900.doc
saved 12.17.2009 8:22 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:42 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


                      full compliance with the laboratory hood control system performance requirements as
                      specified in Section 15910.
     1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
           A.   Safety Devices
                1.    Ensure that all safety devices and limit controls, such as: freeze protection thermostats,
                      smoke detectors, limit switches, and shut-off dampers remain active under all operating
                      conditions.
           B.   Hazardous Areas
                1.    Ensure that all wiring, conduit, starters, push buttons, control devices and other
                      electrical devices provided for any areas which are indicated as hazardous or in areas
                      classified as hazardous by the National Electrical Code, the American Insurance
                      Association, or the National Fire Protection Association meet all requirements for these
                      classifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 MANUFACTURERS
           A.   Provide Siemens system that matches the existing facility. All other manufacturers are not
                acceptable.

           B.   All control devices are to be mercury free.

     2.2 PIPING
           A.   Copper
                1.    Air piping: hard drawn Type M seamless copper tubing, ASTM B88, with wrought copper
                      solder fittings, ASME B16.22, joined with lead free solder composed of 95.5 percent tin,
                      4 percent copper and 0.5 percent silver of the wire type, per ASTM B32. Provide flux
                      used with lead free solder as recommended by the manufacturer.
                2.    Use compression type fittings only for connections to control devices.
                3.    Soft copper tubing may be used in maximum 600-mm (2-foot) lengths for connections to
                      control devices only.
           B.   Plastic
                1.    Plastic tubing will be permitted only where specifically described as acceptable; refer to
                      Article "INSTALLATION".
                2.    Where permitted, provide plastic tubing that is rodent proof with a smoke and flame
                      resistant rating in accordance with NFPA 90A. Plastic tubing: black virgin polyethylene
                      tubing conforming to modified ASTM D1693 test with a burst pressure of 4140 kPa (600
                      psi) at 22 degrees C (72 degrees F), tensile strength 12070 kPa (1750 psi) and water
                      absorption of 0.8 percent.
                3.    Plastic tubing: Dekoron Type 1219 FR 94V-2, for single lines and Polycor Type 1224 FR
                      bundles for multiple lines.
                4.    Fittings for plastic tubing: UL-approved (to MIL-F-18280) rod or forged brass rated to
                      1380 kPa (200 psi) at 38 degrees C (100 degrees F).



INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                                          15900 - 4
15900.doc
saved 12.17.2009 8:22 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:42 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                        REV 0
-


     2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
           A.   For material specifications of electrical components such as conduit, wire, relays etc., refer
                to Division 16 Specifications.

     2.4 CONTROL AIR
           A.   General
                1.    Provide control air as indicated on the control drawings. Tap into the existing building
                      control air supply. Provide all filters, pressure regulators, relief valves, gauges shut-off
                      valves and air dryers required for a complete installation.
     2.5 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC)
           A.   Connect to the existing system in the facility.

     2.6 SENSOR-TRANSMITTERS FOR DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC)
           A.   General
                1.    Provide the analog and digital sensor-transmitters required to meet the DDC system
                      function requirements as shown on the control diagrams and input/output summary.
           B.   Sensor-Transmitters
                1.    Temperature sensor-transmitters: platinum RTD sensors. Provide a 4 to 20 mA
                      transmitter if required by the DDC.
                2.    Provide pressure sensor-transmitters to produce a 4 to 20 mA output signal.
           C.   Instrumentation Ranges and Accuracy.
                1.    Provide the sensor-transmitters for the DDC system to produce an end to end accuracy,
                      consistently throughout the warranty period for sensor to operator's terminal display for
                      the application specified:

                      a.     Space temperatures: 10 to 29 degrees C (50 to 85 degrees F) range within plus or
                             minus 0.42 Degree C (0.75 degree F) for conditioned spaces and 1 to 54 degrees C
                             (30 to 130 degrees F) range within plus or minus 0.56 degree C (1.0 degree F) for
                             unconditioned spaces.
                      b.     Pressure: plus or minus 2.0 percent of range.
     2.7 DDC-VAV BOX CONTROL
           A.   Provide DDC-VAV box control modules with micro-processor based direct digital control
                (DDC) for the terminal units so indicated on the drawings. Provide for the DDC temperature
                control to control air flow to meet zone thermostat setpoint by controlling the air valve or
                damper motor, and be pressure independent.

           B.   Design the unit control modules capable of communication with a VAV control module via a
                twisted wire pair communications link. Design each control module capable of
                communicating with groups of terminal units (63 max.) and be interfaced via a twisted pair
                with the building management system.



INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                                            15900 - 5
15900.doc
saved 12.17.2009 8:22 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:42 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                      SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                  22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                  REV 0
-


           C.   Provide the VAV DDC system capable of remotely monitoring, executing set points or
                changing operation of each terminal unit or groups thereof. Unit information to include:
                1.    Cooling and heating temperature setpoints.
                2.    Current zone temperature.
                3.    Current primary air flow.
                4.    Diagnostics.
                5.    Supply air discharge temperature.
           D.   To provide various building management functions, the following commands, where
                applicable, are to be executed at each unit.
                1.    Unoccupied mode.
                2.    Cooling/Heating changeover.
                3.    Flow control.
                4.    Heat enable or disable.
                5.    VAV box offset tracking.
           E.   Provide zone temperature sensors compatible with the unit controller including setpoint
                adjustment, and an "occupied" mode override button mounted on the sensor. Provide
                communication port to allow access to box DDC Controller and DDC System Global Access.

           F.   Provide actuators to activate the box air valve or damper.

           G.   Ship the DDC box control modules, actuators and any other box mounted control devices to
                the VAV box manufacturer for factory mounting on the unit. The control system supplier or
                appointed representative is to supervise the DDC control mounting and assembly at the VAV
                box manufacturers site.

           H.   Boxes used in laboratory control systems as indicated on the Drawings require a 5-second
                response time from full open to full close and vice-versa. Provide capacity relays for
                pneumatic actuators as necessary to accomplish this performance requirement.

     2.8 THERMOSTATS
           A.   Space Thermostats
                1.    Space thermostats: proportional acting through an approximate range of 16 to 27
                      degrees C (60 degrees to 80 degrees F) and internal stops for minimum and maximum
                      settings. Adjustable throttling range from 1.1 to 5.6 degrees C (2 to 10 degrees F).
                      Mount room thermostats 1200 mm (48 inches) above the floor as required by the
                      Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA).
                2.    In general, provide thermostats with scale opening and thermometer.
                3.    Provide guards for thermostats located in equipment rooms, storage rooms and
                      maintenance rooms.
                4.    Provide thermostats in public areas with blank covers.
                5.    Provide one thermostat (sensor) for each piece of terminal equipment unless indicated
                      otherwise. When thermostat locations are not indicated, allow 10.7 meters (35 feet)
                      average horizontal distance for the location and submit the proposed location on
                      mechanical plans for approval before construction commences.



INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                                     15900 - 6
15900.doc
saved 12.17.2009 8:22 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:42 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


                6.    Mount thermostats on insulated backs when mounted on exterior walls and seal
                      conduit/wire/tubing penetrations of the thermostat housing.
           B.   Line-Voltage Thermostats
                1.    Line-voltage thermostats: minimum rating of 6 amperes at 120 volts, with concealed or
                      key adjustment, and thermometer.
     2.9 ROOM DIFFERENTIAL STATIC PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
           A.   Provide an ultra sensitive electronic differential pressure transmitter which is capable of
                receiving signals of space and reference static pressure, amplifying and scaling the sensed
                differential pressure into a 4-20 mA dc output signal linear to the differential static pressure.

           B.   Minimum factory calibrated span of the differential pressure transmitter: 0 to 12.45 Pa (0.05
                inch water column). The referenced accuracy of the instrument: plus or minus 25 percent of
                the span. Hysterisis: 0.2 percent of span. Repeatability: 0.15 percent of span.

           C.   Transmitter overpressurization: at least 7 kPa (1 psig) without damage to the instrument.

           D.   The operating temperature range: 4 -49 degrees C (40 - 120 degrees F). Power supply: 24
                Vdc unregulated with 0.5 watt power consumption.

           E.   House the transmitter assembly in a molded plastic or steel enclosure with NPS 1/8 (DN 4)
                or NPS ¼ (DN 8) sensor fittings suitable to accept barbed or compression signal fittings.

           F.   Veltron series 5000AZ with automatic zeroing circuit as manufactured by Air Monitor
                Corporation, or equal product of Ashcroft, Modus or Setra.

     2.10 PNEUMATIC-ELECTRIC SWITCHES
           A.   Pneumatic electric (PE) switches: low pressure bellows type with suitable current rating.
                Locate switches adjacent to interconnecting electrical devices. Mercury type switches are
                not acceptable.

     2.11 ELECTRIC-PNEUMATIC VALVES
           A.   Electric pneumatic (EP) valves: of suitable ratings, located adjacent to interconnecting
                electrical devices.

     2.12 PNEUMATIC RELAYS AND SWITCHES
           A.   Pneumatic relays and switches: positive or proportional acting type as required by the control
                sequence.

     2.13 COMBINATION FIRE SMOKE DAMPERS
           A.   Dampers
                1.    Furnish and wire/pipe the fire smoke dampers as shown on the Drawings.
                2.    Furnish dampers that have a dynamic rating and that are 1-1/2-hour UL fire rated under
                      UL Standard 555, and are further classified by Underwriters Laboratories as a Leakage


INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                                           15900 - 7
15900.doc
saved 12.17.2009 8:22 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:42 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                        REV 0
-


                      Rated Damper for Use in Smoke Control Systems under UL 555S. Provide each damper
                      with a UL label attesting to said qualifications, in accordance with established UL
                      labeling procedures.
                3.    Test and UL qualify a complete range of damper sizes covering all combination fire
                      smoke dampers required on this project.
                4.    Provide operators and furnish dampers qualified under UL 555S to a minimum elevated
                      temperature of 121 degrees C (250 degrees F).
                5.    Install UL qualified pneumatic/electric operators at the time of damper fabrication so that
                      the damper-operator assembly meets all applicable UL 555S qualifications for both
                      dampers and operators.
                6.    Equip the dampers with a classified fire stat to allow appropriate authority to override the
                      damper's emergency position and operate as may be required for smoke control
                      functions after fire closure.
                7.    Ruskin FSD60; National Controlled Air Model FSD-AF-F/L-58; Potthorff FSD-151 or O/R-
                      58; Siemens FSD-60; qualified to Class I leakage.
     2.14 AUTOMATIC VALVES AND OPERATORS
           A.   General
                1.    Furnish all automatic valves shown on the Drawings.
                2.    Furnish automatic valves that are normally open or closed as required. Utilize positive
                      positioning relays for sequence operation. Unless otherwise noted, furnish valves single
                      seated with replaceable composition disc and seat ring, equal percentage high lift plug,
                      stainless steel stem and spring loaded, self-adjusting teflon cone packing. Use
                      combination equal percentage and linear plugs on steam service. Replaceable seat
                      rings are not required for water service.
           B.   Water Valves
                1.    Select water valves such that the head loss at maximum flow will not exceed 30 kPa (10
                      feet water gage) or the loss through the heat exchanger served, which ever is greater.
                2.    Furnish water valves that are capable of closing off against the maximum shutoff
                      differential head between the pumps and the return line.
           C.   Pneumatic Valve Operators
                1.    Pneumatic valve operators: rolling, neoprene or silicone diaphragm operated valve
                      actuators. Incorporate positive positioning relays for sequencing. Size operators to
                      operate smoothly through the control pressure range and to move the respective valve
                      without hunting or sticking. Flat diaphragm operators may be used in lieu of rolling type
                      if they are provided with positive positioning devices. Provide valve operators with
                      diaphragms that are temperature rated for their intended service.
           D.   Electric Valve Operators
                1.    Provide electric valve operators with an oil immersed gear train. Provide an integral
                      spring so that the operator will return to a positive position on power failure. Provide an
                      integral 120V to 24V transformer provided. Provide the control circuit to function on 24-
                      volt 60 hertz electrical power and have a 60-second stroke. Include a linkage for
                      operating the valve with the operator and valve body.



INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                                            15900 - 8
15900.doc
saved 12.17.2009 8:22 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:42 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                              SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                          22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                          REV 0
-


     2.15 PRESSURE GAGES
           A.   Mount pressure gages on damper motors and other temperature control equipment. Provide
                gages that are 50 mm (2 inches) in diameter, stem mounted, 0-207 kPa (0-30 psi) range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 INSTALLATION
           A.   Air Piping
                1.    General
                      a.     Install the system free of pockets and pitch to drain at the air tank.
                      b.     Conceal all control piping except in equipment rooms, storage rooms and other
                             areas which will only be accessible to maintenance personnel where piping may be
                             exposed if run in a neat manner, parallel to building structure and supported so as
                             to prevent sagging.
                      c.     Mechanically attach piping to supporting surfaces. Sleeve through concrete
                             surfaces in minimum 25-mm (one-inch) sleeves, extended 150 mm (6 inches)
                             above floors and 25 mm (one inch) below surface of slabs.
                      d.     Adequately strap and support piping every 900 mm (3 feet) except for hard temper
                             copper mains which may be supported every 1500 mm (5 feet).
                      e.     Provide isolation between copper tubing or piping and all ferrous materials.
                      f.     Do not run piping along surfaces which may reach a surface temperature below 13
                             deg. (55 deg. F).
                      g.     Test piping during and after installation as specified. Purge piping with dry, oil free
                             compressed air before connection to control instruments.
                2.    Copper Piping
                      a.     Use copper piping in areas where piping is subject to physical damage (e.g. from
                             moving machinery, sharp edges, maintenance traffic, etc.), is subjected to
                             temperatures in excess of 82 degrees C (180 degrees F) or where control piping is
                             run adjacent to hot (i.e. above 32 degrees C (90 degrees F) pipes passing through
                             a common sleeve or raceway.
                      b.     Where low points in the copper piping system occur, install drip legs with drain
                             cocks.
                      c.     Copper piping may be run exposed in equipment areas but shall be concealed in all
                             other areas.
                3.    Plastic Tubing
                      a.                             i
                             Where control piping s not readily accessible for service and/or replacement -
                             polyethylene tubing may be used providing it is enclosed in a raceway between
                             accessible points.
                      b.     Above accessible ceilings and other accessible areas where piping is not subject
                             to damage or heat as indicated above - polyethylene tubing with flame retardant
                             jacket and suitable junction boxes may be used.
                      c.     In equipment rooms, storerooms and other areas which will only be accessible to
                             maintenance personnel, enclose polyethylene tubing in trays or raceways.



INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                                              15900 - 9
15900.doc
saved 12.17.2009 8:22 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:42 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


                      d.     Use single unsheathed non-rated polyethylene tubing only within control panels,
                             enclosed raceways, or other enclosures.
           B.   Electrical Components
                1.    For installation standards and procedures for electrical components, refer to Division 16
                      Specifications.
           C.   Control Wiring (48 volts or less)
                1.  Provide plenum rated cable in an enclosed raceway where the wiring is not readily
                    accessible.
                2. Provide plenum rated cable in an enclosed raceway or in trays when used in equipment
                    rooms.
                3. Control wiring may be run in cable trays, provided it is clearly identified and rated for use
                    in tray.
                4. Plenum rated cable may be used above accessible ceilings where it is not subject to
                    damage. Install cable in a workmanlike manner parallel to building structure, properly
                    supported to prevent kinks, sagging and damage from other trades.
                5. Provide wiring in raceways inside insulated wall cavities.
                6. Clearly identify all control wiring. Provide “Brady” tagging using the “As-Built” I.D. for
                    each cable. When permitted, label wiring run outside raceways or trays every fifteen
                    feet.
                    a. Identify control system wiring junction boxes with “Medium Blue” color covers.
                    b. Identify control system raceways every fifteen feet with “Medium Blue” color
                          markings six inches long.
                7. Do not run low voltage wiring within raceways or trays containing wiring at 120 volts or
                    above.
                8. Mount thermostats or room temperature sensors on outlet boxes unless shown
                    otherwise.
                9. Provide all wiring related to smoke control functions in conduit.
                10. Splices in data communication wiring are not allowed. Splices in temperature sensing
                    cable are not allowed.
           D.   Control Power Wiring
                1.    Provide 120 VAC control power from circuits indicted on electrical panel schedules or
                      junction boxes located on the Drawings. When control power circuits are not indicated
                      on electrical panel schedules or provided at junction boxes located on the drawings,
                      provide 120 VAC power from a dedicated spare circuit breaker located in the nearest
                      receptacle panel (RP). Do not obtain power from lighting panels (LP). Coordinate all
                      power circuits required with Division 16.
                2.    Whenever control power wiring is taken from a receptacle panel, provide a breaker
                      handle locking device to lock the breaker in the "ON" position. Label circuit as "Control
                      System Power, Do Not De-Activate".
           E.   Automatic Valves
                1.    The installation of automatic valves is specified in Section 15110.
           F.   Laboratory Hood Control Systems
                1.    Refer to Section 15910.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                                         15900 - 10
15900.doc
saved 12.17.2009 8:22 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:42 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


     3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
           A.   Air Pressure Test
                1.    After completion and before acceptance of the work, test the entire control piping
                      system at 207 kPa (30 psi). Pressure drop shall not exceed 34 kPa (5 psi) in twenty-
                      four hours.
           B.   Function test
                1.    Test and adjust control equipment in terms of design, function and performance, ready
                      for the required acceptance tests. Control devices and operators shall operate smoothly
                      and freely without cycling or hunting.
                2.    Two weeks after acceptance and after the systems have operated in normal service,
                      return to the site and check the adjustments on instruments and devices and correct
                      items malfunctioning, at no expense to the Owner.
           C.   Acceptance tests
                1.    Upon completion of the testing of the air and hydronic systems, adjust the various
                      control systems to function satisfactorily in compliance with the requirements of the
                      Specifications and as shown.
                2.    Supply instruments required to conduct the control air testing and balancing operations.
                3.    Remedy any defects or malfunctions that are determined by these tests and repeat
                      tests until defects have been corrected to the complete satisfaction of the Architect.
           D.   Adjusting and balancing
                1.    Cooperate with and assist the adjusting and balancing personnel in their adjusting and
                      balancing of the air and hydronic systems.

                                              END OF SECTION




INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                                       15900 - 11
15900.doc
saved 12.17.2009 8:22 AM
printed 12.17.2009 8:42 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                  SECTION 15910
                                    LABORATORY HOOD INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.3           SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................................................ 1
  1.4           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.5           WARRANTY................................................................................................................................................................. 3
  1.6           SYSTEM START-UP..................................................................................................................................................... 3
  1.7           OWNERS INSTRUCTIONS............................................................................................................................................. 3

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 4
  2.1           MANUFACTURED UNITS .............................................................................................................................................. 4
  2.2           OPERATOR CONTROL PAN             EL..................................................................................................................................... 4

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
  3.1           INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................................................. 4
  3.2           START-UP AND TRAINING SERVICES ......................................................................................................................... 4


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 SUMMARY
           A.       Section Includes:
                    1.       This Section provides for the furnishing of materials and equipment, and the re-
                             installation of existing laboratory hood control systems.
           B.       Products furnished but not installed under this Section.
                    1.       Laboratory hood control systems installed under Section 12310.
                    2.       Air volume control devices and control valves installed under Section 15840 and wired
                             and piped under Section 15900.
     1.2 REFERENCES
           A.       National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
                    1.       70 - National Electrical Code.
                    2.       90A – Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
           B.       Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
                    1.       913 - Intrinsically Safe Apparatus and Associated Apparatus for Use in Class I, II and III,
                             Division 1, Hazardous Locations.
     1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
           A.       Performance Requirements
                    1.       Provide re-installation of the local, stand-alone laboratory hood control system for each
                             hood, or group of hoods in any individual room.
                    2.       Provide a laboratory hood control system that:

LABORATORY HOOD INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL                                                                                                                                 15910 - 1
15910.doc
saved 11.19.2009 3:23 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:43 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                              SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                          22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                          REV 0
-


                      a.     Maintains a constant average face velocity for each individual fume hood regardless
                             of sash position.
                      b.     Maintains face velocity within 5 percent of the hood velocity set point with no
                             greater than a 5 percent divergence from actual measured average face velocity.
                      c.     Provides face velocity control capable of achieving stable operation within 10
                             seconds of sash position change, including full closed to full open position, with no
                             greater than 20 percent of over-shoot or under-shoot of the face velocity set point.
                      d.     Requires no greater than 18.6 Pa (0.6 in. w.g.) of static pressure drop for accurate
                             control, and perform with up to at least 745 Pa (3.0 in. w.g.) of static pressure drop.
                      e.     Maintains a minimum of 25 percent of full exhaust volume regardless of sash
                             position; i.e., minimum turn-down shall be no less than 25 percent.
                      f.     Considers the response times and performance criteria to apply in conjunction with
                             adequate availability of exhaust and make-up air from the building systems.
                3.    Design all electric or electronic devices installed within hoods, exhaust ducts, or
                      exposed to the fume hood environment, to meet UL 913.
     1.4 SUBMITTALS
           A.   General
                1.    Refer to Section 15010.
           B.   Shop Drawings
                1.    Include system piping and electrical connections, a written description of operation, and
                      data on equipment used including flow measuring devices and dampers.
                2.    Submit engineering data for automatic control dampers and volume control devices
                      stating the amount of leakage, flow characteristics and construction of the device.
                3.    Furnish graphic flow diagram drawings for each system.
                4.    Label items and devices shown and indicate the following information:
                      a.     Coordination with submitted catalog information.
                      b.     Proper settings and adjustments of instruments.
                      c.     Normal condition of devices, such as normally closed dampers, normally open
                             valves and contacts.
                      d.     Sizes of devices and accessories included with devices.
                5.    Submit a control diagram for each system with the following:
                      a.     A complete written sequence of operation pertaining to the diagram and shown on
                             the same drawing.
                      b.     Control sequences incorporating symbol elements from diagrams, such as D      -1
                             Exhaust Damper.
                      c.     Catalog sheets for every item used in the system showing two or more devices or
                             models of a device, marked to show the specific model and/or accessories being
                             used in the control diagram.
           C.   Operation and Maintenance Manuals
                1.    Submit complete operation and maintenance manuals as specified in Section 15010.
           D.   Certifications



LABORATORY HOOD INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL                                                               15910 - 2
15910.doc
saved 11.19.2009 3:23 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:43 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                              SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                          22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                          REV 0
-


                1.    Submit certification that the laboratory hood control system manufacturer has
                      supervised the installation of the control systems in the fume hoods, including:
                      a.     Listings of personnel, dates, and times of supervision, and shall attest that the level
                             of supervision provided is sufficient to accomplish a quality and well integrated
                             installation.
                      b.     A statement attesting that the laboratory hood control system manufacturer
                             understands and accepts the responsibility for the integration of these control
                             systems into the fume hood construction, and that the control systems are
                             functioning properly and as designed.
                2.    Submit certification that the laboratory hood control system manufacturer has
                      supervised the installation of the interconnection of the laboratory hood control system
                      with all other building and system controls or construction, and attests that such
                      construction is in full compliance with the laboratory hood control system performance
                      requirements as specified herein.
     1.5 WARRANTY
           A.   Refer to Section 15010.

     1.6 SYSTEM START-UP
           A.   General
                1.    Require start up, check out and tuning of all the control loops and control systems to be
                      performed by a field engineer in the direct employ of the hood control system
                      manufacturer.
                2.    Calibrate each laboratory hood system and tune to provide safe and efficient operation.
                      Check dampers, damper operators, flow sensors, and all other equipment for proper
                      operation. Check alarm systems, modes of control, and fail safe modes for each
                      device.
           B.   Balancing
                1.    Require the hood control system manufacturer's field engineer to cooperate closely with
                      the air systems balancing agent and the automatic controls system provider, to provide
                      balance information as required.
     1.7 OWNERS INSTRUCTIONS
           A.   Documentation and Training
                1.    General
                      a.     Provide thorough documentation and training to permit the Owner to perform the
                             necessary operation and maintenance functions required by the system.
                2.    Training
                      a.     Provide 1 day of on site training for the Owner's personnel, including system
                             operation, troubleshooting, instrument calibration, alarm handling, and system
                             reconfiguration.




LABORATORY HOOD INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL                                                               15910 - 3
15910.doc
saved 11.19.2009 3:23 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:43 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
           A.   Provide complete re-installed laboratory hood control systems for (VAV) fume hoods,
                complete with all controls, wiring, control air piping, actuators and appurtenances required for
                a complete system.

           B.   Replace any existing hood control system components that are determined to be defective
                with identical units.

           C.   Designed and installed in strict compliance with the NFPA 70 requirements. All electric and
                electronic devices installed within hoods, exhaust ductwork, or exposed to the fume hood
                environment, listed under UL 913.

     2.2 OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL
           A.   Provide each VAV fume hood with an operator control panel mounted on the face of the fume
                hood to match the existing units. The control panel shall provide the following local hood
                control functions:
                1.    Audible alarm with visual indication lights and adjustable limits for average face velocity
                      lower and higher than the velocity set point. The audible alarm provided with a manual
                      alarm recognition and silence switch. Alarm limits preset to 75 percent and 125 percent
                      of set point. Alarms automatically reset when the alarm condition is corrected.
                2.    Alarm test function.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 INSTALLATION
           A.   General
                1.    Ensure that the hood control system is re-installed and operates properly, and to provide
                      a field engineer to supervi se the installation of all components.
                2.    Re-install all control devices and connect all airflow and control valve linkages.
                3.    Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
                      and equipment.
           B.   Power Wiring
                1.    Electrical power wiring (120 Vac) to the hood control system is specified in Section
                      15900.
           C.   Field Control Installation
                1.    Hood control system final power connections, interconnecting control wiring, pneumatic
                      tubing, remote mounting of control devices and related components, are specified in
                      Section 15900.
     3.2 START-UP AND TRAINING SERVICES
           A.   Startup




LABORATORY HOOD INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL                                                            15910 - 4
15910.doc
saved 11.19.2009 3:23 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:43 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


                1.    System start-up shall be provided by a factory-authorized representative of the
                      laboratory airflow control system manufacturer. Start-up shall include calibrating the
                      fume hood monitor and any combination sash sensing equipment as required. Start-up
                      shall also provide electronic verification of airflow (fume hood exhaust, supply, makeup,
                      general exhaust, or return).
                2.    Verify that installation of each terminal is according to the Contract Documents.
                3.    Check that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal manufacturer to
                      achieve proper performance.
                4.    Check that controls and control enclosure are accessible.
                5.    Verify that control connections are complete.
                6.    Check that nameplate and identification tags are visible.
                7.    Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.
                8.    Participate in Owner’s commissioning activities.
           B.   Training
                1.    The laboratory airflow control system supplier shall furnish a minimum of eight hours of
                      Owner training, by factory personnel. The training will provide an overview of the job
                      specific airflow control components, verification of initial fume hood monitor calibration,
                      general procedures for verifying airflows of air valves, and general troubleshooting
                      procedures.
                2.    Operation and Maintenance manuals, including as-built wiring diagrams and component
                      lists shall be provided for each training attendee.

                                               END OF SECTION




LABORATORY HOOD INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL                                                            15910 - 5
15910.doc
saved 11.19.2009 3:23 PM
printed 12.17.2009 8:43 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                  SECTION 15952
                                                             TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................................................................. 1

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 1
  2.1           TEST EQUIPMENT......................................................................................................................................................... 1

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 1
  3.1           GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................................................................... 1
  3.2           ABOVEGROUND PIPE TESTING ................................................................................................................................... 2


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 SUMMARY
           A.       Section Includes
                    1.       This Section includes the provision of all labor material and equipment to test all
                             modified piping systems on the Project.
     1.2 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
           A.       Performance Requirements
                    1.       Test all piping systems provided under Division 15.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
           A.       Provide gages, valves, piping, flanges, blanks and other equipment and material necessary to
                    properly conduct the tests. Check gages used for pressure tests against a d      ead weight
                    tester and certify correct over the range of the gage.

           B.       Repair defects appearing during tests immediately with new material, at the Contractor's
                    expense, and re-test the lines to prove elimination of defects.
                     Note: for pressure testing, use existing heating hot water pumps and air compressor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
           A.       Test and adjust all parts of each system and associated equipment to work properly and
                    leave in good operating condition.

           B.       Notify the Architect in advance of all tests, so that the Architect may be represented at all
                    tests, and determine that all tests are conducted to the Architect's entire satisfaction.

           C.       Repair or replace all defects disclosed in the work by tests or otherwise uncovered without
                    additional cost to the Owner.




TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS                                                                                                                                                   15952 - 1
15952.doc
saved 11.19.2009 3:27 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:02 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


           D.   Repeat tests after any defects disclosed and repair or replace, if in the judgement of the
                Architect, it is deemed necessary.

           E.   Make all repairs to piping systems with new material. No caulking on screwed joints,
                cracks, or holes will be acceptable. Where it becomes necessary to replace pieces of pipe,
                make such replacement with the same lengths as the defective pieces.

           F.   Arrange for and pay the cost of all utilities used on tests.

           G.   Make all tests before piping is concealed and covering is applied.

           H.   Take all necessary precautions and protections required when testing to protect all devices,
                equipment and specialties when test pressures exceed the pressure testing limitations of
                such items.

     3.2 ABOVEGROUND PIPE TESTING
           A.   General
                1.    Include in the testing requirements for the respective piping systems, applicable
                      governing codes and insurance company requirements, and those specified. Forward a
                      copy of code-required plumbing inspection certificates for approval.
                2.    Make specified pressure tests as outlined below on piping included in this Contract.
                      Make tests before piping is painted, covered, or concealed.
                3.    Ensure that joints on lines under liquid pressure remain drop dry for a period of one hour
                                                                                       nd
                      under test pressure. Ensure that exterior surface of pipe a fittings do not show
                      cracks, other forms of leaks, or permanent deformation. Drain pipe, other than water
                      pipe, completely after test.
                4.    Observe the tests after the pipe and contents have assumed ambient temperature and
                      the source of the test pressure shut off.
           B.   Domestic Water Piping Testing
                1.    Refer to Section 15140.
           C.   Fuel Gas Piping
                1.    Refer to Section 15194.
           D.   Pressure Tests on Service Piping
                                                                 Test                    Permissible
                System                   Type Of                 Pressure                Pressure Drop
                                         Test                    KPa (psi)               KPa (psi

                Heating hot water        Water                   1034 (150)            14 (2) – 2 hours

                Compressed air           Air                     1034 (150)            14 (2) – 2 hours

                Vacuum                   Vacuum                  40 (12 in. Hg)        5 (1.5 in. Hg) – 1 hour

                1.    Air test
                      a. Make a preliminary test at 172 kPa (25 psig). If the piping is found not to have any
                            major leaks, than slowly increase the pressure in increments of 172 kPa (25 psig)
                            with 10 minutes allowed between increased pressurization for free equalization,
                            until the test pressure is reached.


TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS                                                                             15952 - 2
15952.doc
saved 11.19.2009 3:27 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:02 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                         SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                     22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                     REV 0
-


                      b.     Do not exceed pressure drop specified above.
                      c.     When possible, make tests when ambient air temperature is approximately
                             constant.
                      d.     Make corrections for pressure difference due to temperature changes.
                      e.     Use the following formula to determine air pressure change due to temperature
                             change:
                             1) [101.4 (14.7) + P1]/[101.4 (14.7) + P2] = [273 (460) + T1]/[273 (460) + T2]
                             2) P = Pressure - kPa (psi) gage. T = Temperature - degrees C (F).

                      f.     Charge piping systems with air to the pressure specified and examine joints for
                             leaks with a soapsuds solution.

                2.    Water test
                      a. Remove from the piping such items as steam traps, diaphragm valves, and any
                          other devices not designed to withstand the test pressure.
                      b. Remove from the piping, all restrictions, such as flow nozzles and orifice plates,
                          which interfere with filling, venting, or draining.
                      c. Open all vents and other connections which can serve as vents during filling, so
                          that all air is vented prior to applying test pressure.
                      d. Provide piping systems designed for steam with additional temporary supports if
                          necessary to support the weight of the test liquid.
                      e. Place automatic control valves in the open position unless they are provided with a
                          by-pass permitting application of pressure to both sides.
                      f.  Insert travel stops in spring hanger pipe supports.
                      g. Provide expansion joints with temporary restraints if required for the additional
                          pressure load under test, or isolated during the pressure test.
                      h. Provide piping systems subject to extended hydrostatic test periods with a
                          protective device to relieve excess pressure due to thermal expansion.
                      i.  Slowly charge systems receiving this test with water to the pressure specified.
                          Ensure that exterior surface of pipe and fitting does not show cracks or other forms
                          of leaks and shall be completely drop dry.

                                               END OF SECTION




TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS                                                                           15952 - 3
15952.doc
saved 11.19.2009 3:27 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:02 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                                  SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                              22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                              REV 0
-


                                                              SECTION 16050
                                                  BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

                                                                                 SECTION INDEX

PART 1 - GENERAL............................................................................................................................................................................. 1
  1.1       SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2       REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.3       SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.4       SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.5       QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................................................ 3
  1.6       WARRANTIES .............................................................................................................................................................. 3
  1.7       MAINTENANCE............................................................................................................................................................. 3

PART 2 -              PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 4
  2.1                 MANUFACTURERS....................................................................................................................................................... 4
  2.2                 PRODUCTS................................................................................................................................................................... 4

PART 3 -              EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 5
  3.1                 INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................................................. 5
  3.2                 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL........................................................................................................................................... 6

PART 1 - GENERAL
        1.1 SUMMARY
                 A.       Section Includes
                          1.       This Section specifies basic electrical requirements applicable to Divisions 13 through
                                   16 and electrical work specified in other Divisions when referenced to Divisions 13
                                   through 16 for requirements.
                 B.       Design Intent
                          1.       The Contract documents indicate and specify the electrical design intent. The Contract
                                   drawings are schematic and diagrammatic and are not intended to indicate construction
                                   details and routing unless specifically indicated. The specifications establish minimum
                                   performance, product and installation requirements.
                          2.       In addition to the specified and indicated performance and quality requirements, furnish
                                   products and perform installation work consistent with the design intent and necessary
                                   to the provision of complete operating electrical systems.
        1.2 REFERENCES
                 A.       American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
                          1.       C2 - National Electrical Safety Code.
                 B.       National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA)
                          1.       1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction
                          2.       500 - Recommended Practice for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems.
                 C.       National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
                          1.       70 - National Electrical Code.


BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS                                                                                                                                            16050 - 1
16050.doc
saved 11.5.2009 3:53 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:02 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


     1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
           A.   Feeder and Branch Circuit Sizing
                1.    Provide feeder and branch circuits per the circuit sizing schedules indicated on
                      Drawings.
                2.    Provide feeders and branch circuits for motors and transformers per the circuit sizing
                      schedules indicated on Drawings.

     1.4 SUBMITTALS
           A.   General
                1.    Submit information substantiating that the products comply with the Contract
                      requirements.
                2.    Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and other specified submittals on a
                      "system" basis. Retain, and assemble drawings and data from manufacturer or
                      component manufacturers such that each submittal is for a complete system.
                3.    Refer to Section 01330, "Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples", for basic
                      definitions and requirements for submittals.
                4.    Submit information substantiating that the products comply with the specified
                      regulatory, testing, code, and standards requirements; including independent testing
                      agency requirements, such as Underwriters Laboratories Inc., and industry standards
                      organization requirements, such as the National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
                5.    Develop and submit a curriculum and outline for each training course, for equipment
                      specified.
           B.   Quality Control Submittals
                1.    Submit results of factory tests two weeks prior to product shipment from factory.
                2.    Submit results of field tests immediately upon completion of the field test.
                3.    Submit fault current analysis and over-current protective device coordination study within
                      30 days of switchgear shop drawing approval.
           C.   Contract Closeout Submittals
                1.    Refer to Section 01780, "Record Documents", for basic definitions and requirements for
                      record documents.
                2.    Submit, at the completion of the work, record drawings in hard copy per Section 01780
                      and in an approved electronic format matching the electronic format in which the
                      construction documents were produced. Indicate the actual electrical installation, size
                      and construction details. Include the following information:
                      a.     Lighting layout, type, circuit designation and control, including each conduit and
                             wire as installed.
                      b.     Power distribution system, including distribution equipment and each conduit and
                             wire size installed.
                      c.     Layout and circuiting for wiring devices, surface raceways and related equipment,
                             including each conduit and wire size.
                      d.     Layout and circuitry for power circuits to mechanical equipment and other
                             electrified building equipment, including each conduit and wire size.
                      e.     Supporting and mounting details.


BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS                                                                16050 - 2
16050.doc
saved 11.5.2009 3:53 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:02 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


                      f.     Special systems layouts such as fire alarm and telecommunications systems.
                      g.     Layout, cabling and circuiting of site electrical systems such as underground duct
                             banks, manholes, hand holes and site lighting fixtures. Include system and cable
                             identification of communication systems such as telephone, data, fiber optic, fire
                             alarm, security system and other cabling systems.
                      h.     Panel schedule drawings consisting of each panelboard. Schedules shall indicate
                             the “as built” circuiting with loads and room numbers identified. Room numbers on
                             schedules shall include the architectural room number indicated on the Drawings
                             and the signage room numbers from the signage schedules.

     1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
           A.   Regulatory Requirements
                1.    Comply with the applicable requirements of ANSI C2 and NFPA 70.
                      a.     Requirements of ANSI C2 and NFPA 70 shall be minimum standards of products
                             and installation work. Furnish products and perform installation work which exceed
                             the standards of ANSI C2 and NFPA 70 when specified or indicated.
                2.    Comply with applicable requirements of city, county, and state laws, ordinances and
                      regulations including modifications and supplements to ANSI C2 and NFPA 70.
                3.    Comply with the applicable requirements of U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational
                      Safety and Health Administration Standards (OSHA).

     1.6 WARRANTIES
           A.   Refer to the Conditions of the Contract for provisions concerning Contract general warranty,
                Statements of Compliance, correction of Work period, and form of Special Warranty.

     1.7 MAINTENANCE
           A.   General
                1.    Retain portable and detachable portions of the installation such as tools, tool kits,
                      instruction books, wiring diagrams, service manuals, operating handles and keys until
                      the completion of work.
                2.    Transmit the above items to the Owner when the work has been accepted and an
                      itemized receipt obtained.
           B.   Operations and Maintenance Manuals
                1.    Prior to final acceptance of Project, furnish and deliver to Owner two set(s) of bound
                      manual(s) of instructions for operation and maintenance of all pieces of equipment and
                      systems furnished under this Division of Specifications.
                2.    Bind manuals in a hard-backed, three-hole binder and assemble as follows:
                      a.     First page: title of job, Owner, address, date of submittal, name of Contractor and
                             Architect.
                      b.     Second page: index.
                      c.     Third page: introduction to First Section containing a complete description of the
                             system.



BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS                                                                16050 - 3
16050.doc
saved 11.5.2009 3:53 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:02 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                        REV 0
-


                      d.     First Section: written description of system contents, location in building, how each
                             part functions individually, how system works as whole. Conclude with list of items
                             requiring service and either state the service needed or refer to the manufacturer's
                             data, in binder, that describes the proper service.
                      e.     Second Section: a copy of each Product Data and Shop Drawing submittal with an
                             index at the beginning of the Section.
                      f.     Third Section: a copy of each manufacturer's operating instructions with a index at
                             the beginning of the Section.
                      g.     Fourth Section: a list of all equipment used on the job, Contractor's purchase order
                             numbers, supplier's name and address.
                3.    Provide a separate binder(s) for each system.
           C.   Extra Materials
                1.    Furnish keys to the Owner together with any duplicates which may have been made.
                      Securely wire keys for each lock together and plainly tag and mark the keys to indicate
                      the lock number or piece of equipment they operate. Also indicate the physical location
                      of the lock by building name or number, panel number, or room name or number.
                2.    Provide wiring diagrams, instruction books, installation books, and service manuals to
                      the Owner. Clearly identify each item as to which product it applies and the equipment
                      location.
                3.    Provide special tools as specified and required for equipment maintenance to the Owner.
                      Clearly identify each item as to which piece of equipment it applies and the equipment
                      location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 MANUFACTURERS
           A.   General
                1.    Furnish products by one of the equipment manufacturers listed under the heading
                      "Manufacturers" within the applicable sections. When given, furnish the specified
                      product model or brand for the selected manufacturer.
                2.    Provide products, for which quantities of two or more are to be furnished, from the same
                      manufacturer and of the same product or model series.
                3.    Furnish product components designed to be used together and which are physically and
                      electrically compatible.
           B.   Product Substitutions
                1.    Product substitutions may be requested when the "or as approved" clause is specified
                      under the heading "Manufacturers". Submit product substitutions for approval per
                      Section 01630, "Product Options and Substitutions".

     2.2 PRODUCTS
           A.   Product Listing and Labeling
                1.    Provide listed and labeled product for which listings and labelings exist by Underwriters
                      Laboratories Inc. (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or similar independent testing organizations
                      recognized by the authorities having jurisdiction. For products for which there are no


BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS                                                                  16050 - 4
16050.doc
saved 11.5.2009 3:53 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:02 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                           SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                       22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                       REV 0
-


                      such listings and labelings, provide listed and labeled components of those products, for
                      which component listing and labelings exist.
           B.   PCB Content Prohibited
                1.    Provide products which do not contain any amounts of polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB)
                      compounds.
           C.   Asbestos Content Prohibited
                1.    Provide products which do not contain any amounts of asbestos.
           D.   Firestop Systems
                1.    Provide products suitable for the application as specified in Section 07840, unless
                      otherwise specified or indicated.
                2.    Cable Pathway Firestop Device
                      a. Provide heavy gauge galvanized steel pathway, per UL 1479, with wall plates lined
                           with intumescent material.
                      b. Provide unit with a built-in firestopping system that automatically adjusts to the
                           number of cables installed and provides maximum fire resistance at any fill
                           percentage.
                      c. Provide fire rating as required for installation complete with wall plate, positioning
                           clamps and other needed hardware.
                      d. Manufacturers
                           1) Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI): EZ-Path System.
                           2) Wiremold Flame Stopper: Thru-wall/floor fittings.
                3.    Firestop for Sleeved and Core-Drilled Holes
                      a. Provide firestop plugs in sleeved and core-drilled holes in walls and floors. Install in
                           accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
                      b. Plug un-used sleeves and holes.
                      c. Plug around cables after installation of all cables.
                      d. Manufacturers
                           1) Hilti CP 658T Firestop Plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 INSTALLATION
           A.   Wiring Installation
                1.    Install wiring for control systems, power feeder and branch circuits, lighting branch
                      circuits, communication and auxiliary systems, such as fire alarm, in separate
                      raceways unless otherwise indicated.
           B.   Device Location
                1.    Allow for relocation prior to installation of wiring devices and other control devices, for
                      example, receptacles, switches, occupancy sensors, fire alarm devices and access
                      control devices, within a 10-foot radius of indicated location without additional cost.
           C.   NECA Compliance
                1.    Install products in accordance with NECA 1, 301, 400, 402, 404, 500 and 502, unless
                      otherwise specified or indicated.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS                                                                 16050 - 5
16050.doc
saved 11.5.2009 3:53 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:02 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                        SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                    22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                    REV 0
-


           D.   Wet, Damp, or Dry Location Work
                1.    Provide products as appropriate for wet, damp, or dry locations as defined by NFPA 70.
           E.   Manufacturer Installation Instructions
                1.    Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and
                      recommendations.
           F.   Fire and Smoke Barrier Penetrations
                1.    Install firestopping to raceways, boxes and electrical equipment installed in or
                      penetrating fire-rated floor and wall assemblies and smoke barrier assemblies, in a
                      manner which maintains the fire resistance rating or barrier intent.

     3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
           A.   Field Tests
                1.    Permit Architect (and Owner) to observe field tests. Provide minimum three working
                      days notice of field test.
                2.    Schedule tests in coordination with other Contract work. Schedule no more than one
                      equipment or system field test per day.

                                              END OF SECTION




BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS                                                             16050 - 6
16050.doc
saved 11.5.2009 3:53 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:02 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                         SECTION 16060
                                                                           GROUNDING

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.3           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 1
  1.4           SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................................................................................................. 2

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 2
  2.1           GROUNDING MATERIALS ............................................................................................................................................ 2

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 3
  3.1           INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................................................. 3
  3.2           FIELD QUALITY CONTROL........................................................................................................................................... 3


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 SUMMARY
           A.       Section Includes
                    1.       Provide the following grounding systems as specified and indicated:
                             a.       Equipment grounding.
                             b.       Equipotential grounding.
     1.2 REFERENCES
           A.       American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
                    1.       B30 - Specification for Copper-Base Alloys in Ingot Form.
                    2.       B187 - Specification for Copper Bus Bar, Rod, and Shapes.
           B.       Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
                    1.       142 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power
                             Systems.
           C.       National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA)
                    1.       331 – Standard for Building and Service Entrance Grounding and Bonding.
           D.       National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
                    1.       70 - National Electrical Code.
           E.       Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
                    1.       467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
                    2.       486A - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors.
     1.3 SUBMITTALS
           A.       Product Data


GROUNDING                                                                                                                                                                   16060 - 1
16060.doc
saved 11.12.2009 12:28 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:02 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


                1.    Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of grounding system product
                      provided.
           B.   Shop Drawings
                1.    Submit wiring diagrams indicating typical grounding system connections and wire sizes.
                2.    Submit dimensioned detail Drawing of ground plates and mounting method.
           C.   Quality Control Submittal
                1.    Submit results of specified field tests.
     1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
           A.   Equipment Grounding
                1.    Provide a permanent and continuous bonding of conductor enclosures, equipment
                      frames, power distribution equipment ground busses, metallic raceways, and other non-
                      current carrying metallic parts of the electrical system to form a low impedance, path-
                      to-earth ground.
                2.    Provide a separate, equipment grounding conductor for feeders, branch circuits, and
                      other power circuits.
           B.   Equipotential Grounding
                1.    Interconnect grounding electrodes to form one, electrically continuous, equipotential
                      grounding electrode system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 GROUNDING MATERIALS
           A.   General
                1.    Provide grounding materials per UL 467.
           B.   Cable
                1.    Hard drawn, solid copper or soft drawn, Class B stranded copper for bare conductors.
                2.    Soft drawn, Class B stranded copper, moisture-resistant green insulation, type THW.,
                      THWN/THHN, or XHHW, for insulated conductors.
           C.   Connections and Hardware
                1.    Clamps, bolts, washer, nuts, and other hardware of copper or high copper-content alloy.
                2.    Connectors and lugs per UL 486A
                3.    Manufacturers
                      a.     FCI Electrical
                      b.     Thomas and Betts Corp.
           D.   Irreversible Connectors
                1.    Compression connectors of pure, wrought copper, per ASTM B187.
                2.    Cast connectors of copper base alloy per ASTM B30.
                3.    Clearly and permanently mark connectors with the following information:
                      a.     Catalog number.


GROUNDING                                                                                           16060 - 2
16060.doc
saved 11.12.2009 12:28 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:02 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                       SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                   22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                   REV 0
-


                      b.     Conductors accommodated.
                      c.     Installation die index or die catalog number is required.
                      d.     Underwriters Laboratories "Listing Mark".
                      e.     The words "Direct Burial" or "Burial" per UL 467.
                4.    Pre-fill connectors with a corrosion inhibiting compound which is compatible with the
                      conductors being joined.
                5.    Provide connectors equivalent in current carrying capacity to the maximum size copper
                      conductors being joined.
                6.    Manufacturers
                      a.     Burndy Electrical
PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 INSTALLATION
           A.   General
                1.    Provide connections as follows:
                      a.     Mechanical connectors for connections to equipment frames, conduit, piping and
                             signal systems.
                2.    Comply with the applicable requirements and recommended installation practices of
                      IEEE 142 and NECA 331.
                3.    Route grounding connections and conductors to ground in shortest and straightest
                      paths as possible. Do not use coiled or looping cable paths.
                4.    Size equipment grounding conductors as indicated and per NFPA 70. Terminate each
                      end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing as required for installation condition.
                5.    Make connections in accordance with connector manufacturer's recommendations,
                      including tooling, dies and number of crimps.
     3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
           A.   Field Tests
                1.    Perform field tests as specified before system components become inaccessible or
                      concealed below slabs and other work.
                2.    Inspect compression die index number permanently embossed onto irreversible
                      connectors by installation tooling during crimping for match of manufacturer's
                      recommended die index.
                3.    Test bolted connections with torque wrench with minimum 68 J (50 ft. lbs.) setting for
                      bolts 9 mm (3/8 inch) diameter and larger.
                4.    Perform a continuity check from equipment ground bus bars and ground lugs to the
                      ground system.

                                                 END OF SECTION




GROUNDING                                                                                         16060 - 3
16060.doc
saved 11.12.2009 12:28 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:02 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                      SECTION 16070
                                                                    SUPPORTING DEVICES

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 1
  1.3           QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................................................ 1
  1.4           SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................................................ 1

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 2
  2.1           MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES ................................................................................................................... 2

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 3
  3.1           INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................................................. 3


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 SUMMARY
           A.       Section Includes
                    1.       Provide supports, anchors, sleeves, concrete equipment pads, seals and other related
                             supporting devices and methods as specified and indicated.
                    2.       Refer to other Division 16 sections for specific and supplemental supporting device
                             requirements.
     1.2 SUBMITTALS
           A.       General
                    1.       Submit specific details for supporting electrical equipment with the appropriate electrical
                             equipment submittal.
           B.       Product Data
                    1.       Submit manufacturer's technical product data on supporting devices specified and
                             indicated.
           C.       Quality Control Submittal
                    1.       Submit evidence of manufacturer's qualifications.
     1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
           A.       Manufacturer Qualifications
                    1.       Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of supporting devices, of types, sizes, and
                             ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
                             less than 3 years.
     1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
           A.       Structural Requirements



SUPPORTING DEVICES                                                                                                                                                          16070 - 1
16070.doc
saved 11.5.2009 3:59 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:03 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                        REV 0
-


                1.    Provide support systems adequate for the weight of equipment and conduit, including
                      wiring, which they carry.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
     2.1 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES
           A.   U-channel Strut Systems
                1.    Manufacturers
                      a.     Cooper B-Line, Inc.
                      b.     Hilti Corp.
                      c.     Midland-Ross Corp.
                      d.     Unistrut Corp.
                2.    No. 12 gage, hot-dipped galvanized steel, with 14-mm (9/16-inch) diameter holes, 200
                      mm (eight inches) on center on top surface, with manufacturer's standard,
                      natural/neutral finish.
                3.    Provide corrosion-resistant fittings which mate and match the U-channel.
           B.   Wall and Floor Conduit Seals
                1.    Manufacturers
                      a.     O-Z/Gedney Co., Unit of EGS Electrical Group
                2.    Provide factory-assembled, watertight wall and floor seals, of types and sizes required,
                      suitable for sealing around conduit, pipe, or tubing passing through concrete floors and
                      walls.
                3.    Construct s  eals with steel sleeves, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets
                      and rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws.
           C.   Telecommunications Cable Hangers
                1.    Manufacturers
                      a. Hilti: ECH series.
                      b. Or as approved.
                2.    Non-metal, plenum rated, with flexible, self-locking closure.
           D.   Conduit Straps
                1.    Galvanized steel.
           E.   Clevis Hangers
                1.    Galvanized steel with 13-mm (1/2-inch) diameter hole for round steel rod.
           F.   C-Clamps
                1.    Black malleable iron, 13-mm (1/2-inch) rod size, approximately 32 kg (70 pounds) per
                      100 units.
           G.   Miscellaneous Devices and Hardware
                1.    Corrosion resistant




SUPPORTING DEVICES                                                                                    16070 - 2
16070.doc
saved 11.5.2009 3:59 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:03 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                          SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                      22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                      REV 0
-


PART 3 - EXECUTION
     3.1 INSTALLATION
           A.   General
                1.    Use clamps for making attachments to structural steel for installation purposes wherever
                      possible. Welding will only be permitted for structural load requirements and if approved
                      by the Architect.
                2.    Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
                3.    Do not drill into building structural steel members.
           B.   Sleeve Seals
                1.    Torque sleeve seal nuts, complying with manufacturers recommended values.
                2.    Ensure that sealing grommets expand to form a watertight seal.
           C.   Field Fabricated Supports
                1.    Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to
                      present a neat, workmanlike appearance.
                2.    Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts.
           D.   Anchoring Methods
                1.    Provide anchoring methods for fastening and supporting equipment as follows:
                      a.     Hollow masonry: toggle bolts or spider type expansion anchors.
                      b.     Solid masonry: lead expansion anchors or preset inserts.
                      c.     Metal surface: machine screws, bolts, or welded studs.
                      d.     Wood surfaces: wood screws.
                      e.     Concrete surfaces: self-drilling anchors or power-driven studs.
                      f.     Waterproof walls: set anchors in waterproof cement.

                                                END OF SECTION




SUPPORTING DEVICES                                                                                   16070 - 3
16070.doc
saved 11.5.2009 3:59 PM
printed 12.17.2009 9:03 AM
WAYNE STATE UNIVERSITY                                                                                                                                            SMITHGROUP
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES RENOVATION                                                                                                                                        22511.000
DETROIT, MICHIGAN                                                                                                                                                        REV 0
-


                                                                   SECTION 16075
                                                               ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

                                                                            SECTION INDEX

PART 1 -        GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.1           SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.2           REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
  1.3           SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................................................ 1
  1.4           SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................................................ 2
  1.5           QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................................................ 2

PART 2 -        PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 2
  2.1           IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS ....................................................................................................................................... 2

PART 3 -        EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 3
  3.1           INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................................................. 3


PART 1 - GENERAL
     1.1 SUMMARY
           A.       Section Includes
                    1.       Provide identification of electrical products as specified and indicated.
     1.2 REFERENCES
           A.       National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
                    1.       70 - National Electrical Code.
           B.       Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
                    1.       969 - Marking and Labeling Systems.
     1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
           A.       Manufacturer's Nameplates
                    1.       Provide manufacturer's standard equipment nameplates, permanently affixed, indicating
                             manufacturer's product data information, including model and serial number information,
                             electrical ratings and information required by the various independent testing
                             organizations, such as Underwriters Laboratories Inc., and industry standards
                             organizations, such as the National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
           B.       Equipment and System Identification
                    1.       In addition to the manufacturer's nameplates, provide identification of electrical system
                             equipment as specified and indicated.
           C.       Color Coding
                    1.       Provide the identification background colors for the following systems:
                             a.       Black: general power systems unles